VDOT/VSP Joint Safety Operations Center - BidNet

IFB # 154339

VIRGINIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

PROJECT MANUAL Volume 1 of 3

For

VDOT/VSP Joint Safety Operations Center

2430 Pine Forest Drive

Colonial Heights, VA 23834

Project Code: 501-16674-000

WORKING DRAWING SUBMISSION

November 10, 2017

44 Canal Center Plaza Suite 100

Alexandria, Virginia 22314 703.836.7766

703.836.3042 (fax) HGA No. 3224-002-28

3 4

HGA No. 4001-001-00 VDOT/VSP Joint Safety Operations Center November 10, 2017 Project Code: 501-16674-000 IFB 154339 Seals Page

Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 000107-1 Alexandria, Virginia SEALS PAGE

Architect: Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 44 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 100 Alexandria, Virginia 22314

Civil Engineer: Austin Brockenbrough & Associates, LLP 1011 Boulder Springs Drive, Suite 200 Richmond, Virginia 23225

Landscape Architect: LPDA 1006 E Jefferson Street, Suite B Charlottesville, Virginia 22902

Structural Engineer: S2B Structural Consultants 6200 Rolling Road, #2399 Springfield, Virginia 22152

HGA No. 4001-001-00 VDOT/VSP Joint Safety Operations Center November 10, 2017 Project Code: 501-16674-000 IFB 154339 Seals Page

Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 000107-2 Alexandria, Virginia SEALS PAGE

Mechanical, Plumbing Engineers: GHT Limited 1110 North Glebe Road, Suite 300 Arlington, Virginia 22201

Electrical Engineer: GHT Limited 1110 North Glebe Road, Suite 300 Arlington, Virginia 22201

Fire Protection/Life Safety Engineer: GHD 14585 Avion Parkway, Suite 150 Chantilly, Virginia 20151

REFER TO PROJECT MANUAL—VOLUME 1

FOR ADDITIONAL SPECIFICATIONS

HGA No. 4001-001-00 VDOT/VSP Joint Safety Operations Center

November 10, 2017 Project Code: 501-16674-000

IFB 154339

Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 000110-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Alexandria, Virginia

VIRGINIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

Richmond, VA

VDOT/VSP Joint Safety Operations Center

Project Code: 501- 16674-000

IFB # 154339

TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 3

SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

260500 General Requirements and Common Work Results for Electrical Systems

260519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables

260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems

260533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems

260543 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems

260544 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling

260553 Identification for Electrical Systems

260572 Overcurrent Protective Device Short-Circuit, Coordination , and ARC Flash Studies

260600 Electrical Utility Service

260615 Stand By Electrical Service

260943 Network Lighting Controls

262200 Dry Type Low-Voltage Transformers

262300 Low-Voltage Switchgear

262413 Switchboards

262416 Panelboards

262600 Power Distribution Units

262713 Electricity Metering

262726 Wiring Devices

262813 Fuses

262816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers

262913 Enclosed Controllers

263213 Engine Generators

263353 Static Uninterruptable Power Supply

263600 Transfer Switches

264113 Lightning Protection for Structures

264313 Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits

265100 Interior Lighting

265113 Architectural Lighting Luminaires

265613 Lighting Poles and Standards

265619 LED Exterior Lighting

267500 Telephone and Communication Systems Rough In

268000 Miscellaneous Electrical Equipment



IFB 154339


TABLE OF CONTENTS


269000 Electrical Testing

269500 Submittal and Documentation Requirements for Electrical System

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

270526 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems

270528.29 Inner-Ducts for Communications Systems Raceways

270528.36 Cable Trays for Communications Systems

270553 Identification for Communications Systems

274113 Architecturally Integrated Audiovisual Systems

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

280513 Electronic Security Conductors and Cabling

283111 Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System

DIVISION 29-30 – NOT USED

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

311000 Site Clearing

311500 Erosion and Sediment Control

312000 Earth Moving

312200 Site Demolition and Removal

313116 Termite Control

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

321216 Asphalt Paving

321313 Concrete Paving

323119.13 Decorative Metal Security Fences and Gates

325000 Pavement Markings Signs and Miscellaneous

329113 Soil Preparation

329200 Turf and Grasses

329300 Plants

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

334100 Storm Drainage

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR VOLUME 3

HGA No. 4001-001-02 VDOT/VSP Joint Safety Operations Center November 10, 2017 Project Code: 501-16674-000 IFB 154339

Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 260500-1 Alexandria, Virginia GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 260500 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Division.

B. Documents of other Divisions including, but not limited to, Divisions 01, 03, 10, 11, 14, 21, 22, 23, 27, 28 and 33.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK

A. Provide under this Division of the Specification a complete electrical system, fully adjusted, tested, and commissioned for use as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1. Contractor shall provide complete coordinated installation, as required by Documents for

all disciplines. Contractor acknowledges that the coordination effort may require additional lengths of pipe, conduit, wire, circuits, ducts, fittings, couplings, etc. in order to provide a fully functioning facility.

B. WORK SPECIFIED IN THIS DIVISION

260500 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND COMMOM WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260572 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT CIRCUIT, COORDINATION, AND ARC FLASH STUDY 260600 ELECTRICAL UTILITY SERVICE 260615 STAND BY ELECTRICAL SERVICE 262200 DRY TYPE LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262300 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 262413 SWITCHBOARDS 262416 PANELBOARDS 262600 POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS 262713 ELECTRICITY METERING 262726 WIRING DEVICES 262813 FUSES 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS



262913 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 263213 ENGINE GENERATORS 263353 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 263600 TRANSFER SWITCHES 264113 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES 264313 SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 267500 TELEPHONE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS ROUGH IN 268000 MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 269000 ELECTRICAL TESTING 269500 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

The Contractor shall examine all other Divisions of the Specification to determine the full extent of related work required to be performed under this Division. Failure to do so will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility to perform all work required for a complete and satisfactory installation.

1.3 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Definitions 2. Submittals 3. Codes and Standards 4. Permits 5. Guarantee 6. Complete Performance of Work 7. Cooperation with Other Trades 8. Drawings 9. Surveys and Measurements 10. Equipment furnished by others 11. Conference prior to the start of work 12. Protection 13. Manufacturer’s Recommendations 14. Space Limitations 15. Submittals 16. Alternate and Unit Pricing 17. Product Substitutions 18. Electrical equipment coordination and installation 19. Additional Requirements 20. Materials 21. Mock-ups 22. Installation Drawings 23. Systems 24. Access Doors 25. Escutcheons 26. Coordination 27. Sleeves for raceways and cables 28. Sleeve seals. 29. Grout



30. Sleeves Plates and Inserts 31. Excavation and backfilling 32. Accessibility 33. Equipment Noise and Vibration 34. Lubrication 35. Electrical Connections 36. Field Observations 37. Grout 38. Common electrical installation requirements 39. Operating Instructions 40. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 41. Record Drawings 42. Commissioning of Work

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

C. BCOM: Bureau of Capital Outlay Management.

D. VUSBC: Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code.

E. AHJ: Authority Having Jurisdiction

F. FM: Factory Mutual

G. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association

H. UL: Underwriters’ Laboratories

I. ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association

J. NEC: National Electrical Code

K. ANSI: American National Standards Institute

L. NETA: International Electrical Testing Association

M. NRTL: Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory.

1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Codes and Standards listed below, insofar as they apply, form a part of these Specifications, the same as if they were fully written and shall be followed as minimum requirements. Refer to the Architectural Documents for additional requirements. The Architectural documents’ applicable codes shall govern this Contract. Where standards conflict, that standard with the more stringent requirements shall be applicable. This shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from providing the highest grade of material and workmanship specified.



B. The Contractor shall give written notice to the Architect of any materials or apparatus believed in violation of laws, ordinances, rules or regulations, or Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

C. All equipment shall comply with all applicable requirements of laws, codes, ordinances, legislation, mandates issued by governmental agencies having jurisdiction in some form, etc., of all Federal, State, and Local Governmental Authorities, whether or not indicated on the Contract Documents.

D. The referenced codes shall include any and all supplements, addenda, memoranda, information bulletins and any other changes and additions effective prior to the Date of Substantial Completion by adoption of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction.

E. Modifications to the work contained in these Documents required by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction, shall be made without additional charge to the Owner.

F. Where alterations to and/or deviations from the Contract Documents are required by the Authorities, report the requirements to the Architect and secure his approval before starting the alterations.

G. Where Contract Documents' requirements are in excess of Code requirements and are permitted under the Code, the Contract Documents shall govern.

H. All equipment provided under this contract shall meet the rules and regulations of the Underwriters’ Laboratories whether or not indicated in the Contract Documents. Provide Division 26 equipment having UL labels or labeled by an independent testing agency acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

I. All work shall comply with the applicable adopted edition of the following codes and standards. 1. Codes

Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code (VUSBC). National Fire Alarm code (NFPA 72) National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE),

Standard 90.1 (Energy Code) National Fire Protection Association Pamphlet 110 National Fire Protection Association Pamphlet 111 Local Codes and code Amendments as published by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

2. Standards Applicable Edition of the International Fire Code (IFC) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

American National Standards Institute (ANSI). National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

J. All manufactured products shall be labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, such

as Underwriters' Laboratories (UL labeled) or Intertek Testing Service’s (ETL labeled), in accordance with OHSA Regulations and the National Electrical code. Product performance data shall be based on recognized testing by either UL or ETL, as applicable.



1.7 PERMITS

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and paying for all permits, licenses, and inspection certificates required for all work in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents.

1.8 GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor will guarantee in form satisfactory to the Owner, that all Work installed will be

free from any and all defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one year, to include one full heating and one full cooling season, from the date of certification of substantial completion or acceptance by the Owner, whichever is later. Guarantee that all apparatus will develop capacities and characteristics specified.

B. During the guarantee period, the Contractor shall remedy defective workmanship, materials, and apparatus performance, without cost to the Owner, within a reasonable time to be specified by the Owner. In default thereof, the Owner may have such work done and charge all costs to the Contractor in accordance with the General conditions of the Contract and Division 01.

C. Provide product warranties as specified in the various Sections of this Division. Minimum product warranty shall be one year.

1.9 COMPLETE PERFORMANCE OF WORK

A. Work shall be executed in strict accordance with the best practice of the trades in a thorough, substantial, workmanlike manner by competent workmen under the direct supervision of skilled and experienced trade and Contractor forepersons, superintendents and project managers.

B. Provide labor, materials, apparatus, and appliances essential to the complete functioning of the systems described and indicated or which may be reasonably implied as essential whether mentioned in the Contract Documents or not.

C. Prior to bid and thereafter continuously during the performance of the Work, the Contractor and the trade subcontractors shall carefully study and compare the drawings and specifications to understand, plan, coordinate and properly execute the Work. In cases of doubt as to the Work intended; conflicts within or between the drawings and specifications; ambiguity, errors or omissions in the drawings and/or specifications; or in cases where clarification is desirable and prudent, the Contractor shall timely notify the Architect and seek supplemental information prior to bid submission and, in any event, prior to commencement of the Work. The Architect/Engineer do not warrant or represent that the drawings or specifications are free from conflicts, errors, omissions or ambiguities and therefore welcome and expect timely and responsible requests for supplemental information.

D. Provide skilled journeymen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper installation of the Work of this Division.

1.10 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES



A. Contractor shall coordinate efforts of all trades and shall furnish (in writing, with copies to the Architect and Owner) any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay.

B. Where the work of various trades will be installed in close proximity to one another, or where there is evidence that the work of one trade will interfere with work of other trades, the Contractor shall assist in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment. The Contractor shall prepare composite working drawings and sections at a suitable scale not less than ¼-inch = 1-foot 0-inch clearly showing work of all trades. If the Contractor allows one trade to install his work before coordinating with work of other trades, the Contractor shall make necessary changes to correct the condition without extra charge.

1.11 DRAWINGS

A. The Drawings show the general layout of the various items of equipment. However, layout of equipment, accessories, specialties, busway, conduit, etc. are diagrammatic unless specifically dimensioned, and do not necessarily indicate every required fitting, junction box, pull box, contactor, relay or similar items required for a complete installation. Consult the Architectural Drawings and details for exact location of fixtures and equipment. Where same is not definitely located, obtain the information from the Architect before proceeding.

B. The Contractor shall follow the Drawings in laying out the work and check drawings of all trades to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom and where space conditions appear inadequate, the Architect shall be notified before proceeding with the installation.

C. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on the Drawings but mentioned in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be provided by the Contractor without additional expense to the Owner.

D. Where variances occur between the Drawings and the Specifications or within either document itself, the items or arrangement of better quality, greater quantity, or higher cost shall be included in the contract price. Prior to execution of work in variance between the Drawings and Specifications, the Contractor shall request clarification in writing from the Architect on which item and manner in which the work shall be installed.

1.12 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall base all measurements, both horizontal and vertical, from established

bench marks. All work shall agree with these established lines and levels. Verify all measurements at site, and check the corrections of same as related to the Work and submittals.

B. Should the Contractor discover any discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated which would prevent following intent of the Drawings and Specifications; he shall notify the Architect and shall not proceed until he has received interpretations from the Architect.

1.13 EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS



A. When so specified or shown, the Contractor shall install any equipment furnished by others under other Divisions of work.

B. The Contractor shall receive at the site, unload, uncrate, store, protect, set in place, and connect up completely any such equipment or fixtures which require electrical service connections. All such connections shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and these Specifications.

C. The Contractor shall consult Manufacturer's literature and inspect the actual piece of equipment or fixture to determine roughing in dimensions and locations for all services.

D. The Contractor shall exercise special care in handling and protecting such equipment and fixtures and shall be responsible for the cost of replacing any such equipment or fixtures which are missing; and for the cost of repairing any damage to each piece of equipment and fixtures or finished work, caused by mishandling or failure to protect on the part of the Contractor.

1.14 CONFERENCE PRIOR TO START OF WORK

A. Immediately upon the award of this Contract, but prior to commencing any Work, the Contractor together with designated major subcontractors shall confer with the Architect and Engineer concerning the Work under this Contract.

B. The conference will be held at a mutually agreed place and acceptable time.

1.15 PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall maintain protection of the Work and materials during construction from theft, injury or damage.

B. The Contractor shall carefully store material and equipment received on site which is not immediately installed. Store material and equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.

C. The Contractor shall provide temporary covers on enclosures as required during construction to prevent damage.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for all work and equipment on project until inspected, tested and accepted by the Owner.

1.16 MANUFACTURER’S RECOMMENDATIONS

A. With exceptions as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents, apply, install, connect,

erect, use, clean, and condition manufactured articles, materials, and equipment per manufacturer's current published recommendations. Keep copies of such printed recommendations at job site. Provided they do not conflict with the contract documents, Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be followed at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.17 SPACE LIMITATIONS



A. Equipment has been chosen which will fit into the physical spaces provided and indicated, and allow for access, servicing, removal and replacement of parts, etc. The Contractor shall provide adequate space for clearance in accordance with the Code requirements and the requirements of the local Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

B. In the preparation of Contract Documents, a reasonable effort to accommodate specified Equipment Manufacturers' space requirements has been made. However, since space requirements and equipment arrangement vary according to each manufacturer, the responsibility for initial access and proper fit rests with the Contractor.

C. Physical dimensions and arrangements of equipment to be installed shall be subject to the Architect's review.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for confirming the sufficiency of the size of shafts and chases, the adequate thickness of partitions and adequate clearance in double partitions and hung ceilings for the proper installation of his work. Such spaces and clearances shall be kept to the minimum size required.

1.18 SUBMITTALS

A. After the Contract is awarded, but prior to proceeding with the Work, the Contractor shall

obtain complete submittals from the manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, for all materials and equipment specified in this Division and submit data and details of such materials and equipment to the Architect and Engineer. Submittals shall be provided in electronic format.

B. Prior to forwarding submittal to the Architect and Engineer, the Contractor shall review and certify that the equipment, materials, methods, etc. represented by the submittals are in compliance with the Contract Documents. Submittals shall be complete when forwarded, refer to the Submittal specification section for additional information.

C. The Contractor shall check all materials and equipment after their arrival on the job site and verify their compliance with the Contract Documents.

D. A minimum period of ten working days, exclusive of transmittal time, will be required in the Engineer’s office each time a submittal is submitted or resubmitted for review. Fire Alarm system submittals shall require a minimum review period of twenty working days. This time period shall be considered by the Contractor when scheduling his work.

E. Submittal Types: 1. Product Data Submittal: Manufacturers' literature or sample which the Contractor intends

to provide for the Project. Product data submittals will be reviewed for compliance with the information shown and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Approval of a specific item does not constitute approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. Submit equipment operating data, general arrangement, materials of construction, etc. a. Product data submittals shall include the products of one manufacturer intended for

installation on the project. Submittals including product data of more than one listed manufacturer for the same product may be rejected by the Architect or Engineer.



2. Quality Control Submittal: Shop drawing of an assembly of components with construction dimensions and details as appropriate. Quality control submittals will only be received for the record. The Contractor is responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for the accuracy of dimensions, quantities, substantiating instructions for installations and for performance of equipment and systems designed by the Contractor.

3. Contract Closeout Submittals: Information required at substantial completion of the

Project. Contract closeout submittals will be reviewed for conformance with the specified content.

F. Engineer’s review of submittals is for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Engineer’s review is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems designed by the Contractor. The review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. Approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. Neither review nor approval constitutes approval of substitutions or deviations from the Construction Documents unless such substitutions and deviations are highlighted in the submittal and are specifically approved in the REMARKS.

G. For each submittal, the Contractor shall provide a cover sheet on his business letterhead which consists of: 1. Whether or not item being submitted is the "Basis of Design" as indicated in the Contract

Documents. 2. In the event that the item or equipment being submitted is not the "Basis of Design",

Contractor shall provide scaled drawings of non-Basis of design equipment in ¼ inch=1-foot 0-inch” scale that confirms the intent of the Contract Documents have been met. This shall also confirm that there will be no additional cost to the Owner.

3. The Contractor shall certify that data and details set forth on each submittal comply with the Contract Documents for this Project. Such certification shall be made by the Contractor, or by a person duly authorized to sign binding agreements for the Contractor.

H. Provide submittals with the following: 1. Cover sheet with submittal title, submittal number, name of Project, names of Architect,

Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier/vendor, the submittal date, the dates of any revisions, and the applicable specification section and paragraph numbers.

2. Clear identification of each manufacturer. 3. Irrelevant catalog information marked-out.

I. Provide submittals in the following quantities: 1. Product Data Submittals: As specified in Division 01. 2. Quality Control Submittals: Two copies; one for the Architect's file and one for the

Engineer's file. Provide additional copies for the Owner as required. 3. Contract Closeout Submittals: Minimum of two copies or as specified in the various

sections all approved copies will be turned over to the Owner.



J. The Contractor shall maintain one complete, up-to-date set of all reviewed submittals and all quality control submittals at the project site. At the conclusion of the project, this submittal file shall be turned over to the Owner.

1.19 ALTERNATE AND UNIT PRICING

A. Alternate Pricing, Unit Pricing, and Budgetary Cost Estimates: The Contractors shall provide

alternate prices (BY LINE ITEM), unit prices, and budgetary cost estimates as indicated in the Architectural Documents, as specified herein, and as indicated on the Drawings.

B. If contacted by the Owner or Architect after the bid date, the contractor(s) shall provide

complete alternate pricing information for the owner's evaluation of all alternate priced items specified herein. Alternates may be additive or deductive. An additive alternate, whether shown on the drawings or specified herein, shall be defined as an alternate that is not currently part of the base building scope of work with a price that would be required to add the alternate to the base building scope of work. A deductive alternate shall be defined as an alternate that is currently part of the base building scope of work with a price that would be required to delete the alternate from the base building scope of work. The owner reserves the right to accept or reject any alternate priced item. 1. Alternate E-1: Provide an additive alternate bid price to provide extended service

contract for the stand-by generator system. Refer to Generator Specification Section for additional information.

2. Alternate E-2 - Thermographic Testing Alternate: Provide a deductive alternate bid price to delete the thermographic testing requirement.

C. Refer to the architectural specification section for Architect’s and Owner's instructions to bidders for additional alternate pricing requirements.

D. Pricing information provided for unit costs, separate line items, alternates, and value engineering items shall be all inclusive pricing that accounts for the impact and ripple effects on adjacent or related systems affected by the alternate product, material, or system. Acceptance of an alternate product, material or system shall not result in additional cost to the project beyond the price indicated for the alternate product, material or system.

1.20 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT COORDINATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment: 1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce

headroom are indicated. 2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other

installations. 3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of

obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.



C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

1.21 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to review the following Other Division Specification Sections and Drawings to determine the complete scope of Division 26 work. Divisions are as follows but are not limited to: 1. Division 21 Fire Protection Systems 2. Division 22 Plumbing Systems 3. Division 23 HVAC Systems 4. Division 22 Provided Heat Tracing Systems 5. Division 14 Elevator Systems 6. Division 08 Door Hardware 7. Division 27 Communications Systems 8. Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security 0 9. Division 10 Specialty Equipment – Compactors, Loading Dock Levelers, Rolling Doors,

Security System Conduits

B. The Division 26 Contractor shall be responsible for providing the conduit system including, but not limited to, pull boxes, power circuits, outlet boxes, junction boxes and other electrical work as indicated on the various trade’s and consultant’s design documents which includes, but are not limited to drawings prepared by the following specially consultants: Security, Information Technology, AV, Lighting, etc. The Division 26 Contractor shall be responsible to review all design documents to determine the complete scope of work required to be provided by Division 26.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Except as may be described in PART 1 and PART 3 of this Section, refer to PART 2 of the various Sections of Specification Division 26, ELECTRICAL.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. The word "Provide" is defined as requiring the Contractor to "furnish, erect, and install

complete and commission for use" the item to which it refers.

B. All materials and apparatus required for the work except as specified otherwise, shall be new, of first class quality and shall be furnished, delivered, erected, connected and finished in every detail, and shall be so selected and arranged to fit properly into the building spaces. Where no specific kind or quality of material is given, a first class standard article as approved by the Architect shall be provided.



C. Where any specific material, process or method of construction, or manufactured article is specified by name or by reference to the catalog number of a manufacturer, the Specifications are to be used as a guide and are not intended to take precedence over the basic duty and performance as specified or noted on the Drawings. In all cases, the Contractor shall verify the duty specified with the specific characteristics of the equipment offered for approval.

D. Materials, equipment, etc., used in the Work shall not contain asbestos or PCBs in any form or composition.

E. Equipment designated as "Basis of Design" has been coordinated for structural penetrations; duct, piping, and electrical connection; operating and service (maintenance) requirements; and physical size with regard to space where equipment is housed. Other specified manufacturers of like equipment are acceptable contingent on the Contractor providing a complete installation and maintaining full responsibility to provide, at no additional cost, any modifications to other systems, the structure, or configuration of adjoining equipment and the installation that is required to properly install, operate, and service the equipment being used.

F. The Contractor shall provide equipment, materials, etc. from the specified manufacturers. Where no alternate manufacturers are specified the exact make specified shall be provided. The Architect shall have the right to reject any alternative submitted and to insist on the specified material.

G. All component parts of each item of equipment or device shall bear the manufacturers nameplate, giving name of manufacturer, description, size, type, serial or model number, electrical characteristics, etc., in order to facilitate maintenance or replacement. The nameplate of a Subcontractor or Distributor will not be acceptable.

H. All materials shall be UL listed and UL labeled for their intended purpose.

I. Unless otherwise specifically indicated in the Drawings or Specifications, all equipment and materials shall be applied with the approval of the Architect in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes the performance of such tests as the manufacturer recommends.

J. The following electrical equipment provided as new under this scope of work shall be the products of one manufacturer: 1. LOW-VOLTAGE DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 2. LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 3. SWITCHBOARDS 4. PANELBOARDS 5. MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 6. ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES 7. INSULATED CASE AND MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 8. ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 9. ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

2.3 MOCK-UPS

A. The Contractor shall provide a mock-up of each space listed below for review and approval by the Owner, Architect, and Engineer. Mock-ups shall be complete with all Division 26 Work



provided except as may be specified below. Mock-ups shall be erected, reviewed, and approved prior to commencing work in similar spaces.

B. The approved mock-up shall be incorporated into the Work required by this Division. All subsequent work similar to the mock-up shall conform in all respects to the approved mock-up.

C. Work within the mock-up shall not be concealed until reviewed and approved.

D. Locations of mock-ups: 1. Typical floor electric closets. 2. Typical floor light coves (toilet rooms, elevator lobbies, etc.). 3. Typical floor ceiling cavity. 4. Typical floor telecom room.

2.4 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS

A. Provide installation drawings, as a quality control submittal type, at scale indicated for listed areas of work on the Project before equipment released for manufacture or construction. 1. Drawings requiring approval from the Power Company or code authorities, etc., shall be

submitted and approved by that organization before submission to the Architect. 2. Drawings of equipment rooms shall accompany equipment shop drawings. 3. Drawings of all Equipment Rooms (electrical and mechanical), electric and telephone

closets, service entrance duct banks, transformer vaults and rooms, and high voltage pull rooms, etc., shall show in plan and elevation, equipment arrangements, pads, working space and clearances, raceway and piping paths, and sleeve locations. a. All equipment shall be shown to scale and labeled. b. All sleeves, pipe and raceways shall be labeled to show size and use.

4. A coordinated composite drawing shall be provided for each level of the project showing the following information from mechanical, electrical and plumbing trades on a single drawing. a. Show all sleeve and floor opening and label for use and size. b. Show all mechanical duct runs and label for size. c. Show all piping and raceways larger than 1-½ inches in size, unless specified

otherwise. 5. Drawing listed below shall be submitted at scale indicated.

a. Main electric equipment room and power company service entrance duct banks,

vaults, transformer, and pull rooms (½ inch = 1-foot 0-inch scale). b. Electric and telephone closets, boiler and mechanical rooms, penthouses, and fire

control rooms (¼-inch = 1-foot 0-inch scale). c. Floor plans for duct, sleeves and piping (⅛ inch = 1-foot 0-inch scale).

2.5 SYSTEMS

A. Provide system layout drawings, installation details and test reports as a quality control

submittal type, showing equipment arrangement, size and layout to meet code and specification scope.



B. The following system drawings at scale indicated shall be submitted before systems equipment is installed. Refer to other Division 26 sections for additional requirements. 1. Power Riser diagram showing sizes of conductors and conduits.

2.6 ACCESS DOORS

A. Wherever access is required through walls, ceilings or fire-rated enclosures to concealed

equipment installed under this Division, unless otherwise noted in the architectural documents, the Contractor shall furnish a hinged access door rated for the Architectural equipment the door is installed within.

2.7 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Furnish and install heavy chrome-plated or nickel-plated steel plates of approved pattern on all conduit passing through walls and ceilings in finished areas. Escutcheons shall be B & C No. 10 or approved equal with concealed hinges. Pattern shall be approved by the Architect.

2.8 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel. 1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

2.9 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “Link Seal”

as manufactured by the Thunderline Corporation product by one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating or stainless

steel material, of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.



2.10 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors two inches above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide ¼-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry 1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed

surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.



I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.”

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

C. The sleeves, plates, and inserts shall be carefully located in advance of the construction of walls, slabs, and decks.

D. Sleeves shall be provided for all conduit passing through metal decks or concrete slabs. Sleeves shall be provided for all conduit passing through masonry, concrete, tile, and gypsum wallboard construction.

E. Sleeves in concrete floor slabs may be Schedule 40 PVC pipe.

F. Fasten sleeves securely in slabs, decks, and walls so that they will not become displaced when concrete is poured or when other construction is built around them. Take precautions to prevent concrete, plaster, or other material from being forced into the space between conduit and sleeves during construction.

G. Where sleeves are placed through slabs, decks, or fire-rated wall construction and following placing of electrical service therein, resulting opening and unused sleeves shall be filled with factory built devices or with manufactured fill, void, or cavity materials "Classified" by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. for use as a Through-Penetration Firestop. All firestop devices and systems shall be approved for such use by the authority having jurisdiction. The firesafing system used shall maintain the fire resistance rating of the building component that is penetrated. Firesafing systems and devices shall comply with ASTM E 814 (UL 1479).



Submittal data for firesafing systems shall include the U.L. System Numbers listed in the U.S. Building Materials Directory under which the material was tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 (UL 1479) for use in a Through-Penetration Firestop System. Excessive shrinkage of the fire stopping materials which would permit the transmission of smoke or water prior to exposure to a fire condition is unacceptable. Fire proofing shall be removable. Where a mastic coating is used to seal the surface of the firestop, the mastic shall be non-hardening. The firesafing system used shall accommodate expansion and contraction without damaging the firestop or reducing its effectiveness as a smoke barrier or water seal. Approved firestop sealing component/systems are as follows: 1. Tremco Fire-Resistive Joint System using Dymeric sealant and Cerablanket-FS mineral

filler. 2. Dow Corning 306548 Silicone RTV Foam. 3. 3M Fire Barrier Penetration Sealing Systems (Electro Products Divisions). 4. GEG Pensil 1851 Silicone RTM Foam by General Electric. 5. T&B Flame-Safe Fire Retardant Products.

H. Sleeves penetrating walls below grade shall be standard weight black steel pipe with 1/4 inch thick steel plate secured to the pipe with continuous fillet weld. The plate shall be located in the middle of the wall and shall be four inches wider all around than the sleeve it encircles. The entire assembly shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. Seal off annular opening between conduit and sleeve with "Link Seal" casing seal as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation, Wayne Michigan. The pipe sleeve shall be sized to accommodate the Thunderline casing seal. Casing seals shall be Series 300 for conduit size ¾ inches through four inches and Series 400 for conduit sizes five inches and longer.

I. Check floor and wall construction finishes to determine proper length of sleeves for various locations and make actual lengths to suit the following: 1. Terminate sleeves flush with walls, partitions, and ceilings. Sheet metal thimbles of

adequate strength to resist deformation by construction materials may be used in non-structural walls and ceilings.

2. In areas where conduits are concealed, as in chases, formed penetrations may be used. 3. In areas where conduits are exposed, extend sleeves two inches above finished floor.

J. Sleeves through beams or within 30 inches of column center lines shall be ASTM A-500 or A-501 steel pipe. All other sleeves shall be Schedule 40, ASTM A-120 galvanized or black steel pipe where required by structural engineer or where required to extend above the floor.

3.4 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING

A. Excavation as required to acceptably install work covered in this Division of the Specifications shall be provided as a portion of the work of this Division.

B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to check the indicated elevations of the utilities entering and leaving the building. If such elevations require excavations lower than the footing levels, the Architect shall be notified of such conditions before excavations are commenced.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for backfilling areas indicated but not used by utility companies.

D. Excavation and backfill shall be as specified in the Earthwork section of the Architectural Specifications.



3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical

installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.6 EQUIPMENT NOISE AND VIBRATION

A. It is the intention to specify and for the Contractor to provide equipment and systems that, as defined herein, shall be quiet and free of apparent vibration in operation.

B. It is intended that vibration shall not be apparent to the senses in occupied areas of the building. To this end, both the balancing of rotating machinery and the installation of vibration isolation at various locations are required.

C. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain equipment that is quiet in operation as compared to other available equipment of this size, capacity, and type; to install equipment so that a minimum amount of noise and/or vibration is transmitted to the building.

D. Any additional precautions deemed necessary to provide a quiet installation shall be done as part of the work of the Contractor, subject to review by the Engineer and without additional cost to the Owner. After the system is in operation, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make any changes to equipment or work installed that may be required to provide a system which is quiet in operation as defined herein.

E. The system noise level shall be equal to or less than NC40.

3.7 LUBRICATION

A. Provide means for lubricating all bearings and other machine parts. If a part requiring lubrication is concealed or inaccessible, extend a lubrication tube with suitable fitting to an accessible location and suitably identify it.

B. After installation, properly lubricate all parts requiring lubrication and keep them adequately lubricated with a lubricant recommended by the equipment manufacturer, until the Owner issues a certificate of substantial completion for the equipment, item or system.

3.8 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. General 1. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with all sections of these Specifications and all

the drawings of all trades, as well as other documents that are part of the Contract Documents in order to provide necessary electrical connections to all equipment. Such equipment shall be connected, complete, and ready for operation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where such connections are made using a receptacle and cap, the necessary pigtail shall be provided.

2. Safety disconnect switches shall be provided for all motors or equipment as required by the NEC whether shown on the Drawings or not.



3. Temperature control wiring in general shall be installed under the section specifying the equipment, unless specifically indicated on the Electrical Drawings. Under this section, power shall be provided where indicated to serve such systems as indicated.

4. Individual temperature control devices, such as thermostats which directly control unit heaters, float switches, etc., shall be supplied and connected under the section specifying the equipment.

5. The electrical subcontractor shall provide all wiring, with the exception of the following: a. Equipment control wiring, except for smoke control. b. Interlock wiring.

6. Provide all power wiring complete from power source to motor or equipment junction box, including power wiring through starters. Install all starters not factory mounted on equipment.

7. All control, signal, interlock, and equipment control wiring, regardless of voltage, shall be installed in raceway system unless specifically indicated or specified otherwise.

8. Provide all fire alarm system and smoke control wiring, regardless of voltage. Installed in separate raceway systems as specifically specified in the fire alarm system section.

9. Provide all power connections for heat-traced equipment and piping and extend proper connections to locations coordinated with supplier.

10. Provide final electrical connections to all items of Division 15 provided mechanical equipment, including motors, fan powered terminal devices, and unit heaters for a complete and operational system.

11. Provide final connections to the Division 14 provided elevator equipment, controllers, and control panels and provide the required circuits, fused disconnects, outlets, etc. for the elevator accessories as required by the elevator manufacturer or the Division 14 Contractor. All disconnecting means in the elevator controller room shall be provided with fuses and padlocking hardware. Enclosed fused disconnects shall be provided for all elevator motor circuits in the elevator machine room within "in sight" of the respective elevator controller, and located adjacent to the entrance to the elevator machine rooms. Provide additional non-fused disconnecting means as necessary where obstructions prohibit direct line of sight of main line fused disconnecting means at the elevator machine room entrance door. The Contractor shall provide heat detectors connected to the fire alarm system as required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction and hard wired to the 120 volt standby power system with 120V, 20A rated contact(s). Control wiring shall be provided such that upon activation of detector, a standby powered 120V, 20A circuit shall be completed which shall shunt trip "off" main line power to elevator controllers. All work for the elevator installation shall be in accordance with applicable requirements of the ASME Standard A17.1, published by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

3.9 FIELD OBSERVATIONS

A. Work identified as requiring corrective action by the Contractor is considered not to be in

compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. The Contractor shall provide prompt written notice to the Architect outlining what

remedial measures are to be taken to correct each noted deficiency and the date the corrective action will be available for re-examination.

2. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling remedial work in a timely fashion so that the corrected work may be re-examined. Uncovering work for the purpose of checking



corrective actions will be at the cost of the Contractor regardless of the acceptability of the remedial work.

3. The Contractor shall provide the Architect a minimum of five regular working days notice, exclusive of transmittal time, of the date corrective action is available for re-examination.

3.10 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. The Contractor shall provide the services of a factory trained specialist to supervise the start-up

of all equipment specified in this Division and to instruct the Owner's operators for five 8-hour days operating instruction period. The operating instruction period shall cover all major Division 26 equipment and all Division 26 systems and be defined as straight time working hours and shall not include nights, weekends, or travel time to and/or from the project. See individual Sections for additional instructions required of Manufacturer's trained specialists.

B. All instruction periods shall be digitally recorded by the contractor in digital file format or DVD. Upon completion of all instruction periods, the contractor shall deliver three copies of recorded instructional period to the Owner.

C. The Owner shall be notified in writing at least ten days before each operating instruction period begins. The Contractor shall commence no instruction period until the Owner has issued his written acceptance of the starting time.

D. At the conclusion of the operating instruction period(s), the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a separate certification letter signed by each instructor identifying the system and/or equipment covered in the instruction period, the duration, and that the equipment was in proper operating condition at the time of the instructions. The Owner or his authorized representative shall counter-sign these certifications attesting to the completeness of the instruction period and shall forward copies of the counter-signed certificate to the Architect for his files.

3.11 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. The Contractor shall provide operating instructions and maintenance data manuals for each specific item of equipment and materials provided under this Division.

B. Submit operating and maintenance data manuals for review at least four weeks before systems' commissioning. Assemble all data in a completely indexed three-ring binder(s.)

C. Maintenance manuals shall include the minimum following information. Refer to individual sections of this Division for specific additional requirements. 1. Identifying name and Contract Document section designation. 2. Equipment section shall include corrected final copies of all product data submittals,

complete and final shop drawing submittals manufacturer operational requirements, parts manuals, and written maintenance instructions for each individual piece of equipment.

3. Local source for parts and service. 4. Locations (where several similar items are used, provide a list). 5. Complete nameplate data. 6. Complete lubrication, cleaning, and servicing data. 7. Parts lists with diagrams.



8. Wiring diagrams. 9. Trouble-shooting guides. 10. Manufacturer's recommended operating and maintenance instructions with all

non-applicable information deleted. 11. Panel schedules (8½ x 11 copies), reflecting the installed conditions of each branch

circuit and corresponding circuit breaker pole location.

3.12 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. The Contractor shall maintain on a daily basis at the project site a complete set of "Record Drawings" reflecting an accurate as-built record of all Work. In addition, the "Record Drawings" shall be marked to show the precise location of hidden-from-view work and equipment, including, but not limited to, concealed or embedded raceways, junction boxes, pull-boxes, and all changes and deviations in the Work from that shown on the Contract Documents. This requirement shall not be construed as authorization for the Contractor to make changes in the layout or work without definite instructions from the Architect. 1. The "Record Drawings" shall consist of a complete set of the Contractor's quality control

submittals. 2. The Contractor shall utilize the Division 26 Contract Drawings as the basis for Record

Drawings of that portion of the Work where no submittals were required, (i.e., equipment schedules, schematics, etc.). All references to member firms of the design team shall be blacked-out on Contract Drawings used for Record Drawings.

3. The Contractor is responsible for all reproduction costs associated with Record Drawings. 4. Drawings shall show all conduit paths (1½" and larger unless specified otherwise) with

installation details included and all raceways labeled as to use. 5. All work outside the limits of the building shall show exact location and depth below

grade of all raceways, duct banks and direct buried cables. 6. The use of all or part of the Engineer’s Drawings or files as record drawings shall not be

acceptable.

B. Record dimensions shall clearly and accurately delineate all Division 26 base building and tenant Work provided; locations shall be suitably identified by at least two dimensions to permanent structures.

C. The Contractor shall mark all "Record Drawings" on the front lower right hand corner with a rubber stamp impression that states the following:

“RECORD DRAWINGS. To be used for recording Field Deviations and Dimensional Data Only.”

D. Upon completion of work, the Contractor shall certify the "Record Drawings" for correctness by providing and signing the following certification:

“CERTIFIED CORRECT

(Name of Contractor)

By:

Date:

(Name of Electrical Subcontractor)



By:

Date:

E. Prior to commissioning of the Work of this Division, the Contractor shall forward properly certified reproducible "Record Drawings" to the Architect as a quality control submittal in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 1.15 of this Section. 1. In the event that tenant construction is unfinished at the time of building commissioning,

the Contractor shall forward an intermediate submission of base building "Record Drawings" in accordance with the requirements specified above.

3.13 COMMISSIONING OF WORK

A. At a time designated by the Owner, all Work provided by Division 26 shall be operated by the Contractor to demonstrate to the Owner compliance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall provide all materials, test equipment, utilities (fuel, electrical power, conditioned space), etc., and sufficient responsible and knowledgeable personnel from each related trade as required to demonstrate proper systems' operation. 1. This commissioning test shall be in addition to the requirements for Contractor tests,

Code officials’ inspection tests and operating instructions. 2. The Contractor shall supervise, conduct, and document the commissioning tests. 3. The date for the commissioning tests shall be prior to the anticipated date of Substantial

Completion and in sufficient time to permit trouble shooting, de-bugging, proper and full execution of the tests with successful results, prior to that date. Any adjustments and/or alterations which the commissioning tests indicate as necessary for the proper functioning of all equipment shall be completed prior to the date of Substantial Completion.

4. The Contractor shall provide a detailed schedule of completion indicating when each system is to be completed and outlining when and how tests will be performed. Completion schedule and test procedures shall be submitted for review at least 60 days prior to the anticipated date of system commissioning.

B. All Division 26 systems shall be operated properly with loads balanced among phases and controls adjusted. All labels shall be removed and the lighting fixtures shall be cleaned, re-lamped where lamps have burned out or failed, and restored to operating condition. 1. Work found not operating in accordance with the requirements specified in the Contract

Documents shall be corrected and additional commissioning tests made, all at no additional cost to the Owner.

2. Commissioning tests on portions of the Division 26 Work may be required by the Owner out of sequence to facilitate early tenant occupancy. The Contractor shall, in this case, demonstrate to the Owner that these portions of the Work required for the tenant occupancy are operating in accordance with the Contract Documents.

3. Partial system commissioning accepted by the Owner as complete and correct will not be retested unless further tenant construction or completion of other systems affects those systems or equipment already tested.

C. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect certificates and documents required herein at least two weeks prior to the commissioning tests, unless specified otherwise. 1. The Code Authority must have signed off for final approval and occupancy of project. 2. All system tests as required by this Division must be performed and accepted.



3. Provide test reports, as contract closeout submittal type, as required by the Electrical Testing Specification Section work for the electrical systems.

4. O&M manuals submitted. 5. Record drawings submitted. 6. On-site operating instructions and factory start-up complete and specified documentation

submitted. 7. Thorough cleaning of all systems, equipment and spaces. 8. All systems’ identification complete. 9. All electrical connections complete and free from short circuits. 10. All Field Report and Punchlist work complete.

END OF SECTION 260500


Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 260519-1 Alexandria, Virginia LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Specific Attention is called to the "General Requirements and Common Work Results for Electrical Systems" located in Division 26.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 26 “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems” 2. Division 26 “Identification for Electrical Systems” 3. Division 26 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling" 4. ASHRAE 90.1 Section 8.4: Maximum allowable voltage drop for feeder circuits and

branch circuits.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. VFC: Variable frequency controller.

B. Cu or CU: Copper

C. Al or AL: Aluminum

D. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association

E. ANSI: American National Standards Institute

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product, submit manufacturers' literature, illustrations, specifications, engineering data, and conductor supports.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Field quality-control reports, including insulation resistance testing results for the wiring specific to this project



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide U.L. listed wire, cable and connectors of manufacturer's standard materials, as indicated by published product information and designed and constructed in accordance with applicable industry standards. All wire shall bear the stamped seal of approval of the National Board of Fire Underwriters.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

C. Conductor Insulation types for installation shall comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658, and shall be either Type THHN, THHN-2, THWN, THWN-2, or Type XHHW-2, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the Drawings.

D. Multiconductor Cable types for installation shall comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658, and shall be either metal-clad cable, Type MC, or mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI, with ground wire, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the Drawings.

E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 3. General Cable Corporation. 4. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 5. Southwire Company. 6. Tyco Pyrotenax

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. General: Provide all required fitting accessories.

B. Terminal Blocks: Terminal blocks shall be rated for 600 volts and shall be of the screw type.

C. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

E. Splices shall be made only in outlet boxes, junction boxes or splice boxes.

F. All #8 AWG and smaller conductors shall be spliced with preinsulated spring connectors. No other type of mechanical connector may be used for sizes #8 AWG and smaller wire. Connectors shall be Skotchlok, Buchanan B-Cap, or approved equal.



G. All #6 AWG and larger copper conductors terminated on lugs of switchboards, panelboards and motor control centers with copper bus shall be terminated with copper U.L. listed compression connectors such as Thomas & Betts #54200 series connectors for feeder and service terminations.

H. All #6 AWG and larger copper conductor two way splices shall be made with long barrel connectors requiring compression on each end. Connectors shall be U.L. listed for the type of conductors to be connected.

I. All #6 AWG and larger copper conductor tapping and pigtailing shall be made using "C" type compression taps such as Thomas & Betts #54700 series connectors. Connectors shall be U.L. listed for type of conductors to be tapped.

J. Conductor termination provisions shall be listed and rated for use with conductor ampacities rated at 75oC minimum.

K. The manufacturer's recommended installing tools with required number of compressions shall be used for all terminations.

2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper only. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper only. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 and larger.

C. Connections to mechanical, plumbing, conveying, and other equipment provided under other trades: Copper only, sizes as indicated on the drawings.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. All feeder conductors except as specified below shall be standard code type THHN-THWN-2 insulated wire except as specified below, indicated on the contract documents, or as required per the NEC.

B. Service Entrance Conductors: Type THHN-THWN-2, or XHHW-2. Except where service conductors are installed by the electric utility company. Where provided by the electric utility company the service conductors are not in contract.



C. Feeder conductors that are buried in conduit, run in wet locations, conduit encased in two inches of concrete in contact with the earth and unprotected/locations exposed to the weather: Type, THHN-THWN-2.

D. Feeders Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

E. Exposed Branch Circuits: Type THHN-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway, or Metal-clad cable, Type MC where permitted by the code and acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

H. Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway, or Metal-clad cable, Type MC, where permitted by the code and acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction, except where otherwise noted on the Drawings..

I. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Metal-clad cable, Type MC where permitted by the code and acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

J. Fire Pump Circuits: THHN-THWN-2 or XHHW-2 within conduit and encased within a minimum of two inches of concrete or mineral-insulated, metal sheathed cable, Type MI.

K. Two Hour Fire Rated Fire Alarm System Circuits: THHN-THWN-2 within conduit and encased within a minimum of two inches of concrete or mineral-insulated, metal sheathed cable, Type MI.

L. VFC Output Circuits: As recommended by the VFC Manufacturer.

M. All conductors within three inches of light fixture ballast shall be type THHN-THWN-2.

N. All wire to electric heaters shall be THHN-THWN-2.

O. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN-2, in raceway

P. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN-2, in raceway

3.3 CONDUCTOR SIZES

A. All wire shall be sized as indicated on the contract documents and as required by the adopted local codes for the load. However, the minimum wire size shall not be less than the following regardless of what wire size is indicated on the contract drawings. 1. Minimum size for power and lighting circuits - 12 AWG. 2. Minimum size for 120V circuits over 60 feet and 277V circuits over 120 feet to the first

outlet, fixture, or device - 10 AWG. 3. Minimum size for control circuits - 14 AWG.



B. Circuit conductor sizes shall be provided such that the maximum demand load shall not result in a voltage drop from the service equipment to the furthest feeder termination of more than 2%, and not more than 3% voltage drop across branch circuits from the last overcurrent device to the furthest fixture, device, equipment connection, or outlet.

3.4 CONDUCTOR MARKING

A. All conductors and cables shall be durably marked on the surface to indicate the following information: 1. The maximum rated voltage for which the conductor was listed. 2. The proper type letter or letters for the type of wire or cable. 3. The manufacturer's name, trademark, or other distinctive marking by which the

organization responsible for the product can be readily identified.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Division 26 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. Do not exceed minimum allowable turn radius in conduit or boxes for cables. Cross-sectional area for installed conductors shall be uniform throughout the installation.

D. Use pulling means; including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Division 26 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

G. Complete cable tray systems installation according to Division 26 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" prior to installing conductors and cables.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with and UL listed for conductor material. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least six inches of slack.



3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.8 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 26 “General Requirements and Common Work Results for Electrical Systems” and Division 26 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.9 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: The Contractor shall engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. The Contractor shall perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative for applicable equipment: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,

test service entrance and feeder conductors and conductors feeding the following critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements. a. Critical equipment and services to be tested shall be as follows:

1) Fire Pump Circuits 2) Conductors serving NEC 700 systems 3) Conductors serving NEC 701 systems 4) Conductors serving NEC 702 systems 5) Other conductor systems as required by the Architect and/or Owner.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

3. Provide insulation resistance testing for all conductors. a. Each conductor shall have its insulation resistance tested immediately after the

installation is completed, however prior to applying line voltage to the conductors. b. Cables shall not be connected to any equipment. The insulation resistance (IR)

acceptance test shall be conducted with a test instrument which will measure the IR of an insulated conductor to any possible combination of conductors in the cable or conduit. All conductors not under test and any shields, ground wires, metallic conduit, etc., shall be grounded to the system ground. The recommended test voltage is 600 Vdc. The minimum acceptable insulation resistance is to be based upon the following formula: 1) IR = (V + 1000)/L



2) where IR = Minimum acceptable Insulation Resistance in Megohms 3) V = Rated cable voltage in volts 4) L = Length of circuit in feet

All safety precautions associated with the test equipment and with personnel shall be followed during performance of the test. Conductor sizes #12, #10, and #8 shall be tested for continuity with standard ohm meter indicating at least 250,000 ohms to ground resistance.

4. Conductors that do not exceed the calculated insulation resistance values shall be removed and replaced and test repeated. All tests shall be performed in presence of Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for tests, shall tabulate readings observed, and shall forward four copies of test readings to the Engineer for review.

5. These test reports shall identify each conductor tested, conductor size, insulation type, length, date and time of test, weather conditions, and relative humidity. Each test shall be signed by party making test and person witnessing it. Any conductor or splice which is found defective shall be promptly removed and replaced, and additional tests shall be performed.

6. The above testing and report requirements shall apply to all circuits sized #6 AWG and larger. Circuits sized #8 and smaller, control circuits, and signal circuits shall be checked in accordance with the National Electrical Code, latest edition, using a standard ohm meter method.

C. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

D. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 260526-1 Alexandria, Virginia GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications: 1. Underground distribution grounding. 2. Ground bonding common with lightning protection system. 3. Foundation steel electrodes. 4. Grounding electrodes.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated submit ground rods, ground clamps and connectors, and expansion joint connectors.


A. As-Built Data: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following: 1. Test wells 2. Ground rods 3. Location of each grounding electrode. 4. Ground rings 5. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.

C. Field quality-control reports. 1. Provide graphed results of Fall of Potential Test with weather conditions stated,

equipment used, and equipment calibration date.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include

the following:



a. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells, ground rings, grounding connections for separately derived systems, based on NETA MTS. 1) Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain

within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values do not.

2) Include recommended testing intervals.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE


B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms maximum measured from the main ground bus to earth.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ERICO International Corporation. 2. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 3. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. 4. Burndy, A Hubbell Company. 5. OZ/Gedney, an Emerson Company.


A. Minimum requirements for equipment grounding shall be governed by the latest National Electrical Code and OSHA and the requirements of the telecommunications supplier. Contractor shall coordinate specific criteria amongst the trades. Grounding requirements shown on drawings and specified herein are intended to exceed such minimum requirements. The Contractor shall furnish and install any and all items necessary to meet these requirements at no extra cost, even if such items are not detailed on Drawings or listed herein.

B. The work specifically entails an equipment system which shall be a permanent, continuous-bonding system with noncurrent-carrying parts of the electrical system, building steel, and major structure and equipment.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.



E. The project equipment grounding system shall be designed so all metallic structures, enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, portable equipment and other conductive items connected to, or in within close proximity to electrical circuits, operate continuously at ground potential and provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents in conjunction with an equipment copper ground conductor. The system shall comply with the National Electrical Code, and as hereinafter specified. All branch circuits and feeders shall have green insulated equipment ground conductors sized in accordance with the NEC. Where parallel sets of conduits and current carrying conductors are used to comprise a single feeder, the equipment ground conductor in each conduit shall be fully rated and sized in accordance with NEC Article 250 or as indicated on the Drawings.

F. The building equipment grounding system shall consist of the electrically continuous metallic conduit system together with equipment copper ground wires extended from the main service entrance equipment as indicated on the Drawings. Every item of equipment served by the electrical system shall be bonded to the building equipment ground system. Portions of metallic piping and duct systems which are isolated by flexible connections, insulating couplings, etc., shall be bonded to the equipment ground system with a flexible bonding jumper with a minimum size of #8 AWG.

G. All expansion joints, isolated couplings, points of electrical discontinuity, or connections in conduit where firm mechanical bond is not feasible shall be bonded with OZ Type "BJ" or approved equal bonding jumper.

H. Mechanical equipment shall be bonded electrically to the building equipment grounding system. This includes but is not limited to flexible duct connections, fans, pumps, etc.

I. All flexible metal conduit connections not U.L. labeled as a grounding means shall have a ground conductor installed. Refer to Division 26.

J. Grounding rods shall be 3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet in length, made of cooper-clad steel. The portion of copper on copper-clad rods shall be approximately 27% of the weight of the rod.

2.3 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 inch deep by four inches in cross section unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Stand-off insulators for mounting



shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: UL Listed Copper or Copper alloy ground connectors, with at least two bolts per lug. 1. Pipe connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-Bar Connectors: compression type long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: solid copper-clad steel, 3/4 inch by 10 feet. 1. Ground rods shall meet ASTM B 133 & ASTM B 187.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Each system of metallic conduit, piping, and sheet metal shall be electrically grounded in accordance with the requirements of the NEC for the grounding of "conductor enclosures and equipment." Metallic conduit, piping, and sheet metal systems which enter the building shall be grounded at the point of entry with a grounding bond wire to the main electric service ground bus. Any metallic systems requiring isolation within the building shall be bonded to the building equipment grounding system.

B. The system neutral shall be grounded at each service entrance device. The system neutral on interior wiring shall be kept insulated and isolated from other grounding systems throughout the building and shall be grounded only to the grounding electrode system.

C. Bonding and grounding conductors shall be sized, shall be installed within conduit, and

shall be connected to services in accordance with the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction and the NFPA 70 (NEC). Where parallel conductors are used to comprise a single feeder, the equipment ground conductor in each conduit at a minimum shall be full sized in accordance with NEC Article 250, however shall not be provided in sizes less than as indicated on the Drawings, where grounding conductor sizes are indicated.

D. Grounding shall be done in accordance with the requirements of, and subject to the

approval of the Architect, Engineer, and Authority Having Jurisdiction. Only approved materials and devices shall be utilized and installed in workmanship like manner.



E. The following equipment shall be directly grounded to the main ground system by installation and connection of a ground cable to the main ground bus. 1. Main Switchboard and Switchgear ground bus 2. UL Listed Service entrance rated equipment 3. Secondary side of transformers 4. Generators 5. Lightning Protection system where provided on this project 6. Main telephone room ground bus

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for #10 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for #8 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, shall be provided in size as indicated on the drawings. 1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade. 2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when indicated as

part of duct-bank installation.

C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow.

D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, telecom rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers two inches minimum from wall, six inches

above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top

of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus.

E. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.3 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE

A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the main ground bus. The system neutral shall be grounded at the service entrance. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.

B. The system neutral on interior wiring shall be kept isolated from other grounding systems throughout the building and shall be grounded only to the grounding electrode system.

C. When a standby electric generator is grounded at the same location as the building utility service grounding electrode connection is made, a permanent stainless steel engraved placard



shall be affixed to the wall at the point of common connection location stating "Caution, both normal and emergency source(s) are connected to ground at this location". Placard shall use two inch high lettering.

3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Service circuits, feeders circuits, and branch circuits.

B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

C. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

D. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from the raceway. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated. Terminate isolated ground conductor at the applicable receptacle isolated ground terminal, and at the panelboard isolated ground bus.

E. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

F. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors at each pole mounted lighting fixture assembly, refer to the Drawings for additional information.

G. Metallic Fences: Comply with requirements of IEEE C2. 1. Grounding Conductor: Bare copper, not less than #6 AWG. 2. Gates: Shall be bonded to the grounding conductor with a flexible bonding jumper. 3. Barbed Wire: Strands shall be bonded to the grounding conductor.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system



ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as

otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate

any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install

bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection

is required, use a bolted clamp.

E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,

from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.

F. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

G. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.

H. Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building structure ground rod and to each steel column, extending around the perimeter of building. 1. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 3/0 AWG for ground ring and for taps

to building steel. 2. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches from building's foundation.

I. Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; use a minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than #2 AWG.



1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet long, coil excess conductor within base of foundation.

2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's main ground bus using #3/0 AWG.


A. The Contractor shall perform the following tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been

energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,

electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of

precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. 4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod

assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare written test and inspection reports and submit to the Architect.

E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed five ohms.

F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 260529-1 Alexandria, Virginia HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. The Contractor shall design supports for multiple raceways, and the Contractor shall include providing engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.


A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems 3. Steel All Thread 4. Steel channeling

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components



3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components 4. Equipment supports


A. Welding certificates


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Thomas and Betts Corporation b. Unistrut c. ERICO International Corporation d. Or Architect and Engineer Approved Equal

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.



E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: 1) Hilti, Inc. 2) MKT Fastening, LLC 3) Or Architect and Engineer Approved Equal

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: 1) Hilti, Inc. 2) MKT Fastening, LLC 3) Or Architect and Engineer Approved Equal

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4-inch in diameter.



C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with either one or two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1½-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200.

C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers

and nuts or Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate and where applicable by means that meet the project anchorage requirements.

D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than four inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.



B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified under other sections.

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in other sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 260533-1 Alexandria, Virginia RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters 4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters 5. Surface raceways 6. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets 7. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling

B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 26 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior

ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction. 2. Division 27 “Communications" for conduits, wireways, surface pathways, innerduct,

boxes, faceplate adapters, enclosures, cabinets, and handholes serving communications systems.

3. Division 28 " Electronic Safety and Security" for conduits, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving electronic safety and security.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit

B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit

D. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing

E. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing

F. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber

G. FMC: Flexible metal conduit

H. LFMC: Liquid tight flexible metal conduit



I. LFNC: Liquid tight flexible nonmetallic conduit

J. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber

K. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures, wire troughs, bussed troughs, and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.


A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: 1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

B. Source quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Alflex Inc. 3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose 5. Electri-Flex Co. 6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex 7. Maverick Tube Corporation 8. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal 9. Wheatland Tube Company

C. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6

E. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A



F. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242

G. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit 1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch minimum.

H. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

I. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or corrosion protected aluminum.

J. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

K. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and

NFPA 70. 2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel b. Type: Setscrew or compression

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. a. Expansion fittings for EMT shall be equal to Thomas and Betts ‘XJG’ series. b. Expansion fittings for PVC Schedule 40 shall be equal to Thomas and Betts E945

series. c. Fittings for expansion and deflection for EMT, IMC, RMC shall be similar type to

Thomas and Betts ‘XD’ series. d. Fittings for expansion or deflection outdoors, direct buried or embedded in

concrete shall be similar or equal to Thomas and Betts ‘XD’ series. 4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch with

overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

L. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose 3. Arnco Corporation 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group 6. Condux International, Inc. 7. ElecSYS, Inc. 8. Electri-Flex Co. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products 10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex 11. RACO; a Hubbell Company



12. Thomas & Betts Corporation

B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.

D. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.

E. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.

F. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.

G. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B.

H. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485.

I. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14.

J. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

K. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.

L. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

M. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman 3. Square D; Schneider Electric 4. NJ Sullivan

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 for indoor locations, NEMA Type 3R, for outdoor locations, and NEMA Type 4X for areas where directed water may be present (kitchens, carwash facilities, automotive service stations, etc. unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.



C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Provide cover type (hinged type) appropriate for location of wireway and corresponding NEMA rating.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Provide nonmetallic construction where specifically indicated on the Drawings.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Hoffman 2. Lamson & Sessions 3. Carlon Electrical Products

C. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Description: Fiberglass polyester extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, without holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections shall be flanged and have stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.

E. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

G. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Thomas & Betts Corporation



b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The) c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division

C. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Product shall comply with UL 94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing characteristics. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Butler Manufacturing Company; Walker Division b. Enduro Systems, Inc.; Composite Products Division c. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division d. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products e. Panduit Corp. f. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The) g. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division

D. Tele-Power Poles: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Monosystems b. Panduit Corporation c. Wiremold/Legrand

2. Material: Aluminum with clear anodized finish 3. Fittings and Accessories: Dividers, end caps, covers, cutouts, wiring harnesses, devices,

mounting materials, and other fittings shall match and mate with tele-power pole as required for complete system.

2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company 4. Hoffman 5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division 6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal 7. RACO; a Hubbell Company 8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division 9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division 10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation 12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The) 13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.



D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

F. Metal Floor Boxes: 1. Material: Sheet metal 2. Type: Semi-adjustable 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

G. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round or rectangular. 1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in


H. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 pounds. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 pounds shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

I. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing 70 pounds. 1. Listing and Labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in


J. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

K. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

L. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

M. Device Box Dimensions: Four inches square by 2-⅛ inches deep.

N. Gangable boxes are allowed.

O. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 for indoor locations, NEMA Type 3R, for outdoor locations, and NEMA Type 4X for areas where directed water may be present (kitchens, carwash facilities, automotive service stations, etc.) with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic. 3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

P. Cabinets:



1. NEMA 250, Type 1 for indoor locations, NEMA Type 3R, for outdoor locations, and NEMA Type 4X for areas where directed water may be present (kitchens, carwash facilities, automotive service stations, etc. galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.7 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: 1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as

defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application. 2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two. 1. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 2. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with closed bottom unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC," “TELEPHONE,” or “CATV” as

necessary for utility served. 6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts

for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 7. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and

pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied. 1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing

agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012 and traceable to NIST standards.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: PVC coated GRC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC, or IMC, 3. Underground Conduit: Type EPC-40-PVC. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R for outdoor locations or

Type 4X where directed water may be present.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC, IMC, or EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC or IMC. Raceway locations

include the following: a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms. d. Gymnasiums. e. Elevator machine rooms. f. Elevator pits and hoistways.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC or IMC. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless

steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and other indoor damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this

type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

F. Do not install nonmetallic conduit exposed on roofs or where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F (49 deg C).



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least six inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Division 26 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of four 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Comply with requirements in Division 26 “Telephone and Communication Systems Rough-In” for telephone and communication system conduit installation requirements.

I. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

J. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than one inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of two inches of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for

each specific location. 5. Change from ENT to GRC or IMC before rising above floor.

K. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

L. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.



M. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

N. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1¼-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1½-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

O. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus one quarter turn more.

P. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

Q. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits two-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

R. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-pound tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

S. Surface Raceways: 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum two-inch radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not

exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

T. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

U. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Refer to Division 26 for raceway seal requirements. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces. 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

V. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

W. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature

change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F (55 deg C) and that has a horizontal run length that exceeds 100 feet.



2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C)

temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature

change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

(70 deg C) temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F (75 deg C) temperature change. e. Covered unconditioned parking garages: 95 deg F temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

X. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi recessed luminaries, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

Y. Mount boxes as high as feasible in accessible location.

Z. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a rain tight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

AA. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

BB. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

CC. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

DD. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

EE. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

FF. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.



3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench

bottom as specified in Division 31 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 31 "Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end

of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow. a. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits

penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

5. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits but a minimum of six inches below grade. Align planks along centerline of conduit.

6. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Division 26 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from ½-inch sieve to #4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures one inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, 36 inches below grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.

F. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.




A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 26 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 "Penetration Firestopping” and where required in section 26.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

recommended by manufacturer.



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 260543-1 Alexandria, Virginia UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Direct-buried conduit, ducts, and duct accessories. 2. Concrete-encased conduit, ducts, and duct accessories. 3. Handholes and boxes. 4. Manholes.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Trafficways: Locations where vehicular or pedestrian traffic is a normal course of events.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include duct-bank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components. 2. Include ducts and conduits and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends,

fittings, and solvent cement. 3. Include accessories for manholes, handholes, boxes, and other electrical, telephone, and

communications utility structures. 4. Include warning tape. 5. Include warning planks.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures:

a. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and accessories.

b. Include duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. c. Include reinforcement details. d. Include frame and cover design and manhole frame support rings. e. Include ladder or step details. f. Include grounding details. g. Include dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in and lifting irons,

and sumps. h. Include joint details.

2. Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Boxes Other Than Precast Concrete: a. Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations, and fabrication and

installation details.



b. Include duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. c. Include cover design. d. Include grounding details. e. Include dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting

irons.


A. Duct-Bank Coordination Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and underground structures. 1. Include plans and sections, drawn to scale, and show bends and locations of expansion

fittings. 2. Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in precast concrete below grade structures, as required by ASTM C 858.

C. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency responsible for testing nonconcrete handholes and boxes.

D. Source quality-control reports.

E. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

B. Furnish cable-support stanchions, arms, insulators, and associated fasteners in quantities equal to five percent of quantity of each item installed.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions, and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than ten days in advance of proposed interruption

of electrical service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Architect and Owner's

written permission.

B. Ground Water: Refer to Civil Engineer and Geotechnical Engineer’s documents for ground water elevation. Where no documentation exists, assume ground-water level is at grade level.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DUCTS AND RACEWAYS

A. Comply with ANSI C2.

2.2 CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized. Comply with ANSI C80.1.

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, UL 651, with matching fittings by same manufacturer as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.

2.3 NONMETALLIC DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES

A. Underground Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 2, UL 651, ASTM F 512, Type EPC-40, with matching fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 by same manufacturer as the duct.

B. Underground Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 6 & 8, ASTM F 512, UL 651A, Type HDPE, with matching fittings complying with NEMA TC 9 by same manufacturer as the duct.

C. Duct Accessories: 1. Duct Separators: Factory-fabricated rigid PVC interlocking spacers, sized for type and

size of ducts with which used, and selected to provide minimum duct spacing indicated while supporting ducts during concreting or backfilling.

2. Warning Tape: Underground-line warning tape specified in Division 26 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3. Concrete Warning Planks: Nominal 12 by 24 by 3 inches in size, manufactured from 6000-psi concrete. a. Color: Red dye added to concrete during batching. b. Mark each plank with "ELECTRIC" in two-inch high, 3/8-inch deep letters.

2.4 PRECAST CONCRETE HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Comply with ASTM C 858 for design and manufacturing processes.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated, reinforced-concrete, monolithically poured walls and bottom unless open-bottom enclosures are indicated. Frame and cover shall form top of enclosure and shall have load rating consistent with that of handhole or box. 1. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof cast-iron frame, with cast-iron cover with recessed cover

hook eyes and tamper-resistant, captive, cover-securing bolts. 2. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof steel frame, with steel cover with recessed cover hook

eyes and tamper-resistant, captive, cover-securing bolts. 3. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof steel frame, with hinged steel access door assembly with

tamper-resistant, captive, cover-securing bolts. a. Cover Hinges: Concealed, with hold-open ratchet assembly. b. Cover Handle: Recessed.

4. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof aluminum frame with hinged aluminum access door assembly with tamper-resistant, captive, cover-securing bolts. a. Cover Hinges: Concealed, with hold-open ratchet assembly.



b. Cover Handle: Recessed. 5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC" or “TELEPHONE” or

“COMMUNICATIONS” or as indicated on the Drawings. 7. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have integral closed bottom

unless otherwise indicated. 8. Extensions and Slabs: Designed to mate with bottom of enclosure. Same material as

enclosure. a. Extension shall provide increased depth of 12 inches. b. Slab: Same dimensions as bottom of enclosure, and arranged to provide closure.

9. Joint Sealant: Asphaltic-butyl material with adhesion, cohesion, flexibility, and durability properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location with the ground-water level at grade.

10. Windows: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of approaching ducts and duct banks, plus an additional 12 inches vertically and horizontally to accommodate alignment variations. a. Windows shall be located no less than six inches from interior surfaces of walls,

floors, or frames and covers of handholes, but close enough to corners to facilitate racking of cables on walls.

b. Window opening shall have cast-in-place, welded-wire fabric reinforcement for field cutting and bending to tie in to concrete envelopes of duct banks.

c. Window openings shall be framed with at least two additional #3 steel reinforcing bars in concrete around each opening.

11. Duct Entrances in Handhole Walls: Cast end-bell or duct-terminating fitting in wall for each entering duct. a. Type and size shall match fittings to duct or conduit to be terminated. b. Fittings shall align with elevations of approaching ducts and be located near

interior corners of handholes to facilitate racking of cable. 12. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and larger shall have inserts for cable racks

and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

2.5 HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: Comply with SCTE 77. Comply with tier requirements in "Underground Enclosure Application" Article. 1. Color: Gray. 2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have integral closed bottom

unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC" or “TELEPHONE” or

“COMMUNICATIONS” or as indicated on the Drawings. 6. Duct Entrance Provisions: Duct-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for

secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 7. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and larger shall have factory-installed

inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons.



B. Polymer Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with a polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.

C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Frame and Cover: Sheet-molded, fiberglass-reinforced, polyester resin enclosure joined to polymer concrete top ring or frame.

D. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with covers made of hot-dip galvanized-steel diamond plate.

E. High-Density Plastic Boxes: Injection molded of high-density polyethylene or copolymer-polypropylene. Cover shall be made of hot-dip galvanized-steel diamond plate.

2.6 PRECAST MANHOLES

A. Comply with ASTM C 858.

B. Structural Design Loading: Comply with requirements in "Underground Enclosure Application" Article.

C. Precast Manholes: One-piece units and units with interlocking mating sections, complete with accessories, hardware, and features.

D. Windows: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of approaching ducts and duct banks, plus an additional 12 inches vertically and horizontally to accommodate alignment variations. 1. Windows shall be located no less than six inches from interior surfaces of walls, floors,

or roofs of manholes, but close enough to corners to facilitate racking of cables on walls. 2. Window opening shall have cast-in-place, welded-wire fabric reinforcement for field

cutting and bending to tie in to concrete envelopes of duct banks. 3. Window openings shall be framed with at least two additional No. 3 steel reinforcing bars

in concrete around each opening.

E. Duct Entrances in Manhole Walls: Cast end-bell or duct-terminating fitting in wall for each entering duct. 1. Type and size shall match fittings to duct or conduit to be terminated. 2. Fittings shall align with elevations of approaching ducts and be located near interior

corners of manholes to facilitate racking of cable.

F. Concrete Knockout Panels: 1½ to 2 inches thick, for future conduit entrance and sleeve for ground rod.

G. Ground Rod Sleeve: Provide a three-inch PVC conduit sleeve in manhole floors two inches from the wall adjacent to, but not underneath, the ducts routed from the facility.

H. Joint Sealant: Asphaltic-butyl material with adhesion, cohesion, flexibility, and durability properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location with the ground-water level at grade.



2.7 CAST-IN-PLACE MANHOLES

A. Description: Underground utility structures, constructed in place, complete with accessories, hardware, and features. Include concrete knockout panels for conduit entrance and sleeve for ground rod.

B. Materials: Comply with ASTM C 858 and with Section 03 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Structural Design Loading: As specified in "Underground Enclosure Application" Article.

2.8 UTILITY STRUCTURE ACCESSORIES

A. Manhole Frames, Covers, and Chimney Components: Comply with structural design loading specified for manhole. 1. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof, gray cast iron complying with ASTM A 48/A 48M,

Class 30B with milled cover-to-frame bearing surfaces; diameter, 26 inches/29 inches. a. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. b. Special Covers: Recess in face of cover designed to accept finish material in paved

areas. 2. Cover Legend: Cast in. Selected to suit system.

a. Legend: "ELECTRIC-LV" for duct systems with power wires and cables for systems operating at 600 V and less.

b. Legend: "ELECTRIC-HV" for duct systems with medium-voltage cables. 3. Manhole Chimney Components: Precast concrete rings with dimensions matched to those

of roof opening. a. Mortar for Chimney Ring and Frame and Cover Joints: Comply with

ASTM C 270, Type M, except for quantities less than two cubic feet where packaged mix complying with ASTM C 387, Type M, may be used.

b. Seal joints watertight using preformed plastic or rubber conforming to ASTM C 990. Install sealing material according to the sealant manufacturers' printed instructions.

B. Manhole Sump Frame and Grate: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30B, gray cast iron.

C. Pulling Eyes in Concrete Walls: Eyebolt with reinforcing-bar fastening insert, two-inch diameter eye, and one-by-four-inch bolt. 1. Working Load Embedded in six-inch, 4000-psi Concrete: 13,000-lbf minimum tension.

D. Pulling Eyes in Nonconcrete Walls: Eyebolt with reinforced fastening, 1¼-inch diameter eye, rated 2500-lbf minimum tension.

E. Pulling-In and Lifting Irons in Concrete Floors: 7/8-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized, bent steel rod; stress relieved after forming; and fastened to reinforcing rod. Exposed triangular opening. 1. Ultimate Yield Strength: 40,000-lbf shear and 60,000-lbf tension.

F. Bolting Inserts for Concrete Utility Structure Cable Racks and Other Attachments: Flared, threaded inserts of noncorrosive, chemical-resistant, nonconductive thermoplastic material; one half inch ID by 2¾ inches deep, flared to 1¼ inches minimum at base. 1. Tested Ultimate Pullout Strength: 12,000-lbf minimum.



G. Ground Rod Sleeve: three-inch, PVC conduit sleeve in manhole floors two inches from the wall adjacent to, but not underneath, the ducts routed from the facility.

H. Expansion Anchors for Installation after Concrete Is Cast: Zinc-plated, carbon-steel-wedge type with stainless-steel expander clip with one half-inch bolt, 5300-lbf rated pullout strength, and minimum 6800-lbf rated shear strength.

I. Cable Rack Assembly: Steel, hot-dip galvanized, except insulators. 1. Stanchions: T-section or channel; 2½-inch nominal size; punched with 14 holes on 1½-

inch centers for cable-arm attachment. 2. Arms: 1½inches wide, lengths ranging from three inches with 450 pound minimum

capacity to 18 inches with 250 pound minimum capacity. Arms shall have slots along full length for cable ties and be arranged for secure mounting in horizontal position at any vertical location on stanchions.

3. Insulators: High-glaze, wet-process porcelain arranged for mounting on cable arms.

J. Cable Rack Assembly: Nonmetallic. Components fabricated from nonconductive, fiberglass-reinforced polymer. 1. Stanchions: Nominal 2. Arms: Arranged for secure, drop-in attachment in horizontal position at any location on

cable stanchions, and capable of being locked in position. Arms shall be available in lengths ranging from three inches with 450 pound minimum capacity to 20 inches with 250 pound minimum capacity. Top of arm shall be nominally four inches wide, and arm shall have slots along full length for cable ties.

K. Duct-Sealing Compound: Non-hardening, safe for contact with human skin, not deleterious to cable insulation, and workable at temperatures as low as 35 deg F (2 deg C). Capable of withstanding temperature of 300 deg F (150 deg C) without slump and adhering to clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and common metals.

L. Fixed Manhole Ladders: Arranged for attachment to wall and floor of manhole. Ladder and mounting brackets and braces shall be fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel.

M. Cover Hooks: Heavy duty, designed for lifts 60 lbf and greater. Two required.

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and inspect precast concrete utility structures according to ASTM C 1037.

B. Non-concrete Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of manholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied. 1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing

agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification, complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field. Notify Architect if there is a conflict between areas of excavation and existing structures or archaeological sites to remain.

B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into manholes, handholes, and boxes with final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks, as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to manholes and handholes, and as approved by Architect.

C. Clear and grub vegetation to be removed, and protect vegetation to remain according to Division 31 "Site Clearing." Remove and stockpile topsoil for reapplication according to Division 31 "Site Clearing."

3.2 UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION

A. Ducts for Electrical Cables More than 600 V: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40 PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank unless otherwise indicated.

B. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40 PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank unless otherwise indicated.

C. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40 PVC, in direct-buried duct bank unless otherwise indicated.

D. Ducts for Electrical Branch Circuits: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40 PVC, in direct-buried duct bank unless otherwise indicated.

E. Underground Ducts Crossing Paved Paths, Walks, Driveways, Roadways, parking lots, and Railroads: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40 PVC, encased in a minimum of two inches of reinforced concrete.

3.3 UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURE APPLICATION

A. Handholes and Boxes for 600 V and Less: 1. Units in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths: Precast concrete.

AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating. 2. Units in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional,

Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Precast concrete, AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating.

3. Units in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Precast concrete, AASHTO HB 17, H-10 structural load rating.

4. Units Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbf vertical loading.



5. Cover design load shall not exceed the design load of the handhole or box.

B. Manholes: Precastorcast-in-place concrete. 1. Units Located in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium

Vehicles: H-20 structural load rating according to AASHTO HB 17. 2. Units Not Located in Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium Vehicles: H-10 load

rating according to AASHTO HB 17.

3.4 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Division 31 "Earth Moving," but do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.

B. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation, and re-establish original grades unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.

C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching. Comply with Division 32 "Turf and Grasses" and Division 32 "Plants."

D. Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of underground ducts and utility structures according to the "Cutting and Patching" Article in Division 01 "Execution."

3.5 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Install ducts according to NEMA TCB 2.

B. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two manholes, to drain in both directions.

C. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches or 6 times the trade size of the largest duct whichever is longer, both horizontally and vertically, at other locations unless otherwise indicated.

D. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane.

E. Installation Adjacent to High-Temperature Steam Lines: Where duct banks are installed parallel to underground steam lines, perform calculations showing the duct bank will not be subject to environmental temperatures above 40 deg C. Where environmental temperatures are calculated to rise above 40 deg C, and anywhere the duct bank crosses above an underground steam line, install insulation blankets listed for direct burial to isolate the duct bank from the steam line.

F. Duct Entrances to Manholes and Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, spaced approximately 10 inches o.c. for five-inch ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes.



1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet from the end bell without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line.

2. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each conduit in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole. Install an expansion fitting near the center of all straight line direct-buried duct banks with calculated expansion of more than three quarter inch.

3. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.

G. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at least 10 feet outside the building wall, without reducing duct line slope away from the building, and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to-conduit transition. Install conduit penetrations of building walls as specified in Division 26 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

H. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig hydrostatic pressure.

I. Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf test nylon cord in empty ducts.

J. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators. 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct bank. Prepare

trench bottoms as specified in Section 31 "Earth Moving" for pipes less than six inches in nominal diameter.

2. Width: Excavate trench 12 inches wider than duct bank on each side. 3. Width: Excavate trench three inches wider than duct bank on each side. 4. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches below finished grade in areas not subject

to deliberate traffic, and at least 30 inches below finished grade in deliberate traffic paths for vehicles unless otherwise indicated.

5. Support ducts on duct separators coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor temperature.

6. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than five spacers per 20 feet of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately six inches between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.

7. Minimum Space between Ducts: three inches between ducts and exterior envelope wall, two inches between ducts for like services, and four inches between power and signal ducts.

8. Elbows: Use manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment, at building entrances through floor, and at changes of direction in duct run unless otherwise indicated. Extend concrete encasement throughout length of elbow.

9. Elbows: Use manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment, at building entrances through floor, and at changes of direction in duct run. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase

coupling with three inches of concrete. b. Stub-Ups to Equipment: For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases,

extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.



10. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks where they cross disturbed earth and where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.

11. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms.

12. Concrete Cover: Install a minimum of three inches of concrete cover at top and bottom, and a minimum of two inches on each side of duct bank.

13. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation. a. Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of

ducts as their temperature changes during and after the pour. Use expansion fittings installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations, or use other specific measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage.

b. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install three quarter inch reinforcing-rod dowels extending a minimum of 18 inches into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope.

14. Pouring Concrete: Comply with requirements in "Concrete Placement" Article in Division 03 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Place concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application.

K. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct bank. Comply with

requirements in Division 31 "Earth Moving" for preparation of trench bottoms for pipes less than six inches in nominal diameter.

2. Support ducts on duct separators coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor temperature.

3. Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than four or five spacers per 20 feet of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent displacement during backfill and yet permit linear duct movement due to expansion and contraction as temperature changes. Stagger spacers approximately six inches between tiers.

4. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 36 inches below finished grade unless otherwise indicated.

5. Set elevation of bottom of duct bank below frost line. 6. Install ducts with a minimum of three inches between ducts for like services and six

inches between power and signal ducts. 7. Elbows: Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment, at

building entrances through floor, and at changes of direction in duct run unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow.

8. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment, at building entrances through floor, and at changes of direction in duct run. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase

coupling with three inches of concrete. b. For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit

horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.



9. After installing first tier of ducts, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point and work toward end of duct run, leaving ducts at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Repeat procedure after placing each tier. After placing last tier, hand place backfill to four inches over ducts and hand tamp. Firmly tamp backfill around ducts to provide maximum supporting strength. Use hand tamper only. After placing controlled backfill over final tier, make final duct connections at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction. Comply with requirements in Section 31 "Earth Moving" for installation of backfill materials. a. Place minimum three inches of sand as a bed for duct bank. Place sand or

engineered soil to a minimum of six inches above top level of duct bank. b. Place minimum six inches of engineered fill above concrete encasement of duct

bank.

L. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried ducts and duct banks, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional plank for each 12-inch increment of ductbank width over a nominal 18 inches. Space additional planks 12 inches apart, horizontally.

M. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches above all concrete-encased ducts and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within three inches of centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch increment of ductbank width over a nominal 18 inches. Space additional tapes 12 inches apart, horizontally.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND BOXES

A. Cast-in-Place Manhole Installation: 1. Finish interior surfaces with a smooth-troweled finish. 2. Windows for Future Duct Connections: Form and pour concrete knockout panels 1½ to 2

inches thick, arranged as indicated. 3. Comply with requirements in Division 03 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for cast-in-place

concrete, formwork, and reinforcement.

B. Precast Concrete Handhole and Manhole Installation: 1. Comply with ASTM C 891 unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting

ducts, to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel,

graded from one inch sieve to #4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevations: 1. Manhole Roof: Install with rooftop at least 15 inches below finished grade. 2. Manhole Frame: In paved areas and trafficways, set frames flush with finished grade. Set

other manhole frames one inch above finished grade. 3. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, 36” below grade. 4. Handhole Covers: In paved areas and trafficways, set surface flush with finished grade.

Set covers of other handholes one inch above finished grade. 5. Where indicated, cast handhole cover frame integrally with handhole structure.



D. Drainage: Install drains in bottom of manholes where indicated. Coordinate with drainage provisions indicated.

E. Manhole Access: Circular opening in manhole roof; sized to match cover size. 1. Manholes with Fixed Ladders: Offset access opening from manhole centerlines to align

with ladder. 2. Install chimney, constructed of precast concrete collars and rings, to support cast-iron

frame to connect cover with manhole roof opening. Provide moisture-tight masonry joints and waterproof grouting for frame to chimney.

F. Waterproofing: Apply waterproofing to exterior surfaces of manholes and handholes after concrete has cured at least three days. Waterproofing materials and installation are specified in Division 07 "Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing” and/or "Thermoplastic Sheet Waterproofing." After ducts have been connected and grouted, and before backfilling, waterproof joints and connections, and touch up abrasions and scars. Waterproof exterior of manhole chimneys after mortar has cured at least three days.

G. Dampproofing: Apply dampproofing to exterior surfaces of manholes and handholes after concrete has cured at least three days. Dampproofing materials and installation are specified in Section 07 "Bituminous Dampproofing." After ducts are connected and grouted, and before backfilling, dampproof joints and connections, and touch up abrasions and scars. Dampproof exterior of manhole chimneys after mortar has cured at least three days.

H. Hardware: Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated.

I. Fixed Manhole Ladders: Arrange to provide for safe entry with maximum clearance from cables and other items in manholes.

J. Field-Installed Bolting Anchors in Manholes and Concrete Handholes: Do not drill deeper than 3-7/8 inches for manholes and two inches for handholes, for anchor bolts installed in the field. Use a minimum of two anchors for each cable stanchion.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts, to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Use box extension if required to match depths of ducts, and seal joint between box and extension as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from one half inch sieve to #4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas and trafficways, set cover flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes one inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below frost line, 36” below grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm



lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.

F. Field cut openings for ducts and conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

G. For enclosures installed in asphalt paving and subject to occasional, nondeliberate, heavy-vehicle loading, form and pour a concrete ring encircling, and in contact with, enclosure and with top surface screeded to top of box cover frame. Bottom of ring shall rest on compacted earth. 1. Concrete: 3000 psi, 28-day strength, complying with Division 03 "Cast-in-Place

Concrete," with a troweled finish. 2. Dimensions: 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep.

3.8 GROUNDING

A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Division 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation

of underground ducts and utility structures. 2. Pull solid aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and

adequate bend radii, and test for out-of-round duct. Provide a minimum six-inch long mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest.

3. Test manhole and handhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Division 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts.

B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 260544-1 Alexandria, Virginia SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLINIG

SECTION 260544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Specific Attention is called to the "General Requirements and Common Work Results for Electrical Systems" located in Divison 26.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 07 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-

resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, provide Manufacturer’s product data, drawings, and engineering information for products provided under this section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves: 1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated,

plain ends.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board. PVC sleeves in "PVC-Pipe Sleeves" and "Molded-PVC Sleeves" paragraphs below may be prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: 1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.



b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “Link Seal”

as manufactured by the Thunderline Corporation product by one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.

2.3 Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating or stainless steel material, of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.

2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; noncorrosive, nonstaining, nonmetallic, and recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors. Grout shall be type mixed with water to consistency suitable for application with a 30 minute working time.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below. 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal

surfaces that are not fire rated.

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS


B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls: 1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 079200 "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide one quarter inch annular clear space between sleeve and

raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed . 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are

used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors four inches above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: 1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved

opening. 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board

assemblies. 3. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate

for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for one inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for one inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

H. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations, consistent with the Architectural design documents. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."



3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

C. The sleeves, plates, and inserts shall be carefully located in advance of the construction of walls, slabs, and decks.

D. Sleeves shall be provided for all conduit passing through metal decks or concrete slabs. Sleeves shall be provided for all conduit passing through masonry, concrete, tile, and gypsum wallboard construction.

E. Fasten sleeves securely in slabs, decks, and walls so that they will not become displaced when concrete is poured or when other construction is built around them. Take precautions to prevent concrete, plaster, or other material from being forced into the space between conduit and sleeves during construction.

F. Where sleeves are placed through slabs, decks, or fire-rated wall construction and following placing of electrical service therein, resulting opening and unused sleeves shall be filled with factory built devices or with manufactured fill, void, or cavity materials "Classified" by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. for use as a Through-Penetration Firestop. All firestop devices and systems shall be approved for such use by the authority having jurisdiction. The firesafing system used shall maintain the fire resistance rating of the building component that is penetrated.

G. Sleeves penetrating walls below grade shall be standard weight black steel pipe with one quarter inch thick steel plate secured to the pipe with continuous fillet weld. The plate shall be located in the middle of the wall and shall be four inches wider all around than the sleeve it encircles. The entire assembly shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. Seal off annular opening between conduit and sleeve with "Link Seal" casing seal as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation, Wayne Michigan. The pipe sleeve shall be sized to accommodate the Thunderline casing seal. Casing seals shall be Series 300 for conduit size three quarter inches through four inches and Series 400 for conduit sizes five inches and larger.

H. Check floor and wall construction finishes to determine proper length of sleeves for various locations and make actual lengths to suit the following: 1. Terminate sleeves flush with walls, partitions, and ceilings. Sheet metal thimbles of

adequate strength to resist deformation by construction materials may be used in non-structural walls and ceilings.

2. In areas where conduits are concealed, as in chases, formed penetrations may be used. 3. In areas where conduits are exposed, extend sleeves two inches above finished floor.

I. Sleeves through beams or within 30 inches of column center lines shall be ASTM A-500 or A-501 steel pipe. All other sleeves shall be Schedule 40, ASTM A-120 galvanized or black steel pipe where required by structural engineer or where required to extend above the floor.





Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 260553-1 Alexandria, Virginia IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products.


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.



1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER AND CONTROL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. Letter Color Schemes on a white field:

SYSTEM COLOR Communications/Telephone/Data Yellow Controls Gray Power (Normal) Black Power (NEC 700, 701) Orange Power (NEC 702) Magenta Power (UPS) Brown Fire Alarm Red Security Pink

2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system type.

C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING."

D. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

E. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.



F. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, two inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

G. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, two by two by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.

H. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker

recommended by printer manufacturer.

2.2 METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size.

B. Colors for Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less: 1. Brown, Orange Yellow for 277/480 volt circuits, black red blue for 120/208 volt circuits.

C. Colors for Cables Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING."

D. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size.

B. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, two by two by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.

D. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker

recommended by printer manufacturer.

E. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

F. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, two inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.



2.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than three mils thick by two to four inches wide.

B. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the conductor diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.

C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

E. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Labels for Tags: Self-adhesive label, machine-printed with permanent, waterproof, black

ink recommended by printer manufacturer, sized for attachment to tag.

2.5 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. Two inch wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with yellow and black stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

2.6 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape: 1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and

locate underground electrical, communications, and utility lines. 2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when

exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

B. Color and Printing: 1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE or as required.

Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE, or as required.

C. Tag: 1. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid

aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.

2. Overall Thickness: 5 mils. 3. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mils. 4. Weight: 28 pound/1000 square feet.



5. Three inch Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf, and 4600 psi.

2.7 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: 1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size

required for application. 2. One quarter inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, seven by 10 inches.

C. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: 1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-

inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 2. One quarter inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.

D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -

EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN

FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."

2.8 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Provide instruction signs meeting this section where instruction signs are specified on the Drawings or required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

B. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 square inches and one eighth inch thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

2.9 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be three eighths inch.

B. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be three eighths inch.

C. For Outdoor equipment labels provide Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be one inch.



2.10 CABLE TIES

A. Outdoor locations: UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black.

B. Indoor locations: Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi. 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 140 deg C). 5. Color: Black.

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.



G. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

H. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below: 1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. Indoors: Plenum rated.

I. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at six to eight inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete encased exceeds 16 inches overall.

J. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. Communications/Telephone/Data 2. Controls 3. Power (Normal) 4. Power (NEC 700, 701) 5. Power (NEC 702) 6. Power (UPS) 7. Fire Alarm 8. Security

B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors

listed below for ungrounded service and feeder circuit conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied for sizes larger than #8 AWG. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Colors for 480/277-V (or 460/265V) Circuits: 1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow.

d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of six inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

C. Install instructional sign including the color code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.



D. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in

raceway.

E. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

F. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Baked-enamel warning signs or Metal-backed, butyrate warning signs. 1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections.

G. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label or Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label]. provide a single line of text with one half inch high letters on 1½-inch high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels two inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label or Stenciled legend four inches high.

c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.

d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by

panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive or engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchgear. e. Switchboards. f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the

transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. g. Substations. h. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.



i. Motor-control centers. j. Enclosed switches. k. Enclosed circuit breakers. l. Enclosed controllers. m. Variable-speed controllers. n. Push-button stations. o. Power transfer equipment. p. Contactors. q. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. r. Battery-inverter units. s. Battery racks. t. Power-generating units. u. Monitoring and control equipment. v. UPS equipment.


HGA No. 4001-001-02 VDOT/VSP Joint Safety Operations Center November 10, 2017 Project Code: 501-16674-000

IFB 154339

Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 260572-1 Alexandria, Virginia PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT-CIRCUIT, COORDINATION, AND ARC FLASH STUDIES

SECTION 260572 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT-CIRCUIT, COORDINATION, AND ARC FLASH STUDIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes computer-based electrical system modeling and studies. These studies shallinclude all portions of the electrical distribution system from the normal and emergency powersource or sources to the smallest fuse and circuit breaker in the electrical system. Normalsystem connections and those connections which result in maximum fault conditions, such asbypass connections or the highest possible FCA available from the utility source, shall beincluded in the study. The following system studies shall be included:1. Fault-current study shall determine the minimum interrupting capacity of circuit

protective devices.2. Fault-current study shall determine the minimum interrupting bracing of electrical

equipment housing circuit protective devices.3. Overcurrent protective device coordination studies to determine overcurrent protective

devices and to determine overcurrent protective device settings for selective protectiveopening of circuit conductors from fault current source(s).a. Study results shall be used to determine coordination of series-rated devices. Series

rated equipment shall be provided with labels indicating non-interchangeableupstream devices to maintain UL system series rating. Series ratings of equipmentshall not be acceptable in NEC 700 or NEC 701 type of systems.

4. Arc-flash study to determine the arc-flash hazard distance and the incident energy towhich personnel could be exposed during work on or near electrical equipment. Archazard labels shall be field installed on the switchgear, switchboards, distributionpanelboards, motor control centers, busways, fused and non fused disconnecting means,enclosed controllers, power distribution units, , automatic transfer switches, busway plug-in switches or circuit breakers, transformers, load centers, and panelboard assemblies.

5. Protective devices shall be set based on the results of the study.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are nototherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

B. One-Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, thecourse of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts usedtherein.

C. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removesthe affected portion from the system.


IFB 154339


D. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

E. FCA: Fault current available.

F. FCR: Fault current rating.

G. AIC: Amperes Interrupting Capacity

H. KAIC: Kilo-amperes Interrupting Capacity

I. ARMS: Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System

J. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility tothe wiring system of the premises served.


A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following after the approval of system protective devicessubmittals. Submittals may be in digital form.1. Short-circuit study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets,

motor contribution data, electrical system one-line diagram, conductor material,conductor sizes, conduit material, conductor lengths, transformer percent Z impedance,X/R ratios, and official letter from Utility Company indicating the maximum availablefault current rating based on the largest feasible utility system and equipmentarrangement that the Utility Company can elect to install to serve the project electricalsystem, and where applicable upstream utility protective devices and their correspondingratings. Where the utility does not provide upstream protective devices’ ratings, aninfinite primary bus shall be assumed on the primary side of the utility transformersystem.

2. Short-circuit study and equipment evaluation report; signed, dated, and sealed by aqualified professional engineer, licensed to practice in the jurisdiction of the projectlocation. Seal shall be the seal of the jurisdiction of the project location.a. Submit initial study report for action simultaneously with initial submission of

distribution equipment submittals for action. Selection of equipment ratings indistribution equipment submittals shall be coordinated with results of study,however equipment ratings shall not be less than as required by the ContractDocuments. The Contractor shall include in the schedule sufficient time to allowfor completion of the studies without causing a delay in equipment manufacturing.

b. Revised single-line diagram, reflecting field investigation results and results ofshort-circuit study.

3. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets,motor contribution data, electrical system one-line diagram, conductor material,conductor sizes, conduit material, conductor lengths, transformer percent Z impedance,X/R ratios, and official letter from Utility Company indicating the maximum availablefault current rating based on the largest feasible utility system and equipmentarrangement that the Utility Company can elect to install to serve the project electricalsystem, and where applicable upstream utility protective devices and their correspondingratings. Where the utility does not provide upstream protective devices’ ratings, an


IFB 154339


infinite primary bus shall be assumed on the primary side of the utility transformer system.

4. Study and equipment evaluation reports.5. Overcurrent protective device coordination study report; signed, dated, and sealed by a

qualified professional engineer.a. Submit overcurrent protective device coordination study report for action

simultaneously with initial submission of distribution equipment submittals foraction. Selection of equipment ratings in distribution equipment submittals shall becoordinated with results of study, however equipment ratings shall not be less thanas required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall include in theschedule sufficient time to allow for completion of the studies without causing adelay in equipment manufacturing.

6. Arc-flash study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets,motor contribution data, electrical system one-line diagram, conductor material,conductor sizes, conduit material, conductor lengths, transformer percent Z impedance,X/R ratios, and official letter from Utility Company indicating the maximum availablefault current rating based on the largest feasible utility system and equipmentarrangement that the Utility Company can elect to install to serve the project electricalsystem, and where applicable upstream utility protective devices and their correspondingratings. Where the utility does not provide upstream protective devices’ ratings, aninfinite primary bus shall be assumed on the primary side of the utility transformersystem.

7. Arc-flash study report; signed, dated, and sealed by a qualified professional engineer,licensed to practice in the jurisdiction of the project location. Seal shall be the seal of thejurisdiction of the project location.a. Submit Arc Flash study report for action simultaneously with initial submission of

distribution equipment submittals for action. Selection of equipment ratings indistribution equipment submittals shall be coordinated with results of study;however, equipment ratings shall not be less than as required by the ContractDocuments. The Contractor shall include in the schedule sufficient time to allowfor completion of the studies without causing a delay in equipment manufacturing.

8. Provide time current curves for each normal system feeders from source down to furthestand smallest fixed trip circuit breaker and fuse.

9. Provide time current curves for each stand by system feeders from source down tofurthest and smallest fixed trip circuit breaker and fuse.

10. The following submittals shall be submitted prior to receiving final approval of thedistribution equipment shop drawings and/or release of equipment for manufacturer.Submittals shall be in digital form.a. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data

sheets.b. Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports.c. Coordination-Study Report.d. Arc Flash Study Report.


A. Qualification Data: For Short-Circuit Study Specialist.

B. Product Certificates:1. For short-circuit study software, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.


IFB 154339


2. For overcurrent protective device coordination study software, certifying compliancewith IEEE 399.

3. For arc-flash hazard analysis software, certifying compliance with IEEE 1584 andNFPA 70E.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For the overcurrent protective devices to include inemergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include

the following:a. The following parts from the Protective Device Coordination Study Report:

1) One-line diagram.2) Protective device coordination study.3) Time-current coordination curves.

b. Power system data.


A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use.Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in thisSection. Manual calculations are unacceptable.

B. Electrical System Study Software Developer Qualifications: An entity that owns and marketscomputer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitudeon electrical distribution systems using similar devices.1. The computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed professional

engineer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software DevelopmentProfessional certification.

C. Electrical System Study Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performingthe study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. Allelements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of thisprofessional engineer who shall be contracted by the equipment manufacturer or the ElectricalContractor. The Study Specialist shall detail the coordination of equipment selections with themanufacture and present any modifications or settings necessary for system improvement.Initial shop drawing submittal shall include a letter of approval/recommendations of systemratings and settings prior to submission to the engineer of record for review.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products byone of the following:1. CGI CYME.2. EDSA Micro Corporation.3. ESA Inc.4. Operation Technology, Inc.5. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.


IFB 154339


B. Comply with IEEE 242, 399 and IEEE 551.

C. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall have the capabilityto calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

D. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-characteristic curves as part of its output.

E. Computer software program used for Coordination shall be capable of plotting diagrammingtime-current-characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall reportdevice settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selectivecoordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.1. Included Features:

a. Arcing faults.b. Simultaneous faults.c. Explicit negative sequence.d. Mutual coupling in zero sequence.

2.2 STUDY REPORT CONTENTS

A. Executive summary.

B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, andguide for interpretation of the computer printout.

C. One-line diagram, showing the following:1. Protective device designations, voltages, and ampere ratings.2. Cable size, material, insulation type, and lengths.3. Conduit type, size, and lengths.4. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios.5. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA), voltage ratings, X/R ratios, and percent impedance.6. Automatic Transfer switch voltage, ampere, and X/R ratios. Motor horsepower and code

letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.7. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance.8. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings.9. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, and panelboard designations.

D. Comments and recommendations for system improvements, where needed.

E. Protective Device Evaluation:1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short-circuit ratings.2. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse, and other protective device ratings versus calculated

short-circuit duties.3. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or

higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.4. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication

factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.5. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents;

verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors


IFB 154339


at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

F. Short-Circuit Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article in theEvaluations.

G. Short-Circuit Study Output:1. Low-Voltage Fault Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the

following for each overcurrent device location:a. Voltage.b. Calculated fault-current magnitude and angle.c. Fault-point X/R ratio.d. Equivalent impedance.

2. Momentary Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing thefollowing for each overcurrent device location:a. Voltage.b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle.c. Fault-point X/R ratio.d. Calculated asymmetrical fault currents:

1) Based on fault-point X/R ratio.2) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 1.6.3) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 2.7.

3. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing thefollowing for each overcurrent device location:a. Voltage.b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle.c. Fault-point X/R ratio.d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio.e. Equivalent impedance.f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a

symmetrical basis.g. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis.

H. Protective Device Coordination Study:1. Report recommended settings of protective devices, ready to be applied in the field. Use

manufacturer's data sheets for recording the recommended setting of overcurrentprotective devices when available.a. Phase and Ground Relays:

1) Device tag.2) Relay current transformer ratio and tap, time dial, and instantaneous pickup

value.3) Recommendations on improved relaying systems, if applicable.

b. Circuit Breakers:1) Adjustable pickups and time delays (long time, short time, ground).2) Adjustable time-current characteristic.3) Adjustable instantaneous pickup.4) Recommendations on improved trip systems, if applicable.

c. Fuses: Show current rating, voltage, and class.


IFB 154339


I. Time-Current Coordination Curves: Determine settings of overcurrent protective devices toachieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation existsbetween devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices.Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where thepower source is local generation. Show the following information:1. Device tag and title, one-line diagram with legend identifying the portion of the system

covered.2. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or

asymmetrical fault current to which the device is exposed.3. Identify the device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if

applicable, tap, time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended.4. Plot the following listed characteristic curves, as applicable:

a. Power utility's overcurrent protective device.b. Medium-voltage equipment overcurrent relays.c. Medium- and low-voltage fuses including manufacturer's minimum melt, total

clearing, tolerance, and damage bands.d. Low-voltage equipment circuit-breaker trip devices, including manufacturer's

tolerance bands.e. Transformer full-load current, magnetizing inrush current, and ANSI through-fault

protection curves.f. Three phase and single phase damage points for transformers.g. Cables and conductors damage curves.h. Ground-fault protective devices.i. Motor-starting characteristics and motor damage points.j. Generator short-circuit decrement curve and generator damage point.k. Main and branch circuit breakers or fuses in each motor-control center and

panelboard.5. Series rating on equipment allows the application of two series interrupting devices for a

condition where the available fault current is greater than the interrupting rating of thedownstream equipment. Both devices share in the interruption of the fault and selectivityis sacrificed at high fault levels. Maintain selectivity for tripping currents caused byoverloads.

6. Provide adequate time margins between device characteristics such that selectiveoperation is achieved.

7. Comments and recommendations for system improvements.

J. Arc—Flash Incident Energy and Flash Protection Boundary Calculations:1. Arcing fault magnitude.2. Protective device clearing time.3. Duration of arc.4. Arc-flash boundary.5. Working distance.6. Incident energy.7. Hazard risk category.8. Recommendations for arc-flash energy reduction.

K. Fault study input data, case descriptions, and fault-current calculations including a definition ofterms and guide for interpretation of the computer printout.


IFB 154339


2.3 ARC-FLASH WARNING LABELS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Produce a 6-by-4-inch thermal transfer label of high-adhesion polyester for each work location included inthe analysis.

B. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC-FLASHHAZARD," and shall include the following information taken directly from the arc-flash hazardanalysis:1. Location designation.2. Nominal system voltage.3. Flash protection boundary.4. Hazard risk category.5. Available incident energy.6. Working distance.7. Engineering report number, revision number, and issue date.

C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field-applied markings. .

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the study.1. For equipment provided that is Work of this Project, use characteristics submitted under

the provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.2. Where equipment on the Drawings is indicated as existing to remain, obtain required

electrical distribution system data and apply to this the electrical system study.

B. Power System Data: Gather and tabulate the following input data to support the short-circuitstudy. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 551 as to the amount of detail that is required tobe acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control ofthe engineer in charge of performing the study.1. Product Data for Project's overcurrent protective devices involved in overcurrent

protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistentwith electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals,input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service entrance equipment.3. Power sources and ties.4. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift.5. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and

impedance.6. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of

breaker, type of trip, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings.7. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated

kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.8. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and

conductor material.9. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.


IFB 154339


10. Cable sizes, lengths, quantity, conductor material and conduit material (magnetic ornonmagnetic).

3.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY

A. Perform study following the general study procedures contained in IEEE 399.

B. Calculate short-circuit currents according to IEEE 551.

C. Base study on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.

D. Begin short-circuit current analysis at the service, extending down to the system overcurrentprotective devices as follows:1. To each system 120 or 120/208 volt equipment bus where fault current is 5 kA or less.

E. Study electrical distribution system from normal, alternate, and standby power sourcesthroughout electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system-switchingconfigurations, paralleling configurations, bypass connections, electric utility service or electricutility equipment configurations, and other alternate operations that may result in maximumfault conditions.

F. The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronousmotors, and asynchronous generators and shall apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phaseac systems. The calculations shall also account for the fault-current dc decrement, to address theasymmetrical requirements of the interrupting equipment.1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for areas as

defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.

G. Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in amperes rms symmetrical and short-circuit momentary/interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault at each of the belowlocations throughout the electrical power distribution system:1. Electric utility's supply termination point.2. Service Entrance equipment.3. Low-voltage switchgear4. Low-Voltage switchboards.5. Motor-control centers.6. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches.7. Dry Type Transformers.8. Branch circuit panelboards.9. Disconnect switches.10. UPS systems11. PDU’s12. Variable Speed Drives/Variable Frequency Controllers (VFDs/VFCs.)13. Combination Motor Controller & Fused Switches.14. Other relevant locations within the system.

H. The calculation for the maximum available short-circuit shall be for current immediately afterinitiation of a three-phase bolted short circuit.


IFB 154339


I. Provide each service entrance assembly with signage and warning labels as specified inDivision 26 “Identification for Electrical Systems”. Signage shall indicate the date ofcompletion of the approved project short circuit and fault current study and indicate the value ofthe maximum available fault current, which shall include contributions from equipmentdownstream of the service entrance equipment.

3.3 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

A. Comply with IEEE 241 and IEEE 242 for calculating short-circuit currents and determiningcoordination time intervals.

B. Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. Prepare a writtenreport using results of fault-current study. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.1. Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents.2. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.

C. The study shall be based on the protective device characteristics supplied by each protectivedevice manufacturer.

D. Begin analysis at the service entrance equipment, extending down to the system overcurrentprotective devices as follows:1. To each system 120 or 120/208 volt equipment bus where fault current is 5 kA or less.

E. Study electrical distribution system from normal, alternate, and stand-by power sourcesthroughout electrical distribution system for the Project. Study all cases of system-switchingconfigurations, paralleling configurations, bypass connections, electric utility service or electricutility equipment configurations, and other alternate operations that may result in maximumfault conditions.

F. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:

a. Inrush current when first energized.b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is

specified for that transformer.c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by

unusual loading or emergency conditions.2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault

currents.

G. Motor Protection:1. Select protection for low-voltage motors according to IEEE 242 and NFPA 70.2. Select protection for motors served at voltages more than 600 V according to IEEE 620.

H. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and protection recommendations in IEEE 242. Demonstrate thatequipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the trippingtime of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determinetemperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listedstandards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.


IFB 154339


I. Generator Protection: Select protection according to manufacturer's written recommendationsand to IEEE 242.

J. The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronousmotors, and asynchronous generators and shall apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phaseac systems. The calculations shall also account for the fault-current dc decrement, to address theasymmetrical requirements of the interrupting equipment.1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for areas as

defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.

K. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault andsingle line-to-ground fault at each of the following :1. Electric utility's supply termination point.2. Service Entrance equipment.3. Low-voltage switchgear4. Low-Voltage switchboards.5. Motor-control centers.6. Control panels.7. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches.8. Dry Type Transformers.9. Branch circuit panelboards.10. Disconnect switches.11. UPS systems12. PDU’s13. Variable Speed Drives/Variable Frequency Controllers (VFDs/VFCs.)14. Combination Motor Controller & Fused Switches.15. Other relevant locations within the system.

L. Protective Device Coordination Evaluation Report:1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short-circuit ratings.

a. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:1) Device tag.2) Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-

pickup values.3) Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous

settings.4) Fuse-current rating and type.5) Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.

b. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protectivedevices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate timeseparation exists between devices installed in series, including power utilitycompany's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of curves for the switchingschemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation.Show the following information:1) Device tag.2) Voltage and current ratio for curves.3) Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer.4) No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses.5) Cable damage curves.6) Transformer inrush points.


IFB 154339


7) Maximum fault-current cutoff point.2. Adequacy of switchgear, motor-control centers, and panelboard bus bars to withstand

short-circuit stresses.3. Any application of series-rated devices shall be certified, complying with requirements in

NFPA 70.

3.4 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Obtain all data necessary for the preparation of the overcurrent protective device study.1. For new equipment, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action

submittals and information submittals for this Project.2. For existing equipment, whether or not relocated obtain required electrical distribution

system data by field investigation and surveys.

B. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study. The list below is aguide. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 241 and IEEE 551 for the amount of detailrequired to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervisionand control of the engineer in charge of performing the study.1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved

in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tagsthat are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protectivedevice submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Electrical power utility impedance at the service.3. Power sources and ties.4. Short-circuit current at each system bus, three phase and line-to-ground.5. Full-load current of all loads.6. Voltage level at each bus.7. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift.8. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and

impedance.9. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of

breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breakersettings.

10. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, ratedkVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.

11. For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios,potential transformer ratios, and relay settings.

12. Maximum demands from service meters.13. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and

conductor material.14. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.15. Low-voltage cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material, and conduit material

(magnetic or nonmagnetic).16. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with

tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting

and stopping.b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush

current, and overload capability.


IFB 154339


c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type ofstart, and thermal-damage curve.

d. Generator thermal-damage curve.e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices.f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility

company.g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere

or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range,and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.

i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range,instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio forovercurrent relays.

j. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and SCCR in amperesrms symmetrical.

k. Identify series-rated interrupting devices for a condition where the available faultcurrent is greater than the interrupting rating of the downstream equipment. Obtaindevice data details to allow verification that series application of these devicescomplies with NFPA 70 and UL 489 requirements.

3.5 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

A. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE 1584 equations that arepresented in NFPA 70E` and its Annex D for hazard analysis study.

B. When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the phase overcurrentdevices will be retrieved from the short-circuit and coordination study model. Alternativemethods shall be presented in the proposal.

C. Calculate maximum and minimum contributions of fault-current size.1. The minimum calculation shall assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and

shall assume no motor load.2. The maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and

shall assume motors to be operating under full-load conditions.

D. Calculate the arc-flash protection boundary and incident energy at locations in the electricaldistribution system (switchboards, switchgear, motor-control centers, panelboards, busway,disconnecting means, and splitters) where personnel could perform work on energized parts.

E. Include medium- and low-voltage equipment locations

F. Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based on the calculatedarc-flash boundary, considering incident energy of 1.2 cal/sq.cm.

G. Incident energy calculations shall consider the accumulation of energy over time whenperforming arc-flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations shalltake into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted ordecremented with time. The minimum calculation shall assume that the utility contribution is ata minimum and shall assume a minimum motor load. Conversely, the maximum calculationshall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall assume motors to be operating


IFB 154339


under full-load conditions. Fault contribution from motors and generators shall be decremented as follows: 1. Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered beyond three to five

cycles.2. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators should be decayed to match

the actual decrement of each as closely as possible (e.g., contributions from permanentmagnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to three per unit after 10 cycles).

H. Arc-flash computation shall include both line and load side of a circuit breaker as follows:1. When the circuit breaker is in a separate enclosure.2. When the line terminals of the circuit breaker are separate from the work location.

I. Base arc-flash calculations on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Cap maximumclearing time at two seconds based on IEEE 1584, Section B.1.2.

J. Arc-Flash hazard analysis shall include incident energy and flash protection boundarycalculations. The analysis shall also include Arc-Flash incident energy and flash protectionboundary calculations during equipment maintenance when the ARMS device is activated onthe corresponding upstream circuit breaker. For equipment that can be fed from multiplesources consider all such upstream source breakers and show:1. Arcing fault magnitude2. Device clearing time3. Duration of arc4. Arc flash boundary5. Working distance6. Incident energy7. Hazard Risk Category8. Adjustments for arc flash energy reduction

a. Where the initial Arc Flash study indicates incident energy available higher thanallowable per the adopted code, the Contractor shall provide additional equipment,devices, features, and ratings as necessary to allow for qualified maintenancepersonnel to approach the electrical equipment. Examples of methods adjustmentsinclude, but are not limited to:1) Providing additional dry type transformers with 1:1 ratio of windings for

reduction in incident energy.2) Adding Arc Reduction Maintenance fault current ratings adjustments, and

provide ARMS devices and equipment on electrical overcurrent protectivedevices.

3) Add current limiting fused switches to equipment or circuits.4) Revise specified circuit breaker construction with fused switch construction.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Make modifications to equipment interrupting ratings as required to accomplish compliancewith short-circuit study. Interrupting ratings shall not be less than as indicated on thedocuments, and may not be adjusted downward without the Utility Company’s writtenconfirmation that the maximum available fault current provided represents the maximumpossible value for the FCA from the Utility company over the life of the building.


IFB 154339


B. Adjust relay and protective device settings according to the recommended settings provided bythe coordination study. Field adjustments shall be completed by the engineering service divisionof the equipment manufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract portion.

C. Make modifications to equipment as required to accomplish compliance with short-circuitand protective device coordination studies.

D. Testing and adjusting shall be by the Contractor or appropriate subcontractor.1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. PerformNETA tests and inspections for all adjustable overcurrent protective devices.

3.7 ARC FLASH LABELING

A. Apply one arc-flash label for 600-V ac, 480-V ac, and applicable 208-V ac equipmentcontaining live parts example as follows, but not limited to:1. Motor-control center.2. Low-voltage switchboard.3. Switchgear.4. Disconnect switches5. Metering equipment6. Combination disconnect and motor controller.7. Panel boards.

B. Provide a 6 inches By 4 inches thermal transfer type label of high adhesion polyester for eachwork location analyzed. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, “WARNING,ARC FLASH HAZARD”, and shall include the following information:1. Location designation2. Nominal system voltage3. Flash protection boundary4. Hazard risk category5. Available incident energy6. Working distance

C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field markings.

D. Labels shall be field installed by the study specialist or the contractor upon completion of theStartup and Acceptance Testing contract portion.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage the Arc-Flash Study Specialist to train Owner's maintenance personnel in the potentialarc-flash hazards associated with working on energized equipment and the significance of thearc-flash warning labels.1. The equipment vendor shall train personnel of the potential arc flash hazards associated

with working on energized equipment (minimum of 4 hours). Maintenance procedures inaccordance with the requirements of NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical SafetyRequirements for Employee Workplaces, shall be provided in the equipment manuals.The training shall be certified for continuing education units (CEUs) by the InternationalAssociation for Continuing Education Training (IACET).


IFB 154339




IFB 154339

Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 260600-1 Alexandria, Virginia ELECTRICAL UTILITY SERVICE

SECTION 260600 – ELECTRICAL UTILITY SERVICE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Specific Attention iscalled to the "General Requirements and Common Work Results for Electrical Systems" locatedin Division 26.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Electric Utility rough in provisions, including the following:

a. Concrete encased duct banks.b. Manholes.c. Conduits.d. Transformer Pads.e. Service Entrance Conductors.f. Meter sockets.g. Lugs.h. Pulling provisions.i. Below grade transformer vaults.j. Utility requirements.

1.3 WORK REQUIRED

A. The Contractor shall obtain from the Utility Company’s project construction representative themost recent revision of the utility company’s documents and requirements for electrical service.The Contractor shall familiarize itself with the Utility Company’s requirements for electricalservice and installation. Service shall be in accordance with all applicable utility company'srequirements.

B. As part of the work under this Division, the Contractor shall furnish and install the concreteencased building electric service lateral conduits and conductors from the service entranceequipment to the utility connection location as required by the electrical utility company.

C. Furnish and install an instrument metering compartment integral with building switchgear,meeting the requirements of the utility company. Provide an exterior wall mounted metersocket, and 1-½” conduit with pull string from each instrument cabinet to a dedicated metersocket for utility’s use. Prior to ordering service equipment or utility instrumentation cabinets,the Contractor shall submit equipment shop drawings to the Electrical utility company forapproval. Copies of approved equipment submittals shall be included in Engineers' recordsubmittals.

D. Service shall be in accordance with all applicable utility company's requirements.

E. Where a service raceway enters from an underground distribution system, it shall be sealed.


IFB 154339


Spare or unused raceways shall also be sealed. Sealants shall be identified for use with the cable insulation, shield or other components.

F. Service-entrance conductors shall not be spliced and shall test free of shorts, grounds, and shallbe provided with an insulation resistance test prior to connecting to the transformer or serviceentrance equipment lugs.

G. Service entrance equipment shall be suitable for the short-circuit current available at its supplyterminals, however shall not be less than as indicated on the Drawings.

H. The Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits directly from the local electrical utility asrequired for performing any work related to or governed by the electrical utility.

I. The Contractor shall obtain utility company inspections, tests, and approvals from the localutility prior to building occupancy.

J. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary temporary power for theconstruction process.

K. The Contractor shall install all utility accessories, including but not limited to transformer pad,ground rods and conductors, padlocks, etc.

L. The Contractor shall provide all compression terminations for service lateral feeders for bothconnections to the service equipment and utility connection locations. The Electric Utilitycompany shall make the final connections to the transformer secondary bushings, and theContractor shall provide the Utility company with compression lugs for connection to thesecondary well.

M. In addition to items shown on the contract documents, contractor shall provide all additionalmanholes, pull boxes, cable pulling structures, and duct bank modifications as required toconnect the electrical service to the utility’s instrumentation cabinets and the building serviceentrance equipment. Refer to the Civil Engineering Documents, and provide necessary belowgrade conduit and manhole system for the Utility company’s use in pulling primary cabling.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall provide a coordinated shop drawing layout of theelectrical utility vault(s) and below grade utility facilities or structures below grade which shallhouse electric utility company’s equipment for this project. Coordinated shop drawings shall bedrawn to at least one quarter inch equals one inch scale in AutoCAD format. The AutoCADfiles shall be in AutoCAD 2013 version software or later version as approved by the Engineer.Submit coordinated shop drawings to the local electric utility company and to the Engineer.Shop drawings shall match the Construction Drawings and shall be coordinated with therequirements of Electric Utility Company.

B. Quality Control Submittals:1. Service and equipment shop drawings showing the arrangement in plan and elevation of

all metering, main service equipment duct banks and service entrance troughs. Drawingsshall include manufacturer's name, ratings, physical dimensions, and all other pertinentlayout information to include verification of clearance in designated room or space.



C. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Record drawings. 2. Documentation of inspections by, and tests performed for, the utility company. 3. Documentation of inspections by, and tests performed for, the Authority Having

Jurisdiction.

D. Special Submittal Handling Procedures: 1. Obtain approval of the Quality Control Submittals from the utility company prior to

submission to the Architect. Provide evidence of the utility's approval on the submittals forwarded to the Architect.



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 260615-1 Alexandria, Virginia STAND BY ELECTRICAL SERVICE

SECTION 260615 - STAND BY ELECTRICAL SERVICE



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide the emergency service equipment (panelboards, disconnects, generators, etc.) as shown on the Drawings and as specified.

B. The Stand by electrical system shall include the EPSS (Emergency Power Stand by System) as defined by NFPA, this shall include NEC 700, NEC 701, and NEC 702 classified systems.

C. Electrical overcurrent devices within NEC 700 and NEC 701 classified systems shall be selectively coordinated.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data Submittals: 1. As specified in other Sections of Division 26.

B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Riser diagram with sizes and capacities of system components. 2. Detailed and dimensioned layout drawings for raceway system. Reference all dimensions

to hold-points shown on structural drawings.

C. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Record drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT

A. Provide emergency equipment of the size and type indicated on the drawings and specified.

B. All emergency equipment shall be painted, i.e. branch circuit panelboards, disconnect switches, wire troughs, junction boxes, and pull boxes, refer to Division 26 for additional information.

C. Exceptions are automatic load transfer switches, transformers, and generator.

D. All emergency equipment shall be labeled with phenolic nameplates with engraved letters not less than 3/8-inch block style.


Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 260615-2 Alexandria, Virginia STAND BY ELECTRICAL SERVICE

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Check to see that the emergency equipment is installed correctly.

B. Coordinate conduit rough-in for emergency equipment and conductors and control circuit connection.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install all equipment for emergency electrical system as described in sections specifying equipment.

B. NEC 700 classified systems shall have the corresponding wiring contained within separate raceways, boxes, enclosures, etc. from the remaining premises wiring systems.

C. NEC 700 systems that are provided with lighting dimming or switching controls shall be provided as UL 924 listed and labeled for the intended purpose.



IFB 154339

CM KLING + ASSOCIATES INC 260943-1 Alexandria, Virginia NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS

SECTION 260943 – NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS – LUTRON

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Digital-network lighting control system and associated components: 1. Power panels. 2. Fluorescent electronic dimming ballasts. 3. LED drivers. 4. Power interfaces. 6. Lighting control modules (Lutron Energi Savr Node). 7. Energy meter. 8. Digital dimming ballast and switching modules (Lutron EcoSystem). 9. Lighting management hubs. 10. Lighting management system computers. 11. Lighting management system software. 12. Control stations. 13. Low-voltage control interfaces. 14. Wired sensors. 15. Wireless sensors. 16. Accessories.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

B. Section 26 5100 – Architectural Lighting Luminaires

1.3 REFRENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI C12.20 - American National Standard for Electricity Meters - 0.2 and 0.5 Accuracy Classes.

B. ANSI C82.11 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts – Supplements

C. ANSI/ESD S20.20 - Protection of Electrical and Electronic Parts, Assemblies and Equipment (Excluding Electrically Initiated Explosive Devices

D. ASTM D4674 - Standard Practice for Accelerated Testing for Color Stability of Plastics Exposed to Indoor Office Environments

E. IEC 60669-2-1 - Switches for Household and Similar Fixed Electrical Installations - Part 2-1: Particular Requirements - Electronic Switches

F. IEC 60929 - AC and/or DC-Supplied Electronic Control Gear for Tubular Fluorescent Lamps - Performance Requirements


IFB 154339


G. IEC 61000-4-2 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 4-2: Testing and Measurement Techniques - Electrostatic Discharge Immunity Test

H. IEC 61000-4-5 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 4-5: Testing and Measurement Techniques - Surge Immunity Test

I. IEC 61347-2-3 - Lamp Control Gear - Part 2-3: Particular Requirements for A.C. and/or D.C. Supplied Electronic Control Gear for Fluorescent Lamps

J. IEC 61347-2-13 - Lamp Control Gear - Part 2-13: Particular Requirements for D.C. or A.C. Supplied Electronic Control Gear for LED Modules

K. IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits

L. ISO 9001 - Quality Management Systems-Requirements

M. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction

N. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical Contractors Association

O. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association

P. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association

Q. UL 94 - Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances

R. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures

S. UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment; Underwriters Laboratories Inc

T. UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels; Underwriters Laboratories Inc

U. UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment

V. UL 935 - Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts

W. UL 1472 - Solid-State Dimming Controls

X. UL 2043 - Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products and Their Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces

Y. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products


IFB 154339


1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination 1. Coordinate the placement of sensors and wall controls with millwork, furniture, equipment,

etc. installed under other sections or by others. 2. Coordinate the placement of wall controls with actual installed door swings. 3. Coordinate the placement of daylight sensors with windows, skylights, and luminaires to

achieve optimum operation. Coordinate placement with ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions to light level measurement installed under other sections or by others.

4. Coordinate the work to provide luminaires and lamps compatible with the lighting controls to be installed.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

B. Pre-Installation Meeting: Conduct on-site meeting with lighting control system manufacturer prior to commencing work as part of manufacturer's standard startup services. Manufacturer to review with installer:

1. Low voltage wiring requirements. 2. Separation of power and low voltage/data wiring. 3. Wire labeling. 4. Lighting management hub locations and installation. 5. Where Lighting Control Manufacturer Sensor Layout and Tuning service is specified in

Part 2 under "DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS", sensor locations to be reviewed in accordance with layout provided by Lighting Control Manufacturer. Lighting Control Manufacturer may direct Contractor regarding sensor relocation should conditions require a deviation from locations indicated.

6. Control locations. 7. Computer jack locations. 8. Load circuit wiring. 9. Network wiring requirements. 10. Connections to other equipment. 11. Installer responsibilities. 12. Power panel locations.

C. Sequencing: 1. Do not install sensors and wall controls until final surface finishes and painting are

complete.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures for submittal procedures.

B. Design Documents: Where Lighting Control Manufacturer Sensor Layout and Tuning service is specified in Part 2 under "DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS", Lighting Control Manufacturer to provide plans indicating occupancy/vacancy and/or daylight sensor locations.

C. Product Data: Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors


IFB 154339


1. Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors: Include detailed basic motion detection coverage range diagrams.

D. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide schematic system riser diagram indicating component interconnections. Include

requirements for interface with other systems. 2. Provide detailed sequence of operations describing system functions.

E. Samples: 1. Wall Controls:

a. Show available color and finish selections. b. Provide one sample for each product upon request.

2. Sensors: Provide one sample for each product upon request

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

G. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations and settings for lighting control system components.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on lighting control system operation, equipment programming and setup, replacement parts, and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

I. Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's Warranty or Enhanced Warranty as specified in Part 1 under "WARRANTY". Submit documentation of final execution completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer

J. Software: Provide 1 copy of any system wide software required to operate lighting controls.


A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Company with not less than (250) installations of lighting control systems of similar

complexity to specified system. 2. Registered to ISO 9001, including in-house engineering for product design activities. 3. Qualified to supply specified products and to honor claims against product presented in

accordance with warranty.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions until ready for installation.


IFB 154339



A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer’s required service conditions during and after installation.

1. System Requirements - Lutron, Unless Otherwise Indicated: a. Ambient Temperature

1) Lighting Control System Components, Except Those Listed Below: Between 32 and 104 degrees F (0 and 40 degrees C).

2) Lighting Management System Computer: Between 50 and 90 degrees F (10 and 35 degrees C).

3) Fluorescent Electronic Dimming Ballasts: Between 50 and 140 degrees F (10 and 60 degrees C).

b. Relative Humidity: Less than 90 percent, non-condensing.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Operating and Maintenance Manual with the following data:

a. Product data submittal b. Wiring diagrams c. Operating instructions d. Maintenance instructions e. Alignment and adjustment procedures f. Troubleshooting guide g. Exploded view diagrams h. Parts lists

2. Product Warranties for air conditioning units. 3. Documentation of factory-authorized equipment start-up. 4. Documentation of operating instructions to building management staff.

B. Manufacturer's Standard Warranty, With Manufacturer Start-Up; Lutron Standard 2-Year Warranty; Lutron LSC-B2:

1. Manufacturer Lighting Control System Components, Except Lighting Management System Computer, Ballasts/Drivers and Ballast Modules: a. First Two Years:

1) 100 percent replacement parts coverage, 100 percent manufacturer labor coverage to troubleshoot and diagnose a lighting issue.

2) First-available on-site or remote response time. 3) Remote diagnostics for applicable systems.

b. Telephone Technical Support: Available 24 hours per day, 7 days per week, excluding manufacturer holidays.

2. Lighting Management System Computer: One year 100 percent parts coverage, one year 100 percent manufacturer labor coverage.

3. Ballasts/Drivers and Ballast Modules: Five years 100 percent parts coverage, no manufacturer labor coverage.


IFB 154339


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; www.lutron.com.

B. All other manufacturers must be submitted to lighting designer for approval. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Electronic Theatre Controls 2. nLight 3. Products by listed manufacturers are subject to compliance with specified requirements

prior to approval of Architect, Electrical Engineer and Lighting Designer

C. Substitutions: 1. Should the Contractor wish to have another Digital-Network Lighting System be

considered other than those specified, the item must be submitted in written project bid RFI (Request for Information) (21) Twenty One days in advance of the bid. Failure to submit within that deadline constitutes a guarantee that the specified products shall be supplied.

2. The party responsible for Specification of Digital-Network Lighting System (Lighting Designer) shall be the sole judge of determining whether the substitution complies with the specifications and shall reserve the right to disqualify any candidate.

3. By using pre-approved substitutions, Contractor accepts responsibility and associated costs for all required modifications to related equipment and wiring. Provide complete engineered shop drawings (including power wiring) with deviations from the original design highlighted in an alternate color for review and approval by Architect prior to rough-in.

D. Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.

2.2 DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) as suitable for the purpose indicated.

B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required equipment, conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, accessories, software, system programming, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system that provides the control intent indicated.

C. Design lighting control equipment for 10 year operational life while operating continually at any temperature in an ambient temperature range of 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 104 degrees F (40 degrees C) and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity.

D. Electrostatic Discharge Tolerance: Design and test equipment to withstand electrostatic discharges without impairment when tested according to IEC 61000-4-2.

E. Dimming and Switching (Relay) Equipment: 1. Designed so that electrolytic capacitors operate at least 36 degrees F (20 degrees C) below

the capacitor's maximum temperature rating when the device is under fully loaded conditions at maximum rated temperature.


IFB 154339


2. Inrush Tolerance: a. Utilize load-handling thyristors (SCRs and triacs), field effect transistors (FETs) and

isolated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs) with maximum current rating at least two times the rated operating current of the dimmer/relay.

b. Capable of withstanding repetitive inrush current of 50 times the operating current without impacting lifetime of the dimmer/relay.

3. Surge Tolerance: a. Panels: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 6,000 V, 3,000 amps according

to IEEE C62.41.2 and IEC 61000-4-5 without impairment to performance. b. Other Power Handling Devices: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 6,000

V, 200 amps according to IEEE C62.41.2 without impairment to performance. 4. Power Failure Recovery: When power is interrupted and subsequently restored, within 3

seconds lights to automatically return to same levels (dimmed setting, full on, or full off) as prior to power interruption.

5. Dimming Requirements: a. Line Noise Tolerance: Provide real-time cycle-by-cycle compensation for incoming

line voltage variations including changes in RMS voltage (plus or minus 2 percent change in RMS voltage per cycle), frequency shifts (plus or minus 2 Hz change in frequency per second), dynamic harmonics, and line noise. 1) Systems not providing integral cycle-by-cycle compensation to include

external power conditioning equipment as part of dimming system. b. Incorporate electronic "soft-start" default at initial turn-on that smoothly ramps

lights up to the appropriate levels within 0.5 seconds. c. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply. d. Control all light sources in smooth and continuous manner. Dimmers with visible

steps are not acceptable. e. Load Types:

1) Assign a load type to each dimmer that will provide a proper dimming curve for the specific light source to be controlled.

2) Provide capability of being field-configured to have load types assigned per circuit.

f. Minimum and Maximum Light Levels: User adjustable on a circuit-by-circuit basis. g. Line Voltage Dimmers:

1) Dimmers for Magnetic Low Voltage (MLV) Transformers: a) Provide circuitry designed to control and provide a symmetrical AC

waveform to input of magnetic low voltage transformers per UL 1472. b) Dimmers using unipolar load current devices (such as FETs or SCRs)

to include DC current protection in the event of a single device failure. 2) Dimmers for Electronic Low Voltage (ELV) Transformers: Operate

transformers via reverse phase control. Alternately, forward phase control dimming may be used if dimming equipment manufacturer has recommended specific ELV transformers being provided.

3) Dimmers for Neon and Cold Cathode Transformers: a) Magnetic Transformers: Listed for use with normal (low) power factor

magnetic transformers. b) Electronic Transformers: Must be supported by the ballast equipment

manufacturer for control of specific ballasts being provided. h. Low Voltage Dimming Modules:


IFB 154339


1) Coordination Between Low Voltage Dimming Module and Line Voltage Relay: Capable of being electronically linked to a single zone.

2) Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling the following light sources: a) 0-10V analog voltage signal.

(1) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.

(2) Sink current according to IEC 60929. (3) Source current.

b) 0-10V reverse analog voltage signal. c) DSI digital communication. d) DALI broadcast communication per IEC 60929:

(1) Logarithmic intensity values complying with IEC 60929. (2) Linear intensity values for use with LED color intensity control.

e) PWM per IEC 60929. 6. Switching Requirements:

a. Rated Life of Relays: Typical of 1,000,000 cycles at fully rated 16 A for all lighting loads.

b. Switch load in a manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is applied to and removed from load circuits.

c. Provide output fully rated for continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.

F. Device Finishes: 1. Wall Controls: Match finishes specified for wiring devices in Section 26 2726, unless

otherwise indicated. As indicated on the drawings; White, unless otherwise indicated. To be selected by Architect and Lighting Designer from standard colors;

2. Standard Colors: Comply with NEMA WD1 where applicable. 3. Color Variation in Same Product Family: Maximum delta E of 1, CIE L*a*b color units. 4. Visible Parts: Exhibit ultraviolet color stability when tested with multiple actinic light

sources as defined in ASTM D4674. Provide proof of testing upon request.

2.3 POWER PANELS

A. Provide power panels with configurations as indicated on the drawings.

B. General Requirements: 1. Listed to UL 508 as industrial control equipment. 2. Comply with UL 508A and IEC 60669-2-1 as applicable. 3. Delivered and installed as a listed factory-assembled panel. 4. Field wiring accessible from front of panel without removing dimmer assemblies or other

components. 5. Passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means. 6. Shipped with each dimmer in mechanical bypass position by means of jumper bar inserted

between input and load terminals. Jumpers to carry full rated load current and be reusable at any time. Mechanical bypass device to allow for switching operation of connected load with dimmer removed by means of circuit breaker.

7. Provided with branch circuit protection for each input circuit unless the panel is a dedicated feed-through type panel or otherwise indicated on the drawings.

8. Branch Circuit Breakers:


IFB 154339


a. Listed to UL 489 as molded case circuit breaker for use on lighting circuits. b. Provided with visual trip indicator. c. Thermal-magnetic construction for overload, short-circuit, and over-temperature

protection. Use of breakers without thermal protection requires dimmers/relays to have integral thermal protection to prevent failures when overloaded or ambient temperature is above rating of panel.

d. Equipped with provision for tag-out/lock-out devices to secure circuit breakers in off position when servicing loads.

e. Replaceable without moving or replacing dimmer/relay assemblies or other panel components

f. Listed as switch duty (SWD) so that loads can be switched on and off by breakers.

9. Panel Processor; Lutron Circuit Selector: a. Provide the following capabilities:

1) Operate circuit directly from panel processor for system diagnostics and provide feedback of system operation.

2) Electronically assign each circuit to any zone in lighting control system. 3) Determine normal/emergency function of panel and set emergency lighting

levels. b. Where indicated on the drawings, panels to provide two control links. Each circuit

to be capable of transferring control based on independent programming between architectural control system and theatrical controls utilizing the USITT DMX-512 1990 or ESTA DMX-512A protocol.

c. React to changes from control within 20 milliseconds.

10. Diagnostics and Service: a. Replacing dimmer/relay does not require re-programming of system or processor. b. Include diagnostic LEDs for dimmers/relays to verify proper operation and assist in

system troubleshooting. c. Include tiered control scheme for dealing with component failure that minimizes loss

of control for occupant. 1) If lighting control system fails, lights to remain at current level. Panel

processor provides local control of lights until system is repaired. 2) If panel processor fails, lights to remain at current level. Circuit breakers can

be used to turn lights off or to full light output, allowing non-dim control of lights until panel processor is repaired.

3) If dimmer fails, factory-installed mechanical bypass jumpers to allow each dimmer to be mechanically bypassed. Mechanical bypass device to allow for switching operation of connected load with dimmer removed by means of circuit breaker.

C. Product(s): 1. Specification Grade Dimming Panels:

a. Product: Lutron GP Series Dimming Panels. b. Dimmers designed and tested specifically to control incandescent/tungsten,

magnetic low voltage, electronic low voltage, neon/cold cathode, fluorescent dimming ballasts, and non-dim loads.

c. Unless otherwise indicated or required, utilize universal 16 A continuous-use listed dimmers.


IFB 154339


d. For loads requiring 0-10V, PWM, or DSI control, utilize compatible multiple load type low voltage dimming modules.

e. Limit current rise time to minimum 350 microseconds as measured from 10 to 90 percent of load current waveform and minimum 525 microseconds as measured from 0 to 100 percent of load current waveform at 50 percent rated dimmer capacity at a 90 degree conduction angle. Current rise time to be minimum 400 microseconds as measured from 10 to 90 percent of load current waveform and minimum 600 microseconds as measured from 0 to 100 percent of load current waveform at 100 percent rated dimmer capacity at a 90 degree conduction angle.

f. Load faults only affect the given circuit. 2. Modular Dimming Panels:

a. Product: Lutron LP Series Dimming Panels. b. Provide surface-mounted; flush-mounted enclosures; as indicated; c. Unless otherwise indicated or required, utilize multiple load type 16 A feed

continuous-use listed dimming/switching modules. d. For switching only circuits, utilize relays rated for minimum of 1,000,000 cycles at

fully rated current for all lighting loads. e. For loads requiring 0-10V, PWM, or DSI control, utilize compatible multiple load

type low voltage dimming modules. 3. Modular Combination Panels:

a. Product: Lutron CCP Series Custom Combination Panels. b. Provide surface-mounted; flush-mounted enclosures; as indicated; c. Unless otherwise indicated or required, utilize multiple load type 16 A feed

continuous-use listed dimming/switching modules. d. For switching only circuits, utilize relays rated for typical 1,000,000 cycles at fully

rated 16 A for all lighting loads. e. For loads requiring 0-10V, PWM, or DSI control, utilize compatible multiple load

type low voltage dimming modules. 4. Relay Panels:

a. Product: Lutron XP Series Switching Panels. b. Provide surface-mounted; flush-mounted enclosures; as indicated; c. Switching Requirements:

1) Utilize 20 A continuous-use rated switching modules; able to switch 20 A receptacles.

2) Rated Life of Relay: Typical of 1,000,000 cycles at fully rated 16 A for all lighting loads.

3) Switch load in a manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is applied to and removed from load circuits.

4) Provide output fully rated for continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.

5. DC Dimming Panels: a. Product: Lutron DCI Series Dimming Panels. b. Mounting: Surface. c. Meet recommended electrical noise levels of MRI system manufacturers. d. Operate lamps free from audible noise and flicker throughout entire dimming range. e. In case of control system failure, supervisory circuit to shut down power to load. f. Automatically detect and compensate for lamp failures to maintain consistent DC

voltage level.


IFB 154339


2.4 LED DRIVERS

A. General Requirements: 1. Designed for 10 year operational life while operating at maximum case temperature and

90 percent non-condensing relative humidity. 2. Designed and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges without impairment when tested

according to IEC 61000-4-2. 3. Maximum Inrush Current: 2 amperes for 120V and 277V drivers. 4. UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable. 5. Comply with IEC 61347-2-13 as applicable. 6. Surge Tolerance: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 4,000 V according to IEEE

C62.41.2 without impairment of performance. 7. Manufactured in a facility that employs ESD reduction practices in compliance with

ANSI/ESD S20.20. 8. Class A sound rating; Inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient. 9. No visible change in light output with a variation of plus or minus 10 percent line voltage

input. 10. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20 percent; comply with ANSI C82.11. 11. Drivers to track evenly across multiple lamp lengths and all light levels. 12. Constant Current Drivers:

a. Support from 200 mA to 2.1 A (in 10 mA steps) to ensure a compatible driver exists. b. Support LED arrays up to 40W or 50 W (710 mA to 1.05 A in 10 mA steps).

13. Constant Voltage Drivers: a. Support from 10 V to 40 V (in 0.5 V steps) to ensure a compatible driver exists. b. Support LED arrays up to 40W.

14. Configuration tool available to optimize the following for LED fixtures: a. Light level. b. Efficacy. c. Thermal performance.

B. 3-Wire Control: 1. Dimming Range: 100 to one percent relative light output. 2. Provide integral fault protection to prevent driver failure in the event of a mis-wire. 3. Operate from input voltage of 120 V through 277 V at 60 Hz.

C. Digital Control: 1. Dimming Range: 100 to one percent relative light output. 2. Lights automatically return to the setting prior to power interruption. 3. Operate from input voltage of 120 V through 277 V at 60 Hz. 4. Each driver responds independently to:

a. Up to 32 occupant sensors. b. Up to 16 daylight sensors.

5. Responds to digital load shed command. (Example: If light output is at 30 percent and a load shed command of 10 percent is received, the ballast automatically sets the maximum light output at 90 percent and lowers current light output by three percent to 27 percent).

D. Product(s): 1. Forward Phase (Neutral Wire Required), 3-Wire, and Digital Control, One Percent

Dimming; Lutron A-Series: a. Dimming Range: 100 to one percent relative light output.


IFB 154339


2. Digital Control, Five Percent Dimming; Lutron EcoSystem 5-Series: a. Dimming Range: 100 to five percent relative light output.

2.5 POWER INTERFACES

A. Provide power interfaces as indicated or as required to control the loads as indicated.

B. General Requirements: 1. Phase independent of control input. 2. Rated for use in air-handling spaces as defined in UL 2043. 3. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply. 4. Diagnostics and Service: Replacing power interface does not require re-programming of

system or processor.

C. Product(s): 1. Phase-Adaptive Power Module; Lutron PHPM-PA: Provides interface for phase control

input to provide full 16 A circuit output of forward/reverse phase control for compatible loads.

2. 3-Wire Fluorescent Power Module; Lutron PHPM-3F: Provides interface for phase control input to provide full 16 A circuit output for compatible line-voltage control fluorescent electronic dimming ballasts.

3. Switching Power Module; Lutron PHPM-SW: Provides interface for phase control input to provide full 16 A circuit output of switching for compatible non-dim loads.

4. Phase-Adaptive Power Module with 3-Wire Fluorescent Input; Lutron PHPM-WBX: Provides interface for fluorescent ballast control input to provide full 16 A circuit output for compatible loads.

5. Ten Volt Interface; Lutron GRX-TVI: Provides interface for phase control input to provide full 16 A circuit output of switching and 0-10 V low voltage control for compatible fluorescent electronic dimming ballasts.

2.6 MAIN UNITS (LUTRON GRAFIK EYE QS)

A. Product: Lutron GRAFIK Eye QS.

B. Provide main units with configuration and quantity of zones as indicated or as required to control the loads as indicated.

C. Connects to lighting management hub via RS485.

D. Finish: As specified for wall controls in "Device Finishes" under DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS article above; Standard white with white top door, unless otherwise indicated; Standard white with translucent top door, unless otherwise indicated; Custom colors to be selected by Architect;

E. Engrave units with button, zone, and scene descriptions after field commissioning

F. Integrated Wireless Capability: 1. Provide wireless communication inputs for:

a. Occupancy sensors. b. Daylight sensors.


IFB 154339


c. Wireless controller. 2. RF Range: 30 feet (9 m) between sensor and compatible RF receiving device(s). 3. RF Frequency: 434 MHz; operate in FCC governed frequency spectrum for periodic

operation; continuous transmission spectrum is not permitted.

G. Preset Lighting Control with Zone Override: 1. Intensity for each zone indicated by means of one illuminated bar graph per zone. 2. User-programmable zone and scene names. 3. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply. 4. Astronomical time clock and programmer interface provides access to:

a. Scene selections. b. Fade zone to a level. c. Fine-tuning of preset levels with scene raise/lower. d. Lock out scenes and zones. e. Fine-tuning of light levels with individual zone raise/lower. f. Terminal block for wired infrared signal input. g. Enable/disable wall station.

5. Light intensity with real time energy savings by digital display. 6. Fade time indicated by digital display for current scene while fading. 7. Integral wide angle infrared receiver. 8. For temporary local overrides, individual raise/lower buttons to allow zones to be adjusted

without altering scene values stored in memory. 9. Direct Low-Voltage Control of Digital Ballasts and LED drivers (120V, 220/240V, 277V

and/or 347V Lighting): a. Electronically link a digital fluorescent lighting ballast to a zone for both dimming

and turning on/off. b. Electronically assign daylight sensors to digital ballasts and line voltage dimmers

for proportional daylight harvesting. c. Single integral controller with Class 1 or Class 2 isolated digital output signal

conforming to IEC 60929; capable of direct control without interface. 10. Creates daylighting rows independent of control zones. 11. Capable of re-zoning without re-wiring using programming display on unit. 12. Outputs can be virtually mapped to other device's outputs. 13. Zone raise/lower buttons capable of controlling local lighting loads connected to the main

unit or remote lighting zones in the system.

H. Preset Shade Control with Zone Override: 1. Preset expandable shade control: Provide up to three columns of shade control. 2. For temporary local overrides, individual raise/lower buttons to allow zones to be adjusted

without altering scene values stored in memory.

I. Provides one direct-wired occupancy sensor connection without interface or powerpack.

2.7 LIGHTING CONTROL MODULES (LUTRON ENERGI SAVR NODE)

A. Provide lighting control modules as indicated or as required to control the loads as indicated.

B. General Requirements: 1. Listed to UL 508 as industrial control equipment. 2. Delivered and installed as a listed factory-assembled panel.


IFB 154339


3. Passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means. 4. Mounting: Surface. 5. Connection without interface to wired:

a. Occupancy sensors. b. Daylight sensors. c. IR receivers for personal control.

6. Connects to lighting management hub via RS485. 7. LED status indicators confirm communication with occupancy sensors, daylight sensors,

and IR receivers. 8. Contact Closure Input:

a. Directly accept contact closure input from a dry contact closure or sold-state output without interface to: 1) Activate scenes.

a) Scene activation from momentary or maintained closure. 2) Enable or disable after hours.

a) Automatic sweep to user-specified level after user-specified time has elapsed.

b) System will provide occupants a visual warning prior to sweeping lights to user-specified level.

c) Occupant can reset timeout by interacting with the lighting system. 3) Activate or deactivate demand response (load shed).

a) Load shed event will reduce lighting load by user-specified amount. 9. Emergency Contact Closure Input:

a. Turn all zones to full output during emergency state via direct contact closure input from UL 924 listed emergency lighting interface, security system or fire alarm system.

b. Allow configurable zone response during emergency state. c. Disable control operation until emergency signal is cleared.

10. Supplies power for control link for keypads and control interfaces. 11. Distributes sensor data among multiple lighting control modules. 12. Capable of being controlled via wireless sensors and controls.

C. Switching Lighting Control Modules: 1. Product(s):

a. Lutron SoftSwitch Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-4S16-S: 16 A continuous-use per channel.

b. Lutron SoftSwitch Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-4S20-S: 20 A (16 A ballast) continuous-use per channel.

2. Switching: a. Rated Life of Relay: Typical of 1,000,000 cycles at fully rated 16 A for all lighting

loads. b. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is

applied to and removed from load circuits. c. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads. d. Module to integrate up to four individually controlled zones. e. Utilize air gap off, activated when user selects "off" at any control to disconnect the

load from line supply.

D. 0-10V Lighting Control Modules:


IFB 154339


1. Product(s): a. Lutron 0-10V Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-4T16-S: 16 A continuous-use per channel. b. Lutron 0-10V Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-4T20-S: 20 A (16 A ballast) continuous-use per channel.

2. Coordination Between Low Voltage Dimming Module and Line Voltage Relay: Capable of being electronically linked to single zone.

3. Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling following light sources: a. 0-10V analog voltage signal.

1) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929. 2) Sink current per IEC 60929.

b. 10V-0V analog voltage signal. 1) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929. 2) Sink current per IEC 60929.

4. Switching: a. Rated Life of Relay: Typical of 1,000,000 cycles at fully rated 16 A for all lighting

loads. b. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is

applied to and removed from load circuits. c. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads. d. Module to integrate up to four individually controlled zones. e. Utilize air gap off, activated when user selects "off" at any control to disconnect the

load from line supply.

E. Digital Fixture Lighting Control Modules: 1. Product(s):

a. Lutron EcoSystem Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-1ECO-S: One EcoSystem Digital Link.

b. Lutron EcoSystem Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-2ECO-S: Two EcoSystem Digital Links.

2. Provides two-way feedback with digital fixtures for energy monitoring, light level status, lamp failure reporting, and ballast/driver failure reporting.

3. Provide testing capability using manual override buttons. 4. Each low-voltage digital communication link to support up to 64 ballasts or LED drivers

capable of NFPA 70 Class 1 or Class 2 installation.

2.8 ENERGY METER

A. Product: Lutron Quantum CPN5898 Series Class 500 Energy Meter.

B. General Requirements: 1. Provides accurate, real-time energy metering and verification capability through front-end

PC-based software. 2. Factory-calibrated; not requiring preventative/scheduled maintenance or

cleaning/decontamination procedures. 3. Accepts up to three sets of current sensors to monitor up to three loads of the same voltage

with one meter. 4. Contains direct-read 8-digit LCD display of cumulative kWh. 5. Current Sensors: Split-core; capable of being placed up to 500 feet (152 m) from the meter

without power interruption.


IFB 154339


6. Connects to server via Ethernet. 7. UL listed. 8. Accuracy: Plus/minus 0.5 percent, certified to ANSI C12.20. 9. NEMA 12 housing. 10. Provide voltage and current ratings suitable for the installed location.

2.9 DIGITAL DIMMING BALLAST AND SWITCHING MODULES (LUTRON ECOSYSTEM)

A. Provide digital dimming ballast and switching modules as indicated or as required to control the loads as indicated.

B. General Requirements: 1. Provide continuous 3-wire signal dimming to compatible 3-wire electronic dimming

ballasts. 2. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply. 3. Connect without interface to:

a. Occupancy sensor. b. Daylight sensor. c. Personal control input (wall station or infrared receiver).

4. Generate digital communication commands to distribute ballast and sensor data on the digital bus.

5. If power is interrupted and subsequently restored, lights automatically return to the setting prior to power interruption.

6. Each ballast module responds independently to: a. Up to 32 occupancy sensors. b. Up to 64 personal control inputs. c. Two daylight sensors.

7. Unique internal reference number visible displayed on module cover. 8. Averages two independent daylight harvesting inputs internally. 9. Responds to digital load shed command.

a. Sets high end trim. b. Automatically scales light output proportional to load shed command. (Example: If

light output is at 30 percent and a load shed command of 10 percent is received, the ballast to automatically set the maximum light output at 90 percent and lower current light output by 3 percent to 27 percent).

10. Provide integral fault protection to prevent ballast module failure in the event of a mis-wire.

C. Product(s): 1. 3-Wire Ballast Module, 2 Amp; Lutron EcoSystem Model C5-BMF-2A:

a. Integrates up to 2 amps of 3-wire electronic dimming ballasts into EcoSystem digital control system as a single zone.

2. 3-Wire Ballast Module, 16 Amp; Lutron EcoSystem Model C5-BMJ-16A: a. Integrates up to 16 amps of 3-wire electronic dimming ballasts into EcoSystem

digital control system as a single zone. b. Integrates up to 16 amps of switched high intensity discharge (HID) lighting load

into EcoSystem digital control system as a single zone. 3. Switching Power Module, 16 Amp; Lutron EcoSystem Model C5-XPJ-16A:

a. Integrates up to 16 amps of high in-rush lighting load (magnetic fluorescent ballast, electronic fluorescent ballast, HID, incandescent, magnetic low-voltage, electronic


IFB 154339


low-voltage, neon/cold cathode and motor loads) into EcoSystem digital control system as a single zone.

2.10 LIGHTING MANAGEMENT HUBS

A. Product: Lutron Quantum Light Management Hub.

B. Provided in a pre-assembled NEMA listed enclosure with terminal blocks listed for field wiring.

C. Connects to controls and power panels via RS485.

D. Enables light management software to control and monitor compatible dimming ballasts and ballast modules, power panels, power modules, and window treatments.

1. Utilizes Ethernet connectivity to light management computer utilizing one of the following methods: a. Dedicated network. b. Dedicated VLAN. c. Shared network with Building Management System (BMS). d. Corporate network where managed switches are configured to allow multicasting

and use of IGMP.

E. Integrates control station devices, power panels, shades, preset lighting controls, and external inputs into a single customizable lighting control system with:

1. Multiple Failsafe Mechanisms: a. Power failure detection via emergency lighting interface. b. Protection: Lights go to full on if ballast wires are shorted. c. Distributed architecture provides fault containment. Single hub failure or loss of

power does not compromise lights and shades connected to other lighting management hubs.

2. Manual overrides. 3. Automatic control. 4. Central computer control and monitoring. 5. Integration with BMS via BACnet.

F. Furnished with astronomical time clock.

G. Furnished with solar clock to track the position of the sun to control the shades to limit penetration of direct sunlight.

H. Maintains a backup of the programming in a non-volatile memory capable of lasting more than ten years without power.

I. BACnet Integration License: 1. Provide ability to communicate by means of native BACnet IP communication (does not

require interface) to lighting control system from a user-supplied 10BASE-T or 100BASE-T Ethernet network.

2. Requires only one network connection per system. 3. Lighting control system to be BACnet Test Laboratory (BTL) listed. 4. Basic BACnet integration license:

a. The BACnet integrator can command:


IFB 154339


1) Area light output. 2) Area enable or disable after hours mode. 3) Area load shed level. 4) Area load shed enable/disable. 5) Daylighting level. 6) Area occupied and unoccupied level 7) Occupancy sensor timeouts.

b. The BACnet integrator can monitor: 1) Area on/off status. 2) Area occupancy status. 3) Area fault.

a) Lamp failures. b) Control devices not responding.

4) Area load shed status. 5) Area instantaneous energy usage and maximum potential power usage. 6) Cloudy day and shadow sensor status. 7) Light levels from window mounted sensors. 8) Enable/Disable:

a) Status of automated solar adaptive shade control. b) Status of cloudy day/shadow override for automated shade control. c) Status of brightness override for automated shade control. d) Area occupancy sensors. e) Daylighting.

9) Daylighting level. 10) Light levels from photo sensors and window mount shadow sensors. 11) Area occupied and unoccupied level. 12) Occupancy sensor timeouts.

2.11 LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM COMPUTERS

--CHOOSE ONLY ONE OF THE TWO PARAGRAPHS BELOW--

A. Computers: 1. Server:

a. Suitable for 24 hour per day, 7 day per week programming, monitoring, control, and data logging of digital-network lighting controls.

b. Suitable to handle client machine request in multi-computer systems. c. Unless otherwise indicated, computer to be provided<by lighting control system

manufacturer; d. Minimum Hardware Requirements:

1) Processor: Single Intel® Xeon® processor with minimum speed of 2.0 GHz; Dual Core Intel® processor with minimum speed of 1.86 GHz

2) 2 GB Ram. 3) 80 GB hard drive (30 GB for application). 4) Two 10/100/1000 Ethernet network interfaces - one for communication with

lighting management hubs and one for communication with corporate intranet to allow access from system PCs and/or energy saving display terminals. Only one Ethernet network interface is required if all lighting management hubs and client PCs are on the same network.


IFB 154339


5) 17 inch (43 cm) monitor with 1024 x 768 resolution. 6) 48X CD/DVD-ROM drive. 7) 4 USB 2.0 ports.

e. Minimum Software Requirements: 1) Licensed installation of US English 32-bit or 64-bit Microsoft® Windows®

Server 2008 with Service Pack 1. 2. Computers Provided by Lighting Control System Manufacturer: Computer software to be

preinstalled and tested prior to shipping. 3. Utilize Dell PowerEdge T320 Tower Server or equal. Base specifications meet Lutron

standards for processor, memory, hard drive, and DVD-ROM drive. Ensure tower spec and order includes (2) Broadcam Ethernet network interfaces, (1) monitor minimum of 17”, and keyboard and mouse.

2.12 LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SOFTWARE

A. Provide system software license and hardware that is designed, tested, manufactured, and warranted by a single manufacturer.

B. Configuration Setup Software: 1. Product: Lutron Q-Design. 2. Suitable to make system programming and configuration changes. 3. Windows-based, capable of running on either central server or a remote client over TCP/IP

connection. 4. Allows manufacturer (with on-site service call); end-user (with training) or system

integration company hired by owner: a. Capture system design:

1) Geographical layout. 2) Load schedule zoning. 3) Equipment schedule. 4) Equipment assignment to lighting management hubs. 5) Daylighting design.

b. Define the configuration for the following in each area: 1) Lighting scenes. 2) Control station devices. 3) Interface and integration equipment. 4) Occupancy/after hours. 5) Partitioning. 6) Daylighting. 7) Emergency lighting. 8) Night lights.

c. Startup: 1) Addressing. 2) Daylighting. 3) Provide customized conditional programming.

C. Control and Monitor Software: 1. Product: Lutron Q-Admin. 2. Basic System View: The system navigation and status reporting is performed using a tree

view of the building.


IFB 154339


3. Optional Graphical Floor Plan View: The system navigation and status reporting is performed using customized CAD based drawings of the building. Pan and zoom feature allows for easy navigation. Basic system view is always available.

4. Control of Lights: a. Area lights can be monitored for on/off status. b. All lights in an area can be turned on/off or sent to a specific level. c. For areas that have been zoned, these areas may be sent to a predefined lighting

scene, and individual zones may be controlled. d. Area lighting scenes can be modified in real-time, changing the levels that zones go

to when a scene is activated. e. High and low end of area lighting can be tuned/trimmed. f. Control and monitor area partition status.

5. Occupancy: a. Area occupancy can be monitored. b. Area occupancy can be disabled to override occupancy control or in case of

occupancy sensor problems. c. Area occupancy settings including level that lights turn on to when area is occupied,

and level that lights turn off to when area is unoccupied can be changed in real-time. 6. Daylighting:

a. Daylighting can be enabled/disabled. Can be used to override the control currently taking place in the space.

b. Daylight target levels can be changed for each daylit area. c. Daylight status can be monitored.

7. Scheduling: Schedule time of day and astronomic time clock events to automate functions. 8. Reporting: Provide reporting capability that allows the building manager to gather real-

time and historical information about the system as follows: a. Energy Reports: Show a comparison of cumulative energy used over a period of

time for one or more areas or meter groups. b. Power Reports: Show power usage trend over a period of time for one or more areas

or meter groups. c. Activity Report: Show what activity has taken place over a period of time for one or

more areas. Activity includes occupant activities (e.g. wall controls being pressed), building manager operation (e.g. controlling/changing areas using the control and monitor tool), and device failures (e.g. keypads or ballasts that are not responding). 1) Include shade related activities (e.g. automatic movements from Hyperion

algorithm, manual overrides from personal controls, automatic overrides from sensors).

d. Lamp Failure Report: Shows which areas are currently reporting lamp failures. e. Shade Level Report: Shows the shade level for any shade group in the system over

any historical 24 hour period. f. Shade Position Report: Shows the percentage of time shade groups in the system are

at each position. g. Sensor Level Report: Shows the light level in footcandles of any photosensor in the

system. h. Alert Activity Report: Capable of generating historical reports of all alert activity

within the system. 9. Diagnostics: Allows the building manager to check on the status of all equipment in the

lighting control system. Devices to be listed with a reporting status of OK, missing, or unknown.


IFB 154339


10. Alerts and Alarms: Monitors the system for designated events/triggers and automatically generates alerts according to configured response criteria. a. Capable of monitoring for the following events/triggers:

1) A failed piece of equipment (e.g. ballast, control, sensor, etc.); alert cleared when equipment is replaced.

2) A lamp outage (for compatible EcoSystem digital electronic dimming ballasts only); alert cleared when lamp is replaced.

3) Low battery conditions in battery-operated sensors and controls; alert cleared when battery is replaced.

4) Luminaires with lamp operating hours in excess of designated time. 5) A load shed event; alert generated for beginning and end of trigger. 6) Energy usage higher than designated threshold target. 7) Potential light level condition discrepancies (daylight sensors not agreeing

with expected lighting status). b. Capable of generating alerts through visible changes in software or through email

messages. c. Capable of customizing the frequency of alerts and providing notifications

immediately or through daily, weekly, or monthly summaries. d. Capable of sending different alerts to different system users. e. Capable of generating historical reports of all alert activity within the system.

11. Administration: a. Users: Allows new user accounts to be created and existing user accounts to be

edited. 1) Supports Active Directory (LDAP) tying user accounts to network accounts.

b. Area and feature access can be restricted based on login credentials with three levels of access rights (Admin, Programmer, Controller) and customized access levels available.

c. Publish Graphical Floor Plan: Allows admin user to publish new graphical floor plan files, allowing users to monitor the status of lights, occupancy of areas, and daylighting status.

d. Back-Up Project Database: Allows admin user to back up the project database that holds all the configuration information for the system, including keypad programming, areas scenes, daylighting, occupancy programming, emergency levels, night lights, and time clock.

e. Publish Project Database: Allows admin user to send a new project database to the server and download the new configuration to the system. The project database holds all the configuration information for the system, including keypad programming, area scenes, daylighting, occupancy programming, emergency levels, night lights, and time clock.

12. Virtual Global Buttons: Provide global scene control or modes of operation across entire system.

13. Provides control/monitoring of partition status to automatically reconfigure how the space operates based on the partition's open/closed status.

D. Quantum Mobile Control and Programming Software License: 1. Allows mobile control and programming of Quantum system via an Apple iPad. 2. Provides users the ability to:

a. Control and monitor area lighting scenes, zones, and shade presets. b. Easily identify zones and shade groups.


IFB 154339


c. Edit area lighting scenes, shade presets, scene fade rates, and scene delay rates. d. Restrict user access by area. e. Restrict users from ability to make changes. f. Historical logging of who made changes available in Q-Admin control and monitor

software. 3. Connects to Quantum system via WiFi. 4. Can connect directly to processor or through computer (server) in the system.

2.13 CONTROL STATIONS

A. Provide control stations with configuration as indicated or as required to control the loads as indicated.

B. Wired Control Stations: 1. General Requirements:

a. Class 2 (low voltage). b. UL listed. c. Control stations can be replaced without reprogramming. d. Finish: As specified for wall controls in "Device Finishes" under DIGITAL-

NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS article above; White, unless otherwise indicated; Custom colors to be selected by Architect

2. Product(s): a. Multi-Scene Wired Control:

1) Product(s): a) Lutron Palladiom

2) Allows control of any devices part of the lighting control system. 3) Utilize RS485 wiring for low-voltage communication. 4) Functionality:

a) Upon button press, LEDs to immediately illuminate. b) LEDs to reflect the true system status. LEDs to remain illuminated if

the button press was properly processed or LEDs to turn off if the button press was not processed.

c) Allows for easy reprogramming without replacing unit. d) Replacement of units does not require reprogramming.

5) Provide faceplates with concealed mounting hardware. 6) Engrave wall stations with button, zone, and scene descriptions after

commissioning as directed by Lighting Designer 7) Silk-screened borders, logos, and graduations to use graphic process that

chemically bonds graphics to faceplate, resistant to removal by scratching and cleaning.

8) Software Configuration: a) Customizable control station device button functionality:

(1) Buttons can be programmed to perform single defined action. (2) Buttons can be programmed to perform defined action on press and

defined action on release. (3) Buttons can be programmed using conditional logic off of a state

variable such as time of day or partition status.


IFB 154339


9) Control station device LEDs to support logic that defines when it is illuminated: a) Scene logic (logic is true when all zones are at defined levels). b) Room logic (logic is true when at least one zone is on). c) Pathway (logic is true when at least one zone is on). d) Last scene (logic is true when spaces are in defined scenes).

10) Contact Closure Interface: Accepts both momentary and maintained contact closures.

11) Provide integral infrared receiver for personal control where indicated on plan.

b. Single-Scene or Zoned Wired Control: 1) Product: Lutron Pico Wired Control. 2) Turn an individual fixture or group of fixtures on and off. 3) Raise and lower light levels. 4) Recall favorite light levels.

c. Four-Button Preset Wallstation: 1) Product: Lutron EcoSystem CC-4BRL Four-Button Control. 2) Recall four scenes plus all on or all off for one group of fixtures. 3) Master raise/lower control for entire group of fixtures. 4) Integral IR receiver for personal control. 5) Immediate local LED response upon button activation to indicate that a

system command has been requested. 6) Allows control of any devices part of the lighting control system. 7) Utilize RS485 wiring for low-voltage communication. 8) Functionality:

a) Allows for easy reprogramming without replacing unit. b) Requires key insertion to activate actions.

9) Provide faceplates with concealed mounting hardware. 10) Engrave wall stations with button, zone, and scene descriptions after

commissioning as directed by Lighting Designer 11) Silk-screened borders, logos, and graduations to use graphic process that

chemically bonds graphics to faceplate, resistant to removal by scratching and cleaning.

12) Software Configuration: a) Customizable control station device button functionality:

(1) Key positions can be programmed to perform single defined action.

(2) Key positions can be programmed using conditional logic off of a state variable such as time of day or partition status.

C. Wireless (Radio Frequency) Controls: 1. Product: Lutron Pico Wireless Control. 2. Quantity: As indicated on the drawings 3. Communicates via radio frequency to compatible dimmers, switches, and plug-in modules. 4. Does not require external power packs, power or communication wiring. 5. Allows for easy reprogramming without replacing unit. 6. Button Programming:

a. Single action. b. Toggle action.


IFB 154339


c. Defined action on press and defined action on release. 7. Includes LED to indicate button press or programming mode status. 8. Models available with integral night light. 9. Mounting:

a. Capable of being mounted with a table stand or directly to a wall under a faceplate. b. Faceplates: Provide concealed mounting hardware.

10. Power: Battery-operated with minimum ten-year battery life.

2.14 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL INTERFACES

A. Provide low-voltage control interfaces as indicated or as required to control the loads as indicated.

B. Connects to lighting management hub via RS485.

C. UL listed.

D. Contact Closure Interface: 1. Product: Lutron Model QSE-IO. 2. The contact closure input device to accept both momentary and maintained contact

closures. 3. The contact closure output device can be configured for maintained or pulsed outputs. 4. Contact closure can be programmed using conditional logic off of a state variable such as

time of day or partition status.

E. Wallbox Input Closure Interface: 1. Product: Lutron Model QSE-CI-WCI. 2. Mounts in wallbox behind contact closure keypad to provide interface for up to eight

contact closure inputs. 3. The contact closure input device to accept both momentary and maintained contact

closures.

F. RS232 and Ethernet Interface: 1. Product: Lutron Model QSE-CI-NWK-E. 2. Provide ability to communicate via Ethernet or RS232 to audiovisual equipment,

touchscreens, etc. 3. Allow creation of custom output strings. 4. Provide control of:

a. Light scene selections. b. Fine-tuning of light scene levels with raise/lower. c. Simulate system wall station button presses and releases.

5. Provide status monitoring of: a. Light scene status. b. Wall station button presses and releases. c. Wall station LEDs.

6. Provide ability to send custom output strings.

G. DMX Interface 1. Product: Lutron Model QSM-CI-DMX. 2. Provide ability to:


IFB 154339


a. Map a single zone intensity to a single DMX512 lighting channel. b. Map a single zone intensity to three DMX512 channels for RGB/CMY color control. c. Map a single zone intensity to a single DMX512 integration channel. d. Smoothly transition from one color to another in a cross fade. e. Automatically sequence through a variety of colors. f. Download, program, and customize a color wheel for each unit.

H. Sensor Modules: 1. Products:

a. Sensor module with both wired and wireless inputs; Lutron Model QSM2-4W-C. b. Sensor module with wired inputs only; Lutron Model QSMX-4W-C. c. Sensor module with wireless inputs only; Lutron Model QSM2-XW-C.

2. Wired Modules: a. Provide wired inputs for:

1) Occupancy sensors. 2) Daylight sensors. 3) IR receivers for personal control. 4) Digital ballast wall stations.

3. Wireless Modules: a. Provide wireless communication inputs for:

1) Occupancy sensors. 2) Daylight sensors. 3) Wireless controller.

b. RF Range: 30 feet (9 m) between sensor and compatible RF receiving devices. c. RF Frequency: 434 MHz; operates in FCC governed frequency spectrum for

periodic operation; continuous transmission spectrum is not permitted. 4. Communicate sensor information to wired low-voltage digital link for use by compatible

devices.

2.15 WIRED SENSORS

A. Wired Occupancy Sensors: 1. General Requirements:

a. Connects directly to compatible ballasts and modules without the need of a power pack or other interface.

b. Turns off or reduces lighting automatically after reasonable time delay when a room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy the space.

c. Accommodates all conditions of space utilization and all irregular work hours and habits.

d. Comply with UL 94. e. Self-Adaptive: Continually adjusts sensitivity and timing to ensure optimal lighting

control for any use of the space. f. Furnished with field-adjustable controls for time delay and sensitivity to override

any adaptive features. g. Provide capability to:

1) Add additional timeout system-wide without need to make local adjustment on sensor.

2) Group multiple sensors.


IFB 154339


h. Power Failure Memory: Settings and learned parameters to be saved in non-volatile memory and not lost should power be interrupted and subsequently restored.

i. Furnished with all necessary mounting hardware and instructions. j. Class 2 devices. k. Ceiling-Mounted Sensors: Indicate viewing directions on mounting bracket. l. Wall-Mounted Sensors: Provide swivel-mount base. m. Color: White.

2. Wired Passive Infrared Sensors: a. Utilize multiple segmented lens, with internal grooves to eliminate dust and residue

build-up. b. Ceiling-Mounted Sensors: Provide customizable mask to block off unwanted

viewing areas. c. Product(s):

1) Ceiling-Mounted Passive Infrared Sensor, 450 square feet (42 sq m); Lutron Model LOS-CIR-450-WH: Coverage of 450 square feet (42 sq m) with ceiling height of 8 to 12 feet (2.4 to 3.7 m); 360 degree field of view.

2) Ceiling-Mounted Passive Infrared Sensor, 1500 square feet (140 sq m); Lutron Model LOS-CIR-1500-WH: Coverage of 1500 square feet (140 sq m) with ceiling height of 8 to 12 feet (2.4 to 3.7 m); 360 degree field of view.

3) Wall-Mounted Passive Infrared Sensor; Lutron Model LOS-WIR-WH: Coverage of 1600 square feet (149 sq m) with ceiling height of 8 to 12 feet (2.4 to 3.7 m); 110 degree field of view.

3. Wired Ultrasonic Sensors: a. Utilize an operating frequency of 32kHz or 40kHz, crystal-controlled to operate

within plus/minus 0.005 percent tolerance. b. Product(s):

1) Ceiling-Mounted Ultrasonic Sensor, 500 square feet (46 sq m); Lutron Model LOS-CUS-500-WH: Coverage of 500 square feet (46 sq m) with ceiling height of 8 to 12 feet (2.6 to 3.7 m); 180 degree field of view.

2) Ceiling-Mounted Ultrasonic Sensor, 1000 square feet (93 sq m); Lutron Model LOS-CUS-1000-WH: Coverage of 1,000 square feet (93 sq m) with ceiling height of 8 to 12 feet (2.6 to 3.7 m); 180 degree field of view.

3) Ceiling-Mounted Ultrasonic Sensor, 2000 square feet (186 sq m); Lutron Model LOS-CUS-2000-WH: Coverage of 2000 square feet (186 sq m) with ceiling height of 8 to 12 feet (2.6 to 3.7 m); 360 degree field of view.

4. Wired Dual Technology Sensors: a. Passive Infrared: Utilize multiple segmented lens, with internal grooves to eliminate

dust and residue build-up. b. Ultrasonic: Utilize an operating frequency of 32kHz or 40kHz, crystal-controlled to

operate within plus/minus 0.005 percent tolerance. c. Ceiling-Mounted Sensors: Provide customizable mask to block off unwanted

viewing areas. d. Integral Photocell: Provide an integral photocell with adjustable sensitivity to

prevent lights from turning on when there is sufficient natural light e. Product(s), Without Isolated Relay and Integral Photocell:

1) Ceiling-Mounted Dual Technology Sensor, 500 square feet (46 sq m); Lutron Model LOS-CDT-500-WH: Coverage of 500 square feet (46 sq m) with ceiling height of 8 to 12 feet (2.6 to 3.7 m); 180 degree field of view.


IFB 154339




4) Wall-Mounted Dual Technology Sensor; Lutron LOS-WDT-WH: Coverage of 1600 square feet (149 sq m) with ceiling height of 8 to 12 feet (2.4 to 3.7 m); 110 degree field of view.

f. Product(s), With Isolated Relay and Integral Photocell: 1) Ceiling-Mounted Dual Technology Sensor, 500 square feet (46 sq m); Lutron

Model LOS-CDT-500R-WH: Coverage of 500 square feet (46 sq m) with ceiling height of 8 to 12 feet (2.6 to 3.7 m); 180 degree field of view; with isolated relay and integral photocell.

2) Ceiling-Mounted Dual Technology Sensor, 1000 square feet (93 sq m); Lutron Model LOS-CDT-1000R-WH: Coverage of 1000 square feet (93 sq m) with ceiling height of 8 to 12 feet (2.6 to 3.7 m); 180 degree field of view; with isolated relay and integral photocell.

3) Ceiling-Mounted Dual Technology Sensor, 2000 square feet (186 sq m); Lutron Model LOS-CDT-2000R-WH: Coverage of 2000 square feet (186 sq m) with ceiling height of 8 to 12 feet (2.6 to 3.7 m); 360 degree field of view; with isolated relay and integral photocell.

4) Wall-Mounted Dual Technology Sensor; Lutron Model LOS-WDT-R-WH: Coverage of 1600 square feet (149 sq m) with ceiling height of 8 to 12 feet (2.4 to 3.7 m); 110 degree field of view; with isolated relay and integral photocell.

B. Sensor Power Packs: 1. Provide sensor power packs where required for power connection to sensors. 2. For ease of mounting, installation and future service, power pack(s) to be able to mount

through a 1/2 inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure and be an integrated, self-contained unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching control relay and a transformer to provide low-voltage power. Transformer to provide power to a minimum of three sensors.

3. Plenum-rated. 4. Control Wiring Between Sensors and Control Units: Class 2, 18-24 AWG, stranded UL

Classified, PVC insulated or TEFLON jacketed cable suitable for use in plenums, where applicable.

C. Infrared Receivers: 1. Product: Lutron Model EC-IR-WH. 2. Use Class 2 wiring for low voltage communication. 3. Can be replaced without reprogramming. 4. 360 degree reception of wireless infrared remote controls. 5. Immediate local LED response upon reception of handheld transmitter communication. 6. Mountable on lighting fixtures or recessed acoustical ceiling tiles. 7. Constructed via sonic welding. 8. Color: White.


IFB 154339


D. Wired Daylight Sensors: 1. Digital Interior Daylight Sensor:

a. Product: Lutron Model EC-DIR-WH. b. Use Class 2 wiring for low voltage communication. c. Can be replaced without reprogramming. d. Open-loop basis for daylight sensor control scheme. e. Stable output over temperature from 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 104 degrees F

(40 degrees C). f. Partially shielded for accurate detection of available daylight to prevent fixture

lighting and horizontal light component from skewing sensor detection. g. Provide linear response from 0 to 500 footcandles. h. Integral IR receiver for personal control. i. Mountable on lighting fixtures or recessed acoustical ceiling tiles. j. Constructed via sonic welding. k. Color: White.

2. Daylight Control Package: a. Product: Lutron CES Series (Lutron CES Analog Sensor, LC8 Controller, and

Power Pack). b. Controller:

1) Product: Lutron Model LC8. 2) Automatically switches a dry contact according to changes in ambient light

levels. 3) Fully adjustable separate high and low setpoints, with an adjustable dead band

between set points to prevent unwanted cycling. 4) Input time delay to prevent unwanted cycling due to intermittent light level

fluctuations. 5) Signal/setpoint and relay status indication. 6) Sensor calibration input.

c. Sensors: 1) Class 2, three-wire analog devices. 2) Provision for zero or offset based signal. 3) Indoor Photo Sensors; Lutron Model CES/I: With fresnel lens and 60 degree

cone of response; sensor range of 0 to 750 footcandles. 4) Outdoor Photo Sensors; Lutron Model CES/O: Weatherproof, with hood

over aperture to shield sensor from direct sunlight; sensor range of 0 to 750 footcandles.

5) Atrium Photo Sensors; Lutron Model CES/A: With translucent dome and 180 degree field of view; sensor range of 2 to 2,500 footcandles.

6) Skylight Photo Sensors; Lutron Model CES/S: With translucent dome and 180 degree field of view; sensor range of 10 to 7,500 footcandles.

E. Infrared Partition Sensors: 1. Product: Lutron Model GRX-IRPS-WH. 2. Provide contact closure based on status of the partition wall (open/close) enabling

automatic linking of controls.

2.16 WIRELESS SENSORS

A. General Requirements:


IFB 154339


1. Operational life of 10 years without the need to replace batteries when installed per manufacturer's instructions.

2. Communicates directly to compatible RF receiving devices through use of a radio frequency communications link.

3. Does not require external power packs, power wiring, or communication wiring. 4. Capable of being placed in test mode to verify correct operation from the face of the unit. 5. RF Range: 30 feet (9 m) between sensor and compatible RF receiving device(s). 6. Electromagnetic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI) Limits: Comply

with FCC requirements of CFR, Title 47, Part 15, for Class B application.

B. Wireless Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors: 1. General Requirements:

a. Provides a clearly visible method of indication to verify that motion is being detected during testing and that the unit is communicating to compatible RF receiving devices.

b. Utilize multiple segmented lens, with internal grooves to eliminate dust and residue build-up.

c. Sensing Mechanism: Passive infrared coupled with technology for sensing fine motions. Signal processing technology detects fine-motion passive infrared (PIR) signals without the need to change the sensor's sensitivity threshold.

d. Provide optional, readily accessible, user-adjustable controls for timeout, automatic/manual-on, and sensitivity.

e. Turns off lighting after reasonable and adjustable time delay once the last person to occupy the space vacates a room or area. Provide adjustable timeout settings of 1, 5, 15, and 30 minutes.

f. Capable of turning dimmer's lighting load on to an optional locked preset level selectable by the user. Locked preset range to be selectable on the dimmer from 1 percent to 100 percent.

g. Color: White. h. Provide all necessary mounting hardware and instructions for both temporary and

permanent mounting. i. Provide temporary mounting means to allow user to check proper performance and

relocate as needed before permanently mounting sensor. Temporary mounting method to be design for easy, damage-free removal.

j. Sensor lens to illuminate during test mode when motion is detected to allow installer to verify coverage prior to permanent mounting.

k. Ceiling-Mounted Sensors: 1) Provide surface mounting bracket compatible with drywall, plaster, wood,

concrete, and compressed fiber ceilings. 2) Provide recessed mounting bracket compatible with drywall and compressed

fiber ceilings. 3) Provide customizable mask to block off unwanted viewing areas.

l. Wall-Mounted Sensors: Provide wall or corner mounting brackets compatible with drywall and plaster walls.

2. Wireless Combination Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors: a. Ceiling-Mounted Sensors: Programmable to operate as an occupancy sensor

(automatic-on and automatic-off), an occupancy sensor with low light feature (automatic-on when less than one footcandle of ambient light available and automatic-off), or a vacancy sensor (manual-on and automatic-off).


IFB 154339


b. Product(s): 1) Ceiling-Mounted Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor; Lutron Model LFR2-

OCR2B-P-WH: Coverage from 324 square feet (30.2 sq m) to 676 square feet (62.4 sq m) depending on ceiling height from 8 to 12 feet (2.4 to 3.7 m); 360 degree field of view.

2) Wall-Mounted Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor; Lutron Model LFR2-OWLB-P-WH: Minor motion coverage of 1500 square feet (139.4 sq m) and major motion coverage of 3000 square feet (278.7 sq m) with mounting height of 6 to 8 feet (1.6 to 2.4 m); 180 degree field of view.

3) Corner-Mounted Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor; Lutron Model LFR2-OKLB-P-WH: Minor motion coverage of 1225 square feet (113.8 sq m) and major motion coverage of 2500 square feet (232.3 sq m) with mounting height of 6 to 8 feet (1.6 to 2.4 m); 90 degree field of view.

4) Hallway Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor; Lutron Model LFR2-OHLB-P-WH: Major motion coverage of up to 150 feet (45.7 m) with mounting height of 6 to 8 feet (1.6 to 2.4 m); narrow field of view.

3. Wireless Vacancy-Only Sensors: a. Operates only as a vacancy sensor (manual-on and automatic-offb. Product(s):

1) Ceiling-Mounted Vacancy-Only Sensor; Lutron Model LFR2-VCR2B-P-WH: Coverage from 324 square feet (30.2 sq m) to 676 square feet (62.4 sq m) depending on ceiling height from 8 to 12 feet (2.4 to 3.7 m); 360 degree field of view.

C. Wireless Daylight Sensors: 1. Product: Lutron Model LFR2-DCRB. 2. Open-loop basis for daylight sensor control scheme. 3. Stable output over temperature from 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 104 degrees F (40

degrees C). 4. Partially shielded for accurate detection of available daylight to prevent fixture lighting

and horizontal light component from skewing sensor detection. 5. Provide linear response from 0 to 10,000 footcandles. 6. Color: White. 7. Mounting:

a. Provide surface mounting bracket compatible with drywall, plaster, wood, concrete, and compressed fiber ceilings.

b. Provide all necessary mounting hardware and instructions for both temporary and permanent mounting.

c. Provide temporary mounting means to allow user to check proper performance and relocate as needed before permanently mounting sensor. Temporary mounting method to be design for easy, damage-free removal.

2.17 ACCESSORIES

A. Emergency Lighting Interface: 1. Product: Lutron Model LUT-ELI. 2. Provides total system listing to UL 924 when used with lighting control system. 3. Senses all three phases of building power. 4. Provides an output to power panels or digital ballast interfaces if power on any phase fails

and sends all lights controlled by these devices to an emergency light level setting; 100


IFB 154339


percent intensity. Lights to return to their previous intensities when normal power is restored.

5. Accepts a contact closure input from a fire alarm control panel.

B. Provide power supplies as indicated or as required to power system devices and accessories. 1. Product(s):

a. Junction box-mounted power supply for shades, keypads, and accessories, and for providing additional low voltage power to communication link; Lutron Model QSPS-J-1-50; with miswire and thermal protection.

b. Plug-in power supply for shades, drapery drive units, keypads, and accessories, and for providing additional low voltage power to communication link; Lutron Model QSPS-P1-1-50; with miswire protection; powered from standard receptacle using cord 6 feet (1.8 m) in length.

c. Ten output power supply panel for shades, drapery drive units, keypads and accessories, and for providing additional low voltage power to communication link; Lutron Model QSPS-P1-10-60.

d. Power supply for keypads and accessories (not for shades/window treatments), and for providing additional low voltage power to communication link; Lutron Model STEP-PS.


A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Factory Testing; Lutron Standard Factory Testing: 1. Perform full-function factory testing on all completed assemblies. Statistical sampling is

not acceptable. 2. Perform full-function factory testing on 100 percent of all ballasts and LED drivers. 3. Perform factory audit burn-in of all dimming assemblies and panels at 104 degrees F (40

degrees C) at full load for two hours. 4. Perform factory burn-in of 100 percent of all ballasts at 104 degrees F (40 degrees C).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

B. Verify that ratings and configurations of system components are consistent with the indicated requirements.

C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive system components.

D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.


IFB 154339


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where applicable, NECA 130

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Provide dedicated network between lighting management system computer and lighting management hubs.

D. Define each dimmer/relay load type, assign each load to a zone, and set control functions

E. Sensor Locations: 1. Where Lighting Control Manufacturer Sensor Layout and Tuning service is specified in

Part 2 under "DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS", locate sensors in accordance with layout provided by Lighting Control Manufacturer. Lighting Control Manufacturer may direct Contractor regarding sensor relocation should conditions require a deviation from locations indicated. Where Lighting Control Manufacturer Sensor Layout and Tuning service is not specified, locate sensors in accordance with Drawings.

2. Sensor locations indicated are diagrammatic. Within the design intent, reasonably minor adjustments to locations may be made in order to optimize coverage and avoid conflicts or problems affecting coverage, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

F. Mount exterior daylight sensors to point due north with constant view of daylight.

G. Ensure that daylight sensor placement minimizes sensor view of electric light sources. Locate ceiling-mounted and luminaire-mounted daylight sensors to avoid direct view of luminaires.

H. Automated Shade Control Sensors: 1. Mount rooftop cloudy day sensors to point in the direction of each facade. 2. Ensure that window shadow sensor placement provides an unobstructed view of outdoors.

Do not place at a skylight or above indirect luminaires.

I. Lamp Burn-In: Operate lamps at full output for prescribed period per manufacturer's recommendations prior to use with any dimming controls. Replace lamps that fail prematurely due to improper lamp burn-in.

J. Lamp Lead Lengths: Do not exceed 3 feet (0.9 m) for T4 4-pin compact and T5 BIAX lamps and 7 feet (2.1 m) for T5, T5-HO, T8 U-bend, and T8 linear fluorescent lamps.

K. LED Light Engine/Array Lead Length: Do not exceed 100 feet (31 m).

L. System and Network Integration Consultation; Lutron LSC-INT-VISIT: Include as part of the base bid additional costs for Lighting Control Manufacturer to conduct meeting with facility representative and other related equipment manufacturers to discuss equipment and integration procedures.

1. Coordinate scheduling of visit with Lighting Control Manufacturer. Manufacturer recommends that this visit be scheduled early in construction phase, after system purchase but prior to system installation.


IFB 154339


M. Identify system components


A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer's Startup Services; Lutron Standard Startup Services: 1. Manufacturer's authorized Service Representative to conduct minimum of two site visits

to ensure proper system installation and operation. 2. Conduct Pre-Installation visit to review requirements with installer as specified in Part 1

under "Administrative Requirements". 3. Conduct second site visit upon completion of lighting control system to perform system

startup and verify proper operation: a. Where Lighting Control Manufacturer Sensor Layout and Tuning service is

specified in Part 2 under “DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS”, authorized Service Representative to verify sensor locations, in accordance with layout provided by Lighting Control Manufacturer; Lighting Control Manufacturer may direct Contractor regarding sensor relocation should conditions require a deviation from locations indicated.

b. Verify connection of power wiring and load circuits. c. Verify connection and location of controls. d. Energize lighting management hubs and download system data program. e. Address devices. f. Verify proper connection of panel links (low voltage/data) and address panel. g. Download system panel data to dimming/switching panels h. Check dimming panel load types and currents and supervise removal of by-pass

jumpers. i. Verify system operation control by control. j. Verify proper operation of manufacturer's interfacing equipment. k. Verify proper operation of manufacturer's supplied PC and installed programs l. Configure initial groupings of ballast for wall controls, daylight sensors and

occupancy sensors m. Provide initial rough calibration of sensors; fine-tuning of sensors is responsibility

of Contractor unless provided by Lighting Control Manufacturer as part of Sensor Layout and Tuning service where specified in Part 2 under "DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS".

n. Train Owner's representative on system capabilities, operation, and maintenance, as specified in Part 3 under "Closeout Activities".

o. Obtain sign-off on system functions.

C. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with contract documents.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. On-Site Scene and Level Tuning; Lutron LSC-AF-VISIT: Include 2 additional visits to site for Lighting Control Manufacturer to visit site to conduct meeting with Lighting Designer to make required lighting adjustments to the system for conformance with original design intent.


IFB 154339


B. Sensor Fine-Tuning: Where Lighting Control Manufacturer Sensor Layout and Tuning service is specified in Part 2 under “DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS”, Lighting Control Manufacturer to provide up to two additional post-startup on-site service visits for fine-tuning of sensor calibration. Where Lighting Control Manufacturer Sensor Layout and tuning service is not specified, Contractor to provide fine-tuning of sensor calibration.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish.

3.6 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. See Section 01 7700 – Closeout Procedures

B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.

C. Training: 1. Include services of manufacturer's authorized Service Representative to perform on-site

training of Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of lighting control system as part of standard system start-up services. a. Include training on software to be provided:

1) Configuration software used to make system programming and configuration changes.

2) Control and monitor. 3) Energy savings display software. 4) Personal web-based control software.

2. Provide (2) training visits

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from subsequent construction operations

3.8 MAINTENANCE

A. See Section 01 7300 - Execution, for additional requirements relating to maintenance service.

B. System Optimization Visit; Lutron LSC-SYSOPT: Include costs for Lighting Control System Manufacturer to visit site six months after system start-up to evaluate system usage and discuss opportunities to make efficiency improvements that will fit with the current use of the facility

PART 4 - EXECUTION

4.1 SUBMITTALS

A. System Performance-Verification Documentation; Lutron LSC-LEED-DOC: Include this as an additional cost for manufacturer's enhanced documentation detailing start-up performance-verification procedures and functional tests performed along with test results.


IFB 154339


4.2 WARRANTY

A. Include as an alternate to the base bid additional costs for manufacturer's enhanced warranty with manufacturer start-up; Gold Enhanced Warranty; Lutron LSC-E8G; coverage to include items listed under manufacturer's standard warranty with manufacturer start-up above, plus the following upgrades:

1. Manufacturer Lighting Control System Components, Except Lighting Management System Computer, Ballasts/Drivers and Ballast Modules: a. First Two Years:

1) Upgrade from as-available Field Service response to 72-hour on-site or remote response time.

b. Additional Coverage for Years 3-5: 50 percent replacement parts coverage, no manufacturer labor coverage

c. Additional Coverage for Years 6-8: 25 percent replacement parts coverage, no manufacturer labor coverage.

4.3 MAINTENANCE

A. Software Maintenance Agreement; Lutron LSC-SMA: Include as an alternate to the base bid additional costs for manufacturer to provide quarterly compatibility testing results for PC-based lighting control software and new patches issued for Microsoft Operating System, Database, and Browser tools.

1. If new Microsoft patches create a software conflict, manufacturer to provide lighting control software patches to ensure continued operation.



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 262200-1 Alexandria, Virginia DRY TYPE LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

SECTION 262200 – DRY TYPE LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1500 kVA: 1. Distribution transformers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for each type and size of transformer. 2. Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances,

installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated.

3. Include percent impedance, percent regulation at 80 percent and 100 percent power factor loads, efficiencies at 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent and 100 percent load, no load core losses, full winding coil losses, total losses, and noise level rating.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.

3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

D. Source quality-control test reports.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.




A. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."


A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate installation of structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided for units hung from structural slabs and/or steel supports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products 2. General Electric Company 3. Square D; Schneider Electric

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service. 1. Three-phase transformers shall be 60 hertz, 480 volt, three-phase delta to 120/208 volt,

three-phase, four wire grounded wye, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 2. Single-phase transformers shall be 480 volt primary, 120/240 volts secondary, unless

otherwise noted on the Drawings.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: Comply with DOE 2016 energy-efficiency levels 2.



D. Cores: Electrical grade, non-aging silicon steel with high magnetic permeability and low hysteresis and eddy current losses.

E. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps. 1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2. Coil Material: Copper.

F. Transformer connection shall be Delta primary to Wye secondary unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.

G. Encapsulation: Transformers smaller than 15 kVA shall have core and coils completely resin encapsulated.

H. Shipping Restraints: Paint or otherwise color code bolts, wedges, blocks, and other restraints that are to be removed after installation and before energizing. Use fluorescent colors that are easily identifiable inside the transformer enclosure.

I. Required performance shall be obtained without exceeding the above indicated temperature rise in a 40 deg C maximum ambient, and a 24-hour average ambient of 30 deg C. Special requirements for marine duty transformer: The required performance shall be obtained without exceeding the above indicated temperature rise in a 50 deg C maximum ambient, and a 24-hour average ambient of 30 deg C.

J. All insulation materials shall be flame-retardant and shall not support combustion as defined in

ASTM Standard Test Method D635.

K. Factory installed high-compression, bolt-on cable connectors shall be provided for all primary/secondary and grounding cable connections.

L. Ventilated dry type transformers shall be naturally ventilated through convection; forced ventilation in transformers shall not be acceptable.

M. Transformers shall be designed for continuous operation at rated KVA, for 24 hours a day, 365 days a year operation, with normal life expectancy as defined in ANSI C57.96.

N. Short term overload shall be as required by ANSI without being detrimental to transformer when applied in accordance with ANSI C57.96.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NEMA 70 and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Cores: One leg per phase.

C. Enclosures by location: 1. Indoor: not in active air handling plenum: natural convection ventilated type.

a. NEMA 250, Type 2, Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound to seal out moisture and air.

2. Indoor: within active air handling plenum: Totally enclosed non-ventilated type



a. NEMA 250, Type 2, Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound to seal out moisture and air.

3. Outdoor: Natural Convection Ventilated type. a. NEMA 250, Type 3R, Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound

to seal out moisture and air. Furnish and install weather shield over ventilation openings. Special requirements for marine duty transformer: Furnish and install thermostatically controlled space heaters in the enclosure. Provide a minimum of three (3) 250 watt, 240 volt rated heaters applied at 120 VAC for extended life.

D. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250. 1. Finish Color: ANSI 61 gray.

E. Taps for Transformers Smaller than 3 kVA: One, five percent tap above normal full capacity.

F. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One, five percent tap above and one, five percent tap below normal full capacity.

G. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two, 2.5 percent taps above and four, 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity. Special requirements for marine duty dry-type transformer: One, 5% FCAN tap and two 5% FCBN on the primary windings.

H. Insulation Class: 1. Transformers sized 15 KVA and larger shall have a 220 deg C insulation system.

Winding temperature rise shall not exceed 115 deg C. 2. Transformers smaller than 15 KVA and larger than 0.5 KVA shall have a 185 deg C

insulation system. Winding temperature rise shall not exceed 115 deg C. 3. Temperature rise shall be based on a 40 deg C ambient temperature. 4. The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 90 deg C when

operated at full load in a 40 deg C ambient. 5. Special requirements for marine duty dry-type transformer- Winding temperature rise

shall not exceed 115 deg C rise based on a 50 deg C ambient temperature.

I. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561 requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by designated K-factor. 1. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion

corresponding to designated K-factor. 2. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate. 3. Unit shall meet requirements of NEMA TP 1 when tested according to NEMA TP 2 with

a K-factor equal to one.

J. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance. 1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and

output terminals. 2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield. 3. Shield Effectiveness:

a. Capacitance between Primary and Secondary Windings: Not to exceed 33 picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz.



b. Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 120 dBA at 0.5 to 1.5 kHz; minimum of minus 65 dBA at 1.5 to 100 kHz.

c. Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 52 dBA at 1.5 to 10 kHz.

K. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.

L. Neutral: 1. Rated 200% of full load current for K-13 factor rated transformers.

M. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.

B. Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct sound-level tests on equipment for this Project.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Division 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.

E. Environment: Enclosures shall be rated for the environment in which they are located. Covers for NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosures shall not cause accessibility problems.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install transformers level and plumb on a concrete base with vibration-dampening supports. Locate transformers away from corners and not parallel to adjacent wall surface. Vibration-



dampening supports may be either internally installed by the manufacturer, or installed externally mounted by the Contractor.

B. Construct four-inch high concrete bases according to Division 03 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" anchor floor-mounted transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions, applicable to Project, and requirements in Division 26 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 1. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast

anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

2. Concrete bases shall be poured monolithically with floor slab.

C. Secure covers to enclosure and tighten all bolts to manufacturer-recommended torques to reduce noise generation.

D. Remove shipping bolts, blocking, and wedges.

E. Install all non-floor-mounted transformers on suitably designed steel frame supported from structure. 1. Provide inserts in concrete at proper locations for supporting the unit from a minimum of

four sides. 2. Frames shall be designed to support unit’s weight plus 500 pounds of dead load. 3. Support frame design shall be submitted to and approved by project’s structural engineer.

F. Dry-type transformers installed indoors shall have a separation of at least six inches from walls or as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

D. Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and supports to eliminate sound and vibration transmission to the building structure.


A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS

for dry-type, air-cooled, low-voltage transformers. Certify compliance with test parameters.

B. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.



C. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus five percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus three percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results

B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 262300-1 Alexandria, Virginia LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

SECTION 262300 - LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Specific Attention is called to the “General Requirements and Common Work Results for Electrical Systems” located in Division 26.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Furnish and install the switchgear with service entrance labeling and other labeling as shown on the drawings and required by the Specification of this and other sections.

B. This Section includes UL1558 metal-enclosed, low-voltage power circuit-breaker switchgear rated 1000 V and less for use in ac systems. Each assembly shall be comprised of secondary switchgear with coordinated incoming circuit breakers, , utility metering, customer metering, SPD devices, bussing, and coordinated outgoing feeder breakers as shown on the Contract Drawings. 1. Three assemblies must conform to this specification:

a. Utility Switchgear-Indoor b. Rollup Generator and Load Bank Switchgear-Outdoor c. Generator Distribution Switchgear-Indoor

2. Apply this specification as directed by the drawings and schedule details for each assembly.

C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 "Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuit”.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Service.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. EPMC: Electrical Power Monitoring and Control.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: 1. For each type of switchgear, circuit breaker, surge protection device, ground fault

protector, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

2. Submit switchgear with or after completion of the electrical system studies required by Division 26.

3. Submit letter from electric utility certifying metering compartment(s) complies with the Electric Utility Company’s requirements.



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of switchgear and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required

clearances and service space around equipment. Include the following: a. Tabulation of installed devices with features and ratings. b. Enclosure types and details. c. Outline and general arrangement drawing showing dimensions, shipping sections,

and weights of each assembled section. d. Bus configuration with size and number of conductors in each bus run, including

phase, neutral, and ground conductors of main and branch buses. e. Current rating of buses. f. Short-time and short-circuit current rating of switchgear assembly. g. Include descriptive documentation of optional barriers specified for electrical

insulation and isolation of emergency sections as shown on drawings. h. Detail utility company’s metering provisions with indication of approval by utility

company. i. Nameplate legends. j. Mimic-bus diagram. k. Schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. l. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around switchgear where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show switchgear layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.

D. Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified finish. Manufacturer's color charts showing colors available for mimic bus.

E. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency.

F. Field quality-control test reports.

G. Updated mimic-bus diagram reflecting field changes after final switchgear load connections have been made, for record.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchgear and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective

device.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Manufacturer’s Service Organization or independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that has established time



honored procedures from the manufacturer with training, or is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently authorized by the manufacturer and

trained by the manufacturer or certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain switchgear through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of switchgear and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

E. Installation shall comply with NFPA 70.


A. Deliver switchgear in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.

B. Store switchgear indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect switchgear from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Store per the manufacturer’s directions and instructions.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace building components and structures to provide pathway for moving switchgear into place.

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Contracting Officer or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect no fewer than fourteen days in advance of proposed interruption of

electric service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect’s written

permission. 3. Comply with NFPA 79E.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchgear, including clearances between switchgear, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 40 deg C.



2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchgear and components with other construction that penetrates walls, ceilings or is supported by them, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required clearances for workspace and equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Four of each type and rating used. Include spares for potential transformer fuses,

control power fuses, and fuses and fusible devices for fused circuit breakers. 2. Indicating Lights: Four of each type installed. 3. Touchup Paint: Three containers of paint matching enclosure finish, each 0.5 pint (250

mL).

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace switchgear enclosures, buswork, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and factory installed interconnection wiring that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's agrees to repair or replace surge protection devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol-lowing: 1. Eaton Corporation. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

2.2 RATINGS

A. Nominal System Voltage: 480/277 V, 4 wire, 60 Hz or as indicated on drawings.

B. Main-Bus Continuous: Copper as shown on the drawings.



C. Short-Time and Short-Circuit Current: Match rating of highest-rated circuit breaker in switchgear assembly.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Factory assembled and tested and complying with IEEE C37.20.1.

B. Outdoor Unit Arrangement: Single assembly. 1. Weatherproof, listed for installation outdoors. 2. Aisle-less Construction: Full-height doors in front of basic weatherproof equipment. 3. Furnish and install thermostatically controlled space heaters in each section of outdoor

switchgear and separately mounted transformer section. Each section shall have a minimum of three (3) 250 watt, 240 volt rated heaters applied at 120 VAC for extended life.

C. Indoor Enclosure Material: Steel.

D. Outdoor Enclosure: Weatherproof, aisle-less construction for outdoor service. Galvanized-steel waterproof construction; integral structural-steel base frame with factory-applied asphaltic undercoating. The enclosure shall contain a rearward sloping roof and shall contain rear hinged doors for each section with provisions for padlocking. Each compartment shall be equipped with the following features: 1. Structural design and anchorage adequate to resist loads imposed by 125-mph wind. 2. Space heaters operating at 120 volts, sized to prevent condensation, controlled by

thermostats to maintain temperature of each section above expected dew point. 3. Louvers equipped with insect and rodent screen and filter, and arranged to permit air

circulation while excluding insects, rodents, and exterior dust. 4. Hinged front door with padlocking provisions.

E. Finish: IEEE C37.20.1, manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on phosphatizing-treated metal surfaces.

F. Section barriers between main and feeder circuit-breaker compartments shall be extended to rear of section.

G. Bus isolation barriers shall be arranged to isolate line bus from load bus at each main and tie circuit breaker.

H. Circuit-breaker compartments shall be equipped to house drawout-type circuit breakers and shall be fitted with hinged outer doors. Switchgear sections shall have rear hinged doors with padlocking provisions.

I. Removable, Hinged Rear Doors and Compartment Covers:, Secured by cam latch for access to rear interior of switchgear.

J. Hinged Front Panels: To allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank compartments.

K. Auxiliary Compartments: Match and align with basic switchgear assembly. Include the following, where shown on the drawings or schedules:



1. Customer metering compartment with digital meter. 2. Bus transition sections. 3. Incoming-line cable terminations with barriers for service entrance applications. 4. Hinged front panels for access to metering, accessory, and blank compartments. 5. Where shown on drawings or required, furnish and install a pull box on top of switchgear

for extra room for pulling cable, with removable top, front, and side covers and ventilation provisions adequate to maintain air temperature in pull box within same limits as switchgear. a. Set pull box back from front to clear circuit-breaker lifting mechanism. b. Bottom: Insulating, fire-resistant material with separate holes for cable drops into

switchgear. c. Cable Supports: Arranged to ease cabling and adequate to support cables

indicated, including those for future installation.

L. Bus bars connect between vertical sections and between compartments. Cable connections are not permitted. 1. Main Phase Bus: Uniform capacity the entire length of assembly. 2. Neutral Bus: 100 percent of phase-bus ampacity, except as indicated. Equip bus with

pressure-connector terminations for outgoing circuit neutral conductors. Include braces for neutral-bus extensions for busway feeders.

3. Vertical Section Bus Size: Comply with IEEE C37.20.1, including allowance for spare circuit breakers and spaces for future circuit breakers.

4. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum conductivity, with copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.

5. Use copper for connecting circuit-breaker line to copper bus. 6. Contact Surfaces of Buses: Silver plated. 7. Feeder Circuit-Breaker Load Terminals: Silver-plated copper bus extensions equipped

with compression connectors for outgoing circuit conductors. 8. Ground Bus: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum conductivity, with pressure

connector for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors, minimum size 1/4 by 2 inches (6 by 50 mm).

9. Supports and Bracing for Buses: Adequate strength for indicated short-circuit currents. 10. Neutral bus equipped with compression-connector terminations for outgoing circuit

neutral conductors. Neutral-bus extensions for busway feeders are braced. 11. Neutral Disconnect Link: Bolted, uninsulated, 1/4-by-2-inch (6-by-50-mm) copper bus,

arranged to connect neutral bus to ground bus. 12. Provide for future extensions from either end of main phase, neutral, tie insulated neutral

and ground bus by means of predrilled bolt-holes and connecting links. 13. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, full height bus,

bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of overcurrent protection device compartment.

14. The Utility Switchgear shall be listed and labeled as a suitable connection to an onsite renewable energy source.

15. Switchgear Fault Current Study Labeling: Provide placard mounted on the enclosure of each switchgear matching nameplate placard described in Division 26, indicating the following information: a. Date of Short Circuit, Fault current, and Arc Flash Study b. Available maximum three phase fault current at line terminals of equipment c. Fault Current Rating of switchgear equipment



16. Bus-Bar Insulation: Individual bus bars wrapped with factory-applied, flame-retardant tape or spray-applied, flame-retardant insulation. a. Sprayed Insulation Thickness: 3 mils (0.08 mm), minimum. b. Bolted Bus Joints: Insulate with secure joint covers that can easily be removed and

reinstalled.

2.4 COMPONENTS

A. Instrument Transformers: Comply with IEEE C57.13. 1. Potential Transformers: Secondary-voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA accuracy class of

0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y. 2. Current Transformers: Ratios as indicated; burden and accuracy class suitable for

connected relays, meters, and instruments.

B. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: UL-listed or -recognized, microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the features as specified below. 1. Where indicated on the drawings, provide a microprocessor based line of Power Quality

Meter(s), designated (PQM), equal to Eaton PXM6000 series meter. 2. A complete PQM combination meter base and/or display shall be have the following

minimum listings and/or certifications: a. Safety: UL 61010-1, EN 610101. b. Accuracy: ANSI C12.20 Class 0.2, IEC/EN60687 0.2 for revenue meters. c. EMC: FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A immunity. d. IEC Standards: 50081-2, 61000-3, 61000-4, and 61326.

3. The PQM shall be supplied suitable for standard 120/240 Vac or 110/250 Vdc inputs as required or indicated on the drawings.

4. Current inputs for each channel shall be from standard instrument current transformers. a. The analog current input shall be converted to 4096 samples per cycle with a delta-

sigma converter digitally filtered down to 512 samples per cycle for anti-aliasing. b. Meter burden shall be less than 10 milliohms. c. Overload withstand capability shall be a minimum of 500A for 1 second, non-

repeating. d. Input range capability shall be 0.005 to 20 amperes.

5. Voltage inputs for each channel shall allow for connection into circuits with the follow-ing parameters: a. Input range of 600V L-L, 347V L-N direct connected. b. PT primary input of 120 volts to 500,000 volts. c. Nominal full-scale value of 700 volts rms. d. Input impedance of 2 mega ohms. e. The analog voltage input shall be converted to 4096 samples per cycle by means of

a delta sigma converter and digitally filtered down to 512 samples per cycle for an-ti-phasing.

6. The PQM shall be capable of monitoring, displaying, and communicating the below true rms minimum information where applicable with the accuracy as indicated of read or cal-culated values based on 3 to 300% full scale. The PQM shall be suitable for installation in single phase, two or three wire systems or in three phase, three or four wire systems a. AC current (amperes) in A, B and C phase, 3-phase average, Neutral (N) and

Ground (G). A total of five (5) current inputs shall be provided. Accuracy of all current inputs shall be 0.05% reading, +/- 0.01% of full scale. Provide neutral and



ground current transformers. The 5 ampere current inputs shall withstand 40 am-peres continuous and 300 amperes for 1 second. Current transformer ratios shall be selectable.

b. AC voltage (volts) for A-B, B-C and C-A, phase average, A-N, B-N and C-N, av-erage phase to N, and N to G. Accuracy of all voltage inputs shall be +/- 0.1% reading, +/-0.05% maximum of full scale. Capable of metering up to 600 volt without external Potential Transformers (PTs) and up to 500 kV with appropriate PTs.

c. Auxiliary AC voltage (volts) for A2-B2, B2-C2, and C2-A2, phase average. Accu-racy of all voltage inputs shall be +/- 0.1% reading, +/-0.05% maximum of full scale. Capable of metering up to 600 volt without external Potential Transformers (PTs) and up to 500 kV with appropriate PTs.

d. Real Power (Watts), Reactive Power (vars), Apparent Power (VA), for each phase and system. Accuracy +/- 0.10% reading and +/- 0.0025% full scale. For-ward/Reverse indication shall be provided.

e. Accumulated, Incremental and conditional measurement for Real Energy (WH), Reactive Energy (VARH), Apparent Energy (VAH) for each phase and system. Accuracy +/- 0.10% reading and +/- 0.0025% full scale. Forward/Reverse and Net difference indication shall be provided.

f. Frequency (Hz) Accuracy +/- 0.01 hertz. g. Demand values including present, running average, last complete interval and peak

for System Current (Amperes). Demand values including present, running average, last complete interval, peak and coincident with peak kVA and kW demand for System Real Power (Watts), System Reactive Power (vars), and System Apparent Power (VA).

h. Power Factor for both Displacement only 60-cycle fundamental Watts to VA and Apparent total Watts to total vars including harmonics for A, B and C phase and 3 phase average. Accuracy +/- 0.10% at unity PF and +/-0.30% at 0.5 PF.

i. Current percent Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) in A, B and C phase and N. j. Voltage percent THD in A-B, B-C and C-A phase, A-N, B-N and C-N. k. K-Factor (sum of the squares of harmonic currents times the square of their har-

monic numbers). l. Transformer Derating Factor (1.414 divided by the Crest Factor). m. Crest Factor (ratio of peak current to rms current). n. CBEMA (ITIC) curve data o. Flicker data p. Nines (9’s) availability data. q. Power Quality Index

7. The PQM shall provide the following sampling capabilities: a. A/D technology, sampling at 4096 samples per cycle. b. Over-sampling and quantizing filtering to eliminate false signal noise. c. ITIC representation of power events. d. Waveform recorded at 512 standard sample per cycle.

8. The PQM shall provide the following advanced analysis features: a. Calculation of harmonic magnitudes and phase angle for each phase voltage and

current through the 85th harmonic. b. Waveforms shall be available in non-volatile memory and retrievable via file trans-

fer protocol (ftp) in COMTRADE file format over the Internet network.



c. Historical Trending: Historical trend logging for graphical viewing from the Local PX-D display or from an embedded WEB server. The graphical views of historical data shall support both pan and zoom functions. All standard metering parameters shall be logged as part of the standard meter functionality including minimum, maximum and average for each metered parameter. The minimum and maximum readings shall be based on 200ms calculations. The averages shall be calculated over the user selected time interval period. Minimum storage capacity for standard trend plots shall be as follows: 1) Five-minute intervals for 48 hours (2 days). 2) Fifteen-minute intervals for 192 hours (8 days) 3) One-hour intervals for 28 days 4) Eight-hour intervals for 56 weeks 5) One-week intervals for 44 months 6) Data storage available in 4GB-PXM 6000 only.

9. Time of Use Monitoring: Time of use monitoring shall include: a. Four rate periods for time of use revenue metering. b. Total rate independent of time of use. c. Up to 4 rate schedules (weekdays and weekends).

10. Energy Profile: Energy profile data shall include recording of real and reactive energy forward, reverse, net and absolute sum as well as apparent energy (KVAH). Up to eight (8) status inputs shall be configurable as energy accumulators for counting KYZ pulse inputs. These readings shall be stored over a configurable interval from 1 to 60 minutes as well as in daily and weekly totals. Storage capacity shall be as follows: a. Sixty-two (62) days of fifteen (15) minute interval energy and pulse interval data.

(Fixed interval capacity shall equal 5,952 intervals configurable from 1 to 60 minutes).

b. Three hundred and seventy-two (372) days of 1 day accumulated energy and pulse interval data.

c. Two Hundred and eight (208) weeks of one (1) week accumulated energy and pulse interval data.

11. Event Triggers: The PX-M shall have a quantity of five (5) types of configurable event triggers consisting of 1) Out of limits, 2) Demand overload, 3) ITIC, 4) Sub-Cycle dis-turbance and 5) Fast Transient. These triggers shall permit pickup, reset and pickup delay to be user configurable. When a trigger occurs, actions shall include Performance moni-toring (Nines (9s) analysis, Capturing Waveform, Capture all metered parameters, and ability to send by email and/or activate a relay output. The meter graphic display PX-D shall flash an LED to annunciate the alarm condition and an audible alarm shall be avail-able. The following trigger options shall be included: a. Out of limits – one hundred and five (105) triggers. b. Demand overload – Ten (10) triggers. c. Sub-cycle disturbance – dV/dt and absolute. d. ITIC curve display sag or swell voltage events – Eight (8) triggers.

12. Event Logging: The PX-M or embedded WEB Server shall allow the user to view a list of triggered events along with any captured parameters, event details, and triggered waveforms. In addition, a separate event log shall include logging of activities including acknowledged triggers, new minimum and maximum events, and systems operations, such as resets. The size of each event log shall be virtually unlimited based only on the memory option selected.



13. ITIC Analysis Plot: The PX-D or embedded WEB Server shall include a graphic display of the Information Technology Industry Council (ITIC) plot with counts of disturbances and transients that have occurred. The ITIC plot shall organize events into eight (8) dis-tinct disturbance zones corresponding to the severity of the event and a ninth (9th) zone for transients. A pass/fail count shall be displayed to indicate how many events are out-side the ITIC limits. Operator clicking of any counter in the ITIC WEB page shall link the user to the event view and display all triggered events in the selected zone making it easy to view disturbance waveforms associated with the ITIC plot.

14. Sag/Swell and Waveform recording: Sixty (60) cycles of waveform shall be recorded at 512 samples per cycle including 30 cycles of pre and post event data. The embedded WEB server shall be capable of supporting viewing of all triggered waveforms one chan-nel at a time and shall include the ability to zoom and to scroll horizontally using a slider bar. Waveforms shall be stored in non-volatile flash memory using industry standard COMTRADE format. Waveforms shall have the capability to be automatically sent out as COMTRADE attachments to an email following an event, or shall be retrievable from a ftp directory structure from the meter’s memory.

15. Minimum and Maximum values for the following parameters: a. Voltage L-L and L-N b. Current per phase c. Apparent Power Factor and Displacement Power Factor d. Real, Reactive, and Apparent total Power e. THD voltage L-L and L-N f. THD Current per phase g. Frequency

16. The PQM shall have (provisions for) a digital Input/Output (I/O) card which shall in-clude: a. Eight (8) digital inputs – self sourced 24 Vdc. These shall be interrupt driven, al-

lowing for 1ms accuracy of digital events time stamps when utilizing local NTP server. Inputs shall be configurable for demand synch, and pulse counting. Inputs selected for pulse counting shall be scalable. Interval by interval pulse recordings shall be maintained in the PX-M/PX-B profile memory and shall be capable of be-ing displayed graphically.

b. Three (3) relay outputs – 5A maximum form C continuous, 380Vac maximum, 125Vdc maximum. Outputs shall be suitable for KYX or alarm annunciation. Relay outputs shall have the following minimum ratings: 1) Make: 30A, 30 Vdc, 120-240 Vac. 2) Break: 5A, 30 Vdc, 120-240 Vac. 3) Resistive load: 0.5A, 125Vdc; 0.25A, 250 Vdc. 4) Mechanical Operations: 1,000,000 no-load and100,000 under rated voltage

and current. 5) Output Relay when event triggered shall be capable of operating in timed,

normal or latched mode. c. Two (2) solid state outputs – 80 mA maximum continuous, 30 Vdc maximum.

17. The PQM shall be provided with multiple communications ports and protocols, including the following capability one of which shall be chosen for the application: a. RS-485 remote display port b. RS-485 Modbus RTU c. RJ-45 10/100 baseT Local Ethernet Configuration Port for local WEB server con-

nection



d. HTML web pages e. File transfer protocol (ftp) f. RJ-45 Selectable 100FX or 10/100Base-T Ethernet network port g. RS-232 h. RS-485 Modbus RTU selectable master/slave port i. Modbus TCP j. SMTP(Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) for email support k. SNMP(Simple Network Management Protocol) MIB support l. Ethernet TCP/IP m. NTP(Network Time Protocol) support

18. The PXM468-Disp-12 color touch screen display shall provide full access to all measured and stored parameters in the meter. It shall also provide graphical real time information, trend charts of key circuit measurements, waveform, harmonics, and calendar displays. a. 12 inch 1024 x 768-pixel backlit LCD graphic touch screen display. b. IP65 aluminum front panel.

19. The WEB server shall provide the user with remote WEB access to all the metered, trend and waveform information. The WEB server shall include real time monitored infor-mation in both numeric and graphical visual formats.

20. A reset button shall be provided on the PX-M and PX-B to be able to reset communica-tions to factory defaults. Reset capabilities shall be provided in conjunction with various lockable dip switch settings

21. The 12-inch display and meter shall be capable of providing the graphically display of the following Main Meter Menu Screens: a. Overview Tab providing:

1) Volts: L-L and L-N, and average 2) Frequency 3) Current and average phase A, B, and C, N & G 4) Power Quality Index 5) Demand Comparison 6) Events Summary

b. Trends Tab providing: 1) Meter 2) Power 3) Quality 4) Phasor

c. Energy Tab providing: 1) Energy and Demand Data 2) Time of Use Information

d. Timeline Tab providing: 1) Latest events 2) Enabled Triggers 3) Historical Events 4) Calendar view of Events 5) Events Timeline screen 6) ITIC Curve

e. I/O Tab providing: 1) Discrete input status 2) Relay output status 3) Counter data



22. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument compartment door.

C. SPD Units: Furnish and install units conforming to UL1449, current Edition. 1. Install in cell compartment and connect in each phase of circuit. 2. Furnish and install 250kA per phase surge rating for service entrance applications.

D. Provision for Future Devices: Equip compartments with rails, mounting brackets, supports, necessary appurtenances, and bus connections.

E. Control Power Supply: Control power transformer supplying 120-V control circuits through secondary disconnect devices. Include the following features: 1. Dry-type transformers, with kVA ratings sized per the applications, including primary

and secondary fuses. 2. Locate control power where required, and wire the transformer to line side of associated

main circuit breaker or incoming service. a. Secondary windings connected through a relay or relays to control circuits or bus

to affect an automatic secondary voltage transfer scheme, where applicable. b. Secondary windings connected through an internal automatic transfer relay to

switchgear control power cable/bus, where applicable. 3. Control Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses with current-limiting and overload

protection. 4. Fuses are specified in Division 26 Section "Fuses."

F. Control Wiring: Factory installed, complete with bundling, lacing, and protection; and complying with the following: 1. Flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges and for

conductors for interconnections between shipping units. 2. Conductors sized according to NFPA 70 for duty required.

G. Ground Fault Protection System: Furnish and install.

2.5 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Description: Comply with IEEE C37.13.

B. Ratings: As indicated on drawings for continuous, interrupting, and short-time current ratings for each circuit breaker; voltage and frequency ratings same as switchgear. All circuit breakers shall be rated for 85 kAIC interrupting without fuses. All circuit breakers shall be electrically operated with control switches and indicating LED lights.

C. Operating Mechanism: Mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operating mechanism with the following features: 1. Normal Closing Speed: Independent of both control and operator. 2. Slow Closing Speed: Optional with operator for inspection and adjustment. 3. Stored-Energy Mechanism Electrically charged, with optional manual charging. 4. Operation counter.



D. Trip Devices: Microprocessor based, overcurrent trip-device system consisting of one or two current transformers or sensors per phase, a release mechanism, and the features listed in the specification section below. 1. Trip Indication: Labeled, battery-powered lights or mechanical targets on trip device to

indicate type of fault.

E. Auxiliary Contacts: For interlocking or remote indication of circuit-breaker position, with spare auxiliary switches and other auxiliary switches required for normal circuit-breaker operation, quantity as required. Each consists of two Type "a" and two Type "b" stages (contacts) wired through secondary disconnect devices to a terminal block in stationary housing.

F. Drawout Features: Circuit-breaker mounting assembly equipped with a racking mechanism to position circuit breaker and hold it rigidly in connected, test, and disconnected positions. Include the following features: 1. Interlocks: Prevent movement of circuit breaker to or from connected position when it is

closed, and prevent closure of circuit breaker unless it is in connected, test, or disconnected position.

2. Circuit-Breaker Positioning: An open circuit breaker may be racked to or from connected, test, and disconnected positions only with the associated compartment door closed unless live parts are covered by a full dead-front shield. An open circuit breaker may be manually withdrawn to a position for removal from the structure with the door open. Status for connection devices for different positions includes the following: a. Test Position: Primary disconnect devices disengaged, and secondary disconnect

devices and ground contact engaged. b. Disconnected Position: Primary and secondary devices and ground contact

disengaged. c. Furnish and install cell switches in drawout circuit breaker cells.

G. Arc Chutes: Readily removable from associated circuit breaker when it is in disconnected position, and arranged to permit inspection of contacts without removing circuit breaker from switchgear.

H. Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least three padlocks on each circuit breaker to secure its enclosure and prevent movement of drawout mechanism.

I. Operating Handle: One for each circuit breaker capable of manual operation.

J. Electric Control Switch: One for each electrically operated circuit breaker.

K. Mechanical Interlocking of Circuit Breakers: Uses a mechanical tripping lever or equivalent design and electrical interlocks.

L. Key Interlocks: Arranged so keys are attached at devices indicated. Mountings and hardware are included where future installation of key-interlock devices is indicated.

M. Shunt-Trip Devices: Where indicated or as required.

N. LED type Indicating Lights: To indicate circuit breaker is open or closed, for all circuit breakers.



2.6 PROGRAMMABLE TRIP UNITS (DIGITRIP)

A. Each low voltage power circuit breaker shall be equipped with a solid-state tripping system consisting of three current sensors, microprocessor-based trip device and flux-transfer shunt trip. Current sensors shall provide operation and signal function. The trip unit shall use microprocessor-based technology to provide the basic adjustable time-current protection functions. True rms sensing circuit protection shall be achieved by analyzing the secondary current signals received from the circuit breaker current sensors and initiating trip signals to the circuit breaker trip actuators when predetermined trip levels and time delay settings are reached. Interchangeable current sensors with their associated rating plug shall establish the continuous trip rating of each circuit breaker. The trip unit shall be Eaton type Digitrip RMS 520MC.

B. The trip unit shall have an information system that utilizes battery backup LEDs to indicate mode of trip following an automatic trip operation. The indication of the mode of trip shall be retained after an automatic trip. A reset button shall be provided to turn off the LED indication after an automatic trip. A test pushbutton shall energize a LED to indicate the battery status,

C. The trip unit shall be provided with a display panel, including a representation of the time/current curve that will indicate the protection functions. The unit shall be continuously self-checking and provide a visual indication that the internal circuitry is being monitored and is fully operational

D. The trip unit shall be provided with a making-current release circuit. The circuit shall be armed for approximately two cycles after breaker closing and shall operate for all peak fault levels above 25 times the ampere value of the rating plug.

E. Trip unit shall have selectable powered and unpowered thermal memory for enhanced circuit protection.

F. Internal ground fault protection or alarm settings if present shall not exceed 1200 amperes. Provide neutral ground fault sensor for four-wire loads.

G. The trip unit shall have provisions for a single test kit to test each of the trip functions.

H. The trip unit shall be capable of providing zone interlocking for the short-time delay and ground fault delay trip functions for improved system coordination. The zone interlocking system shall restrain the tripping of an upstream breaker and allow the breaker closest to the fault to trip with no intentional time delay. In the event that the downstream breaker does not trip, the upstream breaker shall trip after the present time delay. Switchgear shall be wired for zone interlocking for the power circuit breakers within the switchgear.

I. Circuit breakers, where indicated on the drawings, shall have individually adjustable ground fault alarm only.

J. The trip unit shall have a LCD display showing phase, neutral, and ground current. The accuracy of these readings shall be +/- 2% of full scale.

K. The trip unit shall be equipped to permit communication via a network twisted pair for remote monitoring.



.

L. The trip unit shall include a power/relay module which shall supply control to the readout display. Following an automatic trip operation of the circuit breaker, the trip unit shall maintain the cause of trip history and the mode of trip LED indication as long as its internal power supply is available. An internal relay shall be programmable to provide contacts for remote ground alarm indication.

M. The trip unit shall include a voltage transformer module, suitable for operation up to 600V, 50/60 Hz. The primary of the voltage transformer module shall be connected internally to the line side of the circuit breaker through a dielectric test disconnect plug,

N. System coordination shall be provided by the following microprocessor-based programmable time-current curve shaping adjustments. The short-time pickup adjustment shall be dependent on the long delay setting: 1. Programmed long time setting 2. Programmed long time delay with selectable curve shaping 3. Programmed short time setting 4. Programmed short time delay with selectable curve shaping and zone selective interlocking 5. Programmable instantaneous setting 6. Programmable ground fault setting trip or ground fault setting alarm r 7. Programmable ground fault delay and with selectable curve shaping and zone selective interlocking 8. The trip unit shall utilize ARMs Technology (Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance System). 9. The ARMs Technology shall be provided in a system that shall reduce the trip unit Instantaneous pickup value when activated. The ARMs device shall not compromise breaker phase protection even when enabled. Once the ARMs unit is disabled, the recalibration of trip unit phase protection shall not be required. Activation and deactivation of the ARMs Technology trip setting shall be accomplished without opening the circuit breaker door and exposing operators to energized parts. The ARMs Technology shall provide a clearing time of 0.04 seconds, adjustable with a minimum of five settings ranging from 2.5X to 10X of the sensor value. The ARMS technology shall be enabled via a switch on the trip unit and it shall also provide confirmation of ARMS protection via a BLUE LED.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES

A. Key interlocks shall be provided as indicated on the drawings. These interlocks shall keep the circuit breakers trip-free when actuated. Additional key interlocks shall be supplied on the incoming main circuit breakers coordinated with the upstream protectors to assure that the protector fuses are not accessed unless the main circuit breaker is locked in the disconnect position.

B. Fused control power transformers shall be provided within the switchgear for each incoming feeder circuit on the drawings or as required for proper operation of the equipment. A manual disconnect shall be provided ahead of the primary fuses. A secondary control transfer system of relays shall assure that the control cable circuits are powered from the first available source.

C. Furnish and install Ground Fault Tripping or Alarming Only per the schedules. .



D. Wire trip units to a sub-network cable with the switchgear for future tie to a communications system.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Accessory Set: Furnish tools and miscellaneous items required for circuit-breaker and switchgear test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. 1. Racking handle to manually move circuit breaker between connected and disconnected

positions. 2. Portable test set for testing all functions of circuit-breaker, solid-state trip devices without

removal from switchgear. 3. Relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchgear meters and switchgear class

relays.

B. Circuit-Breaker Removal Apparatus: Portable, floor-supported, roller-base, elevating carriage arranged for moving circuit breakers in and out of compartments.

C. Circuit-Breaker Removal Apparatus: Overhead-circuit-breaker lifting device, track mounted at top front of switchgear and complete with hoist and lifting yokes matching each size of drawout circuit breaker installed.

D. Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Identified and compartmented steel box or cabinet with lockable door.

E. Storage for Manual: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a copy of maintenance manual.

2.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Mimic Bus: Continuous mimic bus, arranged in single-line diagram format, using symbols and lettered designations consistent with approved mimic-bus diagram. 1. Mimic-bus segments coordinated with devices in switchgear sections to which applied, to

produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchgear components and connections.

2. Medium: Painted or plastic graphics,. 3. Color: Contrasting with factory-finish background; from manufacturer's full range.

B. System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution components, and major loads. Include as-built data for low-voltage power switchgear and connections as follows: 1. Frame size of each circuit breaker. 2. Trip rating for each circuit breaker. 3. Conduit and wire size for each feeder.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces where switchgear will be installed for compliance with installa-tion tolerances, required clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with applicable portions of NECA 400.

B. Anchor switchgear assembly to 4-inch (100-mm), channel-iron floor sill embedded in concrete base and attach by bolting. 1. Sills: Select to suit switchgear; level and grout flush into concrete base. 2. Concrete Bases: 4 inches high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more

than 4 inches in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switchgear unless otherwise indicated. Construct concrete bases according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "IIdentification for Electrical Systems"

B. Diagram and Instructions: 1. Frame and mount under clear acrylic plastic on the front of switchgear.

a. Operating Instructions: Printed basic instructions for switchgear, including control and key-interlock sequences and emergency procedures.

b. System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution components, and major loads.

2. Storage for Maintenance: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a copy of maintenance manual.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. All cables shall be terminated using two hole compression lugs.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following: 1. Inspect switchgear installation, including wiring, components, connections, and

equipment.

2. Provide Manufacturer’s Field Services for Startup for assemblies for minimum of 8 days. 3. Verify that electrical control wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal

by means of point-to-point continuity testing. Verify that wiring installation complies



with requirements in Division 16 Sections. Set the relays and trip unit settings per the Study.

4. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Assist in field testing of equipment. 6. Report results in writing.

B. Testing Agency: Engage the manufacturer’s Field Service Group or a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS.

Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA tests and inspections for each of the following NETA categories: a. Switchgear. b. Circuit breakers. c. Protective relays. d. Distribution transformers. e. Instrument transformers. f. Metering and instrumentation. g. Ground-fault systems. h. Battery systems. i. Surge arresters. j. Capacitors.

2. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchgear. Remove front and rear panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each

switchgear 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. 2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to

detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switchgear checked

and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip characteristics according to results in Division 16 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination."

B. Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip characteristics.

C. Set field adjustable event and alarm logs for owner’s meters.

3.7 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchgear. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.



3.8 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to switchgear, according to manufacturer's written instructions, throughout periods when switchgear environment is not controlled for temperature and humidity within manufacturer's stipulated service conditions.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Contracting Officer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchgear. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."

B. Provide training for a minimum of six hours each, for two sessions, with each session consisting of no more than five participants.



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 262413-1 Alexandria, Virginia SWITCHBOARDS

SECTION 262413 - SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Furnish and install the switchboards with service entrance labeling and other labeling as shown on the drawings and required by the Specifications of this and other sections.

B. Section Includes: 1. Service entrance and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less. 2. Switchboard mounted Surge protection devices. 3. Switchboard mounted Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. 4. Switchboard mounted Instrumentation. 5. Switchboard Control power. 6. Switchboard mounted Accessory components and features. 7. Switchboard Identification. 8. Switchboard Mimic bus.

C. Related Sections 1. Division 26 “Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits.”


A. Product Data: For each switchboard, overcurrent protective device, surge protection device, ground-fault protector, accessory, and component. 1. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical

characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required

clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Detail short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include descriptive documentation of optional barriers specified for electrical insulation

and isolation of emergency sections as shown on drawings. 6. Detail utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility

company. 7. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.



8. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.

9. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

10. Include diagram and details of proposed mimic bus. 11. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified material and finish, for color selection.


A. Shop Drawing and Product Data: 1. Submit switchboards with or after completion of the electrical system studies required by

Division 26. 2. Submit letter from electric utility certifying metering compartment(s) complies with the

Electric Utility Company’s requirements.

B. Qualification Data: For Installer.

C. Field Quality-Control Reports: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Division 01 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include

the following: a. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components. b. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices. c. Time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective

device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers qualified as defined in NEMA PB 2.1 and trained in electrical safety as required by NFPA 70E.


A. Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.

B. Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NEMA PB 2.1.




A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and structures to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place.

B. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install switchboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet

work in spaces is complete and dry. 2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise

indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C) b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric

service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect's written


1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace switchboard enclosures, buswork, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and factory installed interconnection wiring that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's agrees to repair or replace surge protection devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SWITCHBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. EATON Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products 2. General Electric Co. Electrical Distribution & Protection Division 3. Schneider Electric, Square D Brands

B. Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchboards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NEMA PB 2.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

G. Comply with UL 891.

H. Switchboard shall be completely self-supporting structure of the required number of vertical sections bolted together to form one metal-enclosed switchboard 90 inches high. Sides, top and rear covers shall be code gage steel, bolted to the switchboard structure. The frame structure members shall be die-formed 12-gage steel bolted together and reinforced at corners with gussets. The switchboard frame is to be suitable for use as floor sills.

I. Switchboard structure shall be designed so that extension may be accomplished in the future by the addition of new cubicles and by simple splice plates on the horizontal bus. An air space of at least two inches or a minimum one eighth inch thickness insulating barrier shall be provided between end of busbar and end panel.

J. The manufacturer shall coordinate with the contractor, the size and weight of the individual pieces making up each switchboard so that they may be delivered through the site conditions and installed in its final location.

K. Switchboards: 1. Main Devices: Fixed, individually mounted. 2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted, bolt-on, and front connected. 3. Sections front and rear aligned.

L. Nominal System Voltage: As indicated on the drawings.

M. Main-Bus Continuous: 4000 amps or as indicated on the drawings.



N. Indoor Enclosures: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1.

O. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.

P. Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections.

Q. Insulation and isolation for main and vertical buses of feeder sections, with insulated and sealed bussing between switchboard structures/sections.

R. Service Entrance Rating: Switchboards intended for use as service entrance equipment shall be UL listed as Service Entrance Rated.

S. Short Circuit Rating: Each Switchboard shall have a short circuit rating of 150,000 symmetrical amperes unless shown as a greater value on the drawings.

T. Utility Metering Compartment: Barrier compartment and section complying with utility company's requirements; hinged sealable door; buses provisioned for mounting utility company's current transformers and potential transformers or potential taps as required by utility company. If separate vertical section is required for utility metering, match and align with basic switchboard. Provide service entrance label and necessary applicable service entrance features.

U. Customer Metering Compartment: A separate customer metering compartment and section with front hinged door, for indicated metering, and current transformers for each meter. Current transformer secondary wiring shall be terminated on shorting-type terminal blocks. Include potential transformers having primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means and secondary wiring terminated on terminal blocks.

V. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard.

W. Removable, Hinged Rear Doors and Compartment Covers: Secured by cam latch for access to rear interior of switchboard when rear access is specified.

X. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank compartments.

Y. Pull Box on Top of Switchboard: 1. Adequate ventilation to maintain temperature in pull box within same limits as

switchboard. 2. Removable covers shall form top, front, and sides. Top covers at rear shall be easily

removable for drilling and cutting. 3. Bottom shall be insulating, fire-resistive material with separate holes for cable drops into

switchboard. 4. Cable supports shall be arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support cables

indicated, including those for future installation.

Z. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide phase bus arrangement A, B, C from front to back, top to bottom, and left to right

when viewed from the front of the switchboard.



2. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, silver-plated.

3. Bolted joint connections shall all be readily accessible for inspection and proper maintenance. All bolted joint connection locations shall be clearly identified with suitable signs.

4. All bolted joint connections shall have at least two bolts per joint per phase. All joint connections shall be multiple bolt using Bellville washers or full lap.

5. Copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections. 6. Ground Bus: Minimum-size required by UL 891, hard-drawn copper of 98 percent

conductivity, equipped with compression connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors.

7. Main-Phase Buses and Equipment-Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends.

8. For switchboard distribution sections where mounting multiple feeder overcurrent devices, provide maximum vertical bussing for a 90-inch high switchboard section. Provide additional overcurrent device spaces in addition to the minimum required quantity of devices, spares, and spaces indicated on the Drawings. The vertical bus and accessories shall be provided such that future devices can be mounted to the entire section’s vertical bus. Vertical bussing for mounting multiple feeder overcurrent devices shall be provided per NEMA PB-2 standards; however, this distribution vertical bussing shall not be rated less than 2000 amperes. Horizontal main bus shall be full sized; tapering/de-rating of horizontal bus is not acceptable.

9. Disconnect Links: a. Isolate neutral bus from incoming neutral conductors. b. Bond neutral bus to equipment-ground bus for switchboards utilized as service

equipment or separately derived systems. 10. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated,

equipped with compression connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace bus extensions for busway feeder neutral bus.

11. Isolation Barrier Access Provisions: Permit checking of bus-bolt tightness.

AA. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, full height bus, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of overcurrent protection device compartment.

BB. Switchboard Fault Current Study Labeling: Provide placard mounted on the enclosure of each switchboard matching nameplate placard described in Division 26, indicating the following information:

1. Date of Short Circuit, Fault current, and Arc Flash Study 2. Available maximum three phase fault current at line terminals of equipment 3. Fault Current Rating of switchboard equipment.

2.2 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES

A. SPDs: Comply with UL 1449, Type 1, connected to the load side of the service disconnect.

B. SPDs: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 1449, Type 1, connected to the load side of the service disconnect.



2.3 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series-connected rating (when allowed) or interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads

and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and double-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (5-mA trip).

4. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

5. MCCB Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

material. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

e. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated voltage.

B. Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker (ICCB): 100 percent continuous duty rated as indicated on drawings, sealed, insulated-case power circuit breaker with interrupting capacity rating to meet available fault current. 1. Fixed or drawout circuit-breaker mounting. 2. Two-step, stored-energy closing. 3. Full-function, microprocessor-based trip units with interchangeable rating plug, trip

indicators, and the following field-adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Time adjustments for long- and short-time pickup. c. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response. Ground fault protection

shall be provided for all systems operating at 150 volts to ground or higher. 4. Remote trip indication.

C. Bolted-Pressure Contact Switch: Main protective devices shall be UL-listed, bolted-pressure contact switches as manufactured by Pringle Company. Switches shall be charged before close with electric trip which can be closed only after the opening spring has been charged and ready for electrical opening by electric trip solenoid or manually by mechanical pushbutton. Provide primary and secondary fused control power transformer for electric trip switch. 1. Main switches shall be furnished with zero sequence ground fault protection systems for

use with CBC electric trip type bolted pressure switches. Provide ground fault trip test panel, adjustable ground fault current pick-up and ground fault time settings for all these devices. Ground fault protection shall be provided for all systems operating at 150 volts to ground or higher.



2. Main switches shall be provided with blown-fuse protection for use with CBC electric trip with indicating light.

3. Main switches shall be provided with line-side protection against single phasing of three-phase supply.

4. Switches shall be fused with Class L and Class J fuses Bussman type as specified in Division 26 "Fuses".

5. Service rated switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. .

D. Fused Switch: Feeder protective device shall be quick-make, quick-break fusible switches as manufactured by EATON. 1. Switches shall incorporate safety cover interlocks to prevent opening the cover with the

switch in the "on" position or prevent placing the switch in the "on" position with the cover open. Provide defeater feature for safety.

2. Switch handles shall have provisions for padlocking in the "on" or "off" position 3. Switches shall be clearly indicated to show if unit is "on" or "off" by position of

operating handle. 4. Unit’s front over door shall be padlockable in the closed position. 5. Fusible switches 30 Ampere through 600 Ampere frame size shall be furnished with

Class "J"(or type as recommended by the short circuit , overcurrent coordination, and arc flash study) UL-labeled fuse clips rated for 200,000 A.I.C.

6. Fusible switches 800 Ampere and 1200 Ampere frame size shall be furnished with Class "L" (or type as recommended by the short circuit , overcurrent coordination, and arc flash study) UL-labeled fuse clips rated for 200,000 A.I.C. Fuses are specified in Division 26 section "Fuses."

2.4 INSTRUMENTATION

A. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Provide Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the following features: 1. Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy

tolerances as indicated: a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. d. Megawatts: Plus or minus one percent. e. Megavars: Plus or minus one percent. f. Power Factor: Plus or minus one percent. g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.1 percent. h. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus one percent; accumulated

values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours. i. Megawatt Demand: Plus or minus 1 percent; demand interval programmable from

five to 60 minutes. j. Contact devices to operate remote impulse-totalizing demand meter.

2. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument compartment door.

3. All values shall be transmitted and displayed at the BMS and EPMC.



2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from switchboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchboard meters and switchboard class relays.

C. Mounting Accessories: For anchors, mounting channels, bolts, washers, and other mounting accessories, comply with manufacturer's instructions.

2.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Mimic Bus: Continuously integrated mimic bus factory applied to front of switchboard. Arrange in single-line diagram format, using symbols and letter designations consistent with final mimic-bus diagram.

B. Coordinate mimic-bus segments with devices in switchboard sections to which they are applied. Produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchboard components and connections.

C. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for switchboards with one or more service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NEMA PB 2.1. 1. Lift or move switchboards with spreader bars and manufacturer-supplied lifting straps

following manufacturer's instructions. 2. Use rollers, slings, or other manufacturer-approved methods if lifting straps are not

furnished. 3. Protect from moisture, dust, dirt, and debris during storage and installation. 4. Install temporary heating during storage per manufacturer's instructions.

B. Examine switchboards before installation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work or that affect the performance of the equipment.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 2.1.



B. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, four-inch nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03. 1. Install conduits entering underneath the switchboard, entering under the vertical section

where the conductors will terminate. Install with couplings flush with the concrete base. Extend two inches above concrete base after switchboard is anchored in place.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

3. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards. 6. Anchor switchboard to building structure at the top of the switchboard if required or

recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, straps and brackets, and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.

D. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of switchboards.

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.

F. Install overcurrent protective devices, surge protection devices, and instrumentation. 1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

G. Install spare-fuse cabinet.

H. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Bond conduits entering underneath the switchboard to the equipment ground bus with a bonding conductor sized per NFPA 70.

B. Support and secure conductors within the switchboard according to NFPA 70.

C. Connect conduits to switchboards.

D. Connect conductors to switchboard protective devices.

E. Connect line side conductors to incoming lugs within switchboard.

F. Connect controls conduit and conductors for signals from metering and ancillary switchboard equipment to remote equipment monitoring and other divisions’ systems, such as Division 23 building automation systems.



G. Connect any internal wiring necessary for SPD’s, customer metering equipment, or other

internal workings as necessary inside of switchboard according to Manufacturer’s

recommendations

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. The Contractor shall perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Acceptance Testing:

a. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. Open control and metering circuits within the switchboard, and remove neutral connection to surge protection and other electronic devices prior to insulation test. Reconnect after test.

b. Test continuity of each circuit. 2. Set and then test ground-fault protection of equipment for service equipment per

NFPA 70. 3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in

NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. 4. Correct malfunctioning units on-site where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 5. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies switchboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges using primary injection testing as specified in Division 26 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."



3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, instrumentation, and accessories, and to use and reprogram microprocessor-based trip, monitoring, and communication units.



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 262416-1 Alexandria, Virginia PANELBOARDS

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Specific Attention is called to the "General Requirements and Common Work Results for Electrical Systems" located in Section 26.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 3. Fused type feeder and branch circuit panel boards. 4. Microprocessor-based metering equipment

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. SPD: Surge protective device.


A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, surge protective device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical literature, specifications, and engineering data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed

devices, equipment features, and ratings. Indicate lug quantity and cable material and acceptable cable size range per lug.

2. Detail enclosure types, front covers, and details for each panelboard enclosure size and type.

3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Provide sample circuit directory card.



Indicate future provisions in each panelboard directory where ‘spare’ or ‘space’ is indicated on the drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Field Quality-Control Reports: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

C. Panelboard Schedules: Typed directories for installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective

device that allows adjustments.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Keys: Five spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. In addition to spare devices indicated on the Drawings, provide spare branch type circuit

breakers rated 15 and 20 amp, single pole and two pole, Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types: One spare of each type for each panelboard.

3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site

testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.



C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NEMA PB 1.



A. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.


A. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work

in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F (plus 40 deg C). b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: 1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of electric

service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect's written


1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain code required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. Maintain code required dedicated space above and below each panelboard.



B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases for freestanding panelboards with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace surge protective devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Distribution type Panelboards, Lighting and Appliance type panelboards, Overcurrent

Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories: a. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Protection Division c. Square D

2. Fused Coordination type Panelboards: a. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products b. General Electric c. Square-D d. Cooper Bussman e. Littelfuse

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Panel boards shall be provided with phase and neutral busses which have been rated in accordance with UL 67 heat rise tests.

B. Enclosures: Provide flush type mounted cabinets where located within finished spaces, and provide surface mounted cabinets in electrical, mechanical, or other utility rooms, or as specified on the drawings. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. Kitchens, Car Wash areas, or other

Wash-Down Areas where directed water may be present: NEMA 250, Type 4Xstainless steel.

c. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. d. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive

Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12. 2. Hinged Front Cover: Door in door construction. Entire front trim hinged to box and with

standard door and key locks within hinged trim cover. 3. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with

flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.



4. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.

5. Finishes: a. Panels and Trim: galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and

pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim. 6. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent

protective cover. 7. Panelboard cabinet locks, each keyed alike. 8. Bus bar connections shall be column consecutive phase-sequence type. 9. All panelboards shall have bus bars drilled and equipped with all hardware for bolt-on

devices. 10. Provide pad locking hardware on circuit breakers for small pieces of equipment which

are hardwired without a local disconnecting means (ergo, electric water coolers, dishwashers, ice makers, other specific use kitchen equipment, equipment with dedicated circuits without local in-sight disconnecting means, etc.).

11. Single, two, or three pole molded case circuit breakers indicated for shunt trip shall be UL listed, 60 Hz, factory installed, and have a 120-volt AC coil in addition to the requirements indicated hereinbefore. Trip-coil shall de-energize when breaker opens. Shunt trip breakers shall take an extra pole position within panelboards and may be either left or right mounted. Contractor shall provide the 120-volt circuit to power the shunt trip circuit. The shunt trip circuit activation device shall be a momentary close contact type. Contractor shall coordinate all accessories required for a complete and functional shunt trip circuit.

12. Provide circuit breakers protecting heat trace equipment with 30 milliamp rated ground fault circuit interrupter protection for equipment.

C. Incoming Mains Location: Top or bottom.

D. Load Side Feed Through Lug Locations: Opposite side of incoming lug locations, or double lugs on mains where project space constraints permit double main lugs and feed through lugs.

E. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Busbars shall be sized to limit the temperature rise within the panelboard to 50 deg C

with a 40 deg C ambient temperature. Busbars shall be round edge with bolted joint connections. Bolted joint connection locations shall be readily accessible for maintenance.

3. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box and enclosure.

4. Isolated Ground Bus where indicated on the drawings: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated from box and enclosure.

5. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus where indicated on the drawings: Neutral bus rated for 200 percent of phase bus current carrying capacity and UL listed as suitable for nonlinear loads.

6. Split Bus where indicated on the drawings: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections.

F. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.



1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression or Mechanical type for copper conductors,

compression type only for Aluminum conductors. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Compression or Mechanical type for copper conductors,

compression type only for Aluminum conductors, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs, incoming main device, or provide double lugs at main lugs where space constraints allow for double main lugs.

5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Compression or Mechanical type for copper conductors, compression type only for Aluminum conductors, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

6. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Compression or Mechanical type for copper conductors, compression type only for Aluminum conductors, suitable for use with conductor material.. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

7. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra-capacity neutral bus.

8. Brace distribution panelboards for a minimum of 100,000, amperes symmetrical at system phase to phase voltage.

9. Multi-section panelboards shall be bus connected with copper cables equal to or greater ampacity than the incoming feeder amperage. Cable connections shall be compression type bolt on cable connectors.

G. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

H. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

I. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system (when specified on panel schedule) with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit rating by an NRTL. It shall not be acceptable to provide Series connected short circuit ratings for panel boards in a system classified as Emergency or Legally Required Stand by system under the applicable edition NFPA 70, NEC Articles 700 and 701.

J. Panelboard Fault Current Study Labeling: Provide placard mounted on the enclosure of each panelboard matching nameplate placard described in Division 26, indicating the following information: 1. Date of Short Circuit, Fault current, and Arc Flash Study 2. Available maximum three phase fault current at line terminals of equipment 3. Fault Current Rating of panelboard equipment.


A. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying with UL 1449 SPD Type 2.



2.4 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

B. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike. Omit for fused-

switch panelboards.

C. Mains: Provide mains type as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-On type fused switches or plug-in fused switches where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

2.5 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

B. Mains: Provide mains type as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. Fused switches, with replaceable fuses.

D. Doors: Door in door construction. Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.6 LOAD CENTERS

A. Load Centers: Comply with UL 67.

B. Mains: As indicated on the Drawings.

C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

D. Conductor Connectors: Mechanical type for main, neutral, and ground lugs and buses.

2.7 FUSED COORDINATION TYPE PANELBOARDS

A. Panelboard Construction 1. Panelboards: built to NEMA PB 1 standard; with factory-installed, integral SPD where

indicated on the drawings; labeled by an NRTL for compliance with UL 67 after installing SPD.

2. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.



3. Mains: Main fused switch or main lugs, as indicated on the drawings. 4. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on switch and fuse. 5. Panelboard circuits 100A and less shall incorporate overcurrent protection and branch-

circuit rated disconnecting means into a single integrated component. Interiors shall be factory assembled.

6. Panelboard shall be equipped with a six-space spare fuse compartment for storing replacement branch circuit fuses. Spare fuse compartment shall be located behind locking panel door.

7. Bus bars shall be tin-plated copper with sufficient cross sectional area to meet UL 67 temperature rise requirements.

8. 200A/400A rated neutrals shall be standard, 400A or 800A rated neutral shall be provided where indicated in the associated schedules or drawings.

9. Bonded neutral shall be provided where specified in associated drawings. 10. Isolated or non-isolated equipment ground bar shall be provided as indicated in the

associated schedules or drawings. 11. Where a service-entrance rated panelboard is indicated in associated schedules or

drawings, a bonded neutral and non-isolated equipment ground bar shall be provided by the manufacturer.

B. Branch Fused Disconnects 1. Device shall have visible circuit ON/OFF indication with colored and international

symbol markings. 2. Device shall provide open fuse indication via permanently installed neon indicating light

or other acceptable means of visual blown fuse indication. 3. Device shall be UL and cUL Listed 600Volts AC at 200 KAIC or 125 Volts DC at 100

KAIC short-circuit current rating, load-break disconnect with amp ratings and number of poles as indicated on the panelboard schedule.

4. Fuse and disconnect assembly shall be a finger-safe component with trim installed. 5. Fuse and disconnect shall be mechanically interlocked so as not to allow fuse removal

while fuse terminals are energized. 6. No special tools shall be required for fuse removal. 7. Devices shall have bolt-on style bus connectors. 8. Device housing shall be clearly marked with device amperage. 9. Permanently installed lockout means shall be provided on the device for lockout tagout

procedures. Permanently installed means for locking device in the ON position shall also be provided.

10. Devices shall provide fuse amp rating rejection at the following ampacities to ensure continued circuit protection at the specified circuit rating: 15A, 20A, 30A, 40A, 50A, 60A, 70A, 80A and 100A.

11. Fuse classes shall be either class J, R, T, or CC. Fuses for NEC 700 and 701 systems shall be selected as necessary to provide a selectively coordinated system.

2.8 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series-connected rating (when allowed) or interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level

overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.



2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (5-mA trip).

4. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

5. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole configuration.

6. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials. Aluminum conductors if approved and provided shall be terminated with compression lugs. Mechanical lugs will not be approved for use with aluminum conductors.

c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads and single pole 20 amp and 15 devices; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

e. Shunt Trip: 120 V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated voltage.

f. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit.

g. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position.

B. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle. 1. Fuses and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26

"Fuses." 2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and number of poles.

2.9 PANELBOARD SUBMETERING (Branch Circuit Monitoring)

A. Each panelboard installed on the project shall be provided with a UL listed microprocessor-based Branch Circuit Monitoring System, Basis of Design- Eaton PXBCM, or approved equal having the specified features. This system shall consist of meter base, and meter module(s) as described below

B. The Branch Circuit Monitor shall measure the following operational data for up to 84 branch load circuits: 1. Forward and Reverse kWh 2. Watts, VA, Amps, Power Factor 3. Present and Peak demand readings for Amps, Forward and Reverse Watts 4. Maximum Watts, VA, Amps

C. The Branch Circuit Monitor shall support alarms for current that can be set based on percent of Breaker Rating and alarms for voltage based on percent of nominal voltage. 1. High, High-High, Low, Low-Low non-latching alarms for current. 2. High and Low latching alarms for current, resettable via Modbus or the WEB interface



3. High and Low latching and non-latching voltage alarms for each meter module input voltage.

4. Alarm Status and alarm counters shall be available via Modbus communications

D. Branch Circuit monitor shall support upgradeable firmware via communications.

E. The Branch Circuit Monitor shall have the following ratings 1. Elevation: 0 – 9843 ft (0 – 3000M) 2. Pollution degree: 2 (IEC 60644-1) 3. Ambient temperature range: -20°C – +70°C (-4° – +158°F) 4. Storage temperature range: -40°C to +85°C (-40°F - +185°F) 5. Humidity: 5% – 95% non-condensing. 6. PXBCM as a component shall have a NEMA 1 rating. When installed in an enclosure it

shall have the same rating as its enclosure NEMA [1] [3R] [4] [4X] [12]. 7. Housing ingress protection: IP20 as a component, in an enclosure the same as the

enclosure 8. CE Mark 9. EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility)

a. IEC61326: EMI IEC61000-4-X level 3 b. CISPR 11: Class B emissions, CISPR 22 (Ethernet) class B emissions c. FCC part 15 Class B emissions

10. UL/cUL 61010-1 3rd edition 11. EN61010-1

F. PXBCM Meter Base 1. Each PXBCM-MB Meter Base shall support connection of up to 4 Meter Modules in

either a MMS Strip or MME External configuration monitoring a total of up to 100 single-phase two-wire AC loads, 48 single-phase three-wire AC loads or 32 three-phase four-wire AC loads or combinations not to exceed 25 poles per meter module.

2. The PXBCM-MB shall be equipped with 4 meter module ports. Each port shall provide control power and communications to either a PXBCM-MMS Meter Module Strip or a PXBCM-MME Meter Module External with a maximum cable length of 28ft between each Meter Base and each Meter Module.

3. Each PXBCM-MB shall support connection to up to 4 PXBCM-MMS Meter Module Strip or 4 PXBCM-MME Meter Module External, or a combination of up to 4 total PXBCM-MMS and PXBCM-MME each meter module with independent single or three phase voltage metering circuits with inputs up to 277V L-N and 480V L-L.

4. PXBCM-MB Power Supply shall be rated for 100-277VAC L:N +/-10% CAT III, 47-63 Hz , 6W

5. The PXBCM-MB shall include a 3 terminal RS-485 serial port for Modbus RTU communications and an RJ-45 port for Ethernet communications. The Ethernet port shall support Modbus TCP communications as well as an Embedded WEB server.

6. The PXBCM-MB embedded WEB server shall support device configuration for to up to 4 PXBCM-MMS Meter Module Strip or 4 PXBCM-MME Meter Module External, or a combination of up to 4 total PXBCM-MMS and PXBCM-MME and display of up to 100 points of metering data. It shall be possible to save device configuration information to a file for archiving and for uploading to PXBCM.

7. The PXBCM-MB shall support connection to a pre-configured HMI via RS-485 serial port. The HMI shall not require configuration



8. The PXBCM-MB shall be equipped with LED’s to indicate communications activity and Device/Alarm Status. An LED shall also indicate if Ethernet is configured for DHCP (automatically assigned IP address) or Fixed IP (manually assigned IP address). The PXBCM-MB shall be equipped with 2 rotary switches to assign Modbus Slave ID 1-99.

9. The PXBCM-MB shall be equipped with security mode switches to enable the device to operate in a secure mode to prevent tampering with device configuration and resets over comms.

10. The PXBCM Meter Base shall automatically sense the type of PXBCM Meter Module connected to each of its 4 meter module ports.

11. The Configuration wizard shall support naming and configuration of up 100 virtual meters by assigning 1-3 channels of current to 1, 2 or 3 pole meters. Virtual meters shall aggregate the channel data assigned to each virtual meter and report the aggregated virtual meter values for: a. Forward and Reverse Energy b. Watts, VA, Average Amps and Power Factor c. Average and Peak demand for Watts and VA

G. PXBCM-MMS Meter Module Strip 1. PXBCM-MMS Meter Module Strips shall be available in configurations to mount on

either the left or right of a panelboard and contain 9, 15, or 21 CTs. Four additional 333mV connections shall be provided on each PXBCM-MMS for Auxiliary 333mV CT connections which can be used to monitor the panel mains or branch circuits. The MMS shall include both load current and voltage metering circuits providing meter data to the Meter Base.

2. The PXBCM Meter Module Strip shall be available with either 9 CT’s, 15 CT’s or 21 CT’s per assembly for factory assembly into Panelboards with 18, 30 or 42 poles. PXBCM MMS CT’s shall have be rated for up to 100A continuous current monitoring and designed to mount in an Eaton PRL-1a, PRS-2a or PRL-3e Panelboard with 1 inch breaker pole spacing.

3. PXBCM Meter Module Strip 1 inch center CTs shall have a window opening sufficient for insulated Aluminum conductor rated for 100A capacity

4. The PXBCM Meter Module Strip shall support direct connection of one set of 3 phase nominal metering voltage inputs up to 277V L-N and 480V L-L voltages and shall be rated as Cat III.

5. The Meter Modules can also monitor voltage in the following configurations: a. Three Phase, four wire wye b. Three phase, three wire delta c. Three phase, center tapped delta d. Three phase, three wire e. Single phase, two wire

6. Power and Energy metering shall be performed based on the voltage assignment for each 100A strip mounted CT and 333mV Aux CT current input as configured using the embedded WEB server.

7. PXBCM MMS Accuracy of kWh metering on branch circuits shall be rated for ANSI C12.20 0.5 accuracy class as a system, including 100A rated strip mounted solid core current transformers. kWh accuracy for 333mV input auxiliary circuits shall satisfy ANSI C12.20 0.5 class excluding external 333mV sensor performance.

8. The PXBCM MMS shall be UL approved for mounting to the panelboard interior with no interference. Strip placement shall line up 1 inch center CT’s with breaker poles and not impede the normal routing of branch circuit conductors in the panel enclosure.



9. The PXBCM MMS shall connect to the PXBCM MB using factory supplied cables.

H. PXBCM-MME Meter Module External 1. The PXBCM-MME provides the same metering functionality as the PXBCM-MMS but

is used for retrofit or non-uniform/high-mix load applications where the PXBCM-MMS strip mounted 100A CT’s cannot be applied.

2. The PXBCM Meter Module external shall support 25 channels of current using external 333mV current sensors connected to terminal strips on the PXBCM-MME.

3. The PXBCM Meter Module External shall support direct connection of one set of 3 phase nominal metering voltage inputs up to 277V L-N and 480V L-L voltages and shall be rated as Cat III.

4. The Meter Modules can also monitor voltage in the following configurations: a. Three Phase, four wire wye b. Three phase, three wire delta c. Three phase, center tapped delta d. Three phase, three wire e. Single phase, two wire

5. Power and Energy metering shall be performed based on the voltage assignment for each 333mV current sensor input as configured using the embedded WEB server.

6. PXBCM MMS Accuracy of kWh metering on 333mV input circuits shall satisfy ANSI C12.20 0.5 class excluding external 333mV sensor performance.

I. Each HMI Display shall display data for all configured sub-meters. 1. HMI configuration shall not be required for each sub-meter. The HMI shall discover the

configuration information automatically. 2. Displayed information shall include; 3. Sub-meter name, current, voltage, energy consumption, demand, and power factor for up

to 100 load circuits. Aggregated Power and Energy readings for any 1, 2 or 3 pole meters. 2.10 ENERGY DASHBOARD SYSTEM FOR SUBMETERING

A. Contractor shall provide an Energy Dashboard and electrical meters and communication wiring, raceways, and power supplies that meet intent specified in this section.

B. The following vendors have been approved to provide the system specified herein:

1. Eaton Corporation 2. Eneractive LLC 3. Schneider, Inc. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. Products in compliance with the specification and manufactured by others not named will be considered only if pre-approved by the Engineer ten (10) days prior to bid date.

C. Contractor and vendor shall submit approval drawings that meet the intent specified in this

section. 2.11 ENERGY DASHBOARD SYSTEM – SYSTEM DESCTIPTION A. Energy Dashboard System (EDS) shall be comprised of Web-Server to provide web-pages to

allow any networked PC with a web client view. Base offering shall include a Windows based



computer and software for report generation and system maintenance that can host to other networked computers on site.

B. Energy Dashboard System (EDS) shall support five energy load groups: HVAC systems,

Lighting systems, Plug loads, Process loads and Other miscellaneous loads.

C. EDS shall interface with microprocessor based meters as specified and as shown on the drawings. The meters at minimum shall have following capabilities: 1. Support Modbus-RTU communication protocol. 2. Shall have a local display. 3. Provide hourly kWh (forward and reverse) and Kw demand data over communications.

D. EDS shall have following display capabilities: 1. Display real time and historical energy use (kWh) of the facility and load groups. 2. Energy use values and trends shall be user configurable with possible configurations per

day, week, month or year. 3. Average and peak kW demand (non-coincidental) values and trends shall be available for

facility and load groups. User shall have ability to configure demand web pages per day, week, month or year.

4. EDS must be capable of calculating CO2 emissions based on energy use measurements. 5. EDS shall be able to display any values mentioned in this section for minimum period of

36 months. 6. The EDS shall be accessible from permanent, readily accessible and visible display

located adjacent to the main building entrance and via web pages from any networked computer.

E. EDS shall have following data acquisition capabilities: 1. Shall store the data from electrical meters and other sensing devices for a minimum of 36

months. 2. Shall display logged data to show kW demand and kWh for any hour, day, months or

year, either per each electrical meter, load groups or entire facility. 3. Data shall be stored in SQL database. 4. The system shall automatically create text files with metering data. 5. The software shall run on Windows 7 or Windows server. 6. The software shall provide data access via html 5 and asp.net web pages.

F. Building Automation System Interface: 1. All of the meters shall be connected to facility’s Ethernet backbone, BAS vendor shall

acquire electrical data using Modbus TCP protocol. 2. BAS vendor shall be responsible for setup and integration of metering data in to BAS

software.

G. EDS shall have an optional cloud based hosted solution with following capabilities: 1. Allow user to log in to cloud based system over the internet. 2. Data shall be logged and stored at a secured off-site facility. Historical logs, shall be

accessible to the end user over secured web page. 3. The cloud based EDS shall allow an admin level user to setup and edit users for the cloud

based interface. 4. Annual subscription of cloud based services.



2.12 SUPPORTED METER LIST A. Meter manufacturer, Eaton or equal 1. PXM 4000/6000/8000 series 2. PXM 2000 series 3. IQ250/260 4. IQ130/140/150 5. IQ35M 6. PXMP 7. PXBCM

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install floor mounted panelboards on concrete bases, four-inch nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03. 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of base. 2. For panelboards, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and

anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards. 5. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

D. Mount top most switch or circuit breaker in on position not higher than 78 inches above finished floor or grade.

E. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.



F. Mount all surface-mounted panels on a steel frame of 12-gauge, hot-dipped, galvanized steel channel with a cross-section dimension of at least 1½inches by 1½ inches. 1. Design frame to distribute weight evenly. 2. Secure to structural floor and structural ceiling slab at drywall partitions. Partitions shall

not support channels. 3. Secure to floor and wall at masonry partitions.

G. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

H. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

I. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

J. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 “Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 “Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Panelboards in electrical room shall be connected with EMT conduits. Provide wiring gutters in concealed accessible locations for terminating branch circuit cabling such as ‘MC’ cable prior to entering electrical or utility room with exposed conduits.


A. The Contractor shall perform the following tests and inspections. 1. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

a. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.



b. Test continuity of each circuit. 2. Tests and Inspections:

a. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

b. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

B. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 “Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. 1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.

2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of

the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

3.7 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 262600-1 Alexandria, Virginia POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS

SECTION 262600 - POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes freestanding, prepackaged, power distribution units for transforming, conditioning, and distributing electrical power.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SPD: Surge protective device.

B. UPS: Uninterrupted power supply.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For power distribution units. Include system description, ratings, capacities, and performance characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, and required working clearance. Show PDU layout and relationship between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.

D. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of power distribution unit, signed by product manufacturer.

F. Source quality-control test reports. 1. For each factory test of power distribution units.

G. Field quality-control test reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power distribution units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.




A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency on-site repairs in four hours maximum response time.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency’s Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational

Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain power distribution unit and associated components specified in this Section from a single manufacturer.


E. Comply with NFPA 70.

F. FCC Part 15 Class A (47 CFR 0-19).

G. UL 60950 (while standard is applicable)

H. CSA Standard 60950, C22.2 No.29 & No.31.

I. NEMA.

J. NEC (NFPA70) Section 645Code.

K. ANSI – American National Standard Institute.

L. ISO 9001 – International Organization for Standardization.

M. Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS).

N. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for PDUs, including clearances between PDUs and for adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions and clearances.


A. Deliver equipment in fully enclosed vehicles after specified environmental conditions have been permanently established in spaces where equipment is to be placed.

B. Store equipment in spaces with environments controlled within manufacturer's ambient temperature and humidity tolerances for non-operating equipment.



1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual power distribution unit provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. The PDU manufacturer warrants that the Product manufactured will conform to applicable specifications and be free from failure due to defects in workmanship and material for one (1) year from the date of start-up of the Product or eighteen (18) months from the date of shipment, whichever occurs first. Repairs or replaced equipment are covered under the period of the original warranty, or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. Warranty is contingent upon having a factory-authorized representative perform the start-up.


A. Environmental Conditions: Units shall be capable of operating continuously in the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability. 1. Temperature:

Operating: 0ºC to +40ºC Storage: -40ºC to +60ºC

2. Relative Humidity: Operating: 10% to 95% non-condensing

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Basis of Design: Vertiv Liebert. 2. Eaton Powerware. 3. MGE/Schneider Electric.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Description: Integrated and coordinated assembly of power-line-conditioning and distribution components package in a single cabinet or modular assembly of cabinets. Include the following components: 1. Input-power, circuit breaker section. 2. Isolation transformer. 3. SPD system. 4. Output panelboards 5. Alarm, monitoring, and control system.

B. Enclosure Construction:



1. The cabinet enclosure shall be mobile and contain at least four (4) 360o swivel casters and four (4) leveling feet for final installation. The cabinet shall be a freestanding NEMA type 1 enclosure. The frame shall be made of galvanized and painted steel with a welded painted base. Front access shall be required for operation and general service. Rear or side access is needed for preventive maintenance or extensive service. The rear of the unit has two (2) removable panels (top and bottom). The side sheets can be completely removed to give access to compression lug connections and secondary of transformer.

2. The cabinet shall have double-hinged doors and use natural convection for cooling purposes. The top of the PDU shall prevent entry of foreign material from above per UL60950 guidelines. This specification strictly forbids PDUs that require cooling from the sides of the enclosure.

3. The cabinet shall have provision for top entry/exit to facilitate all load and the main incoming power cables. The bottom of the enclosure shall also be equipped with removable conduit plates for managing load and main incoming power cable connections.

4. The inside of the cabinet shall have hinged trims over the subfeed breakers and main breaker sections that are easily removable to facilitate installation. All removable exterior panels shall be grounded to the frame by way of stranded copper wire.

5. The main enclosure size shall not exceed 44”W x 32”D x 77”H. 6. The main enclosure can be configured to accept up to two (2) “Side-Mounted” sidecars,

each containing 54 additional branch circuit breaker pole positions. Provide one side car with one 54 pole panelboard and branch circuit monitoring for the 150kva units.

7. The color of the exterior panels shall be manufacturer’s standard color, black gray matte

C. Input Cable Connections 1. All main input power connections (three-phase power, neutral and ground) shall be made

from the front of the PDU.

D. Manual Restart: 1. The PDU shall contain a manual restart feature to protect the connected load and allow

for a controlled startup after a power failure. A means shall be provided to activate this feature in the field.

2.3 INPUT-POWER, CIRCUIT-BREAKER SECTION

A. The PDU shall include an input main circuit breaker to provide overcurrent protection and a means of disconnecting power to the unit.

B. The system's input main circuit breaker shall be a 3-pole thermal magnetic molded case circuit breaker sized for 125% of the PDU full load current rating and rated for 600 VAC. The system's input main circuit breaker shall have a minimum interrupting rating of 65,000 symmetrical amps @ 480 VAC.

C. The system's input main circuit breaker shall contain a 24 VDC shunt trip mechanism, which shall be interfaced to the High Temperature Transformer contact. The PDU shall include a means to indicate and alarm a TRIPPED and open condition of the main circuit breaker.



2.4 ISOLATION TRANSFORMER SECTION

A. The PDU shall be fed from a 3-phase, copper wound, double-shielded, convection air-cooled, TPI compliant transformer, for both voltage step-down and isolation purposes. The core shall be manufactured from quality non-aging, cold rolled, fully processed silicon steel laminations.

B. The transformer shall have the following electrical characteristics: 1. Insulation Class: Class H (220°C) with a maximum 150°C rise above 40°C ambient

temperature. 2. Transformer Efficiency will be 98.15% or greater NEMA (TP-1 compliance). 3. Percent impedance: 3.3% to 5.3%. 4. Percent Regulation: 3.5%. 5. Common mode noise attenuation, 120dB 6. Harmonic voltage distortion, 0.5% 7. The neutral of the transformer shall be rated 200% to accommodate the effects of non-

linear loads for K20 applications. 8. Voltage Taps: The transformer shall have six (6), 2 1/2% full load compensation taps

(two [2] above and four [4] below nominal). These taps shall be accessible from the front of the panel located behind the interior trim(s).

9. Thermal Overload: The transformer shall contain six (6) thermal overload protection devices to monitor core temperature in each winding. The first set (3) of thermal devices shall be calibrated to open at 180oC for alarm purposes only. The second set (3) of thermal device shall be calibrated to open at 200oC and shunt trip the PDU input circuit breaker.

10. K-Factor Rating: Transformers shall comply with UL 1561 requirements for non-sinusoidal load current handling capability to the degree defined by the designated K-factor. a. K20. b. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion

corresponding to the designated K-factor. c. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate.

11. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, double, full-width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize inter-winding capacitance. a. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between

input and output terminals. b. Include special terminal for grounding the shield. c. Shield Effectiveness.

1) Capacitance between Primary and Secondary windings: Not to exceed 33 picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz

2) Common-Mode Noise Attenuation using matched impedance no load method: a) Minus 120 dBA minimum at .5 to 1.5 kHz. b) Minus 65 dBA minimum at 1.5 to 100 kHz.

3) Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: a) 52 dBA minimum at 1.5 to 10 kHz. b) 30 dBA minimum at 10 kHz – 100 kHz.

4) Magnetic Field Strength: Less than .1 gauss measured 1.5 feet from cabinet.



2.5 OUTPUT DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. The specified 150kVA system shall contain five sub feed circuit breakers with shunt trip and a sidecar containing one (1) 54-pole output panelboard with branch circuit monitoring. The 75kVA system shall contain one (1) vertically mounted output (Square D bolt-in) panelboard with 72 single-pole branch circuit breaker positions for distribution to the intended loads. Each output distribution panelboard shall be individually protected by a main panelboard circuit breaker. Each panelboard shall be totally enclosed with a hinged accent panel that provides access to that panelboard. The panelboard shall have a rating of 400 amperes, with an interrupting rating of 22kA RMS at 240/120 VAC. Each panelboard shall include separate isolated neutral and safety-ground busbars for the neutral and safety-ground connections to match the number of output circuits. The neutral busbar and wiring shall be sized for at least 1.73 times the panelboard’s full load rating.

2.6 OUTPUT SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE (SPD)

A. The unit shall be equipped with a surge suppression module to eliminate high-speed, high-energy transients and to filter high frequency noise. The surge suppression module shall be mounted on the output of the unit. The surge suppressor components shall be UL recognized. The surge suppressor shall utilize high-energy Metal Oxide Varistors with less than 1 nanosecond response time. The clipping level shall be 212 volts on a system with a nominal peak line voltage of 170 volts and 354 volts on a system with a nominal peak line voltage of 340 volts. Peak current handling capability shall be at least 13,000 amperes based on an 8 x 20 microsecond waveform. Energy absorption capability shall be at least 200 joules per phase. A passive filter, utilizing metalized polypropylene film capacitors, shall provide normal mode noise attenuation of at least 20 dB from 10 kHz to 1 MHz. The capacitors shall be equipped with an integral, pressure-sensitive interrupter to provide short-circuit current interrupting capability of up to 10,000 amperes at 600.

B. Surge protective device in the PDU: The unit shall be equipped with a high energy, UL1449 and UL1283 listed, Surge Protective Device (SPD) module connected to the unit output with minimal interconnecting wiring for maximum surge suppression. The SPD shall consist of multiple, gapless Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV) arrays with their clamping voltages matched to within 1%. Each MOV shall be individually fused to protect against MOV failure while still allowing maximum rated surge current to flow without fuse operation. The fuses shall have a 100 kA interrupting capacity. Each array shall be capable of withstanding at least 1250 IEEE C62:41 category C3 surges (20kV, 10kA) without failure. The complete SPD module shall have a total surge current capacity of 80 kA per phase based on a standard 8 x 20 microsecond surge waveform. The UL1449 surge clamping rating shall not exceed 400 volts for a 120/208 volt system. The maximum continuous operating voltage shall be at least 150 VAC for a 120/208 volt system. The SPD shall also provide electrical noise attenuation of 25 dB from 100 kHz to 100 MHz (based on MIL220A and 50 OHM impedance). An alarm contact of the SPD module shall be connected to the unit monitoring system to annunciate the failure of the SPD.

2.7 INPUT/GROUND COMPRESSION LUGS

A. Provisions for input of all three phases to the main circuit breaker and ground cable shall be provided by the method of busbar reconnected in the unit.



2.8 POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT CONTROLS

A. Include the following control features: 1. Alarm Contacts: Electrically isolated, Form C (one normally open and one normally

closed), summary alarm; contact set shall change state if any monitored function goes into alarm mode.

2.9 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (EMS)

A. Each Power Distribution Unit shall be equipped with a microprocessor-based power monitor panel (LDMF). The monitor panel shall gather and process information from electrical and environmental sensors, relays and switches both internal and external to the unit. The monitored parameters and alarms shall be displayed on the unit monitor panel and shall also be available for communication to a Liebert® centralized monitoring system using a two-wire, twisted-pair, low-voltage signal circuit for reliable communication up to 3,280 ft. (1000m). Additionally, the monitor panel shall be equipped with a DB-9 setup port for adjusting parameters and performing diagnostics. Three IntelliSlot® ports shall be provided to allow communication to remote monitoring systems using Liebert IntelliSlot cards.

B. Monitored Parameters: The energy management system shall monitor and display the following parameters: 1. Input Voltage (VL-L). 2. Input Current (A, B & C phase). 3. Input Voltage THD for all three phases. 4. Input Frequency. 5. Output Voltage (VL-L and VL-N). 6. Output Current (A, B & C phase). 7. Output Neutral Current. 8. Output Current % (A, B, and C phase). 9. Output Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) for all three phases. 10. Output Current Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) for all three phases. 11. Output Current Crest Factor. 12. System Ground Current. 13. Output Frequency. 14. Output Power Factor (Lead/Lag Indicator). 15. Output kVA. 16. Output kW. 17. Output KWH. 18. Date 19. Time

C. Alarms 1. The monitoring system shall detect and annunciate by audible alarm and alarm message

the following conditions: a. Output Overvoltage b. Output Undervoltage c. Output Overcurrent d. Neutral Overcurrent e. Ground Overcurrent f. Output Voltage Distortion



g. Frequency Deviation h. Phase Sequence Error i. Phase Loss j. Transformer Overtemp

2. Remote monitoring shall include notification of critical alarms, a monthly report summarizing alarms and important data relevant to PDU or system performance.

3. All alarm thresholds (factory set points shown in brackets) shall be adjustable by way of the service port to meet site requirements. The system shall detect and alarm the following conditions: a. Output Overvoltage – voltage exceeds +6% of nominal. b. Output Undervoltage – voltage falls below -13% of nominal. c. Output Overcurrent – current exceeds 95% of full load amps. d. Neutral Overcurrent – current exceeds 95% of full load amps e. Ground Overcurrent – current exceeds 10 amps. f. Output Voltage Distortion – output voltage THD exceeds 10% g. Frequency Deviation – output frequency exceeds +/- 0.5Hz of nominal. h. To facilitate troubleshooting, all alarms shall be stored in battery-backed (non-

volatile) memory until reset to protect against erasure by a power outage. Alarms shall be able to be manually reset after the alarm condition has been corrected either at the unit or with the central monitoring system.

D. Profile Log: 1. Profile log feature provides the maximum and minimum deviations for the month. The

exact time that the deviation occurred is also recorded. Data is sampled every five milliseconds. The profile data is recorded in non-volatile memory each hour. The meter shall have the ability to store and view up to twenty-four (24) monthly readings per parameter. a. Output Voltage (All three phases independently) b. Output Current (All three phases independently) c. Output Frequency d. Output Voltage THD (All three phases independently) e. Output Current THD (All three phases independently) f. Output Current Crest Factory for all three phases. g. Output KW. h. Output KVA. i. Output Power Factor. j. Input Voltage (All three phases independently). k. Input Current (All three phases independently). l. Input frequency. m. Input Voltage THD (All three phases independently). n. Input Power Factor. o. Input kW. p. Input kVA. q. Ground Current. r. Output Neutral Current.

E. Programmable Building Alarms 1. The EMS shall be capable of providing annunciation for two customizable building alarm

inputs (N/O dry contacts). The SPD allocates one of the building alarms per input. The



action associated with the alarms is user configurable for Alarm only or Alarm and shunt trip. The associated customized message can be up to 20 characters long and entered either via the LCD panel or RS232 service port.

F. Control 1. The PDU shall be capable of a shutdown on the following alarms:

a. Phase Rotation. b. Phase Loss. c. Ground Overcurrent. d. Building Alarms. e. Transformer Over Temperature. f. Neutral Overcurrent. g. Frequency Out of Tolerance. h. Voltage Low. i. Voltage High. j. Overload. k. REPO. l. Local EPO.

G. Communication: 1. The PDU shall be supplied with an IS-UNITY-DP Card for remote communication using

two of the following protocols: HTTP/HTTPS, Email, SMS, SNMP v1/v2c/v3, BACnet IP/MSTP and Modbus TCP/RTU output. A serial RS-485 two wire connector shall be supplied. Note: Two of the 3rd party protocols (SNMP, Modbus or BACnet) may be configured and used simultaneously. Modbus RTU and BACnet MSTP cannot both be enabled simultaneously.

H. EMS Premium – Branch Circuit Monitoring. 1. The system shall be capable of receive input from branch current sensor modules. Each

sensor module shall contain twenty-one 100A current transformers (CT) capsulated in an epoxy filled plastic enclosure designed to mount next to the panelboard. No individual current transformers mounted on a printed circuit board shall be used. Sensor Module shall be designed to work with Square D or GE panelboards. In addition to monitoring the branch circuit breakers the LDMF shall monitor the current and voltage of the panelboard main circuit breaker. These measurements are used for reporting the average RMS current, power and other parameters.

2. The LDMF shall report alarm and status conditions for each branch circuit breaker and the panelboard main circuit breaker.

3. The LDMF shall monitor and display the following parameters for the panelboard main circuit breaker and each branch circuit breaker: a. Phase Current b. Percent Load c. kW d. kW-Hours

4. In addition, the LDMF shall monitor and display the following parameters for the panelboard main circuit breaker: a. Voltage

1) Line-to-Line 2) Line-to-Neutral



b. Neutral Current c. Ground Current d. kVA e. Power Factor f. Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) g. Current Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) h. Crest Factor i. Circuit identification and status of each breaker shall be displayed.

5. The LDMF shall detect and annunciate by alarm message the following conditions: a. Overvoltage - panelboard main breaker b. Undervoltage - panelboard main breaker c. Neutral Overcurrent - panelboard main breaker d. Ground Overcurrent - panelboard main breaker e. Phase Overcurrent – panelboard main breaker and branch breakers f. Phase Overcurrent Warning – panelboard main breaker and branch breakers g. Phase Low Current Warning – branch breakers h. Summary Alarm

6. All alarm thresholds for monitored parameters shall be adjustable by way of the service port to match site requirements. The factory setpoints for the alarms shall be as follows: a. Panelboard Main Breaker:

1) Overvoltage – at least one of the line-to-line voltages exceeds +6% of nom-inal

2) Undervoltage - at least one of the line-to-line or line-to-neutral voltages falls below -13% of nominal

3) Phase Overcurrent Warning - current exceeds 75% of breaker amps 4) Phase Overcurrent - current exceeds 80% of breaker amps 5) Neutral Current - current exceeds 95% of main breaker amps 6) Ground Current – current exceeds 5 amps

b. Branch Breakers: 1) Overcurrent Warning - current exceeds 75% of breaker amps 2) Phase Overcurrent - current exceeds 80% of breaker amps 3) Low Current Warning – Minimum current level of a branch breaker.

c. Summary Alarm: 1) Summary Alarm - shall detect and annunciate upon occurrence of any

alarm. d. To facilitate troubleshooting, all alarms shall be stored in non-volatile memory to

protect against erasure by a power outage. Alarms shall be manually reset after the alarm condition has been corrected. Alarms can be reset through the Liebert® Intel-liSlot® card or the Liebert LDMF display.

I. Communication: 1. LDMF shall have three IntelliSlot ports; up to three IntelliSlot cards can be added for

customer connections to a Building Management System (BMS).

J. LDMF Display: 1. A monochrome liquid crystal display (LCD) with oval bezel that includes power and

alarm LEDs, an audible alarm and an alarm silence/reset push button. It will display all the Liebert LDMF power parameters and alarms listed in this section for the panelboard



mains and branch breakers. A display shall be mounted on the front door, the display and switches are accessible without opening the door.

2.10 FLOOR STANDS

A. Floor Stands (when the PDU is installed on a raised floor) shall be provided to level the PDU and provide cable access without relying on a raised floor for support. The nominal height of the floor stands shall be as noted on drawing with adjustment for +/-2 inches.

2.11 INPUT POWER JUNCTION BOX (Not Used)

2.12 SOUND LEVEL

A. General: Fully assembled products have a minimum of 3 dB less than the maximum sound levels prescribed for transformers of corresponding ratings when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91.

2.13 FINISHES

A. Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and primer.


A. Factory Tests: Design and routine tests shall comply with referenced standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Arrange power distribution units to provide adequate access to equipment and circulation of cooling air.

B. Anchor or restrain floor-mounting power distribution units according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Identify equipment and install warning signs according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 1. Separately Derived Systems: Make grounding connections to grounding electrodes as

indicated; comply with NFPA 70.

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."



3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. Installation and startup shall include the following: 1. Visual Inspection:

a. Visually inspect all equipment for signs of damage and/or foreign materials. b. Observe type of ventilation, room cleanliness, and the proper application of safety

signs. 2. Mechanical Inspection:

a. Check all internal power connections for proper tightness (torque). b. Check all control wiring terminations and plugs for tightness and/or proper

connection. c. Check all PCBA’s for proper configuration wiring or jumper settings. d. Ensure all subassemblies, barriers, and safety guards are installed and secure.

3. Electrical Pre-Check: a. Verify modules have been installed in accordance to their installation

documentation. b. Check system for phase to ground shorts internally and externally of the cabinet. c. Check system for phase to phase shorts internally and externally of the cabinet.

4. Initial Unit Energization: a. Check input power terminations for proper supply voltage and phase rotation. b. Check all power supply voltages and lamp tests, adjust as necessary. c. Check all internal and output voltages are within acceptable tolerances.

5. System Monitoring and Control Settings: a. Check front panel control functions (buttons, lamps, displays) are in working

order. b. Check all measured and displayed values are within acceptable tolerances. c. Check all alarm and operating transition threshold settings. d. Check all remote monitor operations and displayed parameters. e. Verify local and remote EPO operation.

6. Waveforms: a. Check all utility input waveforms (voltage and current). b. Check primary output waveforms (voltage and current). c. Check logic power supply ripple waveform.

7. System Verification after Critical Loads Have Been Applied: a. Recheck all measured and displayed values (volts, amps, frequency, and power). b. Recheck all input and output, voltage and current waveforms. c. Verify output voltage regulation is within acceptable tolerances.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

B. Adjust power distribution units to provide optimum voltage to equipment served throughout normal operating cycle of loads served. Record input and output voltages and adjustment settings, and incorporate into test results.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.



3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain power distribution units. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 262713-1 Alexandria, Virginia ELECTRICITY METERING

SECTION 262713 - ELECTRICITY METERING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes equipment for electricity metering by utility company.

B. Coordinate all work for electric service with the utility provider and provide service entrance duct banks (primary and secondary), manholes, transformers, switches, feeders and metering equipment in accordance with the rules and regulations of the utility provider.

C. Provide feeders between low voltage switchboards and secondary service switchboards (meter stacks) for dwelling unit metering.

D. Provide main service equipment of the size and type indicated on the drawings, equipment shall bear a UL label for service entrance equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. KY Pulse: Term used by the metering industry to describe a method of measuring consumption of electricity that is based on a relay opening and closing in response to the rotation of the disk in the meter.


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. Describe electrical characteristics, features, and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. Include the following: 1. Electricity-metering equipment.

B. Shop Drawings: For electricity-metering equipment. 1. Service and equipment shop drawings showing the arrangement in dimensioned plans,

sections and elevation layouts of all utility metering, service equipment, and service entrances troughs and duct banks. .

2. Drawings shall include the manufacturer’s name, equipment ratings, physical dimensions, and all other pertinent layout information to include verification of clearances in designated rooms or spaces.

3. Obtain approval of the submittals from the utility company prior to submission to the Architect. Provide evidence of the utility company’s approval on the submittal.



4. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. Identify terminals and wiring designations and color-codes to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance. Indicate recommended types, wire sizes, and circuiting arrangements for field-installed wiring, and show circuit protection features.


A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Record drawings.

B. Documentation of inspections by, and tests performed for the utility company.

C. Documentation of inspections by, and tests performed for the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data. In addition to items specified in Division 01 "Operation and Maintenance Data




A. Receive, store, and handle modular meter center according to NECA 400.


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of

electrical service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Architect's written

permission.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Electrical Service Connections: Coordinate with utility companies and components they furnish as follows: 1. Comply with requirements of utilities providing electrical power services. 2. Arrange for all service facilities and temporary power for construction. 3. Coordinate installation and connection of utilities and services, including provision for

electricity-metering components. 4. Provide all labor and materials not furnished by the utility company for bringing services

into the building.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING BY UTILITY COMPANY

A. Meters will be furnished by utility company.

B. Current-Transformer Cabinets: Comply with requirements of electrical-power utility company.

C. Meter Sockets: Comply with requirements of electrical-power utility company.

D. Meter Sockets: Steady-state and short-circuit current ratings shall meet the ratings required by the Overcurrent protective device short circuit, coordination, and arc flash study..

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with equipment installation requirements in NECA 1.

B. Installation of service entrance raceways to switchboards from service entrance duct bank/pull boxes shall meet requirements of power company and this project

C. Where indicated to be wall mounted indoors, install a ¾-inch plywood on an approved steel frame to provide a minimum 1½inch air space between the plywood and the wall. This assembly shall be designated to distribute the weight evenly between the wall and floor and shall be painted with two coats of gray enamel before equipment installation

D. Provide conduit from each service switchgear or switchboard C/T compartment to metering location shown on drawings. Coordinate conduit size with utility company

E. Install meters furnished by utility company. Install raceways and equipment according to utility company's written requirements. Provide empty conduits for metering leads and extend grounding connections as required by utility company.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Series Combination Warning Label: Self-adhesive type, with text as required by

NFPA 70. 2. Equipment Identification Labels: Adhesive film labels with clear protective overlay. For

residential meters, provide an additional card holder suitable for printed, weather-resistant card with occupant's name.



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 262726-1 Alexandria, Virginia WIRING DEVICES

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Twist-locking receptacles. 3. Receptacles with integral surge-suppression units. 4. Isolated-ground receptacles. 5. Hospital-grade receptacles. 6. Tamper-resistant receptacles. 7. Weather-resistant receptacles. 8. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 9. Solid-state fan speed controls. 10. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors. 11. Communications outlets. 12. Pendant cord-connector devices. 13. Cord and plug sets. 14. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multi-outlet

assemblies.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference

E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: 1. Receptacles for Equipment Furnished by other trades or by the Owner: Match plug

NEMA configurations. 2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.




A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for pre-marking wall plates.

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper) 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell) 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton) 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour)

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


C. Device finish types shall be provided as ‘Decora’, ‘or equivalent finish type in finished spaces Finish colors shall typically be white devices with white matching thermoplastic cover plates, unless specifically indicated otherwise.

2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE STANDARD FINISH RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex) b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex)



c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex) d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex)

B. Hospital-Grade, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, and FS W-C-596. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 8300 (duplex) b. Hubbell; HBL8310 (single), HBL8300H (duplex) c. Leviton; 8310 (single), 8300 (duplex) d. Pass & Seymour; 9301-HG (single), 9300-HG (duplex)

2. Description: Single-piece, rivetless, nickel-plated, all-brass grounding system. Nickel-plated, brass mounting strap.

C. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Hubbell; CR 5253IG b. Leviton; 5362-IG c. Pass & Seymour; IG6300

2. Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.

D. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, and FS W-C-596. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; TR8300. b. Hubbell; HBL8300SG. c. Leviton; 8300-SGG. d. Pass & Seymour; 63H.

2. Description: Labeled shall comply with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities" Article, "Pediatric Locations" Section.

2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: 1. Straight blade, field selectable feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer

provides proper GFCI protection.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; GF20. b. Pass & Seymour; 2084.

C. Tamper-Resistant GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A.



D. Hospital-Grade, Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, and FS W-C-596. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; HGF20. b. Hubbell; HGF8300. c. Leviton; 6898-HG. d. Pass & Seymour; 2091-SHG.

2.5 TVSS RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 1449, and FS W-C-596, with integral TVSS in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground. 1. TVSS Components: Multiple metal-oxide varistors; with a nominal clamp-level rating of

400 V and minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of 240 J, according to IEEE C62.41.2 and IEEE C62.45.

2. Active TVSS Indication: Visual and audible, with light visible in face of device to indicate device is "active" or "no longer in service."

B. Duplex TVSS Convenience Receptacles: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 5362BLS b. Hubbell; HBL5362SA c. Leviton; 5380

2. Description: Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R.

C. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; IG5362BLS b. Hubbell; IG5362SA c. Leviton; 5380-IG

2. Description: a. Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R. b. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding

screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.

D. Hospital-Grade, Duplex Convenience Receptacles: Comply with UL 498 Supplement sd. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 8300BLS b. Hubbell; HBL8362SA c. Leviton; 8380

2. Description: Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R. 3. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in


4. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Isolated-Ground, Hospital-Grade, Duplex Convenience Receptacles:



1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; IG8300HGBLS b. Hubbell; IG8362SA c. Leviton; 8380-IG

2. Description: a. Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R. b. Comply with UL 498 Supplement sd. c. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding


2.6 STRAIGHT-BLADE DECORA RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Leviton; 16341-W (single), 16341-W (duplex).

B. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Leviton; 16362-IGW. 2. Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the

green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.

C. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, and FS W-C-596. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Leviton; 16361-SGW. 2. Description: Labeled shall comply with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities" Article,

"Pediatric Locations" Section.


A. General Description: 1. Straight blade, feed through and non feed through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer

provides proper GFCI protection.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Leviton; S7899-W

C. Tamper-Resistant GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Leviton; S7899-HGW.



2.8 TVSS RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 1449, and FS W C-596, with integral TVSS in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground. 1. TVSS Components: Multiple metal-oxide varistors; with a nominal clamp-level rating of

400 V and minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of 240 J, according to IEEE C62.41.2 and IEEE C62.45.

2. Active TVSS Indication: Visual and audible, with light visible in face of device to indicate device is "active" or "no longer in service."

B. Duplex TVSS Convenience Receptacles: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

a. Leviton; 5380-W. 2. Description: Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R.

C. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Leviton; 5380-IGW.

2. Description: a. Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R. b. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding


D. Tamper Resistant, Duplex Convenience Receptacles: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Leviton; T7380-W. 2. Description:

a. Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R.

2.9 HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATION RECEPTACLES

A. Available Wiring Devices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with NEMA FB 11 and UL 1010. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds b. EGS/Appleton Electric c. Killark; Division of Hubbell Inc.

2.10 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES

A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

a. Leviton; 2310.

B. Isolated-Ground, Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:



a. Leviton; 2310-IG. 2. Description:

a. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498. b. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding


2.11 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES

A. Description: 1. Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector. 2. NEMA WD 6 Configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade, and FS W-C-596. 3. Body: Nylon, with screw-open, cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external

cable grip. 4. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength, galvanized-steel

wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector.

2.12 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description: 1. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of

equipment being connected. 2. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with

green-insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the equipment rating.

3. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.

2.13 STANDARD FINISH TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224

(four way). c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four

way). d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way),

20AC4 (four way).

C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 2221PL for 120 V and 277 V b. Hubbell; HPL1221PL for 120 V and 277 V c. Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR for 120 V



2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON."

D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 2221L b. Hubbell; HBL1221L c. Leviton; 1221-2L d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L

2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

E. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 1995 b. Hubbell; HBL1557 c. Leviton; 1257 d. Pass & Seymour; 1251

F. Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 1995L b. Hubbell; HBL1557L c. Leviton; 1257L. d. Pass & Seymour; 1251L.

2.14 DECORA TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Single Pole: 1) Leviton; 5621-2W.

b. Two Pole: 1) Leviton; 5622-2W.

c. Three Way: 1) Leviton; 5623-2W.

d. Four Way: 1) Leviton; 5624-2W.

C. Pilot-Light Switches, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Leviton; 5631-2W for 120V. 2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "OFF."

D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Leviton; 1221-2KL.



2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

E. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches: 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 1995 b. Hubbell; HBL1557 c. Leviton; 1257 d. Pass & Seymour; 1251

F. Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches: 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 1995L b. Hubbell; HBL1557L c. Leviton; 1257L d. Pass & Seymour; 1251L

2.15 WALL-BOX DIMMERS

A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.

B. Control: Continuously adjustable toggle switch; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472.

C. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve. On-off switch positions shall bypass dimmer module. 1. 600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices. Illuminated

when "off."

D. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.

2.16 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and

labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant thermoplastic with lockable cover.



2.17 FINISHES

A. Device Color:

A. Device Color: White unless otherwise specified by the Architect. Confirm finish selections with the Architect prior to release of equipment. 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White or selected by Architect

unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 2. Wiring Devices Connected to Stand by Power System: Red. 3. TVSS Devices: White. 4. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: White with Orange Symbol.

B. Wall Plate Color: For thermoplastic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device

boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated

on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid

scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,

Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation: 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were

installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect

conductors.



3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly in the direction of the screw post tightening, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up and for horizontally mounted

receptacles install with neutral pin up.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers: 1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multi-gang wall plates.

I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.


A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.

B. Feed through type GFCI type receptacles are acceptable only where the downstream protected receptacles are within the direct line of sight to the GCFI device.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.




A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99. 2. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.

3. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 262813-1 Alexandria, Virginia FUSES

SECTION 262813 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Cartridge fuses rated 600 V ac and less for use in the following:

a. Control circuits. b. Motor-control centers. c. Panelboards. d. Switchboards. e. Enclosed controllers. f. Enclosed switches.

2. Spare-fuse cabinets.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to

accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings. a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating,

local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating. b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment

calculations are based. 2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical

characteristics, and ratings. 3. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 4. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. Submit in electronic format suitable for use in coordination software and in PDF format.

5. Coordination charts and tables and related data. 6. Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 "Closeout Procedures," Division 01 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Ambient temperature adjustment information.



2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse used on the Project. Submit in electronic format suitable for use in coordination software and in PDF format.

4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each fuse class, voltage rating, ampere

rating, interrupting rating, fuse size and type, but no fewer than three fuses of each fuse class, voltage rating, ampere rating, and interrupting rating of each size and type.


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F (5 deg C) or more than 100 deg F (38 deg C), apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings. Fuses located in below grade parking garages will be exposed to a temperature range from 20 deg F (-6.67 deg C) up to 105 deg F (40.5 deg C). Fuses located in open air above grade garages will be exposed to a temperature range from 10 deg F (-12.2 deg C) up to 105 deg F (40.5 deg C). Fuses located on rooftops will be exposed to a temperature range from 10 deg F (-12.2 deg C) up to 135 deg F (57.2 deg C).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper Bussman, Inc. a Division of EATON 2. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 3. Littelfuse, Inc. 4. Reliance Fuse

B. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, current-limiting, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages on the drawings. 1. Type RK-1: 250-V or 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. 2. Type RK-5: 250-V or 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. 3. Type CC: 600-V, zero- to 30-A rating, 200 kAIC, fast acting. 4. Type CD: 600-V, 31- to 60-A rating, 200 kAIC, fast acting. 5. Type J: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC. 6. Type L: 600-V, 601- to 6000-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. 7. Type T: 250-V, zero- to 1200-A and 600-V, zero- to 800-A rating, 200 kAIC, very fast

acting .



B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: UL Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Fuse voltage rating shall be 250 volt for 120/208 volt system and 480 or 600 volts for 277/480 volt system.

D. Fuses shall be dual-element, high interrupting capacity with current limiting effect, 200,000 ampere RMS symmetrical at rated voltage where possible to coordinate with the series rating of the electrical equipment where utilized in the system. Single element devices will only be used where series rating conflicts arise due to UL tested combinations.

E. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, Class R or J time-delay fuses shall be used for individual 480 volt motor circuit protection, for motor control centers and motor starter panels protection. Switches shall be provided with proper mounting clips.

F. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

G. Comply with NFPA 70.

H. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

2.3 SPARE-FUSE CABINET

A. Characteristics: Wall-mounted steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged door and key-coded cam lock and pull. 1. Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 25 percent spare capacity

minimum. 2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel. 3. Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1½-inch high letters on exterior of door. 4. Fuse Pullers: Provide fuse puller tools with cabinet, one puller for each size of fuse, from

fuse manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses: 1. Service Entrance: Class L, time delay, Class RK1, time delay, or Class J, time delay as

appropriate for service entrance equipment. 2. Feeders: Class L, time delay, Class RK1, fast acting, Class RK1, time delay, Class RK5,

fast acting, Class RK5, time delay, Class J, fast acting, or Class J, time delay as selected by the Overcurrent Protective and Arc Flash System Study specified Division 26.

3. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, or Class RK5, time delay. 4. Large Motor Branch (601-4000 A): Class L, time delay. 5. Power Electronics Circuits: Class J, high speed or Class T, fast acting. 6. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay, Class RK5, time delay, Class J, fast

acting, Class J, time delay, or Class CC, fast acting as required by the overcurrent protective device coordination study, short circuit study, and arc flash study.

7. Provide open-fuse indicator fuses or fuse covers with open fuse indication.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

B. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s) in electrical service room or location shown on the Drawings or as directed in the field by the Architect or Owner.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information inside of door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 262816-1 Alexandria, Virginia ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Specific Attention is called to the "General Requirements and Common Work Results for Electrical Systems" located in Division 26.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 4. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

D. SPST: Single pole, single throw.


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include manufacturer’s literature, illustrations, engineering data, dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes for each type and size of enclosed switch and enclosed circuit breaker specific to this project. 1. Enclosure types, dimensioned drawings, and details. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. 6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of

overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

B. Submit a bill of materials list of each enclosed switch and enclosed circuit breaker identified by Contract Document designation.



C. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Field quality-control reports. 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit

breakers. 2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than

three of each size, ampere rating, voltage rating, fuse class, and type. 2. Fuse Pullers: Three for each size and type.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.


C. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding

104 deg F (40 deg C). 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.



B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed

interruption of electric service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect's and Owner's

written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate ampere rating of fuses in enclosed switches and ampere rating of enclosed circuit breakers which protect equipment furnished and installed by other trades. Obtain product electrical information from corresponding trade contractors on equipment to be protected. The Contractor shall evaluate the electrical information for equipment scheduled to be installed by other trades and provide ampere rating adjustment(s) as necessary to provide code required electrical over current and short circuit protection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. EATON Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products 2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Protection Div. 3. Schneider Electric, Square D Brands

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 or 600-Volts AC, sized 1200 amperes and smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate fuses for fused switches, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 240 or 600-Volts AC, sized 1200 amperes and smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate fuses for fused switches, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: For circuits including a neutral conductor, provide internally mounted;

insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.



3. Isolated Ground Kit: Where circuits specified on the drawings include an insulated and isolated equipment ground, provide internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 5. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Where specified on the drawings or required below provide two

NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open. a. Provide within each main line disconnecting means for the following equipment:

each elevator motor/controller circuit, each escalator motor/controller circuit, when located downstream of variable frequency controllers provided by other trades.

6. Hook stick Handle: Allows use of a hook stick to operate the handle. 7. Lugs: Mechanical or Compression type for copper conductors, compression connectors

for aluminum conductors, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 8. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.

2.2 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. EATON Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products 2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Protection Division 3. Schneider Electric, Square D Brands

B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Provide adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

D. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings: 1. Instantaneous trip. 2. Long- and short-time pickup levels. 3. Long- and short-time time adjustments. 4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

F. Ground-Fault, Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (5-mA trip).

G. Ground-Fault, Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

H. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.



3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits.

4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered or remote-mounted and powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.

5. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.

6. Alarm Switch: One NO/NC contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped. 7. Key Interlock Kit: Where indicated on the Drawings, provide externally mounted to

prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Kitchen, Wash-Down, car wash areas, or other areas where hose directed water may be

present: NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel. 4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X Stainless steel. 5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height where feasible.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Install fuses in fusible devices.

D. Comply with NECA 1.



E. Mount all surface-mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers on a steel frame of 12-gauge, hot-dipped, galvanized steel channel with a cross-section dimension of at least 1½ inches by 1½ inches. 1. Design frame to distribute weight evenly. 2. Secure to structural floor and structural ceiling slab at drywall partitions. Partitions shall


3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate indicating the

source circuit and equipment served.


A. The Contractor shall perform the following tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

2. Acceptance Testing Preparation: a. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,

connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. b. Test continuity of each circuit.

3. Tests and Inspections: a. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. b. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. c. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as recommended by the study required for this project specified in Division 26.



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 262913-1 Alexandia, Virginia ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

SECTION 262913 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less: 1. Full-voltage manual. 2. Full-voltage magnetic. 3. Reduced-voltage magnetic. 4. Reduced-voltage solid state. 5. Multispeed.

B. Related Section: 1. Division 26 "Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers" for general-purpose, ac, adjustable-

frequency, pulse-width-modulated controllers for use on variable torque loads in ranges up to 200 hp.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

C. MCP: Motor circuit protector.

D. N.C.: Normally closed.

E. N.O.: Normally open.

F. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

G. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures. 1. Show tabulations of the following:



a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory-installed devices. c. Nameplate legends. d. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit. e. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating of OCPDs

in combination controllers by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual OCPDs in combination controllers.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents.

D. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip

settings. 3. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. 4. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reduced-

voltage solid-state controllers.

1.7 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,

but no fewer than three of each size and type. 2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but

no fewer than two of each size and type. 3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. 4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller

installed. 5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor

installed.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site

testing.


C. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers; install temporary electric heating, with at least 250 W per controller; connect factory-installed space heaters to temporary electrical service.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding

104 deg F (40 deg C). 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: Do not interrupt electrical systems in facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than ten working days in advance of proposed

interruption of electrical systems. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical systems without Architect and Owner's

written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.



C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS

A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. EATON Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products 2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Protection Div. 3. Schneider Electric, Square D Brands

C. Motor-Starting Switches: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off or on. 1. Configuration: Non-reversing and where indicated on the drawings two speed. 2. Flush mounting in finished areas, Surface mounting in back of house, above accessible

ceilings and in equipment rooms. 3. Red running pilot light and Green off pilot light. 4. Additional Nameplates: Provide HIGH and LOW for two-speed switches where

indicated on the drawings.

D. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped. 1. Configuration: Non-reversing. 2. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping

characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor; external reset push button; bimetallic type.

3. Flush mounting in finished areas, Surface mounting in back of house, above accessible ceilings and in equipment rooms.

4. Red running pilot light and Green off pilot light. 5. Additional Nameplates: Provide HIGH and LOW for two-speed switches where

indicated on the drawings.

E. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held. 1. Configuration: Non-reversing. 2. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors.

a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.

3. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.

4. Control Circuits: Provided with sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.

5. Melting Alloy Overload Relays: a. Inverse-time-current characteristic. b. Class 10 tripping characteristic. c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected

motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.



6. Bimetallic Overload Relays: a. Inverse-time-current characteristic. b. Class 10 tripping characteristic. c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected

motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. d. Ambient compensated. e. Automatic resetting.

7. Solid-State Overload Relay: a. Switch or dial selectable for motor running overload protection. b. Sensors in each phase. c. Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to protect motor against

voltage and current unbalance and single phasing. d. Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent nuisance trip

on starting. e. Analog communication module.

8. N.C./N.O., isolated overload alarm contact. 9. External overload reset push button.

F. Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of magnetic controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means. 1. Fusible Disconnecting Means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads to accommodate fuses required by the coordination study.

b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

2. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open. 3. Nonfusible Disconnecting Means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, nonfusible switch. b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed

position. c. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open.

4. MCP Disconnecting Means: a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply

with available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front-mounted, field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.


c. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle. d. N.C./N.O., alarm contact that operates only when MCP has tripped. e. Current-limiting module to increase controller short-circuit current (withstand)

rating to 100 kA. 5. MCCB Disconnecting Means:

a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents; thermal-magnetic MCCB, with inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.

b. Front-mounted, adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.



c. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

d. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCCB handle. e. N.C./N.O. alarm contact that operates only when MCCB has tripped.

2.2 REDUCED-VOLTAGE MAGNETIC CONTROLLERS

A. General Requirements for Reduced-Voltage Magnetic Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A; closed-transition; adjustable time delay on transition.

B. Reduced-Voltage Magnetic Controllers: Reduced voltage, electrically held. 1. Configuration:

a. Wye-Delta Controller: Four contactors, with a three-phase starting resistor/reactor bank.

b. Part-Winding Controller: Separate START and RUN contactors, field-selectable for 1/2- or 2/3-winding start mode, with either six- or nine-lead motors; with separate overload relays for starting and running sequences.

c. Autotransformer Reduced-Voltage Controller: Medium-duty service, with integral over-temperature protection; taps for starting at 50, 65, and 80 percent of line voltage; two START and one RUN contactors.

2. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors. a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating,

manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage. 3. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to

allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring. 4. Control Circuits: Provided with sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and

remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices. 5. Melting Alloy Overload Relays:

a. Inverse-time-current characteristic. b. Class 10 tripping characteristic. c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected

motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. 6. Bimetallic Overload Relays:

a. Inverse-time-current characteristic. b. Class 10 tripping characteristic. c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected

motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. d. Ambient compensated. e. Automatic resetting.

7. Solid-State Overload Relay: a. Switch or dial selectable for motor running overload protection. b. Sensors in each phase. c. Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to protect motor against

voltage and current unbalance and single phasing. d. Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent nuisance trip

on starting. e. Analog communication module.

8. N.C./N.O., isolated overload alarm contact. 9. External overload reset push button.



C. Combination Reduced-Voltage Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of reduced-voltage magnetic controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means. 1. Fusible Disconnecting Means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads to accommodate required by the coordination study.


c. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open. 2. Nonfusible Disconnecting Means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, nonfusible switch. b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed

position. c. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open.

3. MCP Disconnecting Means: a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply

with available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front-mounted, field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.


c. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle. d. N.C./N.O. alarm contact that operates only when MCP has tripped. e. Current-limiting module to increase controller short-circuit current (withstand)

rating to 100 kA. 4. MCCB Disconnecting Means:

a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents; thermal-magnetic MCCB, with inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.

b. Front-mounted, adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

c. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

d. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCCB handle. e. N.C./N.O. alarm contact that operates only when MCCB has tripped.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1 2. Outdoor Locations: Type 4. 3. Kitchen Wash-Down Areas: Type 4X stainless steel. 4. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4. 5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

Type 12.



2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated. 1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, oil tight type.

a. Push Buttons: Shrouded types; maintained or momentary as required. b. Pilot Lights: LED types; green (stopped) and red (running) colors as

indicated; push to test. c. Selector Switches: Rotary type.

B. Reversible N.C./N.O. auxiliary contact(s).

C. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays.

D. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Under-voltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable under-voltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings.

E. Breather and drain assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensation in Type 4 enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.

F. Sun shields installed on fronts, sides, and tops of enclosures installed outdoors and subject to direct and extended sun exposure.

G. Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures.

H. Spare control wiring terminal blocks.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to structural-steel channels bolted to wall and as described below. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Division 26 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Install fuses in each fusible-switch enclosed controller.



D. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Division 26 "Fuses."

E. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed.

F. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment.

G. Comply with NECA 1.

H. Mount all surface-mounted panels on a steel frame of 12-guage, hot-dipped, galvanized steel channel with a cross-section dimension of at least 1½ inches by 1½ inches. 1. Design frame to distribute weight evenly. 2. Secure to structural floor and structural ceiling slab at drywall partitions. Partitions shall


3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 "Identification for Electrical Systems. 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices and facility's central control system. Comply with requirements in Division 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable. 1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices

that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position. 2. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and automatic

positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

C. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply,

feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit.

D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test

and adjust controllers, components, and equipment. 2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, connecting

motor supply, feeder, and control circuits. 3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor

nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Architect and Owner before starting the motor(s).

5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in

NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 8. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare

reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days

after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each multi-pole enclosed controller. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each multi-pole enclosed controller 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

9. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.



B. Adjust overload-relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to the load side of the overload relays.

C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load ampere ratings and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Architect and Owner before increasing settings.

D. Set field-adjustable switches and program microprocessors for required start and stop sequences in reduced-voltage solid-state controllers.

E. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.

B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers, and to use and reprogram microprocessor-based, reduced-voltage solid-state controllers.



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 263213-1 Alexandria, Virginia ENGINE GENERATORS

SECTION 263213 - ENGINE GENERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for standby power supply with the following features: 1. Diesel engine. 2. Unit-mounted cooling system. 3. Unit-mounted digital control and monitoring. 4. Fuel system. 5. Remote monitor 6. Outdoor weatherproof enclosure with integral panelboard containing branch circuit

monitoring.

B. Furnish and install standby diesel generator system of the latest commercial type and design as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. 1. These specifications cover requirements for the design, fabrication, testing and furnishing

of a complete and operable standby diesel generator system. 2. Provide all material and parts for the system. 3. The maximum installed generator height including the outdoor weatherproof housing,

silencer, exhaust pipe, (concrete pad or elevated dunnage mounting), fuel storage tank, spring isolators, railings, etc. shall not exceed the available space where the generator is located. The generator provided with all of its accessories including the manufacturers recommended clearances shall fit within the physical space limitations of the project and not exceed the available space where the generator is located. Refer to the drawings for the generator location.

C. In addition, the installation of the standby diesel generator system shall include the following: 1. Accessories as specified, and/or standard with the specified equipment, including

separate mounted double wall fuel oil day tank with interstitial fuel leak detection, flapper cap, immersion type jacket water heater, weather proof enclosure, and other accessory (or accessories) necessary for installation and/or operation.

2. Energy storage batteries, charger and engine mounted starter motor. 3. Engine exhaust silencer with mounting and isolation brackets installed within the

enclosure. 4. Output insulated case type circuit breaker(s) in quantity and size as indicated on the

drawings. Enclosure shall be sized and constructed such that the primary generator output feeders and conduits may exit out of the bottom of the generator. Arrangement of enclosure and circuit breaker within shall be field adjustable and shall contain additional knock-outs to facilitate top, side, or bottom exit. Generator mounted circuit breakers



shall be provided with electronic trip unit including adjustable long time, short time, and instantaneous trip settings, similar or equal to Square-D 5.0 A micrologic trip unit.

5. Necessary relays for remote start/stop control from fire alarm panel. In addition, provide a remote recessed flush mounted alarm annunciator panel located in the building engineer’s office, as indicated on the drawings, or in a location as directed by the Owner’s representative. Coordinate the exact location of this remote annunciator with the Owner’s representative.

6. Necessary contacts and open communication protocol for monitoring/control as defined in other Sections.

7. Necessary contacts for monitoring generator circuit breakers by the fire alarm system and other specified systems.

8. Vibration Isolators as specified herein.

D. Related Requirements: 1. Division 26 "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays to

initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets. 2. Division 23 Documents related to the storage and transfer of fuel.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter.

B. EPS: Emergency power supply.

C. EPSS: Emergency power supply system.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories. 2. Include thermal damage curve for generator. 3. Include time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device. 4. Include fuel consumption in gallons per hour at 0.8 power factor when unit is loaded to

0.5, 0.75 and 1.0 times the generator power capacity. 5. Include air flow requirements for cooling and combustion air in cfm at 0.8 power factor,

with the ambient air supply (inlet to unit) temperature of 122, 113, and 104, deg F. Provide drawings showing requirements and limitations for location of air intake and exhausts.

6. Include generator characteristics, including, but not limited to kw rating, kVA rating, efficiency, reactances, starting kVA capacity, and short-circuit current capacity.

7. Include heat rejection of engine and alternator when operating at full-rated load. 8. The manufacturer shall furnish a complete torsional analysis on the prototype engine and

generator used for this project.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans and elevations for engine-generator set and other components specified.

Dimensional scale drawings of generator systems in plan view and elevations including



but not limited to engine generator, enclosures, fuel systems, and exhaust system including silencer(s) and indicating method of mounting exhaust silencer. Drawings shall also indicate manufacturer’s recommended operational, service and maintenance clearances including those clearances required for proper intake and exhaust of ventilation and combustion air flow rates. Drawings shall also indicate type, size, and location of connection points for other trades including but not limited to fuel piping, controls, exhaust piping, and electrical feeders and conduit. Drawings shall demonstrate the Contractor’s intent with regards to primary feeder conduit exit (top, side, or bottom exit). Where sub-base fuel tank(s) are specified, indicate access requirements affected by height of sub-base fuel tank.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. In addition to Motor starting and voltage output curve, state specific maximum motor starting capacity at 10 percent, 12.5 percent, 15 percent, and 20 percent voltage drop.

4. Identify fluid drain ports and clearance requirements for proper fluid drain. 5. Design calculations for selecting vibration isolators and for designing vibration isolation

bases. 6. Design calculations for selecting battery size, charger size, and starter motor size. 7. A list of interface, monitoring, and control points as required by other Divisions. 8. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments

to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights. 9. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Complete schematic, wiring, and

interconnection diagrams showing terminal markings for EPS equipment and functional relationship between all electrical components.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, and Manufacturer.

B. Source quality-control reports, including, but not limited to the following: 1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report. 2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not

identical, to those tested on prototype unit. 3. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Certify compliance with specified requirement

to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads. 4. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of

compliance with specified requirements. 5. Report of sound generation. 6. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable EPA and state/local

jurisdictional environmental agency regulations. 7. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Warranty: For warranty as specified in this section.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Division 01 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include

the following: a. List of tools and replacement items recommended being stored at Project for ready

access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.

b. Operating instructions laminated and mounted adjacent to generator location. c. Training plan.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Quantities below are examples only. 1. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Caterpillar 2. Onan-Cummins Power Systems 3. Kohler

B. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one source from a single manufacturer.


A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B15.1.

B. NFPA Compliance: 1. Comply with NFPA 37. 2. Comply with NFPA 70. 3. Where providing alternate power to electric drive fire pump(s) on the Drawings, comply

with NFPA 20. 4. Comply with NFPA 99. 5. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1emergency power supply system.



C. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 2200.

D. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with currently enforced federal Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Tier requirements and applicable state and local government requirements. The engine shall be EPA certified, Emergency Standby EPA Tier 2.

E. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements for maximum noise level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of installation. The enclosure shall be rated 75dba @ 7 meters at full load in free field.

F. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability: 1. Ambient Temperature: -12 to 50 deg C. 2. Relative Humidity: Zero to 95 percent. 3. Altitude: Sea level to 5.000 feet.

2.3 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Factory-assembled and -tested, stationary, liquid-cooled, full diesel, compression ignition, four cycle, multi-cylinder of either vertical in-line or V-type. Arrange engine for direct connection to alternating current generator. Fuel injection and valves shall not require adjustment while in service with brushless four pole generator with horsepower necessary to deliver kW required, with accessories required. The manufacturer shall certify that this electric set series has been developed through rigorous, comprehensive tests including: 1. Maximum power level. 2. Maximum motor starting capacity. 3. Endurance tests. 4. Structural soundness. 5. Torsigraph analysis per MIL-STD-705B, Method 504.2. 6. Fuel consumption. 7. Engine - alternator cooling air flow. 8. Transient response and steady state governing. 9. Alternator temperature rise per NEMA MGI-22.40 definition. 10. Single step load pickup. 11. Harmonic analysis and voltage wave form deviation per MIL-STD-705B, Method 601.4. 12. Three-phase short circuit test for mechanical and electrical strength.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Induction Method: Naturally aspirated or Turbocharged.

D. Governor: Electronic adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing.

E. Emissions: Certified to comply with currently enforced federal Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Tier requirements. Also, Comply with State Department of Environmental



Quality (DEQ) certified emissions standards or the applicable state or district Department of the Environment. Standby diesel generator system shall implement Best Available Control Technology (BACT) as defined by the applicable department of the environment with regards to emission levels of nitrogen oxides (NO2), sulfur dioxides (SO2) and other products of combustion. The Contractor shall contact the department of the environment to confirm current BACT requirements. Include written documentation with submittal package demonstrating compliance with DEQ BACT requirements.

F. Mounting Frame: Structural steel framework to maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation. Provide lifting attachments sized and spaced to prevent deflection of base during lifting and moving. 1. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mounting frame to

indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and generator-set center of gravity.

G. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Power Output Ratings: Sized to deliver not less than the output kW rating at stated

voltage and power factor continuously while operating, excluding power required for the continued and repeated operation of the unit and auxiliaries.

2. Output Connections: Three-phase or four-wire as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and

address, and model and serial number of component.

H. Generator-Set Performance: 1. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth regulation: +2 percent of rated output

voltage from no load to full load. 2. Voltage stability: One percent of its mean value at any constant load from no load to full

load. 3. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent step-

load increase or decrease, except where the maximum allowable voltage drop is indicated on the drawings given a starting kVA load applied to the generator is more stringent than as indicated above, then the transient voltage performance shall meet the requirements indicated on the Drawings. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within three seconds.

4. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: +0.25 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load.

5. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.

6. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within five seconds.

7. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.

8. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a three-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 300 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator system components.



9. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.

2.4 ENGINE

A. Fuel: Fuel oil, Grade DF-2.

B. Engine shall give satisfactory performance on ASME classified commercial grade of petroleum fuels Designation D-975 Grades 1-D and 2-D. Diesel engines requiring premium fuel will not be considered. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.

C. Maximum Piston Speed for Four-Cycle Engines: 1800 fpm.

D. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid: 1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles five micrometers and smaller

while passing full flow. 2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil

temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe. 3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable

container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances.

E. Jacket Coolant Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity, maintain 90 deg F water temperature in ambient conditions.

F. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-generator-set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump. 1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water,

with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer. 2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to

110 percent load condition. 3. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum

closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and petcock. 4. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow

automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer.

5. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion-resistant fabric. a. Rating: 50-psig maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F, and non-

collapsible under vacuum. b. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and

equipment connections.

G. Muffler/Silencer: Size recommended by engine manufacturer, installed inside the enclosure, and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements and meet the project’s sound criteria requirements. Air-Intake Filter: Heavy-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element and "blocked filter" indicator.

H. Starting System: 12 or 24-Vdc electric, with negative ground.



1. Components: Sized so they are not damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine flywheel without binding.

3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified. 4. Battery: Lead acid, with capacity within ambient temperature range specified in

"Performance Requirements" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least three times without recharging.

5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated. Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories.

6. Battery Rack: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish and thermal insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall be arranged to maintain battery above 10 deg C regardless of external ambient temperature within range specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. Include accessories required to support and fasten batteries in place. Provide ventilation to exhaust battery gases.

7. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation and 35 A minimum continuous rating.

8. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, unit mounted, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type designed for lead-acid batteries. Unit shall comply with UL 1236, , meet the requirements of NFPA 99 and NFPA 110 and include the following features: a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after

battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again.

b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg F to 140 deg F to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.

c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.

d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging rates.

e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication at system control and monitoring panel to meet the alarm requirements of NFPA 99 and NFPA 110.

f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet for indoor locations, Type 3R for outdoor locations.

2.5 DIESEL FUEL-OIL SYSTEM

A. Comply with NFPA 30.

B. Piping: Fuel-oil piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel, complying with requirements in Division 23 "Facility Fuel-Oil Piping." Cast iron, aluminum, copper, and galvanizing shall not be used in the fuel-oil system.

C. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine to provide primary fuel flow under starting and load conditions.



D. Fuel Filtering: Remove water and contaminants larger than 1 micron. Primary filter and water separator shall be furnished and installed.

E. Relief-Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess fuel to source.

F. Fuel-Oil Storage Tank: Comply with requirements in Division 23 "Facility Underground Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks" or Division 23 "Facility Aboveground Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks." 1. Fuel Tank Capacity: 1000 gallons or as specified on the drawings. 2. Duplex Fuel-Oil Transfer Pump: Comply with requirements in Division 23 "Facility

Fuel-Oil Pumps."

G. Fuel Sub Base Tank: Comply with UL 142. Provide a double wall sub-base tank constructed to meet all local codes and requirements. A fuel tank base of 18-hour capacity shall be provided as an integral part of the enclosure and shall be contained in a rupture basin with 110% capacity. The factory-fabricated fuel tank assembly shall be provided with the following features: 1. Containment: Integral rupture basin with a capacity of 110 percent of the nominal

capacity of sub base tank. a. Leak Detector: Locate in rupture basin and connect to provide audible and visual

alarm in the event of tank lead. 2. Tank Capacity: 1000 gallons. 3. Locking fill cap. 4. Mechanical reading fuel level gauge. 5. Liquid level float switch #1: Low-Level Alarm Sensor: Liquid-level device operates

alarm contacts at 25 percent of normal fuel level. 6. Fuel tank rupture alarm contact.

2.6 CONTROL AND MONITORING

A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms.

B. Provide minimum run time control set for 15 minutes with override only by operation of an emergency-stop switch.

C. Comply with UL 508A.

D. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator set. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration. Panel shall be powered from the engine-generator set battery. 1. Cabinet Construction: Rigid, self-supporting steel unit complying with NEMA ICS 6.

Power bus shall be copper. Bus, bus supports, control wiring, and temperature rise shall comply with UL 891.



E. Indicating Devices: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 1 system, including the following: 1. AC voltmeter. 2. AC ammeter. 3. AC frequency meter. 4. EPS supplying load indicator. 5. Ammeter and voltmeter phase-selector switches. 6. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 7. Engine-coolant temperature gage. 8. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage. 9. Running-time meter. 10. Current and Potential Transformers: Instrument accuracy class. 11. Real time fuel consumption based on killowatts.

F. Protective Devices and Controls in Local Control Panel: Shutdown devices and common visual alarm indication as required by NFPA 110 for Level 1 system, including the following: 1. Start-stop switch. 2. Overcrank shutdown device. 3. Overspeed shutdown device. 4. Coolant high-temperature shutdown device. 5. Coolant low-level shutdown device. 6. Low lube oil pressure shutdown device. 7. Air shutdown damper shutdown device when used. 8. Overcrank alarm. 9. Overspeed alarm. 10. Coolant high-temperature alarm. 11. Coolant low-temperature alarm. 12. Coolant low-level alarm. 13. Low lube oil pressure alarm. 14. Air shutdown damper alarm when used. 15. Lamp test. 16. Contacts for local and remote common alarm. 17. Coolant high-temperature pre-alarm. 18. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat. 19. Main fuel tank low-level alarm.

a. Low fuel level alarm shall be initiated when the level falls below that required for operation for the duration required in "Fuel Tank Capacity" Paragraph in "Diesel Fuel-Oil System" Article.

20. Run-Off-Auto switch. 21. Control switch not in automatic position alarm. 22. Low cranking voltage alarm. 23. Battery-charger malfunction alarm. 24. Battery low-voltage alarm. 25. Battery high-voltage alarm. 26. Generator overcurrent protective device not closed alarm.

G. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated.



H. Connection to Datalink: A separate terminal block, factory wired to Form C dry contacts, for each alarm and status indication. Provide connections for datalink transmission of indications to remote data terminals via ModBus.

I. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99. An LED labeled with proper alarm conditions shall identify each alarm event, and a common audible signal shall sound for each alarm condition. Silencing switch in face of panel shall silence signal without altering visual indication. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface- or flush-mounting type to suit mounting conditions. Remote panel shall be powered with a separate 120 volt AC power source from the stand by system using 2 #12 AWG, #12 ground, in 1/2” conduit from available 20 amp single pole circuit breaker in 120/208 volt standby power panelboard. 1. Overcrank alarm. 2. Coolant low-temperature alarm. 3. High engine temperature pre-alarm. 4. High engine temperature alarm. 5. Low lube oil pressure alarm. 6. Overspeed alarm. 7. Low fuel main tank alarm. 8. Low coolant level alarm. 9. Low cranking voltage alarm. 10. Contacts for local and remote common alarm. 11. Audible-alarm silencing switch. 12. Air shutdown damper when used. 13. Run-Off-Auto switch. 14. Control switch not in automatic position alarm. 15. Fuel tank derangement alarm. 16. Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm. 17. Lamp test. 18. Low cranking voltage alarm. 19. Generator overcurrent protective devices not closed.

J. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION

A. Overcurrent protective devices for the entire EPSS shall be coordinated to optimize selective tripping when a short circuit occurs. Coordination of protective devices shall consider both utility and EPS as the voltage source. 1. Overcurrent protective devices for the EPSS shall be accessible only to authorized

personnel.

B. Generator Circuit Breaker: insulated-case, electronic-trip type; 100 percent continuous duty rated; complying with UL 489. 1. Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time delay and instantaneous

with adjustable settings. Provide ground fault alarm. 2. Trip Settings: Selected to coordinate with generator thermal damage curve.



3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other protective devices.

4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel. 5. Position indicator contacts: Provide two sets of contacts that change with each circuit

breaker position. Indicate position on the generator annunicator panels.

C. Generator Protector: Microprocessor-based unit shall continuously monitor current level in each phase of generator output, integrate generator heating effect over time, and predict when thermal damage of alternator will occur. When signaled by generator protector or other generator-set protective devices, a shunt-trip device in the generator disconnect switch shall open the switch to disconnect the generator from load circuits. Protector performs the following functions:

D. Ground-Fault Indication alarm: Comply with NFPA 70, "Emergency System" signals for ground fault. 1. Indicate ground fault alarm with other generator-set alarm indications.

2.8 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1.

B. Generator shall be Engine-driven, single bearing, permanent magnet generator, synchronous type. Revolving field, 4 pole, and brushless type employing rotor amortisseur windings to improve the AC wave form and reduce field heating. Capacity shall be as shown on the drawings.

C. Exciter shall be fast-response magnet-generator exciter system type to accommodate motor starting.

D. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft by means of flexible disc coupling for permanent self-alignment. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor.

E. Electrical Insulation Class H.

F. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if required. Provide 12 lead alternator.

G. Range: Provide limited range of output voltage by adjusting the excitation level.

H. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity.

I. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified and as required by NFPA 110. 1. Adjusting Rheostat on Control and Monitoring Panel: Provide plus or minus five percent

adjustment of output-voltage operating band. 2. Maintain voltage within 15 percent on one step, full load. 3. Provide anti-hunt provision to stabilize voltage.



4. Maintain frequency within 0.25 percent and stabilize at rated frequency within two seconds.

J. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew point.

K. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding.

L. Subtransient Reactance: 10.25 percent, maximum.

M. Cooling: Direct centrifugal blower cooled and furnished with heavy-duty ball bearing with pre-lubricated cartridge.

N. Temperature rise shall not exceed 105 deg C.

O. Starting KVA at 30 percent voltage dip shall not be less than 2541 amps

2.9 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE

A. Provide a vandal-resistant; weatherproof steel housing, wind resistant up to 120 mph. Multiple hinged access panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. Panels shall be operable and removable by one person without tools. Generator, Engine, Radiator, Exhaust Muffler, Batteries, Branch Circuit Panelboard, Accessories, Instruments, and control shall be mounted within enclosure, unless noted otherwise. Access to unit instrumentation and controller shall be accessible from a dedicated hinged access panel with lockable latch.

B. Enclosure shall be prefabricated or pre-engineered galvanized-steel-clad, integral structural-steel-framed, walk-in or walk-up enclosure, erected on generator frame with the following features, ratings, and accessories: 1. Structural Design and Anchorage: Comply with ASCE 7 for wind loads up to 120 mph

and shall be VUSBC certified for 120 mph wind loading. 2. Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions. 3. The roof of the housing shall be pitched so that no ponding of water will occur. Where

indicated on the drawings to be an exterior location on a roof, the roof pitch shall match roof drainage ridges and valleys, enclosure of the housing shall match the ridges and valleys in the location of the roof where mounted. Where the generator enclosure is elevated mounted on dunnage, structural steel, or other elements that raise the unit above the walking surface, include enclosure construction on the elevated underside of the generator enclosure, with necessary sound insulation and removable sheet metal paneling.

4. Cold Weather Package consisting of a space heater, air inlet damper, backdraft damper, jacket water heater with pump, space heater, 10-amp battery charger, heavy duty battery set (two 12 volt batteries), dual electric engine starters, AC outlet, and, interior lighting. All cold weather package components and generator auxiliaries shall be prewired to a 100-amp three phase panelboard with branch circuit monitoring contained in a NEMA 3R enclosure located within the enclosure (preferred) or on the exterior of the enclosure provided all access to the generator is sufficient.

5. The generator submitted for this project shall have documented and certified sound power data complying with the specified maximum sound power levels. The generator



manufacturer shall warrant and certify that the sound power levels of the generator to be provided on this project do not exceed the maximum sound power levels specified.

C. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for eight hours with ambient temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions. 1. Louvers: Fixed-engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge. Storm-proof and drainable

louvers prevent entry of rain and snow. Where required for enclosure requirements, provide with intake sound attenuating plenum and discharge sound attenuating plenum, the intake plenum shall be open on the bottom to allow air to enter the generator. The discharge plenum shall be open on the top to direct the air upward. Refer to the drawings for locations of intake and discharge ends of enclosure.

2. Ventilation openings shall contain a wire mesh bird/varmint screen to prevent entry by rodents, etc.

3. Automatic Dampers: Where required for enclosure requirements, at engine cooling-air inlet and discharge. Dampers shall be closed to reduce enclosure heat loss in cold weather when unit is not operating.

2.10 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES

A. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators similar or equal to Mason Industries type ‘SLR’. 1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind

loads or if weight is removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to one quarter inch thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of the spring at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure. 6. Minimum Deflection: Two inches 7. VUSBC approved.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 23 “Hydronic Piping Specialties" for vibration isolation and flexible connectors materials for steel piping.

C. Comply with requirements in Division 23 "Metal Ducts" for vibration isolation and flexible connector materials for exhaust shroud and ductwork.

D. Vibration isolation devices shall not be used to accommodate misalignments or to make bends.

E. Provide quantity of vibration isolation devices as necessary to support wet weight of fully assembled unit, with required minimum deflection.

F. Install vibration isolation devices per the manufacturer’s requirements.



2.11 FINISHES

A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer.


A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories. 1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115.

B. Factory Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine-generator set and other system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests: 1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical to

those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability. 2. Test generator, exciter, and voltage regulator as a unit. 3. Full load run. 4. Maximum power. 5. Voltage regulation. 6. Transient and steady-state governing. 7. Single-step load pickup. 8. Safety shutdown. 9. Provide 14 days’ advance notice of tests and opportunity for observation of tests by

Owner's representative. 10. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test.

2.13 REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS:

A. Each generator unit shall be provided with remote communications for monitoring by the Building Automation System (BAS). The communications connection and protocol shall be coordinated with the BAS Contractor and shall provide all monitoring and alarm functions available to the operator at the system control panel. The communications protocol shall be one of the open protocols (MOD BUS, etc.) listed under other specification sections, or an open published proprietary protocol acceptable to the BAS Contractor. The Standby Diesel Generator System manufacturer shall be responsible for coordinating this requirement with the BAS contractor to ensure proper interface between the generator system communications interface module and the BAS. The manufacturer shall provide all required on-site technical support to demonstrate the proper command and transfer of information between the standby generators and the BAS. If BACnet is required, a translator supplied and installed by the BAS contractor is to be furnished.

2.14 FIRE COMMAND ROOM CONTROL AND MONITORING

A. Where the project includes a Fire Command Room, the following shall be provided: 1. Remote control provisions for remote start from the fire command room. 2. Remote control provisions for remote emergency stop from the fire command room. 3. Remote generator annunciator. 4. Remote control provisions for remote transfer switch position control, individually for

each ATS on the project. Refer to section ‘Transfer Switches’ for additional information.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with re-quirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator perfor-mance.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine-generator installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110.

B. Equipment Mounting: 1. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases, dunnage, equipment supports for

packaged engine generators. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

2. Where Drawings indicate a roof mounted location, coordinate the size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports. Refer to these items specified under other sections.

C. Install packaged engine-generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance.

D. Install with restrained spring isolators having a minimum deflection of two inches on six inch high concrete base. Secure unit to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. Where isolation pads are provided refer to detail drawings for mounting requirements.

E. Install condensate drain piping to muffler drain outlet full size of drain connection with a shutoff valve, stainless-steel flexible connector, and Schedule 40, black steel pipe with welded joints. Terminate drain piping above floor.

F. Installation requirements for piping materials and flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 "Hydronic Piping Specialties." Copper and galvanized steel shall not be used in the fuel-oil piping system.

G. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections.

B. Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine-generator to allow service and maintenance.



C. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.

D. Ground equipment according to Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

E. Connect wiring according to Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Provide a minimum of one 90 degree bend in flexible conduit routed to the generator set from a stationary element.

F. Connect branch circuit monitoring panelboards to master monitoring system.

G. Connect controller to Automatic Transfer Switches according to Division 26.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components according to Division 23 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" and "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install a sign indicating the generator neutral is bonded to the main service neutral at the main service location.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Tests and Inspections: 1. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to

those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test. 2. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Record individual cell voltages. a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for

full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions.

b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery.

c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge. d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.

3. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-charging conditions.

4. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.

C. Leak Test: After installation, charge exhaust, coolant, and fuel systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

D. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation for generator and associated equipment. In addition to testing required under other section, at the time of Factory startup, provide four hour load bank test



using the rated kW as the test load. The Contractor shall provide temporary load banks as necessary.

E. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

F. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

G. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met.

H. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

3.6 FUEL

A. Prior to startup and testing, the Contractor shall provide fuel sufficient to fill both day tank (when installed) and storage tank/sub base tank to a minimum of 90% of fuel capacity. After completion of start-up and testing, fill day and storage tank to 100% capacity. At the time of project turn over to the Owner, check fuel fill levels and where necessary refill day and storage tank/sub base tank to 100% capacity.

3.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include quarterly exercising to check for proper starting, load transfer, and running under load. Include routine preventive maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for proper operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.

B. Extended Service Alternate 1. Emergency Generator Extended Service Contract Alternate: The manufacturer shall

submit with their bid the cost, as an alternate, to provide three (3) additional years of service beyond the minimum two (2) year warranty period. Provide a separate price for each of the four (4) additional years. This additional service shall commence two (2) years following the date of substantial completion. The first year of service after substantial completion shall be included in the base bid price.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel for a minimum of two 4 hour sessions to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generator systems.



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 263353-1 Alexandria, Virginia STATIC UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY

SECTION 263353 - STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes three-phase on-line, double-conversion, static-type, UPS installations complete with transient voltage surge suppression, input harmonics filters and reduction, rectifier-battery charger assembly, battery plant, battery disconnect device, DC to AC inverter, static bypass transfer switch assembly, internal maintenance bypass/isolation switch, external maintenance bypass/isolation switch, remote UPS monitoring provisions, and integral battery plant monitoring.

B. System description: The system will consist of one standalone 200kVA/200kW UPS, composed of four 50kVA/50kW power modules (UPM’s) for 200kVA/200kW capacity and one additional 50kVA/50kW UPM for N+1 redundancy.

C. Basis of design: Vertiv Liebert model eXM with the following features: 200 kVA N+1 output in total per-module rating, 480 volt 3 phase, 3 wire input and output, dual input (rectifier input and static switch input), the UPS shall consist of a solid-state inverter, rectifier/battery charger, batteries and battery disconnects, necessary input filtering to limit input THD below 5%, connection control circuitry, disconnection control circuitry, system metering, system status indicators, and system alarm annunciation circuitry. 1. The UPS shall be front access only and shall contain a vendor provided cable entry

section for two-hole long barrel compression lug connections. 2. UPS batteries shall be valve-regulated, high-rate discharge, lead acid batteries sized for a

protection time of approximately 9 minutes at 200 kW load. 3. The UPS shall be provided with a maintenance bypass panelboard which shall contain a

UPS maintenance isolation circuit breaker, maintenance bypass circuit breaker, a load bank circuit breaker, and critical distribution circuit breakers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. LCD: Liquid-crystal display.

C. LED: Light-emitting diode.

D. THD: Total harmonic distortion.

E. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.

F. IGBT: Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include data on features, components, ratings, and performance for each UPS component indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of equipment indicating dimensions, weights, components, and location and identification of each field connection. Show access, workspace, and clearance requirements; details of control panels; and battery arrangement. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.

D. Manufacturer Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers.

E. Factory Test Reports: Comply with specified requirements.

F. Field Quality-Control and Performance Test Reports: Indicate test results compared with specified performance requirements, and provide justification and resolution of differences if values do not agree.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For UPS units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended being stored at Project

site for ready access. 2. Detailed operating instructions covering operation under both normal and abnormal

conditions.

H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Power Quality Specialist Qualifications: A registered professional electrical engineer or engineering technician, currently certified by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies, NICET Level 4, minimum, experienced in performance testing UPS installations and in performing power quality surveys similar to that required in Part 3 " Performance Testing" Article.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within fifty 50 miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs with eight hours maximum response time.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain the UPS and associated components specified in this Section from a single manufacturer with responsibility for entire UPS installation.

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

G. UL Compliance: The UPS shall be UL listed per UL Standard 1778, Fourth edition, Uninterruptible Power Supplies, and shall be CSA Certified.

H. NFPA Compliance: Mark UPS components as suitable for installation in computer rooms according to NFPA 75.


A. Deliver equipment in fully enclosed vehicles after specified environmental conditions have been permanently established in spaces where equipment is to be placed.

B. Store equipment in spaces with environments controlled within manufacturer's ambient temperature and humidity tolerances for non-operating equipment.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Battery Warranties: Specified form in which manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace UPS system storage batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1.8 Warranties associated with items not manufactured by the UPS supplier but included as part of the system shall be passed through to the end user. VRLA batteries shall be supplied with 3 year full and 7 year pro-rata.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than 1 of each. 2. Cabinet Ventilation Filters: One complete set.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:



1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. a. Vertiv Liebert UPS b. EATON, Powerware UPS c. APC-MGE/Schneider

2.2 PERFORMANCE DESCRIPTION

A. Automatic operation includes the following: 1. Normal Conditions: The critical AC load shall be continuously powered by the UPS

inverter. The rectifier/charger shall derive power from the utility AC source and supply DC power to the DC-DC converter, which in turn shall supply the inverter while simultaneously float charging the battery.

2. Abnormal Supply Conditions: If normal ac supply deviates from specified and adjustable voltage, voltage waveform, or frequency limits, the battery supplies energy to maintain constant, regulated inverter ac power output to the load without switching or disturbance.

3. Upon failure of utility AC power, the critical load shall be powered by the inverter, which, without any switching, shall obtain its power from the battery plant via the DC-DC converter. There shall be no interruption in power to the critical load upon failure or restoration of the utility AC source.

4. Upon restoration of the utility AC source, the rectifier shall supply power to the output inverter and to the DC-DC converter, which shall simultaneously recharge the batteries. This shall be an automatic function and shall cause no interruption to the critical load.

5. If the battery becomes discharged and normal supply is available, the rectifier-charger charges the battery. On reaching full charge, the rectifier-charger automatically shifts to float-charge mode.

6. If any element of the UPS system fails and power is available at the normal supply terminals of the system, the static bypass transfer switch switches the load to the normal ac supply circuit without disturbance or interruption.

7. If a fault occurs in the system supplied by the UPS, and current flows in excess of the overload rating of the UPS system, the static bypass transfer switch operates to bypass the fault current to the normal ac supply circuit for fault clearing.

8. When the fault has cleared, the static bypass transfer switch returns the load to the UPS system.

9. If the battery is disconnected, the UPS continues to supply power to the load with no degradation of its regulation of voltage and frequency of the output bus.

B. Manual operation includes the following: 1. Turning the inverter off causes the static bypass transfer switch to transfer the load

directly to the normal ac supply circuit without disturbance or interruption. 2. Turning the inverter on causes the static bypass transfer switch to transfer the load to the

inverter.

C. Maintenance Bypass/Isolation Switch Operation: Switch is interlocked so it cannot be operated unless the static bypass transfer switch is in the bypass mode. Device provides manual selection between the following three conditions without interrupting supply to the load during switching: 1. Full Isolation: Load is supplied, bypassing the UPS. Normal UPS ac input circuit, static

bypass transfer switch, and UPS load terminals are completely disconnected from external circuits.



2. Maintenance Bypass: Load is supplied, bypassing the UPS. UPS ac supply terminals are energized to permit operational checking, but system load terminals are isolated from the load.

3. Normal: Normal UPS ac supply terminals are energized and the load is supplied through either the static bypass transfer switch and the UPS rectifier-charger and inverter, or the battery and the inverter.

2.3 SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditions: The UPS shall be capable of operating continuously in the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability, except battery performance. 1. Ambient Temperature for Electronic Components: 32 to 104 deg F (0 to 40 deg C). 2. Ambient Temperature for Battery: 77°F (25°C), ±5°F (±3°C). 3. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent, noncondensing. 4. Altitude: Sea level to 3300 feet (1000 m).


A. The UPS shall perform as specified in this Article while supplying rated full-load current, composed of any combination of linear and nonlinear load, up to 100 percent nonlinear load with a load crest factor of 3.0, under the following conditions or combinations of the following conditions: 1. Inverter is switched to battery source. 2. Steady-state ac input voltage deviates up to plus or minus 10 percent from nominal

voltage. 3. Steady-state input frequency deviates up to plus or minus 5 percent from nominal

frequency. 4. THD of input voltage is 15 percent or more with a minimum crest factor of 3.0, and the

largest single harmonic component is a minimum of 5 percent of the fundamental value. 5. Load is 75 percent unbalanced continuously.

B. Minimum Duration of Supply: If battery is sole energy source supplying rated full UPS load current at 90 percent power factor, duration of supply is 9 minutes.

C. Input Voltage Tolerance: +20%, -15% at full load; -40% at half load.

D. Overall UPS Efficiency: Equal to or greater than ninety-five (95) percent at 100 percent load.

E. Maximum Acoustical Noise: 59 dBA measured 4.6 ft. (1.4m) from the surface of the unit.

F. Maximum Energizing Inrush Current: UPS inrush current not to exceed 1.5 times rated input current.

G. Maximum AC Output-Voltage Regulation for Loads up to 50 Percent Unbalanced: +/- 1% RMS average for a balanced, three-phase load. +/-2% for 100% unbalanced load for line-to-line imbalances.

H. Output Frequency: Synchronized to bypass +/-2.0 Hz default setting, (adjustable by factory service personnel).



I. Limitation of harmonic distortion of input current to the UPS shall be as follows: 1. Description: Less than 3% THD at full load linear input current and less than 5% at full

load non-linear input current in double-conversion mode.

J. Maximum Harmonic Content of Output-Voltage Waveform: 5 percent RMS total and 3 percent RMS for any single harmonic, for 100 percent rated nonlinear load current with a load crest factor of 3.0.

K. Maximum Harmonic Content of Output-Voltage Waveform: 5 percent RMS total and 3 percent RMS for any single harmonic, for rated full load with THD up to 50 percent, with a load crest factor of 3.0.

L. Minimum Overload Capacity of UPS at Rated Voltage: 100% continuously, 105% - 110% of full load for 60 minutes at 104°F (40°C) ambient, 110% - 125% of full load for 10 minutes at 104°F (40°C) ambient, 125% - 150% of full load for 60 seconds at 104°F (40°C) ambient, >150% of full load for a minimum of 200 milliseconds at 104°F (40°C) ambient in all operating modes.

M. Maximum Output-Voltage Transient Excursions from Rated Value: For the following instantaneous load changes, stated as percentages of rated full UPS load, voltage shall remain within stated percentages of rated value and recover to, and remain within, plus or minus 2 percent of that value within 60 ms: 1. 50 Percent: Plus or minus 5 percent. 2. 100 Percent: Plus or minus 5 percent. 3. Loss of AC Input Power: Plus or minus 1 percent. 4. Restoration of AC Input Power: Plus or minus 1 percent.

N. Input Power Factor: Minimum 0.99 at full load with nominal input voltage.

O. EMI Emissions: The UPS shall comply with FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 15, Subclass B, Class A. This compliance is legally required to prevent interference with adjacent equipment. The UPS shall have a label stating FCC compliance. The manufacturer shall provide evidence and test data of compliance upon request.

2.5 UPS SYSTEMS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Vertiv Liebert UPS 2. EATON, Powerware UPS 3. APC-MGE MGE UPS Brand Products

B. Electronic Equipment: Solid-state devices using hermetically sealed, semiconductor elements. Other devices are sealed for dust.

C. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Control Assemblies: Mount on modular plug-ins, readily accessible for maintenance.

E. Surge Suppression: Protect internal UPS components from surges that enter at each ac power input connection including main disconnect switch, static bypass transfer switch, and



maintenance bypass/isolation switch. Protect rectifier-charger, inverter, controls, and output components. 1. The UPS shall withstand input surges to both the rectifier and bypass when configured as

a dual-input unit without damage as per the criteria in EN62040-2 (4kV). The manufacturer shall provide evidence of compliance upon request.

F. Maintainability Features: Mount rectifier-charger and inverter sections and the static bypass transfer switch on modular plug-ins, readily accessible for maintenance.

G. UPS Cabinet Ventilation: Fans or blowers draw in ambient air near the bottom of cabinet and discharge it near the top rear.

H. Output Circuit Neutral Bus, Conductor, and Terminal Ampacity: Rated phase current times a multiple of 1, minimum.

2.6 RECTIFIER-CHARGER

A. Description: Modular type IGBT construction.

B. Capacity: Adequate to supply the inverter during rated full output load conditions and simultaneously recharge the battery from fully discharged condition to 95 percent of full charge within 10 times the rated discharge time for duration of supply under battery power at full load.

C. Output Ripple: The AC ripple voltage of the charger DC shall not exceed 1% RMS of the float voltage.

D. Rectifier-Charger Control Circuits: Immune to frequency variations within rated frequency ranges of normal and emergency power sources. 1. Response Time: Field adjustable for maximum compatibility with local generator-set

power source.

E. Battery Float-Charging Conditions: Comply with battery manufacturer's written instructions for battery terminal voltage and charging current required for maximum battery life.

F. Temperature-Compensated Charging: The UPS shall adjust the battery charging voltage based on the battery temperature reported from external battery temperature sensors. When multiple sensors are used, the voltage shall be based on the average temperature measured. Excessive difference in the temperature measurements shall be reported and the charging voltage adjusted to protect the batteries from excessive current.

G. Battery Load Testing: The UPS shall be capable of performing battery load testing under operator supervision. To accomplish this, the rectifier shall reduce charging voltage to force the batteries to carry the load for a short time. If the curve of battery voltage drop indicates diminished battery capacity, the UPS shall display an alarm message. If the voltage drop indicates battery failure, the UPS shall terminate the test immediately and annunciate the appropriate alarms.



2.7 INVERTER

A. Description: Modular type IGBT construction, pulse-width modulated, with sinusoidal output. Include a bypass phase synchronization window adjustment to optimize compatibility with engine-generator plant power source.

2.8 STATIC BYPASS TRANSFER SWITCH

A. Description: Solid-state switching device providing uninterrupted transfer. A contactor or electrically operated circuit breaker automatically provides electrical isolation for the switch.

B. Switch Rating: The static bypass switch shall be rated for continuous duty operation at full rated load for highest reliability without the use of mechanical devices, such as those used with a momentary rated device.

2.9 BATTERY

A. Description: Valve-regulated, premium, heavy-duty, recombinant, lead-calcium units, factory assembled in an isolated compartment or in a separate matching cabinet, complete with battery disconnect switch. 1. Arrange for drawout removal of battery assembly from cabinet for testing and inspecting. 2. Include code-required ventilation openings, placed, designed, sized, and certified for

maximum storage capacity of the cabinet.

2.10 CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS

A. Description: The UPS shall be provided with a microprocessor-based control panel for operator interface (may also be referred to as User Interface, or UI) to configure and monitor the UPS. The control panel shall be located on the front of the unit where it can be operated without opening the hinged front door. A backlit, menu-driven, full-graphics, color touchscreen liquid crystal display shall be used to display system information, metering information, a one-line diagram of the UPS and battery, active events and event history. No Mechanical push buttons shall be used.

B. A microprocessor shall control the display and memory functions of the monitoring system. All three phases of three-phase parameters shall be displayed simultaneously. All voltage and current parameters shall be monitored using true RMS measurements for accuracy to ±3% of voltage, ±5% AC current.

C. Indications: Plain-language messages on a digital LCD or LED screen. 1. Quantitative indications shall include the following:

a. Input voltage, each phase, line to line. b. Input current, each phase, line to line. c. Input frequency d. Input apparent power (kVA) e. Bypass input voltage, each phase, line to line. f. Bypass input frequency. g. System output voltage, each phase, line to line. h. System output current, each phase. i. System output frequency.



j. DC bus voltage. k. Battery current and direction (charge/discharge). l. Elapsed time discharging battery. m. Load real power (kW), total and percentage n. Load apparent power (kVA), total and percentage o. Battery temperature

2. Basic status condition indications shall include the following: a. Normal operation. b. Load-on bypass. c. Load-on battery. d. Inverter off. e. Alarm condition.

3. Alarm indications shall include the following: a. Bypass ac input overvoltage or undervoltage. b. Bypass ac input overfrequency or underfrequency. c. Bypass ac input and inverter out of synchronization. d. Bypass ac input wrong-phase rotation. e. Bypass ac input single-phase condition. f. Bypass ac input filter fuse blown. g. Internal frequency standard in use. h. Battery system alarm. i. Control power failure. j. Fan failure. k. UPS overload. l. Battery-charging control faulty. m. Input overvoltage or undervoltage. n. Input wrong-phase rotation. o. Input single-phase condition. p. Approaching end of battery operation. q. Battery undervoltage shutdown. r. Maximum battery voltage. s. Inverter fuse blown. t. Inverter overtemperature. u. Static bypass transfer switch overtemperature. v. Inverter power supply fault. w. Inverter transistors out of saturation. x. Identification of faulty inverter section/leg. y. Inverter output overvoltage or undervoltage. z. UPS overload shutdown. aa. Inverter current sensor fault. bb. Inverter output contactor open. cc. Inverter current limit.

4. Controls shall include the following: a. Inverter on-off. b. UPS start. c. Battery test. d. Alarm silence/reset. e. Output-voltage adjustment.



D. Dry-form "C" contacts shall be available for remote indication of the following conditions: 1. UPS on battery. 2. UPS on-line. 3. UPS load-on bypass. 4. UPS in alarm condition. 5. UPS off (maintenance bypass closed).

E. Emergency Power Off Switch: Capable of local operation and operation by means of activation by external dry contacts.

2.11 MAINTENANCE BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCH

A. Description: Manually operated switch or arrangement of switching devices with mechanically actuated contact mechanism arranged to route the flow of power to the load around the rectifier-charger, inverter, and static bypass transfer switch. 1. Switch shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked to prevent interrupting power to

the load when switching to bypass mode. 2. Switch shall electrically isolate other UPS components to permit safe servicing.

B. Comply with NEMA PB 2 and UL 891.

C. Switch Rating: Continuous duty at rated full UPS load current.

D. Mounting Provisions: Separate wall- or floor-mounted unit.

E. Kirk-Key interlock requires unlocking maintenance bypass/isolation switch before switching from normal position with key that is released only when the UPS is bypassed by the static bypass transfer switch. Lock is designed specifically for mechanical and electrical component interlocking.

2.12 MONITORING BY REMOTE STATUS AND ALARM PANEL

A. Description: Labeled LEDs on panel faceplate indicate five basic status conditions. Audible signal indicates alarm conditions. Silencing switch in face of panel silences signal without altering visual indication. 1. Cabinet and Faceplate: Surface or flush mounted to suit mounting conditions indicated.

2.13 MONITORING BY REMOTE COMPUTER

A. Description: Communication module in unit control panel provides capability for remote monitoring of status, parameters, and alarms specified in "Controls and Indications" Article. The remote computer and the connecting signal wiring are not included in this Section. Include the following features: 1. Connectors and network interface units or modems for data transmission via RS-232 or

RS-485 link.

2. Software designed for monitoring of UPS functions and to provide on-screen explanations, interpretations, diagnosis, action guidance, and instructions for use of monitoring indications and development of meaningful reports. Permit storage and



analysis of power-line transient records. Design for windows applications using a personal computer, which is not included in this Section.

3. Software and Hardware: Compatible with that specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

2.14 BASIC BATTERY MONITORING

A. Manufacturers: 1. Vertiv Liebert. 2. EATON Powerware; an Invensys Company.

B. Battery Ground-Fault Detector: Initiates alarm when resistance to ground of positive or negative bus of battery is less than 5000 ohms.

C. Battery compartment high-temperature detector initiates an alarm when the temperature is greater than 75 deg C occurs within the compartment.

D. Annunciation of Alarms: At UPS control panel.


A. Factory test complete UPS system before shipment. Include the following: 1. Test and demonstration of all functions, controls, indicators, sensors, and protective

devices. 2. Full-load test. 3. Transient-load response test. 4. Overload test. 5. Power failure test.

B. Observation of Test: Give 14 days' advance notice of tests and provide opportunity for Owner's representative to observe tests at Owner's option.

C. Report test results. Include the following data: 1. Description of input source and output loads used. Describe actions required to simulate

source load variation and various operating conditions and malfunctions. 2. List of indications, parameter values, and system responses considered satisfactory for

each test action. Include tabulation of actual observations during test. 3. List of instruments and equipment used in factory tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install system components on 4-inch- (100-mm-) high concrete bases. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

B. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written instructions and NFPA 70.



C. Connections: Interconnect system components. Make connections to supply and load circuits according to manufacturer's wiring diagrams, unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 GROUNDING

A. Separately Derived Systems: If not part of a listed power supply for a data-processing room, comply with NFPA 70 requirements for connecting to grounding electrodes and for bonding to metallic piping near isolation transformer.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify each battery cell individually.

3.4 BATTERY EQUALIZATION

A. Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual-cell voltages.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust equipment installation including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Electrical Tests and Inspections: Perform tests and inspections according to manufacturer's written instructions and as listed below to demonstrate condition and performance of each UPS component: 1. Inspect interiors of enclosures, including the following:

a. Integrity of mechanical and electrical connections. b. Component type and labeling verification. c. Ratings of installed components.

2. Test manual and automatic operational features and system protective and alarm functions.

3. Test communication of status and alarms to remote monitoring equipment.

C. Electrical Tests and Inspections: Perform tests and inspections according to manufacturer's written instructions and as listed below to demonstrate condition and performance of each UPS component: 1. Inspect interiors of enclosures, including the following:

a. Integrity of mechanical and electrical connections. b. Component type and labeling verification. c. Ratings of installed components.

2. Load the system using a resistive load bank. Use instruments calibrated, within the previous six months according to NIST standards. a. Simulate malfunctions to verify protective device operation. b. Test duration of supply on emergency, low-battery voltage shutdown, and transfers

and restoration due to normal source failure.



c. Test harmonic content of input and output current less than 25, 50, and 100 percent of rated loads.

d. Test output voltage under specified transient-load conditions. e. Test efficiency at 50, 75, and 100 percent of rated loads. f. Test remote status and alarm panel functions. g. Test battery-monitoring system functions. h. Load test/burn-in should total 4-hours.

D. Retest: Correct deficiencies and retest until specified requirements are met.

E. Record of Tests and Inspections: Maintain and submit documentation of tests and inspections, including references to manufacturers' written instructions and other test and inspection criteria. Include results of tests, inspections, and retests.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the UPS. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 263600-1 Alexandria, Virginia TRANSFER SWITCHES

SECTION 263600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide complete factory assembled power transfer equipment with field programmable digital electronic controls designed for fully automatic operation and including: surge voltage isolation, voltage sensors on all phases of both sources, dual solenoid operator, permanently attached manual handles, positive mechanical and electrical interlocking and mechanically held contacts for both sources. Transfer switches shall be delayed transition type with ASCO 7ADTS for non-bypass applications or 7ADTB for bypass applications or approved equal.

B. Technicians specifically trained to support the product and employed by the generator set supplier shall service the transfer switches.

C. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following: 1. Automatic transfer switches. 2. Bypass/isolation switches. 3. ATS Remote annunciator.

D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section “Engine generators”.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified. 1. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, bypass/isolation

switch, power sources, and load; and show interlocking provisions for each combined transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch.

C. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency.

D. Field quality-control test reports.



E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. 2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions,

including software, where applicable.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of notification.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational

Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches, remote annunciators and remote annunciator and control panels through one source from a single manufacturer.


E. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.


G. Comply with NFPA 99.

H. Comply with NFPA 110.

I. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical

service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written

permission.



1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following by original manufacturers. Brand Labeled ATSs by Generator Manufacturer are not acceptable: 1. Contactor Transfer Switches:

a. ASCO Power Technologies b. Russelectric, Inc. c. Zenith

2.2 POWER TRANSFER SWITCH REQUIREMENTS

A. Ratings: 1. Refer to the project drawings for specifications on the sizes and types of transfer switch

equipment, withstand and closing ratings, voltage and ampere ratings, enclosure type, and accessories.

2. Main contacts shall be rated for 600 Volts AC minimum. 3. Transfer switches shall be rated to carry 100 percent of rated current continuously in the

enclosure supplied, in ambient temperatures of -40 to +60 degrees C, relative humidity up to 95% (non-condensing), and altitudes up to 10,000 feet (3000M).

4. Transfer switch equipment shall have withstand and closing ratings (WCR) in RMS symmetrical amperes greater than the available fault currents as defined in the short circuit study at the specified voltage. The transfer switch and its upstream protection shall be coordinated. The transfer switch shall be third party listed and labeled for use with the specific protective device(s) installed in the application.

5. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.

B. Construction: 1. Transfer switches shall be two single pull single throw operators electrically and

mechanically interlocked, and mechanically held in the source 1 and source 2 positions. The transfer switch shall be specifically designed to transfer to the best available source if it inadvertently stops in a neutral position.

2. Contact mechanism shall have separate contacts for the Main Contacts that have spring loaded action to prevent poor surface area contact and shall close in a wiping motion. Separate arcing contacts shall be included as well. Contacts that are derived from circuit breaker contacts are not acceptable. Main switch contacts shall be high-pressure silver alloy. Contact assemblies shall have arc chutes for positive arc extinguishing. Arc chutes shall have insulating covers to prevent inter-phase flashover.

3. Transfer switch internal wiring shall be composed of pre-manufactured harnesses that are permanently marked for source and destination. Harnesses shall be connected to the control system by means of locking disconnect plug(s), to allow the control system to be easily disconnected and serviced without disconnecting power from the transfer switch mechanism.



4. Power transfer switch shall be provided with flame retardant molded covers to allow viewing of switch contact operation but prevent direct contact with components that could be operating at line voltage levels.

5. Transfer switches designated on the drawings as 4-pole shall be provided with a switched neutral pole. The neutral pole shall be of the same construction and have the same ratings as the phase poles. All poles shall be switched simultaneously using a common crossbar.

6. Transfer switches that are designated on the drawings as 3-pole shall be provided with a neutral bus and lugs. The neutral bus shall be sized to carry 100% of the current designated on the switch rating.

C. Connections: 1. Field control connections shall be made on a common terminal block that is clearly and

permanently labeled. 2. Transfer switch shall be provided with AL/CU compression lugs. Lugs shall be suitable

for the number and size of conductors shown on the drawings.

2.3 TRANSFER SWITCH CONTROL

A. The controller's sensing and logic shall be provided by a single built-in microprocessor for maximum reliability, minimum maintenance, and the ability to communicate serially through an optional serial communication module.

B. A single controller shall provide twelve selectable nominal voltages for maximum application flexibility and minimal spare part requirements. Voltage sensing shall be true RMS type and shall be accurate to 1% of nominal voltage. Frequency sensing shall be accurate to 0.2%. The panel shall be capable of operating over a temperature range of -20 to +60 degrees C and storage from -55 to +85 degrees C.

C. The controller shall be connected to the transfer switch by an interconnecting wiring harness. The harness shall include a keyed disconnect plug to enable the controller to be disconnected from the transfer switch for routine maintenance. Sensing and control logic shall be provided on multi-layer printed circuit boards. Interfacing relays shall be industrial grade plug-in type with dust covers. The panel shall be enclosed with a protective cover and be mounted separate-ly from the transfer switch unit for safety and ease of maintenance. The protective cover shall include a built-in pocket for storage of the operator’s manuals.

D. All customer connections shall be wired to a common terminal block to simplify field-wiring connections.

E. The controller shall meet or exceed the requirements for Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) as follows:

1. EN 55011:1991 Emission standard - Group 1, Class A 2. EN 50082-2:1995 Generic immunity standard, from which: 3. EN 61000-4-2:1995 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) immunity



4. ENV 50140:1993 Radiated Electro-Magnetic field immunity 5. EN 61000-4-4:1995 Electrical fast transient (EFT) immunity 6. EN 61000-4-5:1995 Surge transient immunity 7. EN 61000-4-6:1996 Conducted Radio-Frequency field immunity

F. Internal Controls 1. The transfer switch control system shall be configurable in the field for any operating

voltage level up to 600VAC. Provide RMS voltage sensing and metering that is accurate to within plus or minus 1% of nominal voltage level. Frequency sensing shall be accurate to within plus or minus 0.2%. Voltage sensing shall be monitored based on the normal voltage at the site. Systems that utilize voltage monitoring based on standard voltage conditions that are not field configurable are not acceptable.

2. Transfer switch voltage sensors shall be close differential type, providing source availability information to the control system based on the following functions: a. Monitoring all phases of the normal service (source 1) for under voltage conditions

(adjustable for pickup in a range of 85 to 98% of the normal voltage level and dropout in a range of 75 to 98% of normal voltage level).

b. Monitoring all phases of the emergency/alternate service (source 2) for under voltage conditions (adjustable for pickup in a range of 85 to 98% of the normal voltage level and dropout in a range of 75 to 98% of pickup voltage level).

c. Monitoring all phases of the normal service (source 1) and emergency/alternate service (source 2) for loss of a single phase.

d. Monitoring all phases of the normal service (source 1) and emergency/alternate service (source 2) for over or under frequency conditions.

3. Transfer switch voltage sensors shall be close differential type, providing source availability information to the control system based on the following functions: a. Monitoring all phases of the normal service (source 1) for over voltage conditions

(adjustable for pickup in a range of 95 to 99% of the normal voltage level and dropout in a range of 105 to 135% of normal voltage level).

b. Monitoring all phases of the alternate service (source 2) for over voltage conditions (adjustable for pickup in a range of 95 to 99% of the normal voltage level and dropout in a range of 105 to 135% of pickup voltage level).

4. Transfer switch voltage sensors shall be close differential type, providing voltage imbalance sensing, dropout, 2 to 10% adjustable, pickup 90% of dropout with time delay of 2.0 to 20 seconds.

5. ATS shall be configurable without the use of a separate laptop in order to ease change of settings for end user.

6. The transfer switch shall be configurable to control the operation time from source to source (delayed transition operation). The control system shall be capable of enabling or disabling this feature, and adjusting the time period to a specific value. A phase band monitor or similar device is not an acceptable alternate for this feature.

7. The transfer switch shall incorporate adjustable time delays for generator set start (adjustable in a range from 0-15 seconds); transfer (adjustable in a range from 0-120 seconds); retransfer (adjustable in a range from 0-30 minutes); and generator stop (cool down) (adjustable in a range of 0-30 minutes).

8. The transfer switch shall be configurable to accept a relay contact signal and a network signal from an external device for load shedding purposes if necessary for this project. On receipt of this signal, the transfer switch shall switch to a neutral position when



connected to source 2. If source 1 is available when the load-shed signal is received, the transfer switch shall connect to source 1.

9. The transfer switch shall be configurable to accept a relay contact signal and a network signal from an external device to prevent transfer to the generator service.

10. The transfer switch switch shall provide a relay contact signal prior to transfer or retransfer. The time period before and after transfer shall be adjustable in a range of 0 to 50 seconds.

11. The control system shall be designed and prototype tested for operation in ambient temperatures from -40C to +70C. It shall be designed and tested to comply with the requirements of the noted voltage and RFI/EMI standards.

12. The control shall have optically isolated logic inputs, high isolation transformers for AC inputs, and relays on all outputs, to provide optimum protection from line voltage surges, RFI and EMI.

G. Control Interface 1. The transfer switch will provide an isolated relay contact for starting of a generator set.

The relay shall be normally held open, and close to start the generator set. Output contacts shall be form C, for compatibility with any generator set.

2. Provide one set Form C auxiliary contacts on both sides, operated by transfer switch position, rated 10 amps 250 VAC.

3. The transfer switch shall provide relay contacts to indicate the following conditions: source 1 available, load connected to source 1, source 2 available, source 2 connected to load.

4. The transfer switch shall be provided with a network communication card, and configured to allow communication with the transfer switch and other network system components. All transfer switches shall report transfer switch status via modbus or other communication protocol to the EPMC. The network shall provide a redundant start signal to the generator set(s) in the system.

2.4 ENCLOSURE

A. Enclosures shall be UL listed. The enclosure shall provide wire bend space in compliance to the latest version of NFPA70. The cabinet door shall include permanently mounted key type latches.

B. Transfer switch equipment shall be provided in a NEMA 1 or better enclosure unless otherwise noted on drawings.

C. Enclosures shall be the NEMA type specified. The cabinet shall provide code-required wire bend space at point of entry as shown on the drawings. Manual operating handles and all control switches (other than key-operated switches) shall be accessible to authorized personnel only by opening the key-locking cabinet door. Transfer switches with manual operating handles and/or non key-operated control switches located on outside of cabinet do not meet this specification and are not acceptable.

2.5 TWO SOURCE MANUAL BYPASS

A. Transfer switches shown on the project drawings as bypass switches shall include (integral to the transfer switch assembly) transfer switch bypass and isolation equipment as described in this section. The bypass-isolation switch shall provide a means for manually bypassing the transfer



switch from either source (Normal or Emergency) to the load, while under load if necessary, and to isolate the transfer switch from both sources for maintenance or repair. Designs that bypass to only one source are not acceptable.

B. Bypass design shall have permanently attached bypass and isolation handles to prevent loss of components at the site.

C. Permanently attached handles are needed so that the bypass and isolation option can be performed without the opening of the door due to a potentially live ATS.

D. When isolated the ATS shall have it’s own stabs for support so that the ATS can be racked out without the use of a dolly or barrier. Load break bypass switches are not acceptable.

E. Power conductors for the ATS must be of the stab type not cylinder type in order to remove the possibility of overcranking the ATS when reconnecting.

F. Bypass-isolation switch shall be UL Listed per Standard 1008, CSA Approved; with continuous current rating, voltage and frequency ratings, and withstand and closing ratings equal to the transfer switch ratings at the specified conditions of ambient temperature, humidity, and altitude.

G. The bypass-isolation and transfer switches shall be mechanically held in each position. Switching mechanisms shall be break before make on all poles, including the neutral pole on four pole switches. The switch mechanism shall be an over center toggle device which provides stored energy contact operation during both opening and closing. The speed of contact operation shall be independent of the force applied to the operating handles, which permit manual operation under load.

H. Bypass switch shall be a fully rated manually operated switch, rated for the same loads as the automatic transfer switch. Bypass switch shall provide bypass to either normal or emergency source by use of a door-mounted keyed source selector switch and a permanently mounted external-operating handle. Equipment shall provide manual bypass without disturbance of the power supply to the load. Equipment requiring load isolation before bypass is not acceptable for use on this project.

I. Equipment shall provide for manual bypass operation to the source opposite that to which the transfer switch is connected. This shall cause the transfer switch to go automatically to a position disconnected from both sources. Equipment that does not provide a rapid means of opposite source bypass is not acceptable under this specification.

J. Positive mechanical interlocks shall prevent all possible source to source interconnections. Designs which depend on electrical interlocks to prevent source to source interconnections, or which intentionally interconnect the sources, are not acceptable. The interlock system shall assure a properly sequenced, mechanically guided bypass and isolation action.

K. The equipment shall utilize automatic, solenoid-activated mechanical stops to prevent manually bypassing to a dead source. Equipment that does not prevent dead source bypass is not acceptable.



L. The isolation mechanism shall provide for three-position operation; Connected, Test, and Isolated. In the Connected position, isolation contacts shall be fully engaged and closed, with the transfer switch control cable connected. In the Test position, isolation contacts shall be open and the transfer switch control cable connected. The Test position shall allow operational testing of transfer switch and controls without power disruption to the load. The bypass and isolation process for the automatic transfer switch shall be capable of being fully accomplished without opening the cabinet door.

M. Note size and access requirements for the transfer switch with bypass isolation and provide equipment that will fit into the space allowed and comply with code-specified access requirements.

2.6 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. General 1. Supply and install a 10 inch touch panel annunciator with ability to remotely monitor and

control up to 8 (eight) critical facility equipment or devices, such as, transfer switches, generators, load banks, fire pump controllers and power meters. The Annunciator must be compatible with building monitoring systems and make data accessible via open Modbus protocol.

B. Overview 1 Comply with UL 1008, NFPA 110, EN50160, NFPA 99, Joint Commission, CMS, NEC

220.87, IEC 60068-2-27 2 Hardware is to include an industrial 10inch Touch Panel, Industrial Embedded

Controller, Amber Alarm LED, Alarm Buzzer, NEMA1 Enclosure, Redundant Power Supply (24VDC and 120VAC), Control Power Circuit Breaker and (4) Super-Capacitor Power Ride-through Modules.

3 Annunciator shall monitor up to 8 (eight) devices, which may include any combination of transfer switches, generators, load banks, ups, active surge monitors, power control systems, fire pump controllers, jockey pump controllers and power meters.

C. Hardware Requirements 1. Industrial Fanless Controller: Quad-Core x86 Processor, 8GB RAM, 128GB Solid-State

Hard Drive, (2) Gigabit Ethernet Ports, (2) USB Port, -4°F to 140°F 2. Redundant Control Power Supplys: 24VDC and/or 120VAC/220VAC. 3. UPS: (4) Super-Capacitor Modules providing minimum of 10 seconds of power ride-

through. 4. Circuit Breaker: Circuit Breakers to control power and protection.

5. Enclosure: Wall-mounted NEMA1 Enclosure including Alarm LED and Audible Alarm Buzzer.

D. Screens 1. Graphical Overview Screen shall display the following for each device: status, alarm,

power metering and transfer switch transfer control and generator test. User must log in with appropriate authentication level for control privileges.

2. Alarm Summary Screen shall display active alarms along and color-coded severity level. 3. Event log Screen shall display up to 10,000 events by severity and (3) date and time

stamps for when the alarm became active deactivated and acknowledged.



4. Dedicated Detail Screen shall show more granular and detailed data related to each monitored device.

5. Trending Screen shall enable (3) months of historical trending for up to (8) simultaneous parameters from any of the (8) configured devices.

6. Automated Reporting Screens shall include Test Reports, Outage Reports, Energy Reports, Alarm Reports, Activity Reports, Power Quality Reports and Settings Reports.

E. Connectivity 1. The Annunciator shall communicate to Modbus TCP/IP enabled devices. As required,

supply and install 5161 Modbus Connectivity Unit (MCU) for Modbus / RS-485 devices and 5162 IO Connectivity Unit (IOCU) for monitoring any hardwired discrete contacts.

2. Security provided shall comply with NIST standards using AES 128-bit encryption, HTTPS/SSL using facility digital certificate, and 4-levels of user authentication.

3. Provide a single dedicated Modbus TCP/IP Ethernet Port for connection to Building Monitoring Systems or Critical Power Management Systems.

4. Connect to SMTP server to send Email alarm notifications and automated reports.


A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1.

2.8 OPERATION

A. Programed Delay Open Transition Sequence of Operation 1. The life safety transfer switch and legally required transfer switch (if applicable)

normally connects an energized utility power source (source 1) to loads and a generator set (source 2) to the loads when normal source fails. The normal position of the transfer switch is source 1 (connected to the utility). Provide start signal to the gensets upon utility failure.

2. NON life safety transfer switches (optional standby) shall send a start signal to the gensets.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated.

B. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting. 1. Concrete Bases: 4 inches high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more

than 4 inches in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switch. Construct concrete bases according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

C. Identify components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, and relays.



E. Install all wall-mounted transfer equipment on unistrut channel extending from floor slab-to-slab above.

F. Coordinate and provide all feeders and control wiring raceways between ATS, gensets, distribution equipment, and EPMC.

G. Annunciator Panel Mounting: Surface mounted in main electric room and Fire Control Room (when a FCR exists on the project).

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring. All wiring to be installed in raceway. Ethernet communication to BMS is preferred.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Testing Agency's Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for

compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-

resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance. a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of

barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation.

4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times. a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of

emergency source with normal source available. b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings.



d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings.

e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch operations.

f. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of transfer time delay, and retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power.

5. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources. a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.

C. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

D. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

F. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each

switch 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. 2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to

detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked

and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 264113-1 Alexandria, Virginia LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES

SECTION 264113 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes lightning protection for structures, structural elements, and exterior mounted equipment.


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' literature, illustrations, maintenance/operating manuals, engineering data, specifications, mounting details and installation procedures for each type of product indicated and specified for this lightning protection system specific to this project.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide one eighth inch equals one inch shop drawing layout of the lightning protection

system, along with details of the components to be used in the installation. The shop drawings shall indicate horizontal and vertical dimensional data showing the position of the cables, air terminals, architecture, structure and connections.

2. Include indications for use of raceway, data on how concealment requirements will be met, and calculations required by NFPA 780 for bonding of grounded and isolated metal bodies.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer. Include data on listing or certification by UL.

B. Certification, signed by Contractor, that roof adhesive is approved by manufacturer of roofing material.


D. Comply with recommendations in NFPA 780, Annex D, "Inspection and Maintenance of Lightning Protection Systems," for maintenance of the lightning protection system.

E. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features, including the following: 1. Ground rods. 2. Ground loop conductor.




A. Installer Qualifications: Certified by UL or LPI as a Master Installer/Designer, trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. System Certificate: 1. UL Master Label.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 780, "Definitions" Article.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building systems and components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and building materials, metal bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection components, and building finishes.

B. Coordinate installation of air terminals attached to roof systems with roofing manufacturer and Installer.

C. Flashings of through-roof assemblies shall comply with roofing manufacturers' specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTERS

A. If they comply with these Specifications, installer and equipment manufactured by one of the following manufacturers will be acceptable: Bonded Lightning Protection System, Thompson Lightning Protection Inc., Dillon Lightning Protection, Harger Lightning Protection, Lightning Prot. Co. Inc., Advanced Lightning Systems, Warren Lightning Rod Company, National Lightning Protection Corporation.

2.2 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with UL 96 and NFPA 780.

B. All materials specified for this work shall be Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. approved.

C. Material Class: Provide NFPA 780 Class I or Class II as appropriate for this project. 1. Lightning conductors, air terminals, ground terminals, and associated fittings required

shall be Class I materials for structures not exceeding 75 feet in height as measured from the lowest ground level elevation to highest roof elevation and Class II materials for structures exceeding 75 feet in height.

D. Lightning Protection System Conductor Material: Copper or Aluminum material shall be acceptable, unless specifically noted otherwise.

E. The materials of which lightning protection systems are constructed shall be resistant to corrosion and oxidation or shall be acceptably protected against corrosion and oxidation. No combination of materials shall be used that forms a couple of such nature that in the presence of



moisture corrosion or oxidation is accelerated. One or more of the following materials shall be provided: 1. Copper: Where copper is used it shall be of the grade ordinarily required for commercial

electrical work, generally designated as being of 95 percent conductivity when annealed. 2. Copper Alloys: Where alloys of copper are used they shall be substantially as resistant to

corrosion as copper under similar conditions. 3. Aluminum: Where aluminum is used, care shall be taken not to use it in contact with the

earth or elsewhere where it will rapidly deteriorate. Conductors shall be of electrical grade aluminum.

4. Copper lightning protection materials shall not be installed on aluminum roofing, siding, or other aluminum surfaces.

5. Aluminum lightning protection materials shall not be installed on copper surfaces. 6. Lightning conductors, air terminals, ground terminals, and associated fittings required

shall be Class I materials for structures not exceeding 75 feet in height as measured from the lowest ground level elevation to highest roof elevation and Class II materials for structures exceeding 75 feet in height.

7. Air terminals shall be provided for all parts of a structure that are likely to be damaged by direct lightning flashes. Metal parts of a structure that are exposed to direct lightning flashes and that have a metal thickness of one quarter inch or greater only require connection to the lightning protection system. Such connections shall provide a two-way path to ground as is required for air terminals.

8. Air terminals shall be placed on ridges of pitched roofs and around the perimeter of flat or sloping roofs at intervals not exceeding 20 feet except that air terminals 24 inches or higher may be placed at intervals not exceeding 25 feet. Air terminals shall be placed at or within 12 inches of the ends of ridges or edges and corners of roofs.

9. Air terminals shall be secured against overturning either by attachment to the object to be protected or by means of braces which shall be permanently and rigidly attached to the building.

10. Air Terminals More than 24 Inches Long: With brace attached to the terminal at not less than half the height of the terminal. If additional supports are required, they shall be integrated into the lightning protection grounding system.

11. All air terminals shall be provided with spring loaded bases and blunt safety tips. 12. Air terminals mounted on sloping surfaces or surfaces perpendicular to the roof plane

shall be provided with adjustable swivel bases. 13. Single-Membrane, Roof-Mounted Air Terminals: Designed specifically for single-

membrane roof system materials. Comply with requirements in roofing Sections.

F. Main and Bonding Conductors: Copper or Aluminum.

G. Ground Loop Conductor: The same size and type as the main conductor except tinned.

H. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, three quarter inch in diameter by 10 feet long.

I. Heavy-Duty, Stack-Mounted, Lightning Protection Components: Stainless steel or Solid copper.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install lightning protection components and systems according to UL 96A and NFPA 780.



B. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid sharp bends, bend radius for conductors and conduits shall be made using not less than 6 times the diameter of the conductor or conduit trade size, whichever is larger

C. Conceal the following conductors: 1. System conductors. 2. Down conductors. 3. Interior conductors. 4. Conductors within normal view of exterior locations at grade within 200 feet of building.

D. Cable Connections: Use exothermic-welded connections for all conductor splices and connections between conductors and other components. 1. Exception: In single-ply membrane roofing, exothermic-welded connections may be used

only below the roof level.

E. Air Terminals on Single-Ply Membrane Roofing: Comply with roofing membrane and adhesive manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Bond lightning protection components with intermediate-level interconnection loop conductors to grounded metal bodies of building at 60-foot intervals.

G. Ground rods shall be driven to a depth of 24 inches below finished grade and/or finished floor, minimum. Ground rods shall have a target resistance of not greater than 10 ohms. Augmentation of grounding rod system with approved ancillary earth electrode subsystem is permitted with the Owner’s written approval.


A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 26 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.3 CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from junction of such materials.

B. Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions cause deterioration or corrosion of conductors.


A. Notify Architect at least 48 hours in advance of inspection before concealing lightning protection components.

B. UL Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain a UL Master Label for system.



3.5 TESTING

A. Perform tests to verify continuity of all system components including those concealed.

B. Conduct ground resistance tests of the ground termination system and its individual ground electrodes in accordance with NFPA 780 Appendix J.

C. Provide the Owner's representative with the written tests described above.

D. A U.L. master label shall be obtained for this project and provided to Owner.



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 264313-1 Alexandria, Virginia SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

SECTION 264313 - SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes field-mounted SPDs for low-voltage (120 volt to 600 volt) power distribution and control equipment.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 26 "Switchboards" for equipment mounted, factory-installed SPDs. 2. Division 26 “Low-Voltage Switchgear” for equipment mounted, factory-installed SPDs. 3. Division 26 "Panelboards" for equipment mounted, factory-installed SPDs.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Inominal: Nominal discharge current.

B. MCOV: Maximum continuous operating voltage.

C. Mode(s), also Modes of Protection: The pair of electrical connections where the VPR applies.

D. MOV: Metal-oxide varistor; an electronic component with a significant non-ohmic current-voltage characteristic.

E. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

F. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

G. SPD: Surge protective device.

H. VPR: Voltage protection rating.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Submit manufacturer's product literature, illustrations, engineering data and

specifications for each type and size of SPD specific to this project. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.



2. Provide copy of UL Category Code VZCA certification, as a minimum, listing the tested values for VPRs, Inominal ratings, MCOVs, type designations, OCPD requirements, model numbers, system voltages, and modes of protection.



B. Warranty: Provide information on manufacturer's product warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: Provide for each SPDs to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace or replace SPDs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL SPD REQUIREMENTS

A. SPD with Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


C. Comply with UL 1449.

D. MCOV of the SPD shall be the nominal system voltage.

E. Manufacturers: 1. EATON Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products 2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Protection Divivision 3. Schneider Electric, Square D Brands 4. Siemens: Energy and Automation Division 5. Innovative Technology 6. Control Concepts 7. PDI 8. United Power 9. Current Technology

2.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT SUPPRESSOR

A. SPDs: Comply with UL 1449, 3rd edition Type 1.

B. SPDs: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 1449, Type 1.



1. SPDs with the following features and accessories: a. Integral disconnecting means. b. Integral short circuit protection. c. Internal thermal protection that disconnects the SPD before damaging internal

suppressor components. d. Indicator light display for protection status. e. Form-C contacts, one normally open and one normally closed, for remote

monitoring of protection status. Contacts shall reverse on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate and connect to building power monitoring and control system. Surge counter.


D. Peak Surge Current Rating: The minimum single-pulse surge current withstand rating per phase shall not be less than 240kA. The peak surge current rating shall be the arithmetic sum of the ratings of the individual MOVs in a given mode.

E. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 Vand208Y/120 V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall not exceed the following: 1. Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V and700 V for 208Y/120 V. 2. Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V and1200 V for 208Y/120 V. 3. Neutral to Ground: 2000 V for 480Y/277 V and1000 V for 208Y/120 V. 4. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480Y/277 V460Y/265 V and1000 V for 208Y/120 V.

F. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for 240/120 V, single-phase, three-wire circuits shall not exceed the following: 1. Line to Neutral: 700 V. 2. Line to Ground: 1000 V. 3. Line to Line: 1000 V.

G. SCCR: Equal or exceed 200 kA.

H. Inominal Rating: 20 kA.

2.3 PANEL SUPPRESSORS

A. SPDs: Comply with UL 1449, Type 2. 1. Include LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 2. Internal thermal protection that disconnects the SPD before damaging internal suppressor

components. 3. Include Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally

closed, for remote monitoring of protection status. Contacts shall reverse on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate and connect to building power monitoring and control system.

B. Peak Surge Current Rating: The minimum single-pulse surge current withstand rating per phase shall not be less than 100 kA. The peak surge current rating shall be the arithmetic sum of the ratings of the individual MOVs in a given mode.




D. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 Vand 208Y/120 V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall not exceed the following: 1. Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V and700 V for 208Y/120 V. 2. Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V and1200 V for 208Y/120 V. 3. Neutral to Ground: 2000 V for 480Y/277 V and1000 V for 208Y/120 V. 4. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480Y/277 V and1000 V for 208Y/120 V.

E. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for 240/120-V, single-phase, three-wire circuits shall not exceed the following: 1. Line to Neutral: 700 V. 2. Line to Ground: 700 V. 3. Neutral to Ground: 700 V. 4. Line to Line: 1200 V.

F. SCCR: Equal or exceed 200 kA.

G. Inominal Rating: 20 kA.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1.

B. Outdoor Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 4X.

2.5 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring: Provide conductors in sizes matching SPD leads, complying with Division 26 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Class 2 Control Cables: Multi-conductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG, complying with Division 26 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cables: Multi-conductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than AWG, complying with Division 26 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

2.6 FACTORY TESTING

A. Each unit shall be factory tested before shipment. Testing shall include, but not be limited to production-line tests, quality assurance checks, MCOV testing, and clamping voltage tests. A copy of the clamping tests for each individual SPD shall be included with each unit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Integral within each piece of equipment protected.



C. Install an OCPD or disconnect as required to comply with the UL listing of the SPD.

D. Install SPDs with conductors between suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible, and adjust circuit-breaker positions to achieve shortest and straightest leads. Do not splice and extend SPD leads unless specifically permitted by manufacturer. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.

E. Use crimped connectors and splices only. Wire nuts are unacceptable.

F. Wiring: 1. Power Wiring: Comply with wiring methods in Division 26 "Low-Voltage Electrical

Power Conductors and Cables." 2. Controls: Comply with wiring methods in Division 26 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative. 1. Compare equipment nameplate data for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. 2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. 3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written installation

requirements.

B. An SPD will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Do not perform insulation-resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with SPDs installed. Disconnect SPDs before conducting insulation-resistance tests, and reconnect them immediately after the testing is over.

C. Energize SPDs after power system has been energized, stabilized, and tested.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate and maintain SPDs.



IFB 154339

Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 265100-1 Alexandria, Virginia INTERIOR LIGHTING

SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Specific Attention iscalled to the "General Requirements and Common Work Results for Electrical Systems" locatedin Section 26.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.2. Emergency lighting units.3. Exit signs.4. Lighting fixture supports.5. Retrofit kits for fluorescent lighting fixtures.

B. Related Sections:1. 265113 "Architectural Lighting "

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

C. CRI: Color-rendering index.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.




A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3. Ballast, including BF. 4. Energy-efficiency data. 5. Air and Thermal Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Furnish data

required in "Action Submittals" Article in Division 23 "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles." 6. Sound Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Indicate sound power level

and sound transmission class in test reports certified according to standards specified in Division 23 "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."

7. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 8. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with

IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project. a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be

certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer.

b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: For each lighting fixture indicated in the Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule. Each Sample shall include the following: 1. Lamps and ballasts, installed. 2. Cords and plugs. 3. Pendant support system.

D. Installation instructions.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Lighting fixtures. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extends to within 12 inches of the

plane of the luminaires.



4. Ceiling-mounted projectors. 5. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached. 6. Other items in finished ceiling including the following:

a. Air outlets and inlets. b. Speakers. c. Sprinklers. d. Smoke and fire detectors. e. Occupancy sensors. f. Access panels.

7. Perimeter moldings.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from manufacturer.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each

type. 2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish

at least one of each type. 3. Fluorescent-fixture-mounted, emergency battery pack: One for every 20 emergency

lighting unit. 4. Ballasts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each

type. 5. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least

one of each type.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as



defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910, complying with the IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. FM Global Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

F. Mockups: Provide interior lighting fixtures for room or module mockups, complete with power and control connections. 1. Obtain Architect's approval of fixtures for mockups before starting installations. 2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work. 3. Approved fixtures in mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at

time of Substantial Completion.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of

Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years.

2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings for Architecturally specified lighting fixtures. Back of house light fixtures are subject to compliance with requirements. Provide one of the products indicated on Drawings.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.



B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A.

C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

D. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.

E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit re-lamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during re-lamping and when secured in operating position.

H. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to

yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

I. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. 1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad,

triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires.

d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

J. Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conducted electromagnetic interference as required by MIL-STD-461E. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each ballast indicated to require a filter.

K. Air-Handling Fluorescent Fixtures: For use with plenum ceiling for air return and heat extraction and for attaching an air-diffuser-boot assembly specified in Section 233713 "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles." 1. Air-Supply Units: Slots in one or both side trims join with air-diffuser-boot assemblies. 2. Heat-Removal Units: Air path leads through lamp cavity.



3. Combination Heat-Removal and Air-Supply Unit: Heat is removed through lamp cavity at both ends of the fixture door with air supply same as for air-supply units.

4. Dampers: Operable from outside fixture for control of return-air volume. 5. Static Fixture: Air-supply slots are blanked off, and fixture appearance matches active

units.

2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts: 1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11. 2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. 3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level

control is indicated. 4. Sound Rating: Class A Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 6. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.88 or higher. 9. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 10. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11 and shall

be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.

B. Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts.

C. Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T8, T5, and T5HO Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the following: 1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.

D. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor, Class P, and having automatic-reset thermal protection. 1. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.

E. Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory wired with ballast arrangements and bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in the field.

F. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments: 1. Temperatures 0 deg F (Minus 17 deg C) and Higher: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F

(minus 17 deg C) starting and operating temperature with indicated lamp types. 2. Temperatures Minus 20 deg F (Minus 29 deg C) and Higher: Electromagnetic type

designed for use with indicated lamp types.

G. Ballasts for Residential Applications: Fixtures designated as "Residential" may use low-power-factor electronic ballasts having a Class B sound rating and total harmonic distortion of approximately 30 percent.

H. Ballasts for Low Electromagnetic-Interference Environments: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for consumer equipment.



I. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type. 1. Dimming Range: 100 to five percent of rated lamp lumens. 2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal. 3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system

and lamp type indicated. 4. Control: Coordinate wiring from ballast to control device to ensure that the ballast,

controller, and connecting wiring are compatible.

J. Ballasts for Bi-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type. 1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output

of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off. a. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens. b. Low-Level Operation: 30 percent of rated lamp lumens.

2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode. 3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system and

lamp type indicated.

K. Ballasts for Tri-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type. 1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output

of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off. a. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens. b. Low-Level Operation: 30 and 50 percent of rated lamp lumens.

2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode. 3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific tri-level control system

and lamp type indicated.

2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated: 1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: Class A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated. 9. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher. 10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment.

2.5 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT

A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of

1100 lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.



2. Nightlight Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. 3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or

entering ceiling space. a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power

and demonstrates unit operability. b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle

charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer

relay. 6. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates

coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

7. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

B. External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, suitable for powering one or more fluorescent lamps, remote mounted from lighting fixture. Comply with UL 924. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. Connect unswitched

circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast. 2. Nightlight Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp in a remote fixture continuously. 3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type. 5. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. 6. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and

demonstrates unit operability. 7. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;

bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 8. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates



2.6 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS

A. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029. Include the following features unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F (Minus 30 deg C) for single-lamp

ballasts. 3. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F (40 deg C). 4. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life. 5. Low-Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models designed to

minimize audible fixture noise.



B. Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise indicated: 1. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 20 deg F (Minus 29 deg C) for single-lamp

ballasts. 2. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 130 deg F (54 deg C). 3. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 4. Sound Rating: Class A. 5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less. 8. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher. 9. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment. 10. Protection: Class P thermal cutout. 11. Bi-Level Dimming Ballast: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the

light output of the associated fixture between high- and low-level and off. a. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens. b. Low-Level Operation: 50 percent of rated lamp lumens. c. Compatibility: Certified by ballast manufacturer for use with specific bi-level

control system and lamp type indicated. Certified by lamp manufacturer that ballast operating modes are free from negative effect on lamp life and color-rendering capability.

12. Continuous Dimming Ballast: Dimming range shall be from 100 to 35 percent of rated lamp lumens without flicker. a. Ballast Input Watts: Reduced to a maximum of 50 percent of normal at lowest

dimming setting.

C. High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type, with solid-state igniter/starter. Igniter/starter shall have an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature of 90 deg C. 1. Instant-Restrike Device: Integral with ballast, or solid-state potted module, factory

installed within fixture and compatible with lamps, ballasts, and mogul sockets up to 150 W.

2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F (Minus 40 deg C).

2.7 QUARTZ LAMP LIGHTING CONTROLLER

A. General Requirements for Controllers: Factory installed by lighting fixture manufacturer. Comply with UL 1598.

B. Standby (Quartz Restrike): Automatically switches quartz lamp on when a HID lamp in the fixture is initially energized and during the HID lamp restrike period after brief power outages.

C. Connections: Designed for a single branch -circuit connection.

D. Switching Off: Automatically switches quartz lamp off when HID lamp strikes.

E. Switching Off: Automatically switches quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent light output.



2.8 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained

power pack. a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage

drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

f. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

g. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

h. Provide twenty exit signs to Owner at the completion of project. Contractor shall install these where the AHJ instructs to add exit signs during inspection at no additional cost to owner.

3. Master/Remote Sign Configurations: a. Master Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, and

provide additional capacity in LED power supply for power connection to remote unit.

b. Remote Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, except omit power supply, battery, and test features. Arrange to receive full power requirements from master unit. Connect for testing concurrently with master unit as a unified system.

C. Self-Luminous Signs: Powered by tritium gas, with universal bracket for flush-ceiling, wall, or end mounting. Signs shall be guaranteed by manufacturer to maintain the minimum brightness requirements in UL 924 for 20 years.

D. Self-Luminous Signs: Using strontium oxide aluminate compound to store ambient light and release the stored energy when the light is removed. Provide with universal bracket for flush-ceiling, wall, or end mounting.

2.9 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.



1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to

80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

6. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures. 7. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when power is

restored after an outage. 8. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates



2.10 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500K, and average rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

B. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches, 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

C. T5 rapid-start lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 2900 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3000K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

D. T5HO rapid-start, high-output lamps, rated 54 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 5000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 4100K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

E. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start and suitable for use with dimming ballasts unless otherwise indicated. 1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum). 2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum). 3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum). 4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum). 5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum). 6. 57 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum). 7. 70 W: T4, triple tube, rated 5200 initial lumens (minimum).



2.11 HID LAMPS

A. High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), color temperature 1900K, and average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum.

B. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000K.

C. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000K.

D. Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI 78.41, CRI 0, and color temperature 1800K.

2.12 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 26 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: one half inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, one half inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gauge.

E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gauge.

F. Rod Hangers: Three sixteenths inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

2.13 RETROFIT KITS FOR FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Reflector Kit: UL 1598, Type I. Suitable for two- to four-lamp, surface-mounted or recessed lighting fixtures by improving reflectivity of fixture surfaces.

B. Ballast and Lamp Change Kit: UL 1598, Type II. Suitable for changing existing ballast, lamps, and sockets.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures: 1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary.



When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.

C. Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not exceed that recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast manufacturers, maximum distance between ballast and luminaire.

D. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Do not use ceiling grid as a support element for lighting fixtures. 1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension

devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than six inches from lighting fixture corners. 2. Install lighting fixture support system wires, independent of the ceiling system, for each

fixture. Provide one support wire independently connected to the structural system from a minimum of four lighting fixture corners or four locations on each fixture.

3. Fastening Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

4. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two three quarter inch metal channels spanning and supported independently from structure via to ceiling tees. Provide one support wire independently connected to the structural system from each end of metal channels.

5. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of three.

E. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for

suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to

building structure.

F. Air-Handling Lighting Fixtures: Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment.

G. Connect wiring according to Division 26 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.



B. Verify that self-luminous exit signs are installed according to their listing and the requirements in NFPA 101.

C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark. 1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect.



IFB 154339

CM KLING + ASSOCIATES INC 265113-1 Alexandria, Virginia ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING LUMINAIRES

SECTION 265113 – ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING LUMINAIRES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Provide the lighting and accessories as shown on the contract documents and as specified herein. The specifications in this section shall apply to the light fixtures specified by the Lighting Designer.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 26 General Requirement – Section

B. Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables – Section 260519

C. Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems- Section 260533

D. Testing- Section

E. Network Lighting Controls – Section 260943

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Specifier: Design team consisting of representatives of Lighting Designer, Architect, Electrical Engineer, and Owner/ User.

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

C. CRI: Color-rendering index.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast or driver housing if provided.

G. LED: Lighting Emitting Diode

H. BF: Ballast Factor

I. CFL: Compact Fluorescent lamp

J. LM-79: Electrical and Photometric measurements applied to LED luminaires and sources.

K. LM-80: Lumen Depreciation test method applied to LED luminaires and sources.

260500

269000


IFB 154339


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of luminaire, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include and clearly identify data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following 1. Complete luminaire lists of luminaires proposed to be used 2. Submit manufacturer 3. Manufacturer’s cut sheet or shop drawing / illustrations 4. Manufacturer’s complete model and specification number 5. Voltage 6. Ballast or Driver specifications and manufacturer for each luminaire 7. Lamp specifications and manufacturer for each luminaire 8. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests by a qualified independent

testing agency of each lighting fixture type, outfitted with lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project

9. Warranty

B. Shop Drawings 1. Supply complete manufacturers line drawing showing scaled dimensions, weights,

methods of assembly, components, features, and accessories. Include all wiring diagrams and means of installation.

2. Shop drawings for non-standard product are required for fixture approval and must be submitted as part of submittal. Cut sheets for manufacturer and system approval prior to submission of complete shop drawing are not acceptable.

3. Fixture submittals may be submitted electronically in compliance with project submittal specifications.

C. Formatting 1. Fixture submittals shall be furnished in a single complete submittal containing all fixture

types for project to include clearly outlined fixture type, fixture manufacturer, fixture model number, lamp manufacturer, lamp specification, ballast manufacturer and ballast specification.

D. Samples 1. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide sample fixture(s) as indicated in

LIGHTING FIXTURE SPECIFICATIONS. When samples are called for the manufacturer shall provide working samples complete with lamp, ballast or driver.

2. Conditions for mock-up of individual luminaire types shall be indicated in LIGHTING FIXTURE SPECIFICATIONS on a per luminaire type. Contractor is responsible to provide sample fixture as indicated.

3. The sample(s) shall be shipped to a location that is determined by the Architect. Shipping and return shipping costs shall be provided as part of the contract.

4. The purpose of the sample is to review manufacturing techniques, detailing, lamping and scale. Sample fixtures must be approved prior to fabrication of fixtures for the project. Minor modifications, if any, shall be considered part of these Specifications and shall be accomplished with no additional cost to the Owner.

5. Sample fixtures may not be used on the project.

E. Substitutions 1. Should the Contractor wish to have considered products other than those specified, the

items must be submitted in written project bid RFI (Request for Information) (21) Twenty


IFB 154339


One days in advance of the bid. Failure to submit within that deadline constitutes a guarantee that the specified products shall be supplied.

2. Substitute fixtures shall be submitted with current photometric certified test data from an independent testing laboratory of the substitute fixture and the specified fixture.

3. Within seven days after the submittal, the Contractor will be prepared to submit one sample unit of each proposed substitute item. Samples will include proper lamps, accessories, cord, and plug for operation on 120V. Failure to comply with these requirements will require the Contractor to supply the specified item only.

4. The party responsible for Specification of luminaire (Lighting Designer, Architect, Engineer, etc.) shall be the sole judge of determining whether the substitution complies with the specifications and shall reserve the right to disqualify any candidate.

5. Alternate Manufacturers: The listed approved alternate manufacturers and series are approved subject to review by the Lighting Designer. If approved alternates are pursued in place of the fully specified products, they will be reviewed on a by-type basis and the submitted approved alternate must meet all requirements of the specified product. Alternate manufacturers other than those listed in the fixture schedule may be considered provided all of the following conditions are met. Compliance with conditions listed below must be in writing and attested to by fixture manufacturer. Manufacturers other than those specified and listed as approved alternates must be compliant with the conditions listed below in regards to each of the options listed on the luminaire schedule. a. Demonstrates fixture performance is equal or improved. b. Meets aesthetic considerations as established by the Architect / Owner / Lighting

Designer. c. The cost to Owner is reduced. Shown in a per line item side by side of specified

product cost and proposed alternate cost with pricing certified by fixture manufacturers or their designated Manufacturer’s Representatives.

d. Improves delivery schedule. 6. Substitutions shall only be considered on a per line item method and not as a complete

luminaire package.

F. Procurement 1. Contractor must show, in writing, that the selected Electrical Distributor has received

factory and/or factory representative pricing for this project and has ability to procure specified product.

2. Electrical Distributor must hold account in good standing with all specified manufacturers or be capable of opening such an account within time frame of project.

G. Contract Closeout Submittals 1. Operating and Maintenance Manual with the following data:

a. Product data submittals. b. Wiring diagrams (as required). c. Installation instructions (for other than lay-in type fixtures). d. Parts lists.

H. Review 1. Luminaire submittals shall be reviewed (2) two times per type. Additional reviews shall be

at the expense of the Electrical Contractor and may not be charged against project budget. Reviews shall be conducted upon written acknowledgement of these conditions as Senior hourly labor rates for Lighting Designer, Architect, Electrical Engineer.


IFB 154339



A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. FMG Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FMG.

F. The mock-up installation shall closely conform to the conditions of the actual installation as to: height, distance from ceiling, number and type of lamps, material, color, etc. The Contractor shall submit a written description of each proposed mock-up with drawings in order to obtain the Specifier’s approval prior to commencement of each mock-up. The purpose of the mock-up will be to study the general appearance and performance of the intended lighting systems. At the time, certain minimal test variations may be requested as to lamp location, lamp type, reflector shape, color and etc. Final modifications, if any, shall be considered a part of these Specifications and shall be accomplished with no additional cost to the Owner.

G. Experience:

H. LED lighting must be provided with independent testing for LM-79 and LM-80 standards.

1.6 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Lighting fixtures shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance with the following standards. 1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 2. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) 3. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) 4. ANSI C62 and C82 5. FCC Part 18, Subpart C 6. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 7. FDA Food Code 8. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC)

Manufacturer(s) shall have experience in design and manufacture of lightingfixtures of the type and quality shown, unless otherwise indicated in specifications.


IFB 154339


1.7 MANUFACTURER BEST PRACTICES

A. After receipt of order and prior to fabrication fixture manufacturer shall issue a letter to Specifier stating best practices and products that meet specification intent. This shall include evolution of lamping, LED, optics, photometry and fixture performance. 1. This is to allow for improvements in technology during the period between the award and

manufacturing. LED technology, specifically, is rapidly improving and likely could exceed the specifications.

2. Manufacturer to offer, at no additional cost, solutions that meet the design intent as alternates to the base design prior to fabrication. a. LED lighting could include:

1) Improved (lower) wattage for same light output 2) Improved (higher) lumen output for same wattage 3) New fixture series in product line 4) Improved color consistency and binning 5) To be determined by manufacturer.

3. Submittal of letter does not imply approval of alternate product. Base product approved during standard submittal process shall still be available if desired.

B. LED correlated color temperature (CCT) shall have a tolerance of +/- 50 degree Kelvin from base CCT listed in product specification. Tolerance shall be across full product supplied. All Luminaires with continuous installation greater than 8’ shall also be subject to visual inspection for color or output shift.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Lamps: 10% but not less than 6 of each type of lamp. 2. Ballasts: 5% but not less than 1 of each type of ballast. 3. LED Luminaries: 10% but not less than 2 of each LED downlight module and 4 of each

unique length of LED channel. 4. LED power supply: 5% but not less than 1 of each type of driver. 5. LED lighting control box: minimum (1) spare per type. 6. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 10% but not less than 1 of each type of diffuser, lens, or

baffle. 7. Globes and Guards: 5% but not less than one of each type of globe or guard.

1.9 PRICING

A. Contractor to provide unit line item pricing for each fixture type listed. Pricing to be valid for (1) One Year from award of contract and allow for removal or addition of fixtures in official project changes.

B. Pricing shall have a cap of 10% unit cost increase through project duration, after (1) one year.


IFB 154339


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIXTURES AND LAMPS

A. Fixtures shall be provided as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings. Fixtures shall be complete with all required lamps, sockets, wiring, glassware, reflectors, hangers, fittings, plaster frames, etc., necessary for a complete installation. 1. All fixtures shall be cleaned and have all lamps at the time of final acceptance of the

building. All burned-out lamps shall be replaced at the time of final acceptance of building. 2. All fixtures specified herein scheduled and/or detailed on the drawings, shall conform to

the standards and bear the label of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Prior to the application of any finish, all metal parts of all fixtures shall be protected by a rust inhibiting process approved by the Architect. The rust inhibiting process shall be chemical. No type of sprayed, painted, or dipped primer may be used as the basic rust inhibitor. Any fixtures and/or parts of any fixtures which shall have begun to show signs of rusting or corroding at the time of completion of the job shall be removed and replaced by properly protected metal parts, subject to the approval of the Architect, and this shall be done before a final certificate of acceptance will be issued.

3. Where required, fixtures shall be furnished complete with internal wiring and ballasts. All joints and splices within the fixture housing shall be made as specified in Section 260519. Substitute material will not be acceptable.

4. All fixtures provided for this project shall be designed and rated by the fixture manufacturer for the intended application and for the location installed. All fixtures provided for this project shall be UL listed for the intended application and for the location installed. All fixtures exposed to outdoor weather conditions shall be suitable for outdoor weather conditions. All fixtures exposed to outside ambient temperatures shall be designed and rated for operation throughout the entire range of temperatures between the minimum and maximum outside ambient temperatures for this project. All fixtures exposed to damp locations, including but not limited to parking structure areas, shall be of damp rated construction. All fixtures shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Local Code Authority and the National Electrical Code. The requirements of this paragraph shall be in addition to all the other requirements of this specification. The requirements of the specification shall be in addition to the requirements indicated in the lighting fixture schedule. All fixtures shall meet these requirements whether specifically indicated in the lighting fixture schedule or not. It shall be the responsibility of the fixture manufacturer to provide all necessary accessories and modifications to the fixtures specified to meet these requirements. Catalog numbers of fixtures in the fixture schedule are intended to establish manufacturer, type, quality, aesthetic appearance, and lighting characteristics of the fixtures and do not necessarily indicate all the requirements of the specifications.

5. All pole mounted parking lot light fixtures shall be full cut-off type.

B. Provide the proper fixture type for the type of ceiling or wall construction in which the fixture is to be installed. Regardless of fixture numbers given in the fixture schedule, the fixtures supplied shall have the proper trim, frames, mounting devices and configuration and accessories necessary to be properly installed in the building construction. Catalog numbers of fixtures in the fixture schedule are to establish a type of fixture and not to determine a method of mounting.

C. The ballasts for all fluorescent and high intensity discharge fixtures, unless otherwise noted in luminaire specifications, shall be Class "P" energy saving CBM approved, thermally protected. Ballasts shall be General Electric, Advance, Universal, Motorola, Thomas, Valmount or EBT.


IFB 154339


1. Fluorescent ballasts shall be high-frequency (above 20 kHz) electronic, energy saving, high power factor (95% minimum), "A" sound rated, programmed start, universal voltage, and Type "P" automatic reset type. Ballasts shall generate less than 15% total harmonic distortion with a lamp current crest factor less than 1.7 and a ballast factor of .87 or greater. Ballasts shall operate as a parallel circuit, sustain variations of +/- 10% of voltage and frequency with no damage to the ballasts, tolerate operation in ambient temperatures up to 105 degrees F without damage, and operate with no visible flicker (less than 3% flicker index). Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be similar to above with lamp shutdown circuitry for end of lamp life protection, plenum rated, and instant on.

2. Ballasts shall be compatible for lamp type specified and shall be provided in quantity per fixture to perform the switching requirements indicated on the drawings.

3. All ballasts located in fixtures exposed to freezing temperatures shall be rated for zero degree operation. This shall include but not be limited to truck docks, site lighting and roof mounted fixtures.

4. All lighting ballasts shall have a two year manufacturer's warranty for all parts and labor. 5. Where dimming is specified, dimming ballasts shall meet the above ballast requirements

in addition to proper dimming characteristics for the specific lamp and fixture type. 6. Power input to a 277-volt fluorescent ballast for two 32-watt F32T8 lamps shall not exceed

58 watts when tested per ANSI C82.2. 7. Ballasts for 3-tube fluorescent fixtures shall power three 32-watt F32T8 lamps. Power

input shall not exceed 86 watts when tested per ANSI C82.2. 8. Ballasts for fixtures located in remote or difficult to access locations shall have separate

ballasts remotely mounted from fixture. Remote ballasts shall be mounted in fully accessible locations. Light fixtures mounted outside on the skin of the building shall have remote ballasts mounted nearby in accessible ceiling plenum area or other accessible area. All ballasts located within environmental air plenums shall be rated for such a location.

D. All incandescent lamps shall be General Electric, Philips, or Osram Sylvania 120 volt, inside frosted lamps, except where lamps are indicated on the lighting fixture schedule.

E. All fluorescent lamps shall be energy-saving 32-watt F32T8 3500K unless indicated otherwise in the lighting fixture schedule. Fluorescent type (tube and compact) lamp color rendering index (CRI) shall be a minimum of 82 unless otherwise noted by the Lighting Consultant.

F. Fixtures shall be air handling type with provisions for air supply and return through the side slots and heat removal through the lamp cavity unless otherwise noted. The heat extract openings shall have sufficient area to limit the return air pressure drop to a maximum of 0.05" w.g. with 40 CFM flowing through the lighting fixture lamp cavity and the heat removal openings. Fixtures shall be compatible with the slot diffusers, with and without crossover ducts, specified in Division 23 under Section 23 37 00. Fixtures shall have louvered outlets on top of the fixture and combination light and dust trap air slots at the door frame end to provide return air flow through the lamp cavity. Each four foot side slot shall have an integral hinged air control damper blade to be used as a shut-off device or pattern controller. The fixture shall be designed to direct the supply air horizontally at the ceiling away from the lighting fixture. The contractor shall adjust the hinged air control dampers appropriately for proper return air balancing. The Division 26 electrical contractor shall coordinate with the Division 23 mechanical contractor to determine which light fixtures to close and which light fixtures to open the hinged air control damper blade. Typically, all light fixtures within enclosed perimeter office areas or within 15 feet of the perimeter wall for open office areas will have their hinged air control dampers closed to disable the return air


IFB 154339


function of the light fixture when combination supply and return air perimeter slot diffusers are used along the perimeter wall.

G. The lighting fixture manufacturer shall submit certified test data listing the return air performance of the fixture with return air flowing only through the lamp cavity and with return air flowing through the lamp cavity and the two side slot openings. See Section 26 00 10 for certification requirements.

H. All fixtures in elevator machine rooms, electrical rooms, telephone rooms, and equipment rooms shall have wire guards.

I. Supply ten (10) loose exit signs to owner at completion of project. Contractor shall use these where fire marshal instructs to add exit signs during inspection at no additional cost to owner.

J. All lighting fixtures in areas where there is exposed food, clean equipment, utensils, linens, or unwrapped single service and single use articles shall be lensed or provided with shatter resistant lamps in compliance with the most current FDA Food Code and other adopted codes.

K. New and existing indoor (non-dwelling unit) fluorescent light fixtures utilizing double ended lamps and ballasts within the area of work shall include required NEC ballast disconnect internal to fixture and be accessible to qualified persons. Disconnect shall be UL Listed with two mating finger safe halves disconnecting simultaneously all ballast supply conductors including the ground.

L. Solid State Lighting / Light Emitting Diode (LED) Lamps and Luminaires 1. General

a.

b. All components, peripheral devices and control software are to be provided by and shall be the responsibility of a single entity. All components shall perform successfully as a complete system and shall operate as described in Lighting Designer’s Control Narrative documents or Lighting Fixture Schedule.

c. Include all components necessary for a complete installation. Provide all power supplies, synchronizers, data cables, and data terminators for a complete working system.

2. Replacement and Spares a. Manufacture shall provide written guarantee of the following:

1) Manufacture will keep record of original bin for each LED module and have replacement modules from the same bin available for three (3) years after date of installation.

2) Manufacturer will keep an inventory of replacement parts (source assembly, power and control components).

3) Manufacturer’s LED system will not become obsolete for ten (10) years: Manufacturer will provide exact replacement parts, or provide upgraded parts that are design to fit into the original luminaire and provide equivalent distribution and lumen output to the original, without any negative consequences.

b. All parts of system shall replaceable in field. Manufacturer shall provide written guarantee of the following:

Luminaire manufacturer shall have experience in the manufacture and design ofLED products and systems and no less than (100) North American installations.


IFB 154339


1) Manufacturer has in place a written recycling and re-used program, and will accept returned product and/or components for recycling or re-use.

2) Manufacturer will properly dispose of non- recyclable components that are deemed harmful to the environment.

c. System shall carry a full warranty for five (5) years. Manufacturer shall be responsible for cost of labor not exceed $50 per individual part, and cost of shipping, to replace any component of the system that fails within 2 years of installation.

3. Products and Components – Performance a. Manufacturer shall ensure that products undergo and successfully meet appropriate

design and manufacturability testing including Design FMEA, Process FMEA, Environmental Engineering Considerations and Laboratory Tests, IEC standards and UL/CE testing.

b. All LED luminaires shall be subjected to the following JEDEC Reliability Tests for Lead- free Semiconductors: HTOL, RTOL, LTOL, PTMCL, TMSK, Mechanical Shock, Variable Vibration Frequency, SHR, Autoclave.

c. All LED components shall be mercury and lead-free. d. LEDs shall comply with ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2008 – Specifications for

the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products. Color shall remain stable through life of the lamp. Color shall match approved sample.

e. LEDs shall comply with IESNA LM-80- Standards for Lumen Maintenance of LED Lighting Products.

f. White LEDs shall have a rated source life of 50,000 hours under normal operating conditions. RGB LEDs shall have a rated source life of 100,000 hours. LED “rated source life” is defined as the time when a minimum of 70% of initial lumen output remains.

g. Luminaire assembly shall include a method of dissipating heat so as to not degrade life of source, electronic equipment, or lenses. LED luminaires housing shall be designed to transfer heat from LED board to the outside environment. Luminaire housing shall have no negative impact on life of components.

h. Manufacturer shall supply in writing a range of permissible operating temperatures in which system will perform optimally.

i. For wet and dump use, the LED-based luminaire itself shall be sealed, rated, and tested for appropriate environmental conditions, not accomplished by using an additional housing or enclosure. Such protection shall have no negative impact on rated life of source or components, or if so, such reductions shall be explicitly brought to the attention of the designer.

j. Manufacturer shall be able to provide supporting documentation of the product meeting third party regulatory compliance.

k. All LED luminaires (100% of each lot) shall undergo a minimum twenty-four (24) hour burn-in during manufacturing, prior to shipping.

l. Manufacturer shall provide Luminaire Efficacy (lm/W), total luminous flux (lumens), luminous intensity (candelas) chromaticity coordinates, CCT and CRI, optical performance, polar diagrams, and relevant luminance and illuminance photometric data. Provide data in IES file format in accordance with IES LM-79-2008, based on test results from an independent Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory.

m. Power / data supply shall have the following: 1) Supply outputs shall have current limiting protection. 2) Supply shall provide miss-wiring protection.


IFB 154339


3) Supply shall have power factor correction. 4) Supply shall provide connections that are conduit-ready or clamp-style

connections in case of low-voltage wiring. 5) Supply shall come with a housing that meets a minimum IP20 rating for dry

location installation unless located in a damp or wet location. 6) Supply shall be UL listed for Class 1 or Class 2 wiring.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Recessed lay in type lighting fixtures shall be installed in the lay in type ceiling in such a manner that the lens or louver housing may be easily opened and so that the fixtures may be removed and relocated without forcing the fixtures or changing the grid system tie wires. The electrical subcontractor shall coordinate with the ceiling subcontractor before the ceiling grid is installed to assure a mutually satisfactory installation of ceiling and light fixtures, which will permit the fixtures to be relocated at a future date. Refer to specification Section 26 00 10 for seismic restraint requirements.

B. Lighting Fixtures shall be set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture.

C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section “Conductors and Cables”.

3.2 SUPPORTS

A. Recessed downlight lighting fixtures (LED, incandescent, compact fluorescent, metal halide, etc.) installed in lay in type ceilings shall be supported by means of hanger bars extending across the main ceiling support members supported by wires at all four corners. Fluorescent lighting fixtures (1’x1’, 1’x4’, 2’x2’, 2’x4’, etc.) shall be supported independently of the ceiling grid by wires on all four corners. The four wires shall be independent to the structure above. All other type fixtures in lay in type ceilings shall have the outlet box rigidly supported from the building structural system. In addition, each fixture shall be supported independently of the ceiling grid and all other MEP equipment by support wires connected to the building structure. Provide removable clips to securely fasten light fixtures in place to the ceiling construction; however, support shall be via tie wires. In addition to above support methods, all Local Code Authority requirements shall be adhered to. Support means and methods shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and the Local Code Authority seismic requirements and wind loading.

3.3 CLEANING

A. All fixtures shall be cleaned of dirt, debris, and tape inside and outside and left in a clean condition at the end of the construction work

3.4 SAMPLES

A. Provide samples of each fixture type as requested by the architect.


IFB 154339


3.5 COORDINATION

A. The Contractors shall coordinate the control of all light fixtures with the lighting controls indicated in the Automatic Temperature Control System specification section.




IFB 154339

LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 265613-1 Alexandria, Virginia

SECTION 265613 - LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01

Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Poles and accessories for support of luminaires.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPA: Equivalent projected area.

B. Luminaire: Complete luminaire.

C. Pole: Luminaire-supporting structure.

D. Standard: See "Pole."


A. Product Data: For each pole, accessory, and luminaire-supporting device, arranged as indicated.

1. Include data on construction details, profiles, EPA, cable entrances, materials,

dimensions, weight, rated design load, and ultimate strength of individual components.

2. Include finishes for lighting poles and luminaire-supporting devices.

3. Anchor bolts.


A. Material Test Reports:

1. For each foundation component, by a qualified testing agency.

2. For each pole, by a qualified testing agency.

B. Source quality-control reports.


D. Sample Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty.



IFB 154339



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For poles to include in emergency, operation, and

maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include pole inspection and repair procedures.


A. Pole repair materials.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for foundation testing.


A. Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660.

B. Store poles on decay-resistant skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation. Support

poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of pole(s) that fail in

materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk due to

effects of weather or solar radiation within a specified warranty period. Manufacturer may

exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs from special

warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Warranty Period for Corrosion Resistance: Five years from date of Substantial

Completion.

3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-6-M.

B. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, and supporting

structure, applied according to AASHTO LTS-6-M.



IFB 154339


C. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft., applied according to AASHTO LTS-6-M for applicable areas on

the Ice Load Map.

D. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire, calculated and applied according to

AASHTO LTS-6-M.

1. Basic wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet high or less is 100 mph.

a. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0.

b. Minimum Design Life: 25 years.

c. Velocity Conversion Factor: 1.0.

E. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual EPA of luminaires and brackets by a factor

of 1.1 to obtain the EPA to be used in pole selection strength analysis.

F. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting

requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 ALUMINUM POLES

A. Poles: Seamless, extruded structural tube complying with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6061-T6, with

access handhole in in pole wall.

1. Shape: Round, tapered.

2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway

support.

B. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, cantilever, without underbrace.

1. Adaptor fitting welded to pole, allowing the bracket to be bolted to the pole-mounted

adapter, then bolted together with galvanized-steel bolts.

2. Cross Section: Tapered oval, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire.

Match pole material and finish.

C. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Bolted 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in

Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching grounding

and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.

D. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, size and type as determined by manufacturer. Corrosion-resistant

items compatible with support components.

1. Materials: Compatible with poles and standards as well as to substrates to which poles

and standards are fastened and shall not cause galvanic action at contact points.

2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication unless otherwise indicated.

E. Handhole: Oval shaped, with minimum clear opening of 2-1/2 by 5 inches, with cover secured

by stainless-steel captive screws.

F. Powder-Coat Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and

Metal Products" recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil,

grease, and other contaminants that could impair powder coat bond. Grind welds and



IFB 154339


polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from

uncoated steel, according to SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1 or SSPC-SP 8.

2. Powder coat shall comply with AAMA 2604.

a. Electrostatic applied powder coating; single application with a minimum 2.5- to

3.5-mils dry film thickness; cured according to manufacturer's instructions. Coat

interior and exterior of pole for equal corrosion protection.

b. Color: Dark Bronze.

2.3 POLE ACCESSORIES

A. Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, finished same as pole, and arranged to cover

pole's mounting bolts and nuts.

2.4 MOUNTING HARDWARE

A. Anchor Bolts: Manufactured to ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, with a minimum yield strength of

55,000 psi.

1. Galvanizing: Hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153, Class C.

2. Bent rods sized as recommended by the manufacturer.

3. Threading: Uniform National Coarse, Class 2A.

B. Nuts: ASTM A 563, Grade A, Heavy-Hex


2. Four nuts provided per anchor bolt, shipped with nuts pre-assembled to the anchor bolts.

C. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1.


2. Two washers provided per anchor bolt.

2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations

in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved

Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



IFB 154339


B. Examine poles, luminaire-mounting devices, and pole accessories before installation.

Components that are scratched, dented, marred, wet, moisture damaged, or visibly damaged are

considered defective.

C. Examine roughing-in for foundation and conduit to verify actual locations of installation.


3.2 POLE FOUNDATION

A. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange.

Structural steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and hot-dip galvanized according to

ASTM A 123/A 123 M; and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole-base flange and

strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories. Concrete, reinforcement, and

formwork are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Anchor Bolts: Install plumb using manufacturer-supplied template, uniformly spaced.

3.3 POLE INSTALLATION

A. Alignment: Align poles as indicated.

B. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and

underground features unless otherwise indicated on drawing.

1. Fire Hydrants and Water Piping: 60 inches.

2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communications, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet.

3. Trees: 15 feet from tree trunk.

C. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts and tighten top nuts to torque level

according to pole manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a

dissimilar metal, protect aluminum using insulating fittings or treatment.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Ground Metal Poles and Support Structures: Comply with requirements in Section 260526

"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

1. Install grounding electrode for each pole unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding

system.



IFB 154339


3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for

identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Special Inspections: Perform the following special inspections:

1. Inspect poles for nicks, mars, dents, scratches, and other damage.

2. System function tests.




IFB 154339

LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 265619-1 Alexandria, Virginia

SECTION 265619 – LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01

Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior solid-state luminaires that are designed for and exclusively use LED lamp

technology.

2. Luminaire supports.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 265613 "Lighting Poles and Standards" for poles and standards used to support

exterior lighting equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color rendering index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.


A. Product Data: For each type of luminaire.

1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation.

2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.

3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaire.

4. Lamps, include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data.

5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IES

Lighting Measurements Testing and Calculation Guides, of each luminaire type. The

adjustment factors shall be for lamps and accessories identical to those indicated for the

luminaire as applied in this Project, IES LM-79, and IES LM-80.



IFB 154339


a. Manufacturer's Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's

laboratory with a current accreditation under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient

Lighting Products.

6. Means of attaching luminaires to supports and indication that the attachment is suitable

for components involved.

B. Product Schedule: For luminaires. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of the following:

1. Luminaire.

B. Product Test Reports: For each luminaire, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by

a qualified testing agency.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Sample warranty.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturers'

laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.

C. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color

consistency among luminaires.

D. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by

manufacturer.


A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering

prior to shipping.


A. Verify existing and proposed utility structures prior to the start of work associated with

luminaire installation.



IFB 154339


1.9 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures, including luminaire support components.

b. Faulty operation of luminaires and accessories.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.

2. Warranty Period: 2 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1598 and listed for wet location.

C. CRI of minimum 70. CCT of 4100 K.

D. L70 lamp life of 50,000 hours.

E. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.

F. Internal driver.

G. Nominal Operating Voltage: 480 V ac.

H. Source Limitations: Obtain luminaires from single source from a single manufacturer.

2.2 LUMINAIRE TYPES

A. Area and Site:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to

the following:

a. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.

b. General Electric

c. McGraw-Edison Lighting; An Eaton Group Brand

2. Luminaire Shape: Rectangular.

3. Mounting: Pole with extruded-aluminum rectangular arm, 9 inches in length.

4. Luminaire-Mounting Height: 30 feet.

5. Distribution: Type III, Type IV, or Type V as indicated on the drawings.

6. Housings:

a. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink.



IFB 154339


b. Dark Bronze, anodized finish.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

B. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum. Form and support to prevent warping

and sagging.

C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under

operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to

prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during

relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or

replacing lenses.

D. Lens and Refractor Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion

lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

E. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.

2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.

3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

F. Housings:

1. Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosure that will not warp, sag, or deform in

use.

2. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

G. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Labels shall be

located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal

viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:

a. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Variations in Finishes: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in

appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved

Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

B. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes

Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and

designating finishes.

1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the

Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

2. Class I, Color-Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: Medium satin;

Chemical Finish: Etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I,



IFB 154339


integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker),

complying with AAMA 611.

a. Color: Dark bronze.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS


B. Fasten luminaire to structural support.

C. Supports:

1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.

2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping.

3. Support luminaires without causing deflection of finished surface.

4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.

D. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways. Conceal raceways and cables.

E. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with finished grade unless otherwise indicated.

Install luminaires at height and aiming angle as indicated on Drawings.

F. Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires with other construction.

G. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables" and Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways" for wiring connections and

wiring methods.

3.3 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a

dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for

identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



IFB 154339



A. Inspect each installed luminaire for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and components.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after

electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

C. Illumination Tests:

1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST

standards. Comply with the following IES testing guide(s):

a. IES LM-5.

b. IES LM-64.

c. IES LM-72.

2. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after

electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

D. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and

interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate

compliance with standards.



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 267500-1 Alexandria, Virginia TELEPHONE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS ROUGH-IN

SECTION 267500 - TELEPHONE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS ROUGH IN

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Rough-in for telephone and communications systems for the project:

a. Conduit systems. b. Grounding conductors, ground buses, ground connections. c. Telephone and communication service equipment room requirements. d. Typical floor telephone closet requirements. e. Fire resistant plywood back boards for mounting.

B. Standards for Installation 1. All raceways and telephone backbone systems shall be designed, manufactured, tested

and installed in compliance with the following standards: a. ANSI/EIA/TIA-568 b. ANSI/EIA/TIA-569 c. ANSI/EIA/TIA-607 d. EIA/TIA-606

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. The Contractor shall provide an empty conduit system for the telephone and communications service(s) throughout the project as shown on the Contract Documents to be utilized by the respective telephone utility company and communication(s) companies for installation of service cables.

B. The Contractor shall provide telephone and communication(s) entrance conduits as indicated on the Contract Documents and required by the respective telephone utility company and communication(s) companies. See Division 26 for sleeve requirements.

C. Telephone and communications entrance conduits with 45 or 90 degree bends shall be bent with a radius no smaller than ten (10) times the trade size diameter of the conduit. All bends shall have a large sweep radius. Conduit bends shall not exceed 180° without a pull box or manhole. Pull boxes may not be located in the conduit system in lieu of bends. The exact size and configuration of pulling facilities located between the service conduit entrance and the service room and shall be determined by the telephone company. Where located below finished grade, conduits shall be buried at least 24 inches below the ground surface.



D. Conduit terminations entering telephone equipment rooms via floors or ceilings must terminate no further than 6" from the respective wall where telephone or communications cabling will be terminated. A pull string or fish tape with a minimum of 600lbs tensile pulling strength shall be provided in all system conduits.

E. Except where otherwise required by the telephone and communications service utility providers, Contractor shall install multiple flame retardant 3/4" thick 4' x 8' plywood telephone boards in the Main Telephone Room and remote telephone closets as indicated on the contract documents, where not indicated on the contract documents, provide a minimum of two per room. Extent, arrangement, and type of plywood mounted within the Main Telephone Room and remote telephone closets shall be in accordance with the requirements of the telephone service utility provider.

F. Telephone and communications systems conduits installed within the building shall be metallic (EMT, RMC, IMC) and shall be provided with a minimum #6 AWG equipment ground connection and respective bonding jumpers connected to the nearest telephone and communications grounding system.

G. Telephone and communications raceways and cable trays shall be coordinated by the Division 26 Contractor with the line voltage electrical distribution system in order to maintain a minimum 12" separation between parallel runs of telecommunications and electrical cabling. Where line voltage electrical power systems and Telephone and communications raceways/cable paths intersect, they shall cross at 90 degree angles only.

H. All telephone and communications systems conduits, sized two inches or larger, shall be bent with sweeping bends with a bend radius no smaller than 10 times the conduit diameter.

I. A maximum of 180 degrees of bends, not to exceed 90 degrees each, or 100 feet of horizontal run, may be included in the conduits between pull boxes or access points. An additional 90 degrees of bends can be utilized in a conduit route if the last bend is within 12 inches of a pull box or conduit termination access point where pulling can occur.

J. The identification system shall be in accordance with the requirements and recommendations of EIA/TIA-606. All horizontal and backbone conduits shall be assigned a unique alphanumeric designation for identification purposes, and permanent, non-removable labels affixed at both ends and in line as required.

K. Telephone and data outlets located in insulated walls shall have a three-quarter inch conduit with pull string, cord, or tape extending from wall mounted J-box up to ceiling space for each gang. Grommets shall be provided at the end of the conduit in the ceiling space. Telephone and data outlets located in non-insulated walls will only require pull string, cord, or tape extending from wall mounted J-box up to ceiling space for each gang. Each pull string, cord, or tape shall have a minimum pulling strength of 600 lbs.

L. Provide ¼” x 12”x 36” insulated/isolated copper ground bus within Main Telephone Room connected to Main Switchboard Room’s ground bus with 1#3/0 Copper AWG , 1” conduit.

M. Block out(s) and/or core drills shall be furnished between floors in various chases, closets, etc., as indicated on the contract documents and/or as required. Fill all space inside the block-out and/or core drill with non-hardening, removable, U.L. listed fire-safing material equal to the



rating of the floor. Block-out(s) and core drill(s) shall have a two-inch curb made of 2" x 2" x 1/4" angle iron welded at corners set in mastic or two inches wide by two inches high concrete curb extending above finished floor. Empty metallic conduit shall be furnished from the terminal room to various locations indicated on the contract documents. See Division 26 for sleeve requirements.



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 268000-1 Alexandria, Virginia MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

SECTION 268000 – MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Furnish and install various electrical equipment where indicated on the contract documents and as specified herein.

B. Work in other sections 1. 21 – Heat Tracing for Fire Suppression Piping 2. 22 – Heat Tracing for Plumbing Piping 3. 23 – Heat Tracing for HVAC Systems 4. Division 08 – Door Hardware 5. Division 14 – Conveying Systems


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type and size of equipment for this project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRIC HEAT TRACING FOR PIPING

A. Furnish and install three quarter inch conduit with 208 volt circuits for heat tracing systems on the exposed condenser water and domestic make up water piping, valves, and valve bonnets at the cooling tower, sump pump/sewage ejector pump piping in unconditioned space, other flooded non-sprinkler protection piping exposed to unconditioned or outdoors spaces, exposed forced main sanitary and storm piping, as specified in Divisions 21, 22, and 23, and as indicated on the drawings.

B. Electrical contractor shall coordinate with mechanical contractor the quantity of 208 volt, 20

amp circuits required by the mechanical contractor. Conductors run over 100 feet shall be #10 AWG minimum.

C. All circuit breakers supplying heat trace shall be ground fault (GFCI) type for equipment

protection, set to trip at 30 milliamperes of unbalance current. D. Where heat trace for fire protection piping is specified in the Contract Documents, provide the

following:



1. Fire alarm system monitor module for monitoring the integrity of the power circuit serving the fire protection heat tracing.

2. Supervisory signal to fire alarm system in the event of power circuit unavailable, with appropriate LED included on Graphic annunciator and fire control panel.

3. Remote station communication of Supervisory signal “Sprinkler Heat Trace.” 4. Power source shall be provided from a legally required stand by (NEC 701) source.

2.2 DOOR HARDWARE CONNECTIONS

A. Provide 2#12 AWG, #12 AWG ground in three quarter inch conduit from available spare 20

amp, single pole, 120V circuit breakers within 120/208V rated panel boards to door hardware power connections required. Refer to the Architectural documents for locations of hardware connections. Provide #10 AWG sized conductors and ground where homerun distance exceeds 100 feet.

B. Provide additional 20 amp, single pole circuit breakers within 120/208V panel boards as

necessary to accommodate quantity of circuits required. C. Provide fire alarm system interface for doors with fail safe feature such that upon loss of

normal power or activation of fire alarm system doors are unlocked or released.

2.3 CONVEYING SYSTEMS CONNECTIONS

A. Provide connection to conveying systems motor controllers with circuit conductors indicated on the documents.

B. Provide additional non-fused switch disconnecting means within sight of controller where

machine room built condition prevents a line-of-sight view to the respective controller’s main line disconnecting means. Where the short circuit analysis indicates a fault current available above 10,000 amperes, provide an additional fused switch adjacent to motor controller in lieu of an additional non-fused switch.

C. Where an NFPA 110 stand by system is provided for the project, provide 15A/1P circuit and

branch circuit for elevator cab lighting loads. Provide lockable non-fused disconnecting means for cab light circuit. Circuit source shall be provided from an Emergency standby power source (NEC 700 system), provide 2#12 AWG, #12 AWG ground in three quarter inch conduit.

D. Where an NFPA 110 stand by systems is provided for the project, provide 15A/1P circuit and

branch circuit for elevator auxillary loads. Provide lockable non-fused disconnecting means for cab light circuit. Circuit source shall be provided from a legally required standby power source (NEC 701 system), provide 2#12 AWG, #12 AWG ground in three quarter inch conduit.

E. Provide two-inch empty conduit from each elevator machine room to the fire command center,

or where a project is not provided with a fire command center, provide empty conduit to the FACP or location required by Division 14.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate branch circuit voltages for equipment provided by other trades specified to be provided with electrical connections under this section.

3.2 TESTING

A. Provide insulation integrity testing of branch circuit conductors provided for connections to equipment under this section as specified under Section 2, prior to connection to systems provided by other trades.

3.3 CONNECTION

A. Connect branch circuit conductors and conduits to equipment provided by other trades.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clear all dirt and debris from the inside and outside of all specified equipment prior to operating and turning over to the Owner.



IFB 154339

Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 269000-1 Alexandria, Virginia ELECTRICAL TESTING

SECTION 269000 – ELECTRICAL TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Specific Attention iscalled to the "General Requirements and Common Work Results for Electrical Systems" locatedin Division 26.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. During the progress of the work and upon completion, tests shall be made as specified hereinand as required by authorities having jurisdiction including inspectors, Owner, Architect, orEngineer. Tests shall be conducted by the Contractor as part of the work of this Division andshall include the services of qualified personnel as well as all equipment, apparatus, andservices required. Each wiring system with devices connected must test free from short circuitsand from grounds and must have an insulation resistance between conductors and ground,based on maximum load, not less than the requirements of the latest edition of the NationalElectrical Code.

B. Prior to the execution of testing, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer of proposed testprocedures and forms. The procedures and documentation shall include the items listed herein,applicable code requirements, and manufacturer’s recommended installation and acceptancetest procedures.

C. Tests shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:1. Wire and cable insulation, refer to Division 26.2. Grounding system continuity, refer to Division 26.3. Test all operations of the lighting control systems specified on this project.4. Running of mechanical and plumbing equipment with demonstration of controls and

interlocks.5. Ground fault protection system testing after construction is completed and prior to final

acceptance. Certified test results shall be sent to the Engineer from the Contractor.System shall be tested by primary injection method.

6. Operation of all dry type transformers by recording secondary voltage while providedwith load bank at transformer kVA rating to assure proper transformer tap settings.

7. Operation of electrical equipment and appliances whether provided under this Division ornot, including any portions of electrical power system as required by Engineer, Architector Owner.

8. Demonstration and operating test of the fire alarm and detection system including allindicating devices, initiation devices, communication system, on/off controls, door locks,annunciation, fire protection systems, and any other devices or systems. Any testsrequired by the City, County or State Authorities will be performed. Engineer shall benotified two weeks prior to test for witnessing test. Refer to Division 26.

9. Operation of standby power system while the system is fully functional to assure properoperation of the emergency generator system, transfer switches, signal annunciation tofire alarm system and building management system, etc. Provide load bank connected on



the load side of each automatic transfer switch, except fire pump automatic transfer switch, to allow testing of generator, automatic transfer switches and distribution system under loaded conditions. Engineer shall be notified two weeks prior to test for witnessing test. Refer to Division 26. Test shall include the following plus any other required manufacturer’s tests. a. NFPA 110 Installation Acceptance Testing. b. Witness test all of the generator system safety, trouble, alarm features. c. Automatic starting through loss of utility power. d. Witness test all automatic transfer switch interfaces and operations. e. Confirm interfaces with Divisions 21, 22, and 23, fire alarm system, remote

annunciator, etc. f. Confirm proper functioning of associated equipment (i.e. fuel system, dampers,

ventilation, exhaust, etc). 10. After the electrical distribution system including switchboards, busways, distribution

panels, lighting panels, motor control centers, disconnects, automatic transfer switches, transformers, motor starters, troughs, and equipment feeder terminations has been final checked, adjusted, and calibrated, and is under load, it shall be subjected to a thermographic test using an infrared temperature scanning unit. The required quantity of copies of the test report shall be submitted to the Engineer upon completion of test. Connections indicated having higher temperatures than acceptable shall be tightened or corrected as required. After corrections have been made the connections shall be rechecked to confirm that the problem has been corrected. Non-loaded typical floor tenant panels shall be provided with a temporary load bank equal to 80 percent of the ampere rating of the panel at nominal voltage. Submit list of equipment to be tested for confirmation prior to testing. Refer to Division 26 list of pricing Alternates for additional information.

11. Test the operation and set the lighting schemes for the dimming system(s), where applicable.

12. Provide the lightning protection grounding system tests per Division 26. 13. Test the operation of all transfer switches. All transfer switch timer settings shall be

confirmed/adjusted and written in report. The contractor and manufacturer shall provide the necessary equipment to ensure that the required NEC 700 Emergency Systems are energized and operational within ten seconds, the NEC 701 Legally Required Standby Systems are energized and operational within sixty seconds and any NEC 702 Optional Standby Systems are energized and operational within ninety seconds.

14. Test the operation of all the SPDs with verification of unit status, indicators, diagnostics, common alarm to building energy management system, etc.

15. Provide busway system installation testing per manufacturer’s recommendations. With the busway de-energized and electrically isolated, and all plugs in the OFF position, perform a 1000V megger test on the busway system. Document torquing of joint stack bolts.

D. All tests to be witnessed by Engineer shall be completely pre-tested by Contractor and all

systems shall be operational prior to Engineer's review. Should a second trip be necessary to re-review a test for an inoperable system, Contractor shall be responsible for compensating Engineer for his time based on Engineer's hourly rates and reimburse any travel expenses. 1. Tests scheduled to be witnessed by the Engineer:

a. Stand by electrical system operational testing.



E. Contractor shall submit the required quantity of copies of each complete test report specified herein to the Engineer. Each test report shall include at a minimum all model numbers of test equipment with last calibration date, test personnel, date, time, weather conditions, witnesses, passing requirements, test procedures, test results, equipment settings, etc.

F. The foregoing shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the warranty requirements.



Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 269500-1 Alwxandria, Virginia SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 269500 - SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Furnish the specified shop drawing submittal data for the Architect's and Engineer's review as specified herein.

PART 2 - SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL DATA

2.1 GENERAL

A. The submittal data to be furnished for this Project shall comply with the Specifications hereinbefore. The referenced Sections herein scheduled are for general information purposes only and shall not be construed to be limiting to the submittal data scheduled and/or required within the individual Sections of these Specifications.

2.2 CONTRACT SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Shop drawing submittal data shall clearly and concisely address all Contract Document requirements. Standard manufacturer data that does not indicate these requirements shall be supplemented with additional information provided by the Contractor, Vendor, or equipment manufacturer. Refer to Section 26 for additional requirements, including submittal log schedule requirements.

B. All deviations from the contract documents shall be noted in the form of a cover letter included with the shop drawing submittal package. All pertinent data such as material options, equipment arrangements, control options, diagrams, etc. that applies to this Project shall be clearly marked. All data and diagrams that do not apply to this Project shall be omitted from the package or clearly marked-out.

C. Submittals data shall contain a Statement of Compliance. The Statement of Compliance shall individually list each specification paragraph by its alphanumeric designation along with a statement of "Complies" (C) or a statement of "Does not comply" (NC) for each of these alphanumeric designations. If an NC statement is provided, supplemental information shall be provided in the Statement of Compliance that explains the non-compliance and what will be provided to meet the intent of the specification. At the Contractor’s option it will also be acceptable to make a copy of the specifications and mark “C” or “NC” by each specification paragraph. A hand written marked-up specification section will be acceptable. Along with this specification copy mark-up, provide an abbreviated version of the Statement of Compliance that



addresses only the NC statements and deviations from the contract documents. If there is a conflict between the Statement of Compliance and the product literature, the Statement of Compliance will govern. Submittal data received without a Statement of Compliance will be returned without review.

D. Special Requirements: 1. The shop drawing submittal package containing the Fire Alarm composite wiring

diagrams shall require an Owner/Consultant review period of four weeks. Any re-submittals or submittal revisions of the Fire Alarm package will require a minimum of a three week Owner/Consultant review period. The Contractor shall plan for and arrange the shop drawing submittal review schedule to accommodate this requirement.

E. Where spare parts are specified, the submittal data for each piece of equipment shall include a detailed itemized list of recommended spare parts. Spare parts shall be clearly identified by name and part number

F. Unless otherwise noted in the specifications and in the following schedule of shop drawing, the Contractor shall provide a single shop drawing submittal package for each of the listed specification sections. Submittals that include Shop Drawings, product data, and other information shall be packaged under one cover and submitted simultaneously. Multiple submittal packages per specification section will not be acceptable under the terms of the Contract and shall be returned without review, requests for the Engineer to review incomplete submittals shall require an additional Engineer’s service fee compensated by the requester.

G. Specification sections not included within the schedule of submittal data shall be complied with by the Contractor, without submittal documentation review by the Engineer. Should the Contractor provide submittals outside of the schedule of submittal data, these shall be returned without review. Requests for the Engineer to review non-scheduled submittals shall require an additional Engineer’s service fee compensated by the requester.

2.3 COORDINATION BETWEEN DIVISIONS 21, 22, 23, AND 26.

A. The Division 26 Contractors shall cooperate with the General Contractor and the Division 21, 22 and 23 Contractors to provide coordination between the Division 21, 22 and 23 trades and Division 26 trades in a timely manner. For all equipment requiring electrical service provided under Divisions 21, 22, and 23, it shall be the responsibility of the Division 26 Contractors to acquire from the Division 21, 22, and 23 Contractors the electrical characteristics of the actual equipment to be provided. Should there be a discrepancy between the electrical service characteristics of the equipment to be provided and what is indicated on the documents, the contractor shall obtain written direction from the Owner's representative prior to proceeding. This coordination and transfer of information shall take place in a timely manner prior to the purchasing and installation of the electrical service.

2.4 COORDINATION BETWEEN OTHER DIVISIONS AND DIVISION 26.

A. The Division 26 Contractors shall cooperate with the General Contractor and the applicable other Division Contractors to provide coordination between trades and division 26 trade in a timely manner. For all equipment requiring electrical service provided under other Divisions, it shall be the responsibility of the Division 26 Contractors to acquire from the other Division Contractors the electrical characteristics of the actual equipment to be provided. Should there



be a discrepancy between the electrical service characteristics of the equipment to be provided and what is indicated on the documents, the contractor shall obtain written direction from the Owner's representative prior to proceeding. This coordination and transfer of information shall take place in a timely manner prior to the purchasing and installation of the electrical service.

2.5 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATION

All products or equipment listed herein with asterisks (*) shall be certified by the manufacturer. Refer to Section 26 for certification requirements.

2.6 SCHEDULE OF SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL PACKAGES

A. The Contractor shall provide submittals packages for the following Sections

260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS 260544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND

CABLING 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260570 PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT CIRCUIT, COORDINATION, AND ARC

FLASH STUDY 260600 ELECTRICAL UTILITY SERVICE 260615 STAND BY ELECTRICAL SERVICE 262200 LOW-VOLTAGE DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 262300 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 262413 SWITCHBOARDS 262416 PANELBOARDS 262600 POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS 262713 ELECTRICITY METERING 262813 FUSES 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262913 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 263213 ENGINE DRIVEN GENERATORS 263353 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 263600 TRANSFER SWITCHES 264113 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES 264313 SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER

CIRCUITS 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 267500 TELEPHONE AND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ROUGH IN 268000 MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 269000 ELECTRICAL TESTING




IFB 154339


GROUNDING AND BONDING

FOR COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEMS


SECTION 270526-GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the minimum requirements for grounding, earthing, and bonding of equipment

installed under or referred to in Division 27 Contract Documents.


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Reference Material: Refer to the most recent version, update or addenda:

1. TIA-607-B: Generic Telecommunications Bonding And Grounding (Earthing) For Customer

Premises, Edition B, Publish Date 2012.


A. Product Data:

1. Submit all product data in accordance with Division 01

B. Shop drawings:

1. Submit shop drawings indicating:

a. Single-line grounding schematic indicating:

i) Location of each bus bar

ii) conductor gauge for each grounding, earthing, bonding, or equalizing connection

iii) Bus bar labels for each grounding, earthing, bonding, or equalizing connection

C. As-Built Drawings:

1. Submit all as-built drawings in accordance with the requirements of Section 271000

2. Single-line grounding schematic

D. Quality Assurance:

1. Component manufacturer shall be ISO 9001:2000 and offer products that are RoHS compliant



IFB 154339



FOR COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEMS


PRODUCTS

1.5 WALL-MOUNT BUSBARS

A. Manufacturer List:

1. Cooper B-line

2. Chatsworth Products

3. Panduit

B. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB):

1. The Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar shall be located where indicated on the

drawings.

2. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) shall be constructed of .25” (6.4 mm) thick

solid copper bar.

3. The busbar shall be 4” (100 mm) high and 20” (510 mm) long and shall have 30 attachment points

(two rows of 15 each) for two-hole grounding lugs.

4. The hole pattern for attaching grounding lugs shall meet the requirements of TIA–607 and shall

accept 27 lugs with 5/8” (15.8 mm) hole centers and 3 lugs with 1” (25.4) mm) hole centers.

5. The busbar shall include wall-mount stand-off brackets, assembly screws and insulators creating a

4” (100 mm) standoff from the wall.

6. The busbar shall be UL Listed as grounding and bonding equipment.

C. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB):

1. A Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) shall be located where indicated on the

drawings.

2. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) shall be constructed of .25” (6.4 mm) thick solid

copper bar.

3. The busbar shall be 2” (50 mm) high and 12” (300 mm) long and shall have 9 attachment points

(one row) for two-hole grounding lugs.

4. The hole pattern for attaching grounding lugs shall meet the requirements of TIA–607 and shall

accept 6 lugs with 5/8” (15.8 mm) hole centers and 3 lugs with 1” (25.4 mm) hole centers.

5. The busbar shall include wall-mount stand-off brackets, assembly screws and insulators creating a

4” (100 mm) standoff from the wall.

6. The busbar shall be UL Listed as grounding and bonding equipment.

a. Bonding Accessories

D. Two Mounting Hole Ground Terminal Block:

1. Ground terminal block shall be made of electroplated tin aluminum extrusion.

2. Ground terminal block shall accept conductors ranging from #14 AWG through 2/0.

3. The conductors shall be held in place by two stainless steel set screws.

4. Ground terminal block shall have two 1/4” (6.4 mm) holes spaced on 5/8” (15.8 mm) centers to

allow secure two-bolt attachment to the rack or cabinet.

5. Ground terminal block shall be UL Listed as a wire connector.



IFB 154339



FOR COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEMS


E. Compression Lugs:

1. Compression lugs shall be manufactured from electroplated tinned copper.

2. Compression lugs shall have two holes spaced on 5/8” (15.8 mm) or 1” (25.4 mm) centers, as

stated below, to allow secure two bolt connections to busbars.

3. Compression lugs shall be sized to fit a specific size conductor, sizes #6 to 4/0, as stated below.

4. Compression lugs shall be UL Listed as wire connectors.

F. Antioxidant Joint Compound:

1. Oxide inhibiting joint compound for copper-to-copper, aluminum-to-aluminum or aluminum-to-

copper connections.

G. Accessory Products:

1. Provide any accessory products related to the UTP connectors required to provide a complete and

functional infrastructure system.

PART 2 EXECUTION

2.1 INSTALLATION GENERAL

A. The radius of any bend in any bonding, earthing, or grounding conductors shall not be less than 8 inch.

B. The angle of any bend in the bonding, earthing, or grounding conductors shall not be less than 90

degrees.

C. The installation bonding, earthing, or grounding conductors inside ferrous metallic conduit is neither

required nor desired. Use PVC where grounding conductors must be passed through walls. If AHJ

requires metallic conduit, the grounding conductor must be bonded to the sleeve on both ends using a

listed grounding bushing.

D. Splices, taps, or connections to the Connections to the grounding conductor with other grounding

conductors must be made using exothermic welding or irreversible compression type connections.

E. Only connection devices that require the complete removal of the conductor jacket or insulation and

result in a connection to the complete conductor surface area shall be suitable for use.

F. All mechanical and compression-type connection devices shall be UL 486A listed and of the proper size

for the application. These connection devices shall be tin-plated when connected with steel, galvanized

steel or aluminum surfaces.

G. All clamps and compression-type connection devices shall be UL 486A listed and shall maintain a

minimum 88% conductivity rating.

H. Compression systems shall include crimped die index and company logo for purposes of inspection.

I. No more than one clamp, fitting or lug may be attached by the same bolt or bolts. An exception to this is

when a jumper from a terminal strip or other internal connection point of the same equipment must be

bonded to the equipment grounding conductor.



IFB 154339



FOR COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEMS


J. No more than one conductor shall be connected by a single clamp, fitting or lug unless the clamp,

fitting, or lug is listed for multiple conductors.

K. Solid conductors shall be attached to lugs and to other conductors by irreversible high compression

crimping process. Only listed irreversible compression type lugs and connection devices shall be used.

L. Connections between dissimilar metals shall not be made unless the conductors are separated by a

suitable material that is a part of the attachment device. Only attachment devices listed and approved for

use with the specific dissimilar metals may be used for this purpose.

M. An appropriate type of listed, conductive anti-oxidant shall be applied on all connections of dissimilar

metals. Copper enhanced anti-oxidant compound should be used between copper, brass, bronze and tin-

plated bonding surfaces. Zinc enhanced anti-oxidant compound should be used between tin-plated

connection devices and steel, galvanized steel, zinc-chromate steel, aluminum, and tin-plated copper bus

bar bonding surfaces.

N. Where threaded or tapped holes are provided for attachment purposes, a star or split type lock washer

shall be installed under the head of the screw or bolt and/ or between the nut and the ground bus bar.

O. Self-tapping or sheet metal type screws shall not be used for attaching ground or grounding conductors

to any surface. (See NFPA 70-2005, Article 250.8 for additional information.)

P. Paint, enamel, lacquer, or other nonconductive coatings shall be removed from threads and surface areas

where connections are made (NFPA 70-2005, Article 250.12). Use of a star washer shall not alleviate

the requirement to remove nonconductive coatings from attachment surfaces. Star or split type washers

shall not be installed between the conductive surfaces.

Q. All two-hole lugs shall have bolts in both holes with lock washers placed on the nut side of the bonding

surface.

R. All securing hardware for mechanically bolted clamps and lugs shall be stainless steel or approved for

the application.

2.2 GROUND TERMINAL BLOCK

A. Racks and cabinets shall be bonded to the TMGB or TGB.

B. Minimum bonding connection to racks and cabinets shall be made with a rack-mount two-hole ground

terminal block sized to fit the conductor and rack and installed according to manufacturer

recommendations.

C. Remove paint between rack/cabinet and terminal block, clean surface and use antioxidant between the

rack and the terminal block to help prevent corrosion at the bond.

2.3 WALL-MOUNT BUSBARS

A. Process:

1. Attach busbars to the wall with appropriate hardware according to the manufacturer’s installation

instructions.



IFB 154339



FOR COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEMS


2. Conductor connections to the TMGB or TGB shall be made with 2-Hole Bolt-On Compression

Lugs sized to fit the busbar and the conductors.

3. Each lug shall be attached with stainless steel hardware after preparing the bond according to

manufacturer recommendations and treating the bonding surface on the busbar with antioxidant to

help prevent corrosion at the bond.

4. The wall-mount busbar shall be bonded to ground as part of the overall Telecommunications.

Bonding and Grounding System.

2.4 CABLE TRAYS

A. Bonding jumpers shall be installed at all cable tray splices and connection points unless the cable tray

has labeling that identifies it as suitable for use as a grounding (earthing) conductor and it meets the

requirements of NFPA 70-2005, Article 392.7(B). Cable trays shall have bolted splices and the

connection points use splined shoulder bolts which bite into the side rail of the cable tray to ensure a

positive bond between sections. All bolts must be properly installed at each splice in the cable tray

system per the manufacturer's instructions. Care must be taken to ensure a continuous electrical path.

Bonding jumpers must be used where discontinuities such as expansion splice plates and hinged splice

plates exist.

B. Cable trays shall not be utilized as a ground bus conductor for equipment or ancillary support apparatus.

2.5 MTR GROUNDING

A. The MTR Telecommunications Ground Busbar (TGB) shall be the single point grounding system.

B. Data Center grounding bus conductor

1. Provide ground bus conductor throughout data center for bonding the following:

a. IT equipment cabinets

b. IT equipment racks

c. IT Cable trays

d. IT Conduits

2. Provide support for Data Center grounding bus conductor so that it is outside the cable tray and is

no less than 2” from the any part of the cable tray.

2.6 TR ROOM GROUNDING

A. The TR room Telecommunications Ground Busbar (TGB) shall be the single point grounding system.

B. TR room grounding bus conductor

1. Provide ground bus conductor throughout TR Rooms for bonding the following:

a. IT equipment racks

b. IT Cable trays

c. IT Conduits

C. Provide support for TR room grounding bus conductor so that it is outside the cable tray and is no less

than 2” from the any part of the cable tray.

D. Tap of grounding bus conductor, using approved tap, to bond racks and rack bus bar, ref to drawing

details.



IFB 154339



FOR COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEMS


E. The raised floor grounding system (refer to electrical drawings) shall have one connection to the TR

Room TGB. No equipment installed under division 27 shall be connected to the raised floor grounding

system.




IFB 154339

Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 270528.29-1

INNER-DUCTS FOR

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

RACEWAYS


SECTION 270528.29 - INNER-DUCTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS RACEWAYS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provides specifications for non-continuous cable support components and woven fabric

raceways utilized to provide pathways support to telecommunications cables traveling outside

cable trays, conduits, or other continuous cable supports.

B. Provides specifications for non-continuous cable support components and woven fabric

raceways.


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Woven Innerduct: flexible raceway constructed from fabric or textile material placed inside a

larger raceway (conduit).

B. Cell: an individual subunit of a woven Innerduct assembly.

C. Abbreviations and Acronyms:

1. Refer to the Section 271000

D. Codes and Regulations: (Note: Reference Division 01 for specific code versions governing the

work in addition to the information noted below.)

E. Reference Material: Refer to the most recent version, update or addenda.

2. ASTM B633 - Specification for Electro-deposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel

3. ASTM A653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process

F. Scheduling:

1. Contract Documents and the overall construction schedule must be carefully reviewed to

determine all required interfacing and timing of the work. All such documents shall be

available through the General Contractor or Construction Manager.


A. Product Data:

1. Submit all product data in accordance with Division 01.



IFB 154339


INNER-DUCTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

RACEWAYS


2. Submit to A/E product data and samples of anchoring device and narrative of installation

procedure.

3. Submit (1) sample for each size and manufacturer of non-continuous cable support

components utilized.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit all shop drawings in accordance with Division 01 and Section 27 10 00.


A. Cable hooks shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and by UL to

Canadian standards (UL) as required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 3 INCH 3 CELL WOOVEND FABRIC INNERDUCT

A. Specification:

1. Each innerduct assembly shall consist of (3) 3 inch cells constructed from white polyester

and nylon resin polymer.

2. Each cell within an assembly shall have a unique color trace (stitching) for identification.

3. Each assembly (of 3 cells) within a conduit shall have a unique color trace (stitching) for

identification.

4. All innerduct shall be rated for the environment that it is installed in.

5. Innerduct must be constructed so that the coefficient of friction does not exceed .08

6. Each cell will contain a color coded flat woven pulling tape rated for 1250lb of force and

be UL2024A listed.

7. Pulling tape shall contain machine printed, sequential footage markings.

B. Manufacturer List:

1. Maxcell

2.2 WOOVEND FABRIC FITTINGS

A. Specification:

1. Conduit Plugs: Compression-type conduit plugs with locking nuts for sealing and securing

each textile innerduct within a conduit.

2. Termination Bags: Inflation-type bags for sealing and securing around each textile

innerduct and cables within a conduit.

B. Manufacturer List:

1. Maxcell



IFB 154339


INNER-DUCTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

RACEWAYS


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 NON-CONTINUOUS CABLE SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Process:

1. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for allowable fill capacity for each size of non-

contiguous cable support.

2. Use non-continuous support system shall be used in all locations where cables are not

supported by approved raceways.

3. Follow manufacturer’s instructions and recommended industry standards and guidelines.

4. Support for non-continuous support systems must be an independent support structure for

the voice/data communication system.

5. Draping cables over other structures in the ceiling is unacceptable. Water pipes, ceiling

grid, sprinkler system, electrical supports, air ducts or any other in-ceiling structure may

not be used for cable support.

6. Contractor installed supports shall be used to supplement the main cable support system

when any cabling leaves the main support system or is unsupported for more than three

and one half feet (3.5’-0”) feet.

7. Non-continuous supports shall be installed threaded rod secured to the slab above to

support the telecommunications cable infrastructure parallel to the slab throughout the

cable plant, unless site conditions dictate a non-parallel installation.

8. Cable must be routed to follow existing corridors and parallel or 90 degree angles from all

walls and the cable tray whenever possible.

9. Do not exceed the manufacturer’s load capacity for the support device.

10. Do not exceed the load capacity of the threaded rod or its anchoring device.

11. Installation and configuration shall conform to the requirements of the ANSI/ EIA/TIA

Standards 568 and 569, NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code), and applicable local codes.

3.2 INSTALLATION GENERAL - WOVEN INNERDUCT

A. Process:

1. Provide (3) 3-cell woven fabric innerducts for each 4 inch conduits that is 1) provided for

communications cables and 2) is greater than 60 inches in length (sleeves do not receive

innerduct).

2. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for installing all innerducts.

3. Use swivels from same manufacture of woven fabric innerduct for installation of all

innerduct.

4. Install innerducts that are rated for the environment that they are installed in.

5. Provide slack in the maintenance holes, hand holes, pull boxes, and at turns to ensure there

is no kinking or binding of the innerduct.

END OF SECTION 270528.29



IFB 154339


CABLE TRAYS FOR



SECTION 270528.36-CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provides specifications for cable tray (ladder rack and basket type) containment systems to provide

pathways support to telecommunications cables traveling outside of non-contiguous cable support

systems (J-hooks) and conduits.


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Codes and Regulations: (Note: Reference Division 01 for specific code versions governing the work

in addition to the information noted below.)

B. Reference Material: Refer to the most recent version, update or addenda.

1. Refer to the Section 271000

2. ASTM International:

3. ASTM A36 – Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

4. ASTM A1011 – Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,

High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.

5. ASTM A513 – Specification for Electric – Resistance- Welded Carbon And Alloy Steel

Mechanical Tubing.

6. ASTM B633 – Specification for Electro-Deposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.

7. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on

Iron and Steel Products.

8. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

9. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:

a. NEMA FG 1 - Nonmetallic Cable Tray Systems

b. NEMA VE 1 - Metal Cable Tray Systems

c. NEMA VE 2 - Metal Cable Tray Installation Guidelines


A. Product Data:

1. Submit all product data in accordance with Division 01.

2. Product data to include, but not limited to materials, finishes, approvals, load ratings, and

dimensional information.

3. Submit product data and samples of anchoring device and narrative of installation procedure.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit all shop drawings in accordance with Division 01.



IFB 154339


CABLE TRAYS FOR



2. Shop drawings shall depict cable tray routes, types, dimensions, support points, finishes and

calculations determining support spans and load ratings.

C. Closeout Submittals :

1. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing of cable tray and locations of supports.


A. Qualifications – Manufacturer:

1. Component manufactures shall be ISO 9001:2000 and offer products that are RoHS

compliant.

2. All items of a given type shall be the products of the same manufacturer.

3. Cable trays components and systems shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

4. Cable trays components and systems shall be of uniform quality and appearance.

5. All items of a given type shall be the products of the same manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BASKET CABLE TRAY SECTIONS AND COMPONENTS (where drawings indicate cable tray

and/or basket tray)


1. Snake Tray

2. Cablofil

3. Chatsworth

B. Description:

1. Wire basket shall be made of high strength steel wires and formed into a standard 2 inch by 4

inch wire mesh pattern with intersecting wires welded together.

2. All mesh sections must have at least one bottom longitudinal wire along entire length of

straight section.

3. Wire basket tray sizes shall conform to the following nominal criteria:

a. Straight sections shall be furnished in standard 118 inch lengths.

b. Wire diameter shall be 0.196” (5mm) minimum on all mesh sections.

c. Wire tray shall be provided in the sizes indicated on the drawings.

4. System shall be installed as an Equipment Ground Conductor (EGC), all splicing assemblies

shall be UL Classified or CSA approved as an EGC. Powder coated wire mesh cable tray

must have paint completely removed at all contact points of splice/ground bolt attachments.

5. Wire basket try shall be powder coated black with an average paint thickness of 1.2mils

(30microns) to 3.0mils (75microns).

6. All fittings shall be field formed, from straight sections, in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.

7. Contractor must be a certified installer and provide documented proof for the wire basket try

system.

8. All fittings shall be field formed, from straight sections in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.

9. Wire basket cable tray supports shall be center support hangers, trapeze hangers or wall

brackets as manufactured by Cooper B-Line or approved equal.



IFB 154339


CABLE TRAYS FOR



2.2 LADDER RACK SECTIONS AND COMPONENTS (where drawings indicate cable runway and/or

ladder rack)


1. Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI)

B. Description:

1. Ladder rack shall be manufactured from 3/8” (9.5 mm) wide by 1-1/2” (38 mm) high tubular

steel with .065” (1.65 mm) wall thickness.

2. Provided in widths indicated on the drawings.

3. Side stringers: 9’-11½ “ (3.0 m) long.

4. Welded cross members between stringers on 6” (300 mm) intervals/centers beginning 5-3/4”

(146 mm) from one end.

5. Furnish manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer plates, blind

ends, barrier strips, connectors, and grounding straps.

6. UL Classified.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION BASKET TRAY

A. Install wire basket tray in accordance with NEMA VE 2 to ensure that the cable tray equipment

complies with the requirements of NEC, and applicable portions of NFPA70B and NECA’s

“Standard of Installation” pertaining to general electrical installations practices.

B. Provide wire basket of types and sizes indicated; with connector assemblies, clamp assemblies,

connector plates, splice plates and splice bars. Construct units with rounded edges and smooth

surfaces; in compliance with applicable standards; and with the following additions construction

features.

C. All trays should be supported using a minimum of ¼’ All Threaded Rod (ATR).

D. Special accessories shall be furnished as required to protect, support and install a wire basket

support system.

E. Coordinate wire basket with other electrical work as necessary to properly interface installation of

wire basket runway with other work.

F. Support trays and fasten to structure and finishes in accordance with Section 27 05 29. Install

supports at each connection point, at end of each run, and at other points to maintain spacing

between supports of 6 ft (6’0”) maximum.

G. Install expansion connectors where recommended by manufacturer.

H. Install firestopping in accordance with Section 07 84 00 to sustain ratings when passing cable tray

through fire-rated elements.

I. Ground and bond metal cable tray in accordance with Section 27 05 26.

J. Provide continuity between tray components.



IFB 154339


CABLE TRAYS FOR



K. Use anti-oxidant compound to prepare contact surfaces before assembly.

L. Install two 6AWG bare copper equipment grounding conductor through entire length of tray; bond

to each component.

M. Make connections to tray using mechanical, compression or exothermic connectors.

3.2 INSTALLATION LADDER RACK

A. Installation and configuration shall conform to the requirements of the ANSI/ EIA/TIA Standards

568A & 569, NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code), and applicable local codes.

B. Runway should be supported every 4 feet on center with minimum 5/8 inch diameter threaded rod,

or applicable support brackets or racks.

C. Install metal cable tray in accordance with NEMA VE 2.

D. Install fiberglass cable tray in accordance with NEMA FG 1.

E. Support trays and fasten to structure and finishes in accordance with Section 27 05 29. Install

supports at each connection point, at end of each run, and at other points to maintain spacing

between supports of 4 feet maximum.

F. Install expansion connectors [where recommended by manufacturer] [as indicated on Drawings].

G. Install firestopping to sustain ratings when passing cable tray through fire-rated elements.

H. Ground and bond metal cable tray in accordance with Section 27 05 26.




IFB 154339


IDENTIFICATION FOR



SECTION 270553-IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Identification of the various components of the telecommunications infrastructure and pathway

system.

B. Section Includes:

1. Labeling and identification.



Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Reference Material: Refer to the most recent version, update or addenda.

1. TIA-568-C.1: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Edition C,

Publish Date 05/03/2012.

2. TIA-758: Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunication Infrastructure,

Published 2004.


A. Product Data:

1. Submit all product data in accordance with Division 01 and Section 27 10 00.

B. As-Built Drawings:

1. Submit all as-built drawings in accordance with the requirements.

2. Provide floorplan drawings showing outlet identification numbering in hard copy and

AutoCAD format.

3. Provide equipment elevation drawings of all racks, cabinets, and wall field locations

showing termination identification numbering in hard copy and AutoCAD format.


A. As-Built Drawings

1. Submit all as-built drawings in accordance with the requirements of Section 27 10 00.

2. Final project labeling scheme documentation clearly indicating the owner’s approved

labeling scheme for all components of the communications system.



IFB 154339


IDENTIFICATION FOR




A. Qualifications – Manufacturer:

1. Component manufacturer shall be ISO 9001:2000 and offer products that are RoHS

compliant.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION


1. Panduit “PANther” thermal transfer printer.

B. Product Options:

1. The indicated manufacturers shall be the basis of the design and each component selected

shall address the particular requirements for each situation.

C. Description:

1. All labels shall be machine-manufactured by a labeling machine. Handwritten labels will

not be accepted for final labeling.

2. The intention of the labeling scheme is to be TIA- 606 compliant.

3. It is the responsibility of the contractor to acquire, understand, and utilize the owner’s

labeling scheme for all components of the voice data communications system.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Check actual site conditions prior to start of any work. Ensure all preceding trade work

associated with the telecommunications system is accurate and complete before proceeding with

installation or use of products specified in this section.

D. Telecommunications outlets, cable trays and conduits:

1. Provide machine printed label on each telecommunication outlet indicating item

identification number.

2. Use labeling product from manufacturer if available, including plastic wrap to protect

label.



IFB 154339


IDENTIFICATION FOR



3.2 RE-INSTALLATION

A. No additional burden to the owner regarding costs, network down-time and/or end user

interruption shall result from the re-installation of specified components. Scheduling for re-

installation work shall be coordinated, in writing, with the owner prior to beginning the work.

3.3 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Contractor shall provide documentation of all telecommunications system components under

this section utilized throughout the site for review and reference by the Owner and A/E team.

B. Contractor to submit all as-built drawings required prior to acceptance by the Owner.



IFB 154339

Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 274113-1 Alexandria, Virginia ARCHITECTUALLY INTEGRATED AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEMS

SECTION 274113 – ARCHITECTURALLY INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This section of the specification defines the audiovisual systems that are an integral part of the building interiors and finishes. These systems include in-wall mounted back boxes for flat panel displays.


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Refer to the following Sections for specifications related to the Work:

1. Section 27 41 00 – Audiovisual Systems General Conditions

2. Section 27 53 20 – RF Headend and Distribution Systems

3. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical

1.03 RELATED WORK

A. AV Contractor shall coordinate with Electrical Contractor on raceway/junction box locations for audio visual equipment and routing of audio, video, control, and power cables/raceway from equipment, terminal and pull boxes to system equipment racks.

1.04 STANDARDS

A. Codes: Work shall be done according to applicable requirements of governing national and local codes, rules, and regulations. In addition, the work shall be in accordance with the latest revisions of all applicable standards and specifications of the following, whether statutory or not: International Code Council (ICC); International Building Code, 2006 (IBC)

B. Standards: Equipment and materials specified shall conform to the current edition of the following standards and best industry practices, where applicable:

1. UL-Underwriters Laboratories

2. EIA-Electronic Industries Association

3. ISO-International Standards Organization

4. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

5. NFPA 701-99 - Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films.

6. InfoComm International

7. Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE):

1.05 SUBMITTALS


IFB 154339


A. Furnish submittals in accordance with general requirements specified in Division 1,

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

1. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

a. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

b. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

c. Installation methods.

2. Shop drawings:

a. Indicate dimensions.

b. Indicate selection for any applicable options, accessories and finishes or surfaces.

c. Location of box centerline.

d. Location of wiring connections.

e. Detailed drawings for concealed mounting.

f. Connections to suspension systems.

g. Anchorage details.

h. Accessories.

i. Frame details

3. Samples:

a. None


A. Manufacturer qualifications:

B. In-wall boxes shall be certified by Underwriters Laboratory (UL), Inc. and shall bear UL label.

C. Warranty: Products shall be fully warranted for defects in workmanship for one (1) year after date of installation.

D. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of in-wall box required from a single manufacturer as a complete unit, including necessary mounting hardware and accessories.

E. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of in-wall box with other construction supported by, or penetrating through, walls, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partitions.


A. Deliver in-wall boxes in manufacturer's undamaged, labeled packaging.

Firm with successful experience manufacturingin-wall boxes for flat panel displays.


IFB 154339


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (LANDSCAPE IN-WALL STORAGE BOXES W / POWER)

A. 120/240V, 15 A, two (2) receptacle power accessory mounted inside box

B. Surge and filter module

C. Enclosure rated to UL2416 for use as in-wall enclosure systems

D. Knockouts for single gang outlets and 1-1/4”, 1” and 0.5” conduit 2.02 IN-WALL STORAGE BOX DETAILS AND LOCATIONS

A. Provide and install in-wall storage box. Type specified below. Quantity and location indicated below. Coordinate elevation with AV Contractor in the field.

B. Configuration and layout: As detailed on plans, schedules contained in TA drawings.

1. Drywall and stud mountable

2. Landscape or portrait orientation as indicated in TA drawings.

3. Provide and install one (1) 1-1/4” conduit attached to single gang box and to stub out above nearest accessible ceiling. To be used for low-voltage data drop. Data drop to be installed by low-voltage contractor.

4. Provide and install one (1) 1-1/4” conduit connected to top of in-wall storage box in 1-1/4” knockout. Conduit to go from top of in-wall storage box to in-wall SC (screw cover) electrical box near rack location. Refer to riser diagram in TA drawings. To be used for low-voltage AV cable connections. AV cables to be installed by AV contractor.

5. Provide and install power circuit for display and connect circuit to side of in-wall storage box. Connect to power receptacles located inside in-wall storage box.

C. Manufacturer and Model:

1. Chief PAC526FWP4 (basis of design)

a. Integrated surge protector

b. 4 power receptacles

2. Substitutions: Approval by appropriate request process.

D. Locations and elevations:

1. CIRCULATION 100

a. Furnish and install one (1) in-wall storage box.

1) Overall dimension 15.51 x 15.4 x 3.88” 2) In-wall storage box mounted in between two studs in wall. 3) Storage box to include power receptacles and surge suppressor


IFB 154339


4) Center of in-wall storage box to be mounted to align as close as possible to the location of the center of the conference table.

5) Location of in-wall storage boxes to be coordinated with the Architectural drawings and the AV contractor.

2. MULTIPURPOSE ROOM 103 a. Furnish and install five (5) in-wall storage box.

1) Overall dimension 15.51 x 15.4 x 3.88” 2) In-wall storage box mounted in between two studs in wall. 3) Storage box to include power receptacles and surge suppressor 4) Center of in-wall storage box to be mounted to align as close as

possible to the location of the center of the conference table. 5) Location of in-wall storage boxes to be coordinated with the

Architectural drawings and the AV contractor. 2. CONFERENCE ROOMS 104, 105, 110, 126, 211, 218, VS115, VS144



possible to the location of the center of the conference table. 3. CONFERENCE ROOMS 224, 321

a. Furnish and install two (2) in-wall storage box.


possible to the location of the center of the conference table. 4. PANTRY 113, VS145, 201, 301



possible to the location of the center of the conference table. 5. MEETING ROOM 118, 202, 203, 302, 303, 311, 316, 318A, 318A



possible to the location of the center of the conference table.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.


IFB 154339


B. Verify rough-in openings are properly prepared.

C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

3.03 Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate location of screens and enclosures as indicated on Drawings and Schedules

B. Install all boxes plumb

C. Install all devices in locations shown; arrange for adequate ventilation and access.

D. Attach boxes to structure in accordance with specific building requirements (review acceptable attachment methods with General Contractor). Do not damage fire protection coatings on any structure above the ceiling.

E. Do not damage the box in any way during install. Any scratched or bent boxes will require replacement.

F. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.05 CONTRACTOR SYSTEM CHECKOUT

A. The contractor shall assure the following:

1. All devices are secured to structure, free from lateral movement and sway, and are supported per code.

2. All tab tensioning cables are set, as per the manufacturer, and as appropriate to screen drop.

3. All boxes are installed level and plumb, are trimmed in, and free of scratches, blemishes and are cleaned.

4. All connections are tight, correctly soldered and correctly crimped.

5. All required labels are correct and in place.

6. Dust, construction debris have been removed from the facility and from the inside of the enclosures.

7. All electronic devices have been correctly grounded.

8. Prior to energizing any electronic devices, test each and every AC circuit associated with the systems, with a voltmeter and a circuit checker to assure that the voltage is correct and that the hot, neutral and ground conductors have been correctly connected.

beth.rappaport

Typewritten Text


beth.rappaport

Typewritten Text

beth.rappaport

Typewritten Text


IFB 154339



beth.rappaport

Typewritten Text

beth.rappaport

Rectangle

beth.rappaport

Rectangle

ELECTRONIC SECURITY CONDUCTORS AND CABLING



IFB 154339

Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 280513-1 Alexandria, Virginia

SECTION 280513 - ELECTRONIC SECURITY CONDUCTORS AND CABLING

GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Applicable requirements of Division 01 - General Requirements and Division 28, Section

28 00 00 shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed

herein full.

B. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary to each other and what is called for by

one shall be as binding as if called for by both. If a discrepancy exists between the

Drawings and Specifications, the higher cost and/or higher level of functionality shall be

included to meet the design intent.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Specifications, standards, and codes: all work shall be in accordance with the latest edition

of the following, or as otherwise directed by the project team:

1. National Electrical Code (NFPA 70

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

4. Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA)

5. Electronic Industries Association (EIA)

6. Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

7. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

8. American Standards Association (ASA)

9. Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

10. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

11. American Society of Testing Material (ASTM)

12. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

13. Local city and county ordinances governing electrical work

14. In the event of conflicts, the more stringent provisions shall apply




IFB 154339


1.03 SCOPE

A. The work to be done under this section of the specifications shall include the furnishing of

labor, material, equipment, and tools required for the complete installation of the work

indicated on the drawings or as specified herein.

B. All materials, obviously a part of the electronic security infrastructure and necessary to its

proper operation, but not specifically mentioned or shown on the drawings, shall be

furnished and installed without additional charge.

C. The drawings and specifications are complementary to each other and what is called for by

one shall be as binding as if called for by both. If a discrepancy exists between the Drawing

and Specifications, the higher cost shall be included, and the engineer shall be notified of

the discrepancy.

1.04 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Work shall include installation and commissioning of the following:

1. Integrated Security Management system consisting of:

a. Access Control System

b. Video Surveillance System

c. Intrusion Detection System

d. Digital Alarm Panel

e. Uninterruptible Power System

2. Wire and cable to install all equipment

3. Miscellaneous conduit and back boxes (not shown on the Documents as provided, but

required for a complete installation)




IFB 154339


PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. All products not provided by the end-user shall be new and unused, and shall be of

manufacturers’ current and standard production.

B. Where two or more equipment items of the same kind are provided, all shall be identical

and provided by the same manufacturer.

C. Drawings and Specifications indicate major system components, and may not show every

component, connector, module, or accessory that may be required to support the operation

specified. Contractor shall provide all components needed for complete and satisfactory

and intended operation.

D. Wire and Cable

1. General: Provide all wire and cable required to install systems as indicated. Wire and

cable shall be sized to provide minimum voltage drop and minimum resistance to the

devices being supplied.

2. All cables shall be specifically designed for their intended use (direct burial, aerial,

etc.).

3. Comply with equipment manufacturers recommendations for wire and cable size and

type.

4. Comply with all applicable codes and ordinances.

E. Conduit and Raceway Systems

1. General: The placing of surface mounted conduit on the exterior of any building shall

be approved by end-user prior to its installation.

2. Interior Conduit:

a. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)

b. Flexible Metal Conduit

c. Provide fittings and connectors as required for installation of EMT or flexible

conduit.

3. Surface Raceways: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface

metal raceway, WIREMOLD, or approved equal.

a. Provide fittings, elbows, and connectors designed for use with raceway system.

4. Exterior Conduit: Exterior conduit must be approved by Owner prior to installation

(any of the following as determined by local code requirements):

a. Rigid Steel Conduit




IFB 154339


b. Rigid Aluminum Conduit

c. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (only if buried 18" below ground surface).

d. Intermediate Metal Conduit

e. Provide rain-tight fittings and connectors as required for installation of exterior

conduit.

5. Exterior Flexible Conduit:

a. Liquid-tight Flexible Conduit: Flexible metal conduit with PVC jacket.

b. Provide rain-tight fittings and connectors as required for installation of Liquid-

tight Flexible Conduit.

F. Junction and Pull Boxes

1. Interior Boxes: Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: Sizes to be determined in accordance with

code requirements for conductor fill. Provide box covers as required.

2. Exterior Boxes: All exterior boxes shall NEMA 4 or NEMA 3R, water-tight and

dust-tight

3. All interior and exterior boxes shall have their covers fastened using security screws.

G. Lightning Protection

1. The Contractor shall provide suitable lightning protection for all

processors/controllers.

2. All lightning protection equipment shall be UL listed.

2.02 Wire and Cable

A. General Requirements:

1. Provide wire and cable as required to install the Security System as indicated on the

Drawings and specified herein.

2. All wire and cable shall be Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) listed, and shall meet all

national, state, and local code requirements for its application.

3. All wire and cable shall meet individual system or subsystem manufacturer

Specifications.

4. All wire and cable shall be Plenum type cable and shall conform to the minimum

requirements of Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) Standards.

5. Wire and cable shall comply with the applicable requirements of the National

Electrical Code (NEC), latest edition, in regards to cable construction and usage.




IFB 154339


6. The conductors of wires shall be copper, and have conductivity in accordance with

the standardization rules of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.

(IEEE). The conductor and each strand shall be round and free of kinks and defects.

7. All cable carrying data or voice transmissions shall be shielded. All other cable shall

be shielded where necessary for interference-free signals.

8. Insulation shall be rated for a minimum of 300V.

9. Color-coding shall be accomplished by using solidly colored insulation. Grounding

conductors, where insulated, shall be colored solid green or identified with green

color as required by the National Electric Code (NEC).

B. Wire Types and Sizes

1. Signal Cable (Non-Power): Wire size shall be a minimum of 20 AWG, twisted,

shielded, stranded, insulated, and jacketed.

2. Signal Cable (Low Voltage Power): Wire size shall be a minimum of 18 AWG,

stranded, insulated, and jacketed.

a. Wire size shall be a minimum of 18 AWG, twisted, stranded, insulated and

jacketed and shall be used for cable runs less than 500 feet.

b. Wire size shall be a minimum of 16 AWG, twisted, stranded, insulated and

jacketed and shall be used for cable runs in excess of 500 feet, but less than

750 feet.

c. Wire size shall be a minimum of 14 AWG, twisted, stranded, insulated and

jacketed and shall be used for cable runs in excess of 750 feet, but less than

1,250 feet.

3. Security IP Network Cabling

a. Shall be provided by the Telecommunications Contractor under Division 27.

b. Shall consist of (4) twisted pairs, 24 AWG or greater.

c. Shall be Category 6 Augmented cabling (CAT 6A).

d. Refer to Div-27 Communications Specifications.

4. IP Network Patch Cables for Security Equipment

a. Security Contractor shall provide patch cables for network connectivity within

Security Equipment Rooms and where necessary in order to complete the

Security System Work.

b. Shall consist of (4) twisted pairs, 24 AWG or greater.

c. Shall be Category 6 Augmented cabling (CAT 6A).




IFB 154339


d. Refer to Div-27 Communications Specifications.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers: Belden, West Penn, or approved equal




IFB 154339


EXECUTION

3.01 General

A. Provide necessary work as detailed on Section 28 00 00.

3.02 Site Inspections

A. Continuously verify that the site conditions are in agreement with the Documents and the

design package. Submit a report to the Architect documenting changes to the site or

conditions that affect the performance of the System to be installed. For those changes or

conditions, which affect System installation or performance, provide (with the report)

specification sheets, or written functional requirements to support the findings, and a cost

estimate to correct the deficiency. No deficiency shall be corrected without written

permission from the Architect.

B. Specific mounting locations, exact wire and cable runs, and conduit routing have not been

specified or delineated on the Documents. Coordinate all aspects of the Work with the

Architect.

3.03 Coordination

A. Coordinate with the Architect to ensure that adequate conduit is provided and that

equipment back-boxes are adequate for System installation.

B. Coordinate with the Architect to ensure that adequate power has been provided and properly

located for the security System equipment.

C. Coordinate with the Architect to ensure that doors and doorframes are properly prepared for

electric locking hardware and door position switches.

D. Coordinate locations of all devices with the Architect prior to installation.

E. Coordinate and verify the location of each piece of rack-mounted equipment with the

Owner.

3.04 Equipment

A. Provide equipment as indicated on the Documents and specified herein. Additional specific

installation requirements are as follows:

1. Security Equipment Room and IC Locations

a. Configure security equipment as indicated in the Documents.

b. Wire all power supply power fail alarm contacts in each equipment room as a

single alarm input to the SMS.

c. Wire each power supply low battery alarm contact as individual alarm inputs

to the SMS.

2. Controllers

a. Configure the System such that devices can be connected to spare input points,

output points and card reader inputs on the controller without requiring

reconfiguration of the system.




IFB 154339


3. Card Readers

a. Wire card reader LEDs to indicate valid and invalid card reads, and door

locked and unlocked conditions. All card reader LED indicators shall operate

identically.

4. Electric Locking Mechanisms

a. Interface with electric locking mechanisms provided by the door hardware

supplier.

b. Wire electric locking mechanisms as indicated on the Documents.

c. Wire fail-safe electric locking mechanisms in accordance with local codes.

d. Wire fail-secure electric locking mechanisms and power supplies such that a

fire alarm condition or building power failure shall not affect operation of the

lock.

5. Delayed Egress Locking Devices

a. Interface with delayed egress locking devices provided by the door hardware

supplier.

b. Wire delayed egress locking devices as indicated on the Documents.

c. Wire delayed egress locking devices for fail-safe operation in accordance with

local codes.

d. Interface with a normally closed alarm contacts that shall open upon activation

of the unlock timer.

e. Interface with sounder bypass control contacts. Wire control output contacts

to bypass sounder by system workstation.

f. Interface with lock control contacts activated by system workstation and/or

time schedule. Wire control output contacts to lock/unlock devices by time

schedule and/or system workstation.

6. Fire Alarm Interface

a. Connect (hard wire) fail-safe electric and time delay locking mechanical to the

building fire alarm System for fail-safe release upon any fire alarm.

b. Interface with a single low voltage/low current normally closed dry contact

from the fire alarm System provided by the fire alarm contractor in the Fire

Command Center. The contact shall open on any fire alarm condition.

c. Provide all additional UL listed fail-safe relays and power supplies necessary

to interface to this contact and unlock all fail-safe doors.

d. Connect fail-safe relays and power supplies to standard building power.

Connection of fail-safe devices to emergency or UPS power shall not be

acceptable.

e. Reference the Documents for fire alarm interface requirements.

beth.rappaport

Typewritten Text


beth.rappaport

Typewritten Text




IFB 154339


END OF SECTION

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM



IFB 154339

Hammel, Green & Abrahamson 283111-1 Alexandria, Virginia

SECTION 283111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL


Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire-alarm control unit.

2. Manual fire-alarm boxes.

3. System smoke detectors.

4. Heat detectors.

5. Notification appliances.

6. Device guards.

7. Magnetic door holders.

8. Remote annunciator.

9. Addressable interface device.

10. Digital alarm communicator transmitter.

11. Network communications.


1. Section 212200 "Clean-Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems" for fire alarm requirements

for clean agent systems.

C. Contractor shall bid and install the fire protection system as shown in the documents.

Deviations in materials, locations, configurations or sizes proposed by the Contractor will be

reviewed under the provisions of Section 26 of the General Conditions as a 'Substitution'. The

type of systems, the location of major components, the quantity, type, coverage, location of

sprinklers, and modifications to the distribution system are not to be altered by the Contractor,

without prior written approval by the Architect and the Building Official. Changes to the design

depicted within the Construction Documents shall be considered Substitutions in accord with

the General Conditions and are to be documented by Change Order.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.

B. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.

C. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.




IFB 154339


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General Submittal Requirements

1. Complete fire alarm shop drawings and submittal data shall be reviewed and approved by

the A/E of Record prior to submission to BCOM for final approval of conformance with

the Codes and Standards.

2. Contractor shall submit the following items to the Architects. Submittals shall be

prepared in accordance with contract specifications, NFPA 72- 2010 and the VUSBC -

2012.

3. All required submittals in this Article shall be combined and submitted as part of one

comprehensive submittal package. This package shall include product data, shop

drawings, and all required reports and calculations. Partial submittals will be returned

without review.

B. Product Data: Data shall be submitted for each type of product specified in Part 2 of this Section

as well as for all accessories required for operation of the system. Include rated capacities,

operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

All equipment submitted must be UL listed for its intended use. Evidence of such listings and

approvals must be evident on the product data sheets submitted. Product data sheets shall also

indicate the UL file number for the listing of the associated product. Product data sheets shall

also be annotated to specifically indicate the models/sizes being submitted for use.

C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system.

1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the

"Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor

sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory

and field wiring.

4. Detail assembly and support requirements.

5. Floors plans shall include reflected ceiling plans.

6. Include point-to-point wiring diagrams between the fire alarm panels and all field

devices.

7. Include detailed plans of each equipment cabinet, showing all modules, and all wire

terminations within panels.

8. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits.

9. Include circuit load calculations.

10. Include battery-size calculations.

11. Include input/output matrix.

12. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested

as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72.

13. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector.

14. Verify that each duct detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature,

and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

15. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts,

drawn to scale; coordinate location of duct smoke detectors and access to them.




IFB 154339


a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes,

detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators.

b. Show field wiring required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm.

c. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

d. Show air-sampling detector pipe routing.

16. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable

device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams.

17. Drawings showing the location of each notification appliance and smoke and heat

detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing

conditions of the device.

18. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of

detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and intensities for strobe signals

and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances.

19. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. NICET-certified, fire-alarm technician; Level IV minimum.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following:

a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"

chapter in NFPA 72.

b. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of

Completion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" Article in the

"Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and

equipment. Each conductor shall be numbered at every junction point with

indication of origination and termination points.

d. Riser diagram.




IFB 154339


e. Device addresses.

f. Air-sampling system sample port locations and modeling program report showing

layout meets performance criteria.

g. Record copy of site-specific software.

h. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing and

Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following:

1) Equipment tested.

2) Frequency of testing of installed components.

3) Frequency of inspection of installed components.

4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.

5) Manufacturer's user training manuals.

i. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.

j. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit and each

annunciator unit.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10

2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer

than one unit.

3. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type

installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type.

4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to two percent of amount of each type installed, but no

fewer than one unit of each type.

5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked or tamperproofed components.

6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.

7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system. Provide in a box or cabinet with

compartments marked with fuse types and sizes.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.

2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files.

3. Device address list.

4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation

of units required for this Project and shall be certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level IV

technician.

B. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company.




IFB 154339



A. Perform a full test of the existing system prior to starting work. Document any equipment or

components not functioning as designed.

B. Use of Devices during Construction: Protect devices during construction unless devices are

placed in service to protect the facility during construction.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Service Organization: The Contractor shall furnish evidence that the fire alarm equipment

supplier has an experienced and effective service organization which carriers a stock of repair

parts for the system to be furnished. Should the Contractor fail to comply with the service

requirements of this section, the Owner will then have the option to make the necessary repairs

and back charge the Contractor without any loss of warranty or guarantee as provided by the

contract documents.

B. Guarantee: The Contractor shall guarantee labor, materials, and equipment provided under this

contract against defects for a period of two years after the date of final acceptance of this work

by the owner and the receipt of as-built drawings and schematics of all equipment. The

guarantee period begins when all defects and omissions have been corrected and the owner's

representative has confirmed that these items have been corrected. Substantial completion shall

not be construed as final acceptance.

C. Prior to the expiration of the of the guarantee period, approximately 23 months after the final

acceptance of the project, a post-construction review of the project will be made. The

Contractor shall furnish personnel to assist the Owner in this review. Any adjustments, repairs

or replacements found necessary during the review shall be done by the Contractor at no

additional cost to the Owner.The Contractor shall be responsible for, and shall incur financial

responsibility for any damages caused by, or resulting from, defects in their work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission and

horn/strobe evacuation.

B. Automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors.

C. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.




IFB 154339


2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. In addition the to the operational description included in this Article, the fire alarm system shall

also include the operational description for the clean agent fire suppression system included in

Section 212200.

B. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:

1. Manual stations.

2. Heat detectors.

3. Smoke detectors.

4. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.

5. Dry or preaction system alarm pressure switch.

6. Clean agent fire-extinguishing system operation.

7. Fire standpipe system.

C. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate both audible and visual alarm notification appliances.

2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire-alarm control unit, connected network

control panels, and remote annunciators.

3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.

4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.

5. Release preaction system valve (if device is associated with preaction protected area).

6. Release clean agent fire suppression system (if device is associated with clean agent

protected area).

7. Close all dampers serving protected area (if device is associated with clean agent

protected area).

8. Shut down air handling units within protected area (if device is associated with clean

agent protected area).

9. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors.

10. Activate elevator power shunt trip.

11. Record events in the system memory.

D. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Valve supervisory switch.

2. High- or low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.

3. Clean agent system low agent alarm.

4. Elevator shunt-trip supervision.

5. Duct smoke detectors.

6. Independent fire-detection and -suppression systems.

7. User disabling of zones or individual devices.

8. Loss of communication with any panel on the network.

E. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.




IFB 154339


2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating

devices.

3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay, control

module, remote annunciator, printer interface, or Ethernet module.

4. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.

5. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire-alarm control unit.

6. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.

7. Break in standby battery circuitry.

8. Failure of battery charging.

9. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.

F. System Supervisory Signal Actions:

1. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire-alarm control unit, connected network

control panels, and remote annunciators.

2. Record the event on system printer.

3. After a time delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the remote

alarm receiving station.

4. Shut down associated air handling unit (if due to activation of associated duct smoke

detector)

5. Close associated smoke damper (if due to activation of associated duct smoke detector)

2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:

1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with

electronic modules, complying with UL 864.

a. System software and programs shall be held in nonvolatile flash, electrically

erasable, programmable, read-only memory, retaining the information through

failure of primary and secondary power supplies.

b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and

printer.

c. Provide communication between the FACP and remote circuit interface panels,

annunciators, and displays.

d. The FACP shall be listed for connection to a central-station signaling system

service.

e. Provide nonvolatile memory for system database, logic, and operating system and

event history. The system shall require no manual input to initialize in the event of

a complete power down condition. The FACP shall provide a minimum 500-event

history log.

2. Addressable Initiation Device Circuits: The FACP shall indicate which communication

zones have been silenced and shall provide selective silencing of alarm notification

appliance by building communication zone.

3. Addressable Control Circuits for Operation of Notification Appliances and Mechanical

Equipment: The FACP shall be listed for releasing service.




IFB 154339


B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at

fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and

supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming

and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 80 characters, minimum.

2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control

commands.

C. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at

fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and

supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming

and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, three line(s) of 80 characters, minimum.

2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control

commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of

smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.

D. Initiating-Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits:

1. Pathway Class Designations: NFPA 72, Class B.

2. Pathway Survivability: Level 0.

3. Install no more than 256 addressable devices on each signaling-line circuit.

4. Serial Interfaces:

a. One dedicated RS 485 port for central-station operation using point ID DACT.

b. One RS 485 port for remote annunciators,

c. One USB port for PC configuration.

5. All circuits shall not be loaded to more than 80% of their maximum capacity.

6. All circuits shall be sized so that the voltage drop does not exceed 15% of their nominal

operating voltage.

E. Smoke-Alarm Verification:

1. The fire alarm panel shall have the capability of performing this function, but this

function shall be initially disabled.

2. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire-alarm

control unit.

3. Activate an approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire-alarm control unit and

detector.

4. Record events by the system printer.

5. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.

6. Cancel fire-alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.

F. Notification-Appliance Circuit:

1. Audible appliances shall sound in a three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined in NFPA 72.

2. Where notification appliances provide signals to sleeping areas, the alarm signal shall be

a 520-Hz square wave with an intensity 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or




IFB 154339


5 dB above the maximum sound level, or at least 75 dBA, whichever is greater, measured

at the pillow.

3. Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multiple appliances are in

the same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72.

G. Elevator Recall:

1. Elevator recall shall be initiated only by one of the following alarm-initiating devices:

a. Elevator lobby detectors except the lobby detector on the designated floor.

b. Smoke detector in elevator machine room.

c. Smoke detectors in elevator hoistway.

2. Elevator controller shall be programmed to move the cars to the alternate recall floor if

lobby detectors located on the designated recall floors are activated.

H. Door Controls:

1. Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in smoke-barrier

walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.

I. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable

smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change

those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated

changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and

sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and print out the final adjusted

values on system printer.

J. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory,

and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.

K. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. Identify

zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) and date and

time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications. Also print

system reset event, including same information for device, location, date, and time. Commands

initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system

and a historical log of events.

L. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating

devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory signals supervisory

and digital alarm communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source.

1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-

supply module rating.

M. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and

automatic transfer switch.

1. Batteries: Sealed lead acid.




IFB 154339


N. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or

glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe

appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the

system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be

finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show

visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as

surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.

1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with

integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal,

alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.

3. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Where indicated on the drawings, factory-fabricated,

clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.

2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.

2. Detectors shall be two-wire type.

3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a

twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for

connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to

restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power-

on status.

7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be digital-addressable type,

individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm

condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit.

a. Multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to

identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to

manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status.




IFB 154339


b. Device type.

c. Present average value.

d. Present sensitivity selected.

e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to

identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to

manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status.

b. Device type.

c. Present average value.

d. Present sensitivity selected.

e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with

the supplied detector for smoke detection in HVAC system ducts.

4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.

5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific

duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.

6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Separate fully programmable addressable relay rated to interrupt

fan motor-control circuit.

2.6 HEAT DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

1. Temperature sensors shall test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.

B. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed

temperature of 135 deg F.

1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.

2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2.7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to a

signaling-line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system

connections.

B. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance signal

circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for

system connections.




IFB 154339


1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-

mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for

system connections.

C. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clear or

nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is

engraved in minimum 1-inch-high letters on the lens.

1. Rated Light Output:

a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.

2. Mounting: Ceiling mounted unless otherwise indicated.

3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined

with guards in place.

4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.

5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.

6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, white.

D. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating

mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of

90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test

protocol.

1. Horn Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.

2. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, white.

E. Bells: Electric-vibrating, 24-V dc, under-dome type; with provision for housing the operating

mechanism behind the bell. Bells shall produce a sound-pressure level of 94 dBA, measured 10

feet from the bell. 10-inch size, unless otherwise indicated. Bells are weatherproof where

indicated.

2.8 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm,

supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm

control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.

1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1.

B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights

shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and

test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.

2.9 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. General:




IFB 154339


1. Include address-setting means on the module.

2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module type.

3. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers.

B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-initiating

devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

C. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to elevator controller to initiate elevator

recall, to circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown.

1. Allow the control panel to switch the relay contacts on command.

2. Have a minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts available for

field wiring.

D. Control Module:

1. Operate notification devices.

2. Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service.

2.10 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and

shall comply with UL 632.

B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-

alarm control unit and automatically capture two telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for

a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be

transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall

initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the

remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report

telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines,

transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal.

C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the

following:

1. Verification that both telephone lines are available.

2. Programming device.

3. LED display.

4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication.

5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.

D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:

1. Address of the alarm-initiating device.

2. Address of the supervisory signal.

3. Address of the trouble-initiating device.

4. Loss of ac supply.

5. Loss of power.

6. Low battery.




IFB 154339


7. Abnormal test signal.

8. Communication bus failure.

E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.

F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.

2.11 SYSTEM PRINTER

A. Printer shall be listed and labeled as an integral part of fire-alarm system.

2.12 DEVICE GUARDS

A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, gong,

or other device requiring protection.

1. Factory fabricated and furnished by device manufacturer.

2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.

2.13 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE BOOSTER PANEL

A. General: Provide 6 or 8 amp notification appliance booster panels for distributed strobe power

supply via four (4) 1.5 amp rated circuit outputs. Provide primary power from an emergency

120 VAC source and local battery secondary 24 VDC power backup. FACP shall monitor

remote notification appliance booster panels for trouble conditions including low battery and

notification appliance circuit fault. Voltage drop shall not exceed 15% of nominal 24 VDC for

each output circuit. Circuit output load shall not exceed 80% of rated capacity. In load

calculations, the total rated capacity of all circuits on each booster panel shall not exceed the

total capacity of the panel.

2.14 WIRES AND CABLES

A. Wires and cables shall meet the applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and UL for the type of

insulation, jacket, and conductor specified or indicated. Wires and cables manufactured more

than 12 months prior to date of delivery to the site shall not be used.

1. Provide FPL or FPLP, 300 volt type conductors when installed in EMT.

B. Conductors: Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid, and those No. 8 AWG and

larger shall be stranded. Conductor sizes shown are based on copper. All conductors shall be

copper.

C. Minimum Conductor Sizes: Minimum size for branch circuits shall be No. 12 AWG; for Class

1 remote-control and signal circuits, and for Class 2 low-energy remote-control and signal

circuits, No. 14 AWG. Unless otherwise noted, fire protection circuit minimum conductor sizes

shall be No. 18-2 AWG Twisted Shielded Pair (TSP) with drain wire, 300 VAC insulated for

Signaling Line Circuits; No. 14-2 AWG, 300 VAC, FPLP type, insulated for initiating device




IFB 154339


circuits, 24 VDC power,and control circuits; No. 12-2 AWG, 300 VAC, FPLP type, insulated

for notification appliance circuits.

D. Color Coding: Provide for all service, feeder, branch, control, and signaling circuit conductors.

Color shall be green for grounding conductors, and white for neutrals, except where neutrals of

more than one system are installed in same raceway or box, the other neutral shall be white with

a colored (not green) stripe. Colors shall be factory applied

1. Colors for 208/120 VAC Circuits shall be:

a. Phase A: Black

b. Phase B: Red

c. Phase C: Blue

2. The color of fire alarm conductors shall be as follows:

a. Alarm Signaling Line and Initiating Circuits: Black/Red

b. 24 VDC Power Circuits (Power Limited): Brown/Blue

c. Control Circuits: Orange/Brown

d. Notification Circuits: Black/White

3. Contractor to select other color combinations for other miscellaneous wiring

requirements.

E. Insulation: Unless specified or indicated otherwise, or required to be otherwise by NFPA 70, all

power and lighting wires shall be 600-volt, Type THHN/THWN dual rated; Bonding

Conductors: ASTM B 1, solid bare copper wire for sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller; ASTM B 8,

Class B, stranded bare copper wire for sizes No. 6 AWG and larger. Grounding and bonding

conductors shall be insulated type copper conductors where indicated or specified elsewhere.

Power limited fire alarm conductors shall be solid copper wire with 300 volt rated insulation,

type FPLP.

F. Splices and Termination Components: UL 486A for wire connectors, and UL 510 for insulating

tapes. Connectors for wires No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be insulated pressure-type in

accordance with UL 486A or UL 486C (twist-on splicing connector). Provide solderless

terminal lugs on stranded conductors. The use of wire nuts is not permitted.

G. Device Plates: Provide UL listed, one-piece device plates for outlets and fittings to suit the

devices installed. Plates on unfinished walls and on fitting shall be of zinc-coated sheet steel or

cast metal having round or beveled edges. Screws shall be machine type with countersunk

heads in a color to match the finish of the plate. The use of sectional type device plates shall

not be permitted. Plates installed in wet locations shall be gasketed and weather proof while in

use type.

2.15 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS)

A. 120/240 Panel Protection:

1. TVSS shall be listed in accordance with UL 1449 Second Edition to include Section 37.3

highest fault current category. SPD shall be UL 1283 listed.




IFB 154339


2. TVSS shall provide surge current diversion paths for all modes of protection; L-N and L-

G in WYE systems, and L-L, L-G in DELTA systems).

3. Each device shall be fused with a surge rated fuse and incorporate a thermal cutout

device.

4. A dedicated breaker shall be provided as a means of disconnect for TVSSs.

5. Minimum surge current capability (single pulse rated) per phase shall be:

a. 120/240 Protection Panel Application 80kA per phase.

b. UL 1449 Listed UL 1449 Listed Suppression Voltage Ratings for service entrance

shall not exceed the following:

1) VOLTAGE L-N L-G MCOV

240/120V 400 400 150V

6. TVSS shall have a warranty for a period of five years, incorporating unlimited

replacements of suppressor parts if they are destroyed by transients during the warranty

period.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature,

humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been

permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are installed, before

installation begins.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before

installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for

installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with

requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems."

1. Devices placed in service before all other trades have completed cleanup shall be

replaced.

2. Devices installed but not yet placed in service shall be protected from construction dust,

debris, dirt, moisture, and damage according to manufacturer's written storage

instructions.

B. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the

finished floor.

C. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes:




IFB 154339


1. Install manual fire-alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches of the exit

doorway.

2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on a background of a contrasting color.

3. The operable part of manual fire-alarm box shall be between 42 inches and 48 inches

above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise

indicated.

D. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:

1. Comply with the "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices"

chapter in NFPA 72, for smoke-detector spacing.

2. Comply with the "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices"

chapter in NFPA 72, for heat-detector spacing.

3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet.

4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high

ceiling areas shall be determined according to Annex A in NFPA 72.

5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 36 inches from air-supply diffuser or return-air

opening.

6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting

fixture and not directly above pendant mounted or indirect lighting.

E. Install a cover on each smoke detector that is not placed in service during construction. Cover

shall remain in place except during system testing. Remove cover prior to system turnover.

F. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they

extend the full width of duct. Tubes more than 36 inches long shall be supported at both ends.

1. Do not install smoke detector in duct smoke-detector housing during construction. Install

detector only during system testing and prior to system turnover.

G. Air-Sampling Smoke Detectors: If using multiple pipe runs, the runs shall be pneumatically

balanced.

H. Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location..

I. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install in a visible location near each smoke detector,

sprinkler water-flow switch, and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal

viewing position.

J. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells

and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind

a grille. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

K. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least

6 inches below the ceiling. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

L. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.




IFB 154339


3.3 PATHWAYS

A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in nonaccessible locations may be routed exposed.

1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inches above the floor shall be installed in EMT.

B. Pathways shall be installed in EMT.

C. Exposed EMT shall be painted red enamel in unfinished areas. In finished areas, EMT shall be

painted to match surrounding surfaces.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. General Requirements: Electrical installations shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 70

and to the requirements specified herein.

B. Wiring Methods: Wiring method shall be Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) except where

specifically indicated or specified otherwise. Where Electrical Metallic Tubing is indicated, it

shall be insulated conductors installed in conduit, or required by NFPA 70 to be installed

otherwise. A green insulated equipment grounding conductor shall be provided in all branch

circuits.

1. Aluminum Conduit: Do not use

2. Electrical Metallic Tubing-To be provided in basement, attic, concealed areas and risers

unless noted otherwise. Provide minimum ¾ inch trade size.

a. Do not use EMT in the following situations:

1) Use in feeder circuits

2) Install underground

3) Encase in concrete

4) Use in areas where subject to severe physical damage

5) Use in hazardous areas

6) Use in outdoor work

7) Use in sizes larger than 2 inches

3. Surface Metal Raceway – Provide where exposed.

4. Non-metallic Conduit: Do not use.

C. Metal Clad Cable Installation: The use of MC cable is permitted only for whip connections to

devices.

D. Conduit Installation: Unless indicated otherwise, conceal conduit within finished walls,

ceilings, and floors.

1. Contractor shall cut, channel, chase all walls and ceilings in order to conceal as required.

All patching, painting and refinishes shall be provided and performed by the appropriate

trade mechanics required and in accordance with these specifications. Keep conduit at




IFB 154339


least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install

conduit parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, and structural members where located

above accessible ceilings and where conduit will be visible after completion of project.

Any surface mounted conduit shall be mounted such that it is completely flush against the

mounting surface (i.e. no gap between wall, ceiling). Unless otherwise specified, no

conduit is to be surface mounted in finished areas.

E. Conduit Support: Support conduit by pipe straps, wall brackets, hangers, or ceiling trapeze.

Fasten by wood screws to wood; by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; by concrete inserts or

expansion bolts on concrete or brick; by machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-

tension clamps on steel work. Threaded C-clamps may be used on rigid steel conduit only. Do

not weld conduits or pipe straps to steel structures.

1. The load applied to fasteners shall not exceed one-fourth of the proof test load. Fasteners

attached to concrete ceiling shall be vibration and shock resistant. Holes cut to a depth of

more than 1 1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to a depth of more than 3/4 inch

in concrete joints shall not cut the main reinforcing bars. Fill holes that are not used. In

partitions of light steel construction, use sheet-metal screws.

2. In suspended-ceiling construction, support conduit above the ceiling to structure and not

ceiling supports.

3. Make changes in direction of runs with symmetrical bend or cast-metal fittings. Make

field-made bends and offsets with a hickey or conduit-bending machine. Do not install

crushed or deformed conduits. Avoid trapped conduits. Prevent plaster, dirt, or trash

from lodging in conduits, boxes, fittings, and equipment during construction. Free

clogged conduits of all obstructions.

4. Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where required by

NFPA 70, where insulated bushings are used, and where bushings cannot be brought into

firm contact with the box; otherwise, use at least a single locknut and bushing. Locknuts

shall be the type with sharp edges for digging into the wall of metal enclosures. Install

bushings on the ends of conduits and provide insulating type where required by NFPA

70.

5. Flexible connections of short length (maximum of 6 feet) shall be provided for equipment

subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Liquid-tight

flexible conduit shall be used in wet locations. A separate ground conductor shall be

provided across flexible connections.

6. Install pull wires in empty conduits in which wire is to be installed by others. The pull

wire shall be No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or plastic having not less than 200-pound

tensile strength. Leave not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire.

F. Fire Alarm System Conduits: Install in accordance with the previous requirements for conduit

and with the additional requirement that no length of run shall exceed 150 feet for trade sizes 2

inches and smaller and shall not contain more than four 90-degree bends or the equivalent.

Provide pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements. Inside radii

of bends in conduits one-inch trade size and larger shall be not less than two times the nominal

diameter. Terminate conduit in terminal cabinet control panels and pull boxes with two

locknuts and a plastic bushing. Provide ¾ inch minimum trade size conduit with red mylar

coating or provide two inch long red painted bands at five foot intervals along EMT.

G. Boxes, Outlets, and Supports: Provide boxes in the wiring or raceway systems wherever

required for pulling of wires, making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures.




IFB 154339


1. Boxes for metallic raceways shall be of the cast-metal hub type when located in normally

wet locations, when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces, when installed

exposed up to 7 feet above interior floors and walkways, and when installed in hazardous

areas. Boxes in other locations shall be sheet steel. Each box shall have the volume

required by NFPA 70 for the number of conductors enclosed in the box. Boxes for use in

masonry-block or tile walls shall be square-cornered tile-type, or standard boxes having

square-cornered tile-type covers.

2. Fasten boxes and supports with bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick, with

toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and with machine screws or welded studs on steel

work. Threaded studs (etc.) driven in by powder charge may not be used. Support sheet

metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. Where bar hangers

are used, attach the bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway

with an approved type of fastener not more than 24 inches from the box. When

penetrating reinforced-concrete members, avoid cutting any reinforcing steel.

3. Boxes for use with raceway systems shall not be less than 1 1/2 inches deep, except

where shallower boxes required by structural conditions are approved. Boxes shall be not

less than 4 inches square, except that 4 inch by 2 inch boxes may be used where only one

raceway enters the outlet.

H. Pull Boxes: Construct of not less than the minimum size required by NFPA 70 of code-gage

aluminum or galvanized sheet steel, except where cast-metal boxes are required in locations

specified above. Furnish boxes with screw-fastened covers. Where several feeders pass

through a common pull box, tag the feeders to indicate clearly the electrical characteristics,

circuit number, and panel designation.

1. Extension rings shall not be used on new boxes on concealed conduit systems.

I. Mounting Heights: Mount other devices as indicated unless otherwise specified. Unless noted

otherwise, measure mounting heights of wiring devices and outlets to the center of device or

outlet.

J. Conductor Identification: Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where a tap,

splice, or termination is made. For conductors No. 6 and smaller, color coding shall be by

factory-applied color-impregnated insulation. For conductors No. 4 and larger, color coding

shall be by plastic- coated self-sticking markers, colored nylon cable ties and plates, or heat-

shrink type sleeves. Identify control circuit terminations.

K. Splices: Make splices in accessible locations. Make splices in conductors No. 10 AWG and

smaller with an insulated pressure type connector. Make splices in conductors No. 8 AWG and

larger with a solderless connector and cover with an insulation material equivalent to the

conductor insulation.

L. Covers and Device Plates: Install with all four edges in continuous contact with finished wall

surfaces without the use of mats or similar devices. Plaster fillings will not be permitted. Plates

shall be installed with an alignment tolerance of 1/16 inch. The use of sectional type device

plates will not be permitted. Plates installed in wet locations shall be gasketed.

M. Grounding and Bonding: In accordance with NFPA 70. Ground all exposed non-current-

carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor

in nonmetallic raceways, and neutral conductor of wiring systems. Where ground fault

protection is employed, take care that the connection of ground and neutral does not interfere




IFB 154339


with the correct operation of the fault protection. Existing building grounding and bonding

systems shall be utilized where applicable and in compliance with these specifications.

N. Grounding Conductor: Provide an insulated, green-colored equipment grounding conductor in

all feeder and branch circuits. This conductor shall be separate from the electrical system

neutral conductor.

O. Resistance: The maximum resistance to ground of the grounding system shall not exceed 25

ohms under normally dry conditions. Where the resistance obtained exceeds 25 ohms, contact

the Owner for further instructions.

P. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and

systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches from the device controlled. Make an

addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system

being controlled.

1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated HVAC duct systems.

2. Magnetically held-open doors.

3. Electronically locked doors and access gates.

4. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components.

5. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.

6. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system.

7. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt-trip breaker.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals.

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

D. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system

documentation that is required by the "Completion Documents, Preparation" table

in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.




IFB 154339


b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section

of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the

"Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the

"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2

requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

5. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of

Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72

and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection,

Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

E. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

G. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly,

quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

H. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm

system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms

developed for initial tests and inspections.

3.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall

include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service

organization. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective

components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and

supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.

1. Include visual inspections according to the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the

"Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Perform tests in the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection,

Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Perform tests per the "Testing Frequencies" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the

"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3.8 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Comply with UL 864.

B. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include

software support for two years.




IFB 154339


C. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and

program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial

Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for

using software.

1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule access to system and to

upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.




IFB 154339

Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 311000-1 Alexandria, Virginia SITE CLEARING

SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING

PART I - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Protection of existing trees, vegetation and structures to remain.

2. Removal of trees and other vegetation.

3. Clearing and grubbing.

5. Disposal of trees, stumps, roots, debris, rubbish and other objects from the areas

to be cleared.

1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these

Specifications:

1. Section 024200 “Site Demolition and Removal”.

2. Section 311500 “Erosion and Sediment Control”.

1.4 REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS

A. All work shall comply with the laws and regulations of all federal, state and local

agencies having jurisdiction concerning burning, hauling and disposal of trees, stumps,

roots and debris. Nothing contained herein shall be construed as permitting work that is

contrary to such laws and regulations.

B. All work on public property shall conform to applicable laws and regulations of the

agency having jurisdiction, and shall be subject to the supervision and approval of that

agency.

C. The Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and comply with all regulations relative

to burning, hauling and disposal of clearing debris.

D. The Owner has obtained a permit from the Corps of Engineers for impacts to the

wetlands. The Contractor shall comply with all requirements of the permit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONSTRUCTION FENCE

A. Construction fence shall be minimum 48-inch high “international orange” polypropylene

or plastic webb fencing. Secure fence to steel T-post driven into the ground a minimum



IFB 154339


of 18 inches.

2.2 CAUTION TAPE

A. Tape shall be minimum 6 inches wide, 10 mil vinyl, caution tape. Tape shall be a highly

visible color (yellow or orange) and shall have a message on the tape indicating the

purpose.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL:

A. Traffic: Conduct site clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads,

streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct

streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities

having jurisdiction.

B. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protection necessary to prevent damage to

existing improvements indicated to remain in place. Protect improvements on adjoining

properties and on Owner's property. Restore damaged improvements to their original

conditions as acceptable to property owners.

C. Protection of Existing Trees and Vegetation: Protect existing trees and other vegetation

indicated to remain in place against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots,

skinning or bruising of bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or

excavated materials within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of

vehicles within drip line. Provide temporary construction fence or caution tape as

indicated or where needed to protect trees and vegetation to be left standing. Care should

be taken so that falling trees do not hit trees designated to remain. Removal of trees

within 15 feet of those to remain shall be by cutting and stump grinding, not pushing

over. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain which are damaged by

construction operations in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. Employ a licensed

arborist to repair damages to trees and shrubs. Replace trees which cannot be repaired

and restored to full-growth status as determined by arborist.

3.2 CLEARING

A. Contractor shall completely remove all trees, limbs, shrubs, grass, weeds and other

vegetation, rubbish, improvements, or obstructions protruding through the ground within

the limits of clearing as indicated. The limits of clearing as shown on the drawings are

approximate only. The Contractor is responsible for determining the minimum clearing

limits necessary for the Contractor to construct all improvements at no additional cost to

the Owner. Removal includes existing tree stumps and its roots. Cut roots and branches

of trees indicated to remain in a clean careful manner.

3.3 GRUBBING

A. Grubbing shall consist of the removal of stumps, roots larger than two inch diameter, and



IFB 154339


matted root systems. Removal shall be to a depth not less than 18 inches below original

ground level. Unless further excavation is required, depressions made by grubbing shall

be filled and compacted to the density of the surrounding soil such that the surface

conforms to contour of adjacent ground.

3.5 DISPOSAL

A. Burning is prohibited for this project.

B. Chipping of branches and small trees is permitted. Contact Owner to see if chips can be

utilized on-site or whether they shall be hauled away.




IFB 154339

Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 311500-1 Alexandria, Virginia EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

SECTION 311500 - EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL




B. Special Provisions for Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) in the Appendix,

apply to this Section. See Specification Section 303.03



Specifications:

1. Section 312000 “Earth Moving”.

2. Section 329200 “Turfs and Grasses”.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

N/A

PART 3 - EXECUTION

N/A




IFB 154339

Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 312000-1 Alexandria, Virginia EARTH MOVING

SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Earthwork as indicated and required to complete the project.

2. Topsoil stripping and stockpiling.

3. Excavation of footings for buildings, structures and other improvements.

4. Preparation of subgrade for building pads, walks, pavement, curbs and gutter,

curbs, concrete pads, and related work.

5. Trenching, bedding, and backfilling for water lines, fire line, roof drains, sanitary

sewers, yard drains, and storm sewers. This Section includes all such exterior

trench work to within 5 feet of exterior building walls and to the building

downspout rain leaders as indicated.

6. Measurement of earthwork quantities as required herein.

7. Site grading.

8. Fine grading and preparation of finish grade for topsoil.



Specifications:


2. Section 311000 “Site Clearing”.

3. Section 313116 “Termite Control”.

4. Section 329200 “Turfs and Grasses”.


A. All excavations, whether they be for utilities, drainage systems, building slabs, footing

excavations, or other requirements of the work, shall be constructed in accordance with

the United States Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration

(OSHA) amended "Construction Standards for Excavations," 29 CFR part 1926, subpart

P, as published in the Federal Register, Volume 54, No. 209.

B. All materials and work shall conform to the current applicable requirements of the

Virginia Department of Transportation (VDOT) "Road and Bridge Specifications" as

specified herein.


A. The Owner will employ the services of a Geotechnical Engineer and testing laboratory to



IFB 154339


provide soil testing and inspection services for quality control during earthwork

operations.

B. Special inspections are required by the Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code.

Refer to the specification section and the Special Inspection forms in Section 014533, for

the items to be testing and the specific requirements for each item. The independent

agency engaged by the Owner shall review the test procedures and inspections with the

structural engineer of record, the Contractor and the Owner prior to conducting tests and

inspections. The Contractor shall coordinate the scheduling of these tests with the

Owner’s independent testing agency and give a minimal of 48 hours advanced notice of

when testing is needed.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. The geotechnical engineering firm providing soil testing services will submit the

following reports, tests and field data directly to the Owner, Architect and Engineer with

a copy to the Contractor:

1. Test reports of on-site material and off-site borrow material used for fill/backfill.

2. Observation and approval of each building pad, footing, utility trench bottom and

pavement subgrade.

3. Field density test reports on fill, backfill and trench backfill.

4. One moisture density test (Standard Proctor Test - ASTM D698) for each type of

soil used for fill/backfill.

5. Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing tests

of each strata tested.

6. Verification and location of all unsuitable/unstable material.

7. Confirmation of all measurements of earthwork quantities including

unstable/unsuitable soil as required herein that qualify for payment under

allowances or a change order.

1.7 JOB CONDITIONS

A. The general character of the existing soils is indicated by the subsurface exploration data

in the Report of Subsurface Exploration and Geotechnical Engineering Analysis

contained herein and the boring logs found in the drawings. This report is for

information only and is not intended as a complete analysis of the project soil conditions.

The Owner does not warrant the accuracy or completeness of the report and will not be

held responsible for deviations or unrecorded conditions that may be found at the project

site. It is expressly understood that the Owner will not be responsible for interpretations

or conclusions drawn therefrom by the Contractor. Data is made available for the

convenience of the Contractor. Groundwater elevations indicated in the report were those

existing at the time subsurface investigations were made and do not necessarily represent

the groundwater elevation within the project limits at the time of construction. Should the

data contained in the report not be adequate for the Contractor's purposes, the Contractor

may make, before bidding, at his own expense, tests and analyses.

B. The on-site soils are sensitive to disturbance by excessive moisture and construction

traffic. Earthwork operations conducted when soils are wet may be difficult and time

consuming. Contractor shall take this in consideration in planning his work schedule and



IFB 154339


in preparing his bid price. No extras will be allowed for drying materials or difficulties in

conducting earthwork operation caused by failure of the Contractor to properly plan the

work and to protect the soils from saturation by rain and ground water.

C. Existing Utilities

1. The locations of existing utilities across or along the line of the proposed work

are not necessarily as shown on the plans, and where shown, are only

approximately correct. The Contractor shall on his own initiative and at no extra

cost, locate all underground lines and structures prior to commencing

construction. No claims for damages or extra compensation shall be charged to

the Owner by the Contractor for the presence of such utilities or other

obstructions or from any delay due to removal or rearrangement of same.

Contractor shall be responsible for any damage caused to existing utilities,

structures or pipe.

2. The Contractor shall contact "Miss Utility" or an independent utility location

service and make all arrangements for the location of all underground utilities

including those that may not be shown on the plans.

3. Should charted, uncharted, or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be

encountered during excavation, consult Architect immediately for directions.

Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and

facilities in operation. Repair any damaged utilities to the satisfaction of utility

owner.

4. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by Owner

or others during occupied hours, except when permitted in writing by Owner and

then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided.

5. Provide minimum 48-hour notice to Owner and receive notice to proceed before

interrupting any utility.

6. Contractor shall notify and coordinate with the proper utility companies (power,

telephone, cable, gas or other utilities) concerning relocation and/or removal of

aboveground and buried utility lines and poles prior to any earthwork operations.

1.8 USE OF EXPLOSIVES

A. Do not bring explosives onto site or use in work without prior written permission from

the Owner. The Contractor is solely responsible for handling, storage, and use of

explosive materials when their use is permitted.

1.9 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

A. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights.

B. Operate warning lights as required by VDOT when applicable.

C. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities to remain from

damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards

created by earthwork operations.

D. Perform excavation within drip-line of large trees that are to remain by hand, and protect

the root system from damage or dryout to the greatest extent possible. Maintain moist



IFB 154339


condition for root system and cover exposed roots with burlap. Paint root cuts of 1"

diameter and larger with emulsified asphalt tree paint.

1.10 DEFINITIONS

A. Earth Excavation

1. Earth excavation shall include the removal of all material encountered to

subgrade elevation indicated and subsequent disposal or reuse of material

excavated.

B. Unsuitable Material

1. Excavated soil material which cannot be compacted to the densities specified and

is not usable for its intended purpose as backfill under structures, pavement,

walks or in utility trenches. Excessive moisture content alone shall not classify a

material as unsuitable.

C. Unstable Material

1. Soil material encountered at subgrade elevation or in the bottom of a utility

trench that is either wet, lacks firmness or is otherwise incapable of properly

supporting the structure or pipe.

D. Unclassified Excavation

1. Unclassified excavation shall be any and all materials encountered.

E. Structural Fill

1. Structural fill shall be satisfactory soils or select material used for filling or

backfilling for footings, under building slabs, structures, walks, pavement and

curbs, and other structural improvements as indicated.

F. Undercut

1. Material below subgrade that has to be removed in order to achieve a suitable

subgrade.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory soils used for structural fill shall comply with ASTM D2487 soil

classification groups GW, GP, GM, GC, SW, SP, SM, SC, ML or CL and have a

maximum ASTM D4318 liquid limit (LL) of 40. Soils shall be non-organic, free of clay,

gravel or rocks larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials,

vegetable and other deleterious matter. In situ soils meeting the requirements above are

acceptable for use as structural fill.

B. Unsatisfactory soils shall comply with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups OL, OH

and PT. Groups MH and CH are generally considered unsatisfactory unless approved by

the Geotechnical Engineer.



IFB 154339


C. Select material shall be clean sand, VDOT size no. 10 screenings or satisfactory soil

materials.

D. Topsoil shall be topsoil material stripped from the project site that is friable clay loam

soil, well-drained, reasonably free of subsoil clay lumps, stones, and other objects over

3/4 inch in any dimension and without weeds, roots and other material detrimental to

plant growth.

E. Off-site borrow soils shall comply with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, GP,

GM, GC, SW, SP, SM, SC and have a maximum 35% by weight passing the ASTM

D1140 No. 200 sieve and free of organics and debris. Maximum aggregate size shall be

limited to 4 inches.

2.2 COARSE AGGREGATE

A. Coarse aggregate (porous fill) shall be VDOT Size No. 57, open graded coarse aggregate

as indicated unless noted otherwise and shall conform to the requirements of VDOT

Section 203.

2.3 SAND

A. Sand shall be clean, Grading A, fine aggregate conforming to the requirements of VDOT

Section 202.

2.4 AGGREGATE BASE

A. Aggregate base material shall be VDOT Type 1, Size 21-A.

2.5 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC (STABILIZATION)

A. Geotextile fabric used for subgrade improvement shall be woven or non-woven

polypropylene fabric or geogrid designed specifically for stabilization of subgrade soils.

Material shall be resistant to deterioration from ultraviolet and heat exposure.

B. Fabric shall have the following physical requirements:

1. Minimum average grab tensile strength shall be 250 pounds in accordance with

ASTM D4632.

2. Minimum average mullen burst strength shall be 500 psi in accordance with

ASTM D3786.

3. Minimum average puncture resistance strength shall be 110 pounds in

accordance with ASTM D4833.

4. Apparent opening size (A.O.S.) shall be greater than or equal to U.S. Standard

Sieve No. 40 in accordance with ASTM D4751.

5. Minimum average flow rate shall be 4 gal/min/ft2 in accordance with ASTM

D4491.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



IFB 154339


3.1 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Strip existing topsoil and all organic material to whatever depth encountered from all

areas to be graded, seeded and landscaped, where contours are to change, and where

pavement and other construction is to take place. Topsoils depths are as shown in the

boring logs.

B. Strip topsoil in such manner as to prevent intermingling with the underlying subsoil or

other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before

stripping.

C. Where trees are indicated to be left standing, stop topsoil stripping a sufficient distance

from such trees to prevent damage to the main root system.

D. Strip topsoil to the proposed 5-foot expanded building footprint and the 2-foot expanded

paving limits.

E. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas as indicated. Construct stock piles to freely

drain surface water. Cover stockpiles if required to prevent windblown dust and water

erosion. Do not permit topsoil to be placed, stored or to slough off onto any tree root

system. Stockpile slope shall be no steeper than 2:1. Stockpile sufficient topsoil for

placement in all areas to be seeded. Excess topsoil shall be removed from the site by the

Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall provide additional

topsoil as required from his own off-site source at no additional cost to the Owner to meet

the requirements of topsoil depth as outlined in Section 329200 “Turfs and Grasses”.

3.2 PROOFROLLING

A. Proofroll the exposed subgrade soil in the presence of the Geotechnical Engineer after

topsoil stripping and prior to filling. Proofroll with a minimum 10 ton loaded four-

wheeled rubber-tired dump truck or a 5 ton drum roller. Remove any unsuitable/unstable

soils encountered to depths as recommended by the Geotechnical Engineer and directed

by the Owner and backfill as noted herein. Do not proofroll in wet or inclement weather.

Proofrolling should be performed on subgrades free of surface water (wet conditions

resulting from rainfall) which would promote degradation on otherwise unacceptable

subgrades.

B. Under pavement and other structures, after topsoil stripping in fill areas and excavating to

subgrade in cut areas, proofroll the exposed subgrade and remove any unstable/unsuitable

materials to depths as recommended by the Geotechnical Engineer and directed by the

Owner. Backfill undercut areas with compacted satisfactory soil material or select

material as approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. When proofrolling for buildings,

structures or pavement, the subgrade shall be considered to be 5 feet beyond the building

line or 2 feet beyond the pavement limits.

C. Any adjustment in the Contract Price due to removal below subgrade of

unstable/unsatisfactory soils and backfilling with satisfactory soil or select material shall

be determined based on field measurements made by the Contractor and confirmed by the

Geotechnical Engineer and in accordance with the unit prices or allowances stated in the



IFB 154339


bid form.

3.3 EXCAVATION

A. General

1. Excavate to the contours, elevations, subgrade depths and dimensions indicated.

Reuse excavated materials to the extent possible that meet the specified soil

requirements for the soil type required at the intended location. All excavation

shall be unclassified and shall include all material encountered.

2. Proofroll existing subgrade as required in the "Proofrolling" paragraph herein.

B. Stability of Excavations:

1. Stabilize and construct all excavations, including but not limited to utility

trenches, basements and footings, in accordance with OSHA. Provide shoring,

sheeting and bracing or other effective means when specifications, possible cave-

in of excavation, space limitations, proximity to other improvements or damage

to existing structures preclude sloping of the sides of excavations. Maintain sides

and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling.

2. Where shoring, sheeting and bracing is used, remove as the excavations are

backfilled. Care shall be exercised to prevent injurious caving during the removal

of the shoring and/or sheeting. Where damage to the structure, pavement, walk

or adjacent property is likely to result by removing the sheeting, or when directed

by the Architect, the sheeting shall be left in place. Sheeting and shoring left in

place shall be cut off to a depth of not less than 2 feet below finished grade.

D. Dewatering:

1. Prevent surface, subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavation and

from flooding project site and surrounding area.

2. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent

softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes

detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain

sumps pumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system

components necessary to convey water away from excavations.

3. Effluent from dewatering operations shall be filtered or passed through an

approved sediment trapping device, or bother, and discharged in a manner that

does not adversely affect flowing streams of off-site property.

4. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside

excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to

collecting or run-off areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage

ditches.

5. When rain is forecasted or begins during the work day, seal excavations in

progress by rolling prior to leaving the site. Seal excavations in progress at the

end of the work week.

6. Adequate pumps or other positive dewatering methods shall be provided and

maintained as necessary to prevent the accumulation of water in the utility

trenches until the backfill is placed to a minimum depth of 24 inches above the

pipe. The Contractor shall not open more trench in advance of pipe laying than

available pumping facilities are able to keep dewatered.



IFB 154339


E. Material Storage:

1. Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed or indicated until

required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper

drainage. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do

not stockpile within drip line of trees that are indicated to remain. Slopes of

stockpiles shall not be steeper than 2 to 1.

F. Excavation for Structures:

1. The excavations for footings and foundations shall be true to lines and grades and

to the elevations indicated. Backfill for footings shall be compacted as herein

specified. Where forms are not used, footing and foundation trenches shall be

excavated to the depth and width sizes indicated. Excavation for strip-type

footings shall be to neat lines, and concrete may be deposited directly against

these neat, excavated surfaces without forms, provided the Contractor maintains

such excavated surfaces to the exact dimensions of the footings; otherwise, the

Contractor shall extend the excavation for footings a sufficient distance from the

sides of footings to allow for the placing and removal of forms. All other

excavations shall be of sufficient width for properly building and inspecting the

structure they are to contain and for such sheeting, shoring, plumbing, and

drainage as may be necessary.

2. Additional Excavation: When soil nature is such that good bearing cannot be

found at subgrade elevations indicated, the Architect may decide that additional

excavation to good bearing soil is necessary. Should the Architect so decide, it

will be ordered in writing. Such additional excavation, based upon work required

between indicated grades and authorized lower grades, will be paid for at the unit

prices stated in the bid form for removal of unstable/unsuitable material and

backfilling.

3. Unauthorized Excavation: Where unauthorized excavation takes place beyond

indicated grades, the Contractor shall backfill to the indicated subgrade with

coarse aggregate - VDOT Size No. 57 or select material as chosen by the

Architect at no extra cost to the Owner. Under footings, concrete shall be used

for backfilling.

G. Excavation for Pavements:

1. Excavate subgrade under pavements, curb and gutter, walks and slabs to comply

with cross-sections, elevations and grades as indicated. Proofroll subgrade as

specified herein, removing unsuitable/unstable material and backfilling with

select materials or satisfactory soil materials compacted as specified herein.

Subgrades shall be completed in accordance with the requirements of VDOT

Sections 305, 502 and 504 as applicable.

H. Excavation for Utility Trenches:

1. General

a. Unless specified in other Sections, trench excavation, bedding and

backfill shall be as specified herein.

b. All excavation of every description and of whatever substances

encountered shall be performed to the lines and grades indicated or as

specified. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling shall be

piled in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from the banks of the



IFB 154339


trench to avoid overloading and to prevent slides or cave-ins. Material

shall be protected from inclement weather for reuse as suitable backfill.

All excavated materials not required or unsuitable for backfill may be

used in other grading operations to the extent possible. If unable to be

used elsewhere on site, the Contractor shall remove from site and

properly dispose of same at no additional cost to the Owner. Excavation

shall be done as necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into

trenches or other excavations, and trenches shall be kept free from water

by pumping or by other approved methods while construction therein is

in progress.

2. Trenching

a. Trenches shall be excavated with the side walls as nearly vertical as

practicable except where the sloping of side walls are required for safety

or required by Local, State or Federal codes and ordinances. The width

of the trench from the bottom of the trench to a minimum of two feet

above the crown of the pipe shall not exceed 36 inches for pipe 12 inches

or less in diameter. The width of the trench from the bottom of the

trench to a minimum of two feet above the crown of the pipe shall not

exceed the outside diameter of the pipe plus 18 inches for pipe 15 inches

and greater in diameter.

b. Whenever unstable material is encountered in the bottom of the trench,

such material shall be overexcavated to a depth of 6 inches or deeper, as

recommended by the Geotechnical Engineer and approved by the Owner,

to allow for construction of a stable pipe bedding. The trench shall then

be backfilled to the proper trench elevation with coarse aggregate VDOT

Size No. 57. Payment for removal of unstable material and backfilling

with coarse aggregate - VDOT Size No. 57 shall be paid for at the unit

prices stated in the bid form.

3. Trenching, Bedding and Backfill for Gravity PVC and HDPE Pipe

a. Trench excavation, bedding and backfill shall be performed in

accordance with the requirements of ASTM D2321. Special care shall

be exercised to prevent movement of the pipe or creation of voids in the

backfill when moving trench boxes or removing sheeting. Sheeting must

be pulled progressively with backfill until the backfill is at least 2 feet

above the crown of the pipe.

b. Bed and backfill to the crown of the pipe with coarse aggregate - VDOT

Size No. 57 or clean sand in accordance with the requirements of ASTM

D2321. The stone backfill shall be carefully and completely hand

tamped to provide full support under the pipe, around the pipe and to the

crown of the pipe. Compaction of the final backfill above the crushed

stone shall be to 95 percent of maximum density at optimum moisture

content when tested in accordance with ASTM D698.

c. Environmental Factors. Temperature and weather conditions are more

critical when installing PVC and HDPE pipe. Pipe ends must be dry

when making solvent weld joints and primer and solvent compounds

shall not be allowed to stand in opened containers longer than the

manufacturer's stated "pot life." In cold weather, the pipe can become

brittle and shall be handled with care in the same manner as other rigid

pipe materials.



IFB 154339


4. Water Lines

a. Pipe shall be bedded on undisturbed earth unless indicated otherwise.

Machine excavation shall be stopped at least 2 inches above the final

trench bottom elevation and the final excavation shall be by hand to

insure accurate shaping of the trench and full support along the bottom of

the pipe.

I. Unsuitable Fill or Backfill Material

1. Excavated material which is unsuitable for backfill under pavement, structures or

in utility trenches shall be removed from the site. All other unsuitable material

and excess excavation shall be removed from the site at no additional cost to the

Owner.

3.4 FILLING AND BACKFILLING

A. General

1. All soils used for fill and backfill shall be excavated on-site soils meeting the

requirements of paragraph 2.1.A to the extent available within the limits of

construction or grading. The Contractor shall furnish any additional soil required

to complete the project and meet the finish grades from his own off-site source at

no additional cost to the Owner.

2. Contractor shall furnish a sample of each type of soil material from the off-site

source he intends to use a minimum of five working days prior to placement for

testing and approval by the Geotechnical Engineer.

3. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the

following:

a. Acceptance of construction below finished grade.

b. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground

utilities.

c. Removal of concrete formwork.

d. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with

satisfactory materials. Cut off temporary sheet piling driven below

bottom of structures and remove in manner to prevent settlement of the

structure or utilities, or leave in place if required.

e. Removal of trash and debris.

f. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally

supported walls.

4. Ground Surface Preparation

a. Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions,

and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills.

Plow, strip, or break-up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 5

horizontal so that fill material will bond with existing surface. Where fill

is placed against existing slopes steeper than 4:1, bench the existing

slope as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer.

b. Proofroll subgrade, remove soft material and backfill with compacted

satisfactory soil materials. Any depression caused by the removal of

stumps or the clearing operation shall be excavated to firm subgrade.

c. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under

"Compaction" for a particular area classification, break up the ground



IFB 154339


surface, pulverize the soil material and compact to required depth and

percentage of maximum density.

5. Placement and Compaction

a. Place backfill and fill materials in horizontal layers with a maximum

loose thickness of 8 inches for material compacted by self-propelled

compaction equipment, and not more than 6 inches in loose thickness for

material compacted by hand-operated compaction equipment.

Compaction by jetting or flooding is not permitted.

b. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide

a moisture content that is within the range of plus or minus 3 percent of

optimum moisture. Compact each layer to required percentage of

maximum dry density for each area classification. Do not place backfill

or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice

or when temperatures are below freezing.

c. Evenly place backfill and fill materials adjacent to structures, piping and

conduit to required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of

backfill against structures or displacement of piping or conduit by

carrying material uniformly around structure, piping or conduit to

approximately same elevation in each lift.

B. Filling and Backfilling Under Building Pads and Structures

1. Before placing backfill, remove all forms and debris. Place satisfactory soil in

horizontal loose thickness not exceeding 8 inches and thoroughly compact as

specified herein with approved power tamping equipment suitable for the type of

material used. Moisture content of soil when placed shall be in the proper range

for compaction. Place fill to within 5 feet outside the building or structure walls.

2. No backfill shall be placed against foundations or foundation walls until they

have acquired sufficient strength or are adequately braced. Fill and backfill,

when placed on each side of walls and free-standing structures, shall be deposited

on both sides of walls, at the same time to approximately the same elevations.

Proper provisions shall be made to prevent any wedging action against the walls

or structures, and as necessary, slopes within the areas to be filled or backfill

shall be stepped to prevent such wedge action.

3. Provide coarse aggregate - VDOT Size No. 57 drainage layer under buildings as

indicated on the structural drawings.

C. Filling and Backfilling Under Grassed Areas

1. Under grassed and unpaved areas, use soils free of organic material, roots, loam,

trash, wood and other objectionable material.

D. Filling and Backfilling Under Pavement, Walks, Curb and Gutter

1. Under pavement base material, concrete pads, walks, and curb and gutter use

satisfactory soils except for trench backfill as specified herein.

E. Bedding and Backfilling of Utility Trenches

1. Pipe Bedding

a. All water lines and sanitary sewer force mains shall be fully bedded on

in-situ material in the trench bottom cutting out for bells at joints. Shape

bottom of trench to fit pipe barrel.



IFB 154339


b. All gravity sanitary sewer and storm sewer lines, shall be bedded on a

minimum of 4 inches of coarse aggregate VDOT Size No. 57 or 68.

2. Backfilling

a. Backfill by hand around and over pipe using soils free from stones and

debris to a depth of one foot over the pipe and compact in layers not

exceeding six inches in thickness. Compact the remainder of the trench

thoroughly with hand-operated compaction equipment to a dry density at

least 95% of ASTM D698. Backfilling shall follow installation of pipe

as closely as possible, and no more than 300 feet of completed work shall

be left uncovered at any time. All pipe must be covered at the end of the

day. Backfilling of PVC or HDPE shall be as described above to the

crown of the pipe.

b. Backfill of trenches cut through existing pavement or concrete walks

shall be coarse aggregate - VDOT Size No. 21A placed and compacted

in 6 inch layers for the full depth of the trench as specified herein.

Backfill under pavement shall be brought to the elevation of the base

course. Coarse aggregate - VDOT Size No. 21A backfill shall be

included the Base Bid.

F. Compaction

1. General

a. Control soil compaction during construction providing the minimum

percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated

below. Compaction shall occur when moisture content is within a range

of plus or minus 3 percent of optimum moisture content. Compaction by

jetting or flooding is not permitted.

2. Structures, Building Pads, Ramps and Steps (Structural Fill)

a. Compact each layer of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material

to 95% of maximum dry density as determined in accordance with

ASTM D698 extending 5 feet beyond the exterior building or structure

walls and foundations. All fill and backfill of utility trenches under the

building pads and structure shall be compacted to the same standard.

3. Walks, Pavement, Curb and Gutter and Concrete Pads

a. Compact each layer of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material

to 95% of maximum dry density as determined in accordance with

ASTM D698 extending to 2 feet beyond the pavement.

4. Grassed, Unpaved Areas and Lawns

a. Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill

material to 90% maximum dry density as determined in accordance with

ASTM D698.

5. Moisture Control

a. Where subgrade or layer of fill/backfill material must be moisture

conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of

subgrade, or layer of soil material. Apply water in manner to prevent

free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction

operations.

6. Remove, replace, or scarify and air dry soil material that is too wet to permit

compaction to specified density. Soil material that has been removed because it

is too wet to permit compaction shall be spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying



IFB 154339


by discing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a

satisfactory value at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.5 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC

A. Place geotextile fabric as indicated. Install in accordance with manufacturers

recommendations and instructions.

3.6 GRADING

A. Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading, including adjacent transition areas,

construction storage and laydown areas and areas of construction traffic. Smooth

finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes

between points where elevations are indicated, or between such points and existing

grades. Make changes in slopes with smooth curves and transitions. Provide positive

drainage away from construction areas, finished pavements and foundations to prevent

soaking of subgrade soils.

B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away

from structure and prevent ponding.

C. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follows:

1. Grassed Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 0.15 foot

above or below required subgrade elevations. Allow for 4 - 6 inches of topsoil.

2. Pavement, Walks and Curbing: Shape surface of areas under pavement, walks

and running track to line, grade and cross-section as indicated, with finish surface

not more than 0.05 foot above or below required subgrade elevation.

3. Building Pad: Finish elevation to not more than 0.02 foot above or below

required subgrade elevation.

D. Contractor shall obtain written approval from the Engineer prior to making any

adjustment in grade which will exceed 4 inches. All such work shall be performed at no

change in contract amount.

E. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and percentage of

maximum dry density for each area classification as specified herein.

F. Verification of Subgrade: After completion of grading and compaction of subgrade, and

prior to placing topsoil, the Contractor shall call for an inspection of the subgrade by the

Owner and Architect. The Owner/Architect may, after inspecting the grading, require the

Contractor to provide a survey of the subgrade to confirm that the elevations have been

met. This survey shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.7 BUILDING PAD

A. Subgrades for building slabs shall be constructed as specified herein. Immediately on top

of the subgrade material there shall be placed a layer of coarse aggregate - VDOT Size

No. 57 under all floor slabs to the depth indicated. Install termite treatment as outlined in

Section 313116 “Termite Control”.



IFB 154339


B. Prior to placing the layer of crushed stone under slabs and after all foundation excavation,

utility trenches, pits and other required excavations have been backfilled, the compaction

shall be tested in all areas within the building lines and any soft area shall be removed,

replaced and recompacted so that the entire area will have a uniform soil density as

specified herein.

3.8 QUALITY CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow Geotechnical Engineer to inspect

and approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed.

B. Under Buildings and Paved Areas: Geotechnical Engineer shall observe proofrolling of

the subgrade as specified herein. In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test

for every 2,500 sq. ft. of building or 5,000 sq. ft. of paved area, but in no case less than 2

tests per lift.

C. Responsibilities of Geotechnical Engineer

1. Certification of subgrade preparation and suitability.

2. Moisture content and field density tests on all layers of material placed.

3. Certification of degree of compaction attained in material placed.

4. Verification of subgrade capacity.

5. Approval of all materials used for fill and backfill.

6. Confirming quantities of soil material when an adjustment of contract price will

be based upon such quantities.

D. Footing Subgrade: Verification and approval of each footing subgrade may be based on a

visual comparison of each subgrade with related tested strata, when acceptable to the

Geotechnical Engineer.

E. Foundation Wall Backfill: Geotechnical Engineer shall take at least 1 field density test

for each 2 feet of backfill depth and for each 100 linear feet of wall horizontally.

F. Field density testing of trench backfill shall be performed at a rate of no less than one test

per 50 linear feet of trench, but no less than 1 test per lift.

G. If, in opinion of the Architect, based on testing service reports and inspection, the

subgrade, backfills or fills which have been placed by the Contractor are below the

specified density, the Contractor shall provide additional compaction and testing at no

additional expense to the Owner.

H. The Geotechnical Engineer shall inspect and test construction of embankments, fills,

backfills, and subgrades and certify to the Owner conformance relating to specification

requirements.

I. Scheduling

1. Geotechnical Engineer shall be on site at all times when earthwork operations are

scheduled. No earthwork will be permitted in his absence. It is the Contractor’s

responsibility to schedule the geotechnical engineer. 48 hours notice is required.



IFB 154339


J. Results of Tests

1. Make test results available to the Engineer, Architect, Contractor, and Owner

immediately upon completion.

3.9 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS MATERIAL

A. Excess soil material, topsoil, strippings, unsuitable soils, and waste soil materials from

site excavation and grading not used as specified herein shall be removed from the site

and disposed of by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Remove trash and debris from site.

3.10 MAINTENANCE

A. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep

free of trash and debris. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas

to specified tolerances.

B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by

subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, re-shape, and

compact to required density prior to further construction.

C. Settling: Where settling is measurable or observable in excavated areas during general

project warranty period, remove surface (pavement, lawn or other finish), add backfill

material, compact, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and

condition of surface or finish to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of

restoration to greatest extent possible.




IFB 154339

Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 312200-1 Alexandria, Virginia SITE DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL

SECTION 312200 - SITE DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and subsequent offsite disposal of existing asphalt and/or concrete pavement,

concrete and/or asphalt walks and steps, concrete drainage structures, curbs, landscaping,

and other exterior site items indicated or not indicated which interfere with new

construction.

2. Removal and disposal of existing sanitary manhole.

3. Removal and disposal of existing utility and light poles and lines.

4. Demolition of the building is not a part of the site demolition. Refer to the structure

demolition specification section.


A. The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these Specifications:

1. Section 311000 - Site Clearing

2. Section 311500 - Erosion and Sediment Control


A. All work shall comply with federal, state and local laws and regulations concerning hauling

and disposal of demolition debris.

B. Erosion control measures shall conform to the requirements of Section 311500, "Erosion and

Sediment Control".

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the proper agencies at the start of work and

obtaining all necessary permits for this work.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished.

Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner

insofar as practicable. However, minor variations may occur by Owner's removal and salvage

operations prior to start of demolition work.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for locating all existing underground utilities in the area of

work whether they are or are not shown on the drawings. If utilities are to remain in place,

provide adequate means of support and protection during demolition operations. Call "Miss

Utility" prior to any demolition for assistance in underground utility location.



IFB 154339


C. Should charted, uncharted, or incorrectly charted utilities be encountered during demolition,

contact the Architect immediately for directions. Cooperate with owner and utility companies

to keep respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to the

satisfaction of the utility owner.

D. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by Owner or others

during occupied hours, except when permitted in writing by Owner and then only after

acceptable temporary utility services have been provided.

E. Provide minimum 48-hour notice to Owner and receive notice to proceed before interrupting

any utility.

F. Comply with all governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection during

demolition.

G. The Contractor shall notify and coordinate with the proper utility companies (power, gas,

telephone and cable) concerning relocation and/or removal of aboveground utility lines and

poles prior to any demolition work.

1.6 USE OF EXPLOSIVES

A. Do not bring explosives onto site or use in work without prior written permission from

authorities having jurisdiction. Contractor is solely responsible for handling, storage, and use

of explosive material when their use is permitted.

1.7 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

A. Barricade areas of demolition occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights.

B. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Protect structures, buildings, utilities, walks, pavements, existing vegetation and other facilities

to remain from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and

other hazards created by demolition operations.

1.8 BURNING

A. Burning of demolition material or debris will not be permitted on the job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not applicable

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DEMOLITION OF EXISTING FACILITIES



IFB 154339


A. Utilities

1. Remove existing utilities as indicated and terminate in a manner conforming to the

nationally recognized code covering the specific utility and local jurisdictional codes.

B. Asphalt Pavement

1. Remove asphalt concrete pavement by saw-cutting to the full depth of the pavement.

Provide neat saw-cuts at limits of pavement removal indicated.

C. Concrete Pavement or Walks

1. Remove concrete pavement and walk to nearest joint if possible. Use saw-cutting

method if there are not joints in the concrete. Saw-cut concrete along straight lines to a

depth of not less than 2 inches. Break out remainder of concrete provided that the broken

area is concealed in the finished work, and the remaining concrete is sound. At locations

where the broken face cannot be concealed, grind smooth or saw-cut entirely through

concrete.

3.3 FILLING

A. Fill holes, open basements, utility trenches and other hazardous openings in accordance with

Section 312000 "Earthwork." Provide fill consisting of select material, sand, crushed stone or

others soil material as indicated free of trash or debris, roots or other organic matter.

3.4 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Remove from project site debris, rubbish, and other material resulting from demolition

operations. Transport and legally dispose off site.

B. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable

regulations, laws and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection against

exposure or environmental pollution.

3.5 CLEANUP AND REPAIR

A. Upon completion of demolition work, remove all tools, equipment, and demolition materials

from site. Remove work area protection and leave interior areas clean.

B. Repair any demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of construction

and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to the start of construction. Repair adjacent

construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by demolition work.


beth.rappaport

Typewritten Text

beth.rappaport

Typewritten Text



IFB 154339

Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 313116-1 Alexandria, Virginia TERMITE CONTROL

SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Provide soil treatment for subterranean termite prevention of areas scheduled for

new building construction.

2. Extent of soil treatment includes all areas to be covered by concrete slabs on

grade under and immediately adjacent to the building, crawl spaces and material

adjacent to the exterior sides of walls.

3. Provide warranty and extended warranty.


A. Comply with all applicable local, state and federal pesticide regulations in the project's

location.

B. In addition to the requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's

instructions and recommendations for work, including preparation of substrate and

application.

C. Engage a professional pest control operator who is licensed by the Commonwealth of

Virginia for application of termiticide products.

1.4 WARRANTY AND EXTENDED WARRANTY

A. Product Warranty

1. Furnish a written warranty from the pest control company certifying that applied

soil poisoning treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites and

that, if subterranean termite activity is discovered during the warranty period, the

pest control company will re-treat soil to control such infestation and repair or

replace damage caused by termite infestation at no additional cost to the Owner.

2. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of substantial completion.

B. Extended Warranty (Annual Renewal Option)

1. An optional extended warranty shall be offered to the Owner which would be in

effect after the end of the warranty period.

2. Extended warranty shall include:

a. Not less than annual reinspection.

b. Retreatment of affected areas where active or previous infestation is

discovered.

c. An annual renewal fee and the number of years for which the renewal fee



IFB 154339


will remain fixed.

C. Correction during the period in which the warranty or the extended warranty is in force

shall include not less than the following:

1. Retreatment of areas in which evidence of infestation is discovered.

2. Repairing, patching, removing, and reinstalling of building materials and soil

materials when necessary to facilitate retreatment following infestation.

3. Restoration, repair, or replacement of building materials (including permanent

fixtures) that become damaged by subterranean termites.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following certificates of compliance for materials/products in accordance with

the General Conditions and Division I Specification Sections:

1. Termite control product to include EPA registered label

2. Application instructions

3. Application report after work is completed

4. Warranty

5. Extended Warranty

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TERMITICIDE SOLUTION

A. Solution shall be approved and registered by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

and state and local authorities for use as a termiticide under conditions of use prevailing

at the project site.

B. Use an emulsible concentrated insecticide for dilution with water, specifically formulated

to prevent infestation by termites. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a dilutant. Provide a

solution consisting of one of the following active ingredients chemicals and

concentrations:

1. Aventis Environmental Science USA LP; Termidor.

2. Bayer Corporation; Premise 75.

3. Dow AgroSciences LLC; Dursban TC.

4. FMC Corporation, Agricultural Products Group; Talstar.

5. Syngenta; Demon TC.

C. Other solutions may be used as recommended by the Applicator if approved for the

intended application by the jurisdictional authorities. Use only soil treatment solutions

which are not injurious to planting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Do not apply soil treatment solution until all excavating, filling and grading operations



IFB 154339


are completed, except as otherwise required in construction operations.

B. To insure penetration, do not apply soil treatment solution to frozen or excessively wet

soils or during inclement weather. Comply with handling and application instructions of

the soil treatment solution manufacturer.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter which could decrease effectiveness of

treatment on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except

previously compacted areas under slabs and foundations. Solution may be applied before

placement of compacted fill under slabs if recommended by toxicant manufacturer.

B. Under slab-on-grade structures, treat soil before concrete slabs are placed using either

power sprayer or tank-type garden sprayer at the following rates of application:

1. Apply recommended concentration of termiticide to soil in critical areas under

slab, including entire inside perimeter inside of foundation walls, along both

sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit

penetrating slab, and around interior column footers.

2. Apply recommended concentration of termiticide as an overall treatment under

slab and attached slab areas where fill is soil or unwashed gravel. Apply extra

doses to areas where fill is washed gravel or other coarse absorbent material.

3. Apply recommended concentration of termiticide from grade to footing, along

outside edge of building. Dig a trench 6" to 8" wide along outside of foundation

to a depth of not less than 12". Punch holes to top of footing at not more than

12" o.c. and apply solution. Mix solution with the soil as it is being replaced in

trench.

C. Under crawl space and basement structures, treat soil along exterior and interior walls of

foundations with shallow footings as specified above for the exterior of slab-on-grade

structures.

D. Treat soil under or around crawl-space structures at the following rates of application:

1. Apply recommended concentration of termiticide of trench along inside of

foundation walls, along both sides of interior partitions, and around piers and

plumbing. Do not apply an overall treatment in crawl space.

2. Apply recommended concentration of termiticide of trench for each foot of depth

from grade to footing along outside of foundation walls, including part beneath

entrance platform porches, etc.

3. Apply recommended concentration of termiticide along the inside and outside of

foundation walls of porches.

4. Apply recommended concentration of termiticide of soil surface as an overall

treatment, only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or

ground.

E. At hollow masonry foundations or grade beams, treat voids by pouring solution directly

into the hollow spaces.

F. At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated, apply at



IFB 154339


recommended rate.

G. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil termiticide treatment has been

applied. Remove signs when areas are covered by other construction.

H. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, landscape

grading, or other construction activities following application.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Do not allow contamination of surfaces not intended to be treated. Follow manufacturer's

instructions to completely remove solution from surface should contamination occur.

B. Remove from beneath the structure any cellulosic material, wood that is not pressure-

preservative treated, and debris. Do not allow non-pressure-preservative treated wood to

contact with or remain proximate to soil.

C. Properly dispose of any unused solution off-site. Do not use site dumpsters.




IFB 154339

Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 321216-1 Alexandria, Virginia ASPHALT PAVING

SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Placement of geotextile fabric, aggregate base material, and asphalt concrete courses

over prepared subgrade.


A. The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these specifications:


2. Section 325000 “Pavement Markings, Signs and Miscellaneous”.


A. All materials and construction shall conform to the current applicable requirements of the

Virginia Department of Transportation (VDOT) "Road and Bridge Specifications" and special

provisions, as specified herein.

B. The Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits from the Virginia Department of

Transportation for any work within the right of way of existing state roads.


A. Do not place any asphalt until base aggregate has been proofrolled and observed by inspector

and/or geotechnical engineer. Proofrolls must be repeated if more than 30 days have elapsed

before laying asphalt.

B. Weather Limitations

1. Apply prime and tack coats when ambient temperature is above 50°F and when the

temperature has not been below 35°F for 12 hours immediately prior to application.

Do not apply when base material is wet or contains an excess of moisture.

2. Asphalt mixtures shall not be placed when weather or surface conditions prevent

proper handling, finishing, or compacting of the mixture. Place asphalt courses when

ambient temperature is above 40°F and when base material is dry.

C. Vehicular Traffic

1. After final rolling, no vehicular traffic of any kind shall be permitted on pavement

until it has cooled and hardened and in no case before 24 hours have elapsed.

1.6 SUBMITTALS



IFB 154339


A. Submit the following certificates of compliance for materials in accordance with the General

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections:

1. Geotextile fabric or geogrid

2. Asphalt mixes

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC (SEPARATION)

A. Geotextile fabric used for subgrade separation from base stone shall be woven polypropylene

fabric designed specifically for separation. Fabric shall be resistant to deterioration for

ultraviolet and heat exposure.

B. Fabric shall have the following physical requirements:

1. Minimum average grab tensile strength shall be 110 pounds in accordance with

ASTM D4632.

2. Minimum mullen burst strength shall be 220 psi in accordance with ASTM D3786.

3. Minimum average puncture resistance strength shall be 50 pounds in accordance with

ASTM D6241.

4. Apparent opening size (A.O.S.) shall be greater than or equal to U.S. Standard Sieve

No. 40 in accordance with ASTM D4751.

5. Minimum average flow rate shall be 4 gal/min/ft2 in accordance with ASTM D4491.

2.2 AGGREGATE BASE MATERIAL

A. Aggregate base material shall be Type I, Size No. 21B or 21A dense graded aggregate

conforming to the requirements of VDOT Section 208.

2.3 ASPHALT

A. Asphalt concrete surface course shall be Type SM-9.5A asphalt mixture as indicated


B. Asphalt concrete base course shall be Type IM-19.0A asphalt mixture as indicated


2.4 TACK COAT

A. Tack coat shall be asphalt cutback or asphalt emulsion conforming to the requirements of

VDOT Section 210.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

A. Establish and shape subgrade to elevations indicated and in accordance with Section 312000,



IFB 154339


"Earth Moving". Compact subgrade just prior to placing base material. Any unstable areas in

the subgrade shall be removed, replaced and recompacted until a stable subgrade is achieved

before any placement of base material.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF GEOTEXTILE FABRIC

A. Install fabric in accordance with manufacturer's instructions unless indicated or specified

otherwise. For fabric damaged during installation, repair or provide new fabric, directed by

the Engineer in accordance with the manufacture’s recommendations.

B. Place fabric in contact with the subgrade with minimal wrinkles or folds. If mechanized

methods are used, the equipment shall be capable of laying the fabric without damaging the

fabric and without forming excessive wrinkles and folds. Fabric shall extend to the edges of

the aggregate base stone. Overlap fabric at joints a minimum of 2 feet. At transverse joints,

tuck the following roll under the previously placed fabric. Secure fabric with staples as per

manufacturers recommendations and instructions. Do not place more fabric than can be

covered up with aggregate base material the same working day. Repair damaged fabric by

placing an additional layer of fabric over the damaged area, overlapping one foot in all

directions.

3.3 PLACEMENT OF AGGREGATE BASE MATERIAL

A. Place and compact aggregate base material in accordance with the applicable paragraphs of

VDOT Section 309 and to the minimum depth as indicated.

B. See manufacturers installation guidelines for placement over geotextiles fabric or geogrid.

3.4 PLACEMENT OF ASPHALT

A. Place and compact asphalt in accordance with the applicable paragraphs of VDOT Section

315 and to the minimum depth as indicated. Depth specified on drawings is the minimum

compacted thickness.

B. The surface and finish grade of the surface asphalt shall be within the tolerances of the

applicable paragraphs of VDOT Section 315.

3.5 APPLICATION OF TACK COAT

A. Apply tack coat in accordance with the applicable paragraphs of VDOT Section 310.




IFB 154339

Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 321313-1 Alexandria, Virginia CONCRETE PAVING

SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Subgrade preparation including excavation or filling, placing crushed stone or

aggregate base material.

2. Formwork as necessary for exterior concrete.

3. Concrete mixing, placing, finishing, curing and reinforcing for exterior concrete

including concrete pavement, curb and gutter, curb, walks, stairs, ramps, mechanical

pads, and miscellaneous concrete.




2. Division 03 Concrete.


A. All work shall conform to the applicable provisions of ACI 301 “Specification for Structural

Concrete for Buildings,” ACI 304 “Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing,

Transporting and Placing Concrete,” and ACI 318 “Building Code Requirements for

Reinforced Concrete” as specified herein.

B. All work and materials shall conform to the current applicable requirements of the Virginia

Department of Transportation (VDOT) "Road and Bridge Specifications", as specified herein.


A. The Owner will retain the services of the testing laboratory to perform material evaluation tests of the

concrete delivered and placed at the project site.

B. The testing laboratory will schedule testing and perform lab testing of samples and testing during

concrete placement. All tests and sampling shall be in accordance with the acceptance testing by

VDOT and the requirements of VDOT Section 217. This testing does not relieve the Contractor of the

responsibility of providing concrete in compliance with specifications.

C. Integrally Colored Concrete Mockups:

1. At location on Project selected by Landscape Architect, place and finish 10 feet by 10 feet

area.



IFB 154339


2. For accurate color, the quantity of concrete mixed to produce the sample should not be less

than 3 cubic yards (or not less than 1/3 the capacity of the mixing drum on the ready-mix

truck) and should always be in full cubic yard increments. Excess material shall be discarded

according to local regulations.

3. Construct mockup using processes and techniques intended for use on permanent work,

including curing procedures. Include samples of control, construction, and expansion joints

in sample panels. Mockup shall be produced by the individual workers who will perform the

work for the Project.

4. Retain samples of cements, sands, aggregates and color additives used in mockup for

comparison with materials used in remaining work.

5. Accepted mockup provides visual standard for work of Section.

6. Mockup shall remain through completion of the work for use as a quality standard for finished

work.

7. Remove mockup when directed.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit from the concrete supplier the following test results in accordance with the General

Conditions of Division 01 Specification Sections:

1. Copies of laboratory test results certificates of compliance or evaluation reports

for concrete materials, mix designs and any admixtures for each strength/type of

concrete.

B. Submit product data on the following items:

1. Stair nosing.

2. Tactical warning units.

C. Submit results of concrete testing at intervals established herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Concrete shall be minimum Class A4 General (4,000 psi), air entrained concrete conforming to the

requirements of VDOT Section 217 unless otherwise noted. Concrete may be modified when used in

machinery to form curb and gutter.

B. Suitable forming materials for exposed concrete surfaces shall be provided to suit project conditions.

Provide forms of wood or steel materials straight with sufficient stability to withstand pressure of

placed concrete without bow or deflection.



IFB 154339


C. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing

admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following approved Manufacturer; Solomon Colors, Inc.

2. Colors: See Drawings

2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Welded wire fabric shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A185.

B. Reinforcing bars shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed.

C. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Monofilament or fibrillated polypropylene micro-fibers engineered and

designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches

long.

2.3 STONE

A. Aggregate base material shall be Type I, Size 21B or 21A dense graded aggregate conforming

to the requirements of VDOT Section 208.

2.4 EXPANSION / CONTRACTION JOINT FILLER

A. Joint material shall be non-extruding, preformed asphalt joint filler conforming to the

requirements of AASHTO M213 or ASTM D1751. Thickness shall be the width of the joint.

2.5 JOINT SEALANT

A. Preformed elastomeric joint sealer shall conform to the requirements of VDOT Section 420 or

ASTM C920, Type M, Class 25, Use T.

2.6 TACTICAL WARNING UNITS

A. Units shall be a polymer concrete 6 inches thick with truncated domes tapered from 7/8”

diameter at base to 3/8” diameter at the top. Domes to be approximately 3/16” tall. Units to

be 4’ x 2’. Color shall be yellow.

2.7 STAIR NOSING

A. Nosing shall be cast iron, with integral-abrasive, as-cast finish consisting of aluminum oxide,

silicon carbide, or a combination of both. Fabricate nosing in lengths necessary to accurately

fit stairs.

B. Nosing shall be cross - hatched, 1 1/2 " x 1 1/2" for casting into concrete stairs.

C. Provide integral anchors for embedding nosing in concrete.



IFB 154339


D. Factory applied black paint to all surfaces of nosing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Install formwork so that concrete structures and members are of the correct size, shape,

alignment and elevation as indicated.

B. Provide openings in formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Accurately place and

securely support items built into forms.

C. Clean and adjust forms prior to concrete placement. Apply form release agents or wet forms

as required. Retighten forms during concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks.

3.2 REINFORCEMENT

A. Position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support with

metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. Set wire ties so ends are

directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

B. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable, lapping at least one mesh. Provide

supports so wire fabric is a correct elevation and will not sink when concrete is placed.

3.3 JOINTS

A. Provide construction, contraction and expansion joints as indicated or required. Locate

construction joints so as to not impair strength and appearance of structure. Place

expansion/contraction joints in slabs-on-ground to stabilize differential settlement and random

cracking.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work

that is attached to, or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting diagram, templates and

instructions provided for locating and setting.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Comply with ACI, placing concrete in a continuous operation within planned joints or

sections. Do not begin placement until work of other trades affecting concrete is completed.

B. Consolidate placed concrete using mechanical vibrating equipment with hand rodding and

tamping so that concrete is worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into

forms.

C. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength due to weather extremes during

mixing, placement and curing.



IFB 154339


D. In cold weather comply with the requirements of ACI 306.

E. In hot weather comply with the requirements of ACI 305.

3.6 CONCRETE FINISHES

A. Surfaces Not Exposed To View: Remove fins and projections exceeding 0.25 inch in height.

Patch defective areas and tie holes with cement grout.

B. Surfaces Exposed to View: Light broom finish using consistent strokes in one direction.

C. Surfaces on Accessible Ramp: Heavy broom finish perpendicular to the slope for a slip

resistant surface. Tactical warning units to be set in concrete on lowest portion of ramp.

3.7 CURING

A. Begin initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from exposed surfaces. Where

possible, keep continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. Continue curing by use of

moisture-retaining cover or membrane-forming curing compound. Cure formed surfaces by

moist curing until forms are removed. Provide protection as required to prevent damage to

exposed concrete surfaces.

3.8 CURB AND GUTTER AND CURB

A. Subgrade

1. The subgrade shall be constructed true to grade and cross section. The subgrade shall

be of materials equal in bearing quality to the subgrade under the adjacent roadway

or parking area and shall be placed and compacted to conform with applicable

requirements of Section 312000, “Earth Moving”. The subgrade shall be tested for

grade and cross section by means of a template extending the full width. The

subgrade shall be maintained in a smooth, compacted condition, in conformity with

the required section and established grade until the concrete is placed. The subgrade

shall be in a moist condition when concrete is placed. In cold weather, the subgrade

shall be prepared and protected so as to produce a subgrade free from frost when the

concrete is deposited.

2. Aggregate base material shall be placed and compacted to the depths indicated.

B. Forms

1. Outside forms shall have a height equal to the full depth of the curb and gutter and

curb. Forms shall be held rigidly in place by the use of stakes placed at intervals not

to exceed four feet. Clamps, spreaders, and braces shall be used where required to

insure rigidity in the forms.

2. The forms on the front of the curb shall be removed not less than two hours nor more

than six hours after the concrete has been placed. Forms in back of curb, where

applicable, shall remain in place until the face and top of the curb have been finished.

Forms shall not be removed while the concrete is sufficiently plastic to slump in any

direction. Forms shall be cleaned and coated with form oil each time before concrete

is placed. Wood forms may, instead, be thoroughly wetted with water before



IFB 154339


concrete is placed, except that with probable freezing temperatures, oiling is

mandatory.

C. Installation

1. Concrete curb and gutter and curb shall be constructed to the lines, grades and

sections indicated. Construction, including joints and finish, shall conform to the

requirements of VDOT Section 502. Curb and gutter and curb in curves shall be

poured on the proper radius. Short tangent sections will not be accepted.

2. Machine placed concrete curb and gutter and curb shall be acceptable.

3. Contractor shall review drawing before installing curb and gutter to determine the

slope of the gutter pan.

3.9 WALKS

A. All walks shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of VDOT Section 504

except as modified herein.

B. Walks shall be constructed true to line and grade as indicated. Walks shall be constructed

with a minimum 1/4"/ft. slope or cross-slope unless otherwise indicated.

C. Subgrade shall be well compacted and any soft or unsuitable material shall be removed and

replaced with crushed stone. Walks shall be the minimum thickness indicated placed in one

continuous pour on the prepared base course.

D. Install welded wire fabric, if required, utilizing spacers and supports. Overlap fabric one

mesh width. Fabric shall extend to within 3-inches of the edge of the walk.

E. Forms shall be for the full depth of walk. Top edge of forms shall be set true to line and

grade. Concrete shall be placed in forms and tamped until layer of mortar approximately 3/8"

thick has been brought to the surface. The walk shall then be screeded with a straightedge

given a wood float finish, and then a fine haired push broom shall be drawn across surface

transverse to the line of traffic. Expansion joints 1/2" thick shall be placed at walk

intersections and junctions, at bottoms of steps, where walks abut curb and gutter, curb

returns, buildings, platforms, or other fixed structures, or where it terminates at curb.

Expansion joints shall also be placed along the walkway at intervals approximately 50 feet.

Contraction or control joints shall be placed in walks at distances approximately equal to the

width of the walk. Walks wider than 6 feet but less than 10 feet shall not have a contraction

or control joint down the middle of the walk. Joints shall be hand tooled leaving, when

finished, a groove 1/8" to 1/4" wide across walk and to a depth of 1". Seal expansion joints in

walks with joint sealer. Forms shall not be removed for 3 days and concrete shall be cured by

covering with burlap, polyethene or other similar material and kept wet for 3 - 5 days or by

membrane forming curing compound which shall be approved by the Engineer and placed

according to manufacturer's recommendations.

F. Refer to the drawings for joint patterns in walks, concrete pavement, and concrete pads.

3.10 CONCRETE PAVEMENT

A. Prepare subgrade and proofroll in the presence of the geotechnical engineer. Replace any soft



IFB 154339


spots with select material or base aggregate.

B. Place base stone to depths indicated on drawings. Compact to required densities.

C. Set forms to required grades, location, and elevations. Coat forms with proper form release

agents.

D. Install reinforcement in compliance with CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice”.

1. Clean all wire, rebar, and supports of any dirt, mud, or rust.

2. Arrange, place, and properly space reinforcement as indicated, maintaining correct

elevation.

3. Have all reinforcement inspected and approved before placing concrete.

E. Have delivered concrete sampled by inspector before pouring. Add water and/or admixtures

only as allowed by the inspector after testing.

1. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between

construction/expansion joints.

2. Consolidate concrete by vibrating equipment supplemented with hand rodding and

tamping. Avoid damage or dislocating reinforcement.

3. Screed surface and strike off. Commence initial floating operations.

4. Install joints per approved pattern.

5. Begin second floating and finishing operations after bleed. Water sheen has

disappeared and concrete is hard enough for laborers to stand on it.

3.11 MISCELLANEOUS SITE CONCRETE

A. All miscellaneous concrete items shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of

VDOT Section 504 except as modified herein.

B. Install reinforcement as indicated.

C. All site concrete shall be constructed true to line and grade as indicated. Concrete shall be

properly protected and cured.

D. Subgrade shall be well compacted and soft or unsuitable material shall be removed and

replaced with crush stone and compacted to conform to the applicable requirements of Section

312000 “Earth Moving”. Aggregate base material shall be placed under all concrete items as

indicated.

E. Forms shall be for the full depth of the concrete item. Concrete shall be placed in forms and

tamped. Expansion and construction joints shall be installed as indicated or required.

3.12 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. The Contractor shall make the site and work accessible to the Owner’s testing agent.

Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete may include the

following, as directed by Architect.

B. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C



IFB 154339


94.

1. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day’s pour of each type

of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed.

2. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight

concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each

day’s pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.

3. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below,

when 80 deg F and above, and each time a set of compression test specimens is

made.

4. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; either one set of five 6” x 8” cylinders or

one set of six 4” x 6” cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise

directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when

field-cure test specimens are required.

5. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM CD 39; one set for each day’s pour exceeding 5

cu. yds. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yds. more than the first 25 cu. yds. of

each concrete class placed in any one day; if 6” 8” cylinders are used two specimens

tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in

reserve for later testing if required.

6. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class of

concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each

batch if fewer than 5 are used.

7. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 25 cu. yds., Engineer

may waive strength test if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.

8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion

laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective

procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.

9. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of all sets of

three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength,

and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by

more than 250 psi.

C. Test results shall be reported in writing to Owner, Engineer, Architect and Contractor within

24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project

identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service,

concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at

28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of

break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.

D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be

permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.

E. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test

results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in

the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing service may conduct tests to determine

adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as

directed. The additional tests shall be paid for by the Contractor.

3.12 CLEANUP:



IFB 154339


A. After curing, all forms and debris shall be removed and the area adjoining the concrete shall

be properly backfilled, graded, and compacted to conform to the surrounding area in

accordance with the lines and grades indicated.


Hammel, Green & Abrahamson 323119.13-1 Alexandria, VirginiaDECORATIVE METAL

SECURITY FENCES AND GATES

HGA No. 4001-001-00 VDOT/VSP Joint Safety Operations CenterNovember 10, 2017 Project Code: 501-16674-000

IFB 154339

SECTION 323119.13 - DECORATIVE METAL SECURITY FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Decorative steel security fences. 2. Swing gates.



B. Shop Drawings: For gates. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.




A. Maintenance Data: For gate operators to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DECORATIVE STEEL SECURITY FENCES

A. Decorative Steel Security Fences (Basis of Design): 1. The fence system shall conform to Montage® standard picket Ornamental Steel,

Majestic™ design, flush bottom rail treatment, 2-Rail style manufactured by Ameristar Perimeter Security USA Inc., in Tulsa, Oklahoma.

B. Posts: 2-inch, 18 gauge steel. Steel material for fence panels and posts shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A653/A653M, with a minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi (310 MPa) and a minimum zinc (hot-dip galvanized) coating weight of 0.60 oz/ft2 (184 g/m2), Coating Designation G-60.

C. Post Caps: Aluminum castings.

Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc.




IFB 154339

D. Rails: The rails shall be steel channel, 1.25” x 0.92” x 14 Ga.

E. Pickets: pickets shall be 5/8” square x 18 Ga. tubing.

1. Picket Spacing: 3.75 inches o.c., maximum.

F. Fasteners: Stainless-steel carriage bolts with tamperproof nuts.

G. Finish: Powder Coated- Black.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Pickets, rails and posts shall be pre-cut to specified lengths. Rails shall be pre-punched to accept pickets.

B. Pickets shall be inserted into the pre-punched holes in the rails and shall be aligned to standard

spacing using a specially calibrated alignment fixture. The aligned pickets and rails shall be joined at each picket-to-rail intersection by Ameristar’s proprietary fusion welding process, thus complet-ing the rigid panel assembly (Note: The process produces a virtually seamless, spatter-free good-neighbor appearance, equally attractive from either side of the panel).

C. The manufactured panels and posts shall be subjected to an inline electrode position coating (E-

Coat) process consisting of a multi-stage pretreatment/wash, followed by a duplex application of an epoxy primer and an acrylic topcoat. The minimum cumulative coating thickness of epoxy and acrylic shall be 2 mils (0.058 mm). The color shall be (specify Black or Bronze). The coated pan-els and posts shall be capable of meeting the performance requirements for each quality characteris-tic shown in Table 2 (Note: The requirements in Table 2 meet or exceed the coating performance criteria of ASTM F2408).

D. The manufactured fence system shall be capable of meeting the vertical load, horizontal load, and

infill performance requirements for Residential weight fences under ASTM F2408.

2.2 SWING GATES

A. Gates shall be fabricated using welded ornamental panel material and gate ends having a 1-1/4” square cross-sectional size. All rail and upright intersections shall be joined by welding. All picket and rail intersections shall also be joined by welding

B. Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, hinges, and keepers for each gate leaf.Fabricate latches with integral eye openings for padlocking.

C. Galvanizing: For items other than hardware that are indicated to be galvanized, hot-dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. For hardware items, hot-dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

D. Metallic-Coated-Steel Finish: High-performance coating.





IFB 154339

2.3 STEEL AND IRON

A. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

2.4 COATING MATERIALS

A. Polyurethane Intermediate Coat and Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with undercoat.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DECORATIVE SECURITY FENCE INSTALLATION

A. Install fences according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 GATE INSTALLATION

A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.

3.3 GROUNDING AND BONDING

A. Grounding Method: At each grounding location, drive a grounding rod vertically until the top is 6 inches (150 mm) below finished grade. Connect rod to fence with No. 6 AWG conductor. Connect conductor to each fence component at grounding location.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

1. Grounding-Resistance Tests: Subject completed grounding system to a megger test at each grounding location. Measure grounding resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation, without soil having been moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural grounding resistance. Perform tests by two-point method according to IEEE 81.





IFB 154339

Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 325000-1 Alexandria, Virginia PAVEMENT MARKINGS, SIGNS AND MISCELLANEOUS

SECTION 325000 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS, SIGNS AND MISCELLANEOUS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Establish the location of pavement markings and apply pavement markings for

roadway lane delineation, parking space lines, traffic control, and handicap accessible

spaces.

2. Install signs for traffic control and handicap accessible spaces.

3. Install wheel stops at parking spaces as indicated.



1. Section 321216 “Asphalt Paving”.


A. All work and materials shall conform to the current applicable requirements of the Virginia

Department of Transportation (VDOT) "Road and Bridge Specifications" and "Road and

Bridge Standards" as specified herein.

B. Handicap accessible signs will be per SUBC and the latest ADA Accessibility Guidelines as

published in the Federal Register.


A. Apply pavement markings and/or curb paint to clean, dry surfaces and, unless otherwise

approved, only when the ambient temperature is above 50°F and less than 95°F.

B. The pavement surface and/or curbing shall be dry at the time of installation. Paint or

pavement markings shall not be applied within 48 hours following rain or other inclement

weather or when rain is imminent.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following manufacturer's product data in accordance with the General Conditions

and Division 01 Specification Sections:

1. Wheel stops

2. Signs

3. Sign Posts



IFB 154339


B. Submit the following certificates of compliance for materials in accordance with the General

Conditions and Division 01 Specifications Sections:

1. Paint for asphalt

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT/PAVEMENT MARKING MATERIAL

A. Paint material shall be Type A, fast drying, acrylic waterborne or latex traffic paint for use on

both asphalt and hydraulic cement concrete surface and conforming to the requirements of

VDOT Section 246. Paint shall be on VDOT's approved paint list. Color shall be white or

blue as indicated or otherwise required by VDOT.

2.2 PAINT APPLICATOR

A. Provide hand-operated push-type applicator machine of a type commonly used for application

of paint to pavement surfaces. Paint applicator machine shall be acceptable for marking small

street and parking areas. Applicator machine shall be equipped with the necessary paint tanks

and spraying nozzles, and shall be capable of applying paint uniformly at coverage specified.

2.3 WHEEL STOPS

A. Wheel stops shall be made of 3,000 psi precast concrete and be 6 inches high, 8 inches wide

and approximately 6 feet long as indicated. Provide chamfered corners and edges and two

holes for anchoring. Provide rebar for anchoring.

2.4 SIGNS AND POSTS

A. Sign panels shall be made of 0.10 inch thick high quality aluminum alloy with reflective

background sheeting conforming to the requirements of VDOT Section 701 and 229. Signs

shall be of the shape, size, type and color as indicated unless otherwise noted.

B. Sign posts shall be 2 inch square, 14 gauge, galvanized steel post conforming to the

requirements of VDOT Section 236.

2.5 CONCRETE

A. Concrete shall be Class A3 (3,000 psi), General concrete conforming to the requirements of

VDOT Section 217.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Allow new pavement to cure for a period of not less than 15 days before applying pavement

marking.



IFB 154339


B. Surfaces to be marked shall be thoroughly cleaned before application of paint. Remove dust,

dirt and other granular surface deposits by sweeping, blowing with compressed air, rinsing

with water, or a combination of these methods as required.

C. Pavement surfaces shall be dry and clean prior to painting.

3.2 APPLICATION OF PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Apply paint in accordance with the requirements of VDOT Section 704.

B. Lines and markings shall be laid out to the width and length as indicated. All parking space

lines shall be 4 inches wide, painted white.

C. Pavement marking with messages shall be laid out in accordance with VDOT standards.

D. Apply paint with an approved paint applicator.

E. Apply paint at manufacturer recommended rates to provide a minimum 15 mil wet thickness.

F. Handicap accessible spaces shall be white 4" lines for spaces and hatching. The HCP symbol

shall be a minimum 24" high, color white, and surrounded by a solid blue painted square.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF WHEEL STOPS

A. Secure wheel stops with two 1/2 inch diameter steel reinforcing rods. Rods shall be a

minimum of 18 inches in length and be embedded into the pavement, base and subgrade a

minimum of 12 inches.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF SIGNS

A. Install signs on sign posts as indicated and in accordance with the requirements of VDOT

Section 701.

B. Install steel posts as indicated.


Hammel, Green & Abrahamson 329113-1 Alexandria, Virginia SOIL PREPARATION


IFB 154339

SECTION 329113 - SOIL PREPARATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes planting soils specified by composition of the mixes.


1. Section 329300 "Plants" for planting installation.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Duff Layer: A surface layer of soil, typical of forested areas, that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.

B. Imported Soil: Soil that is transported to Project site for use.

C. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced by blending soils, sand, stabilized organic soil amendments, and other materials to produce planting soil.

D. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified as specified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

E. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

F. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a naturally occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and few soil organisms.

G. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In undisturbed areas, surface soil is typically called "topsoil"; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

H. USCC: U.S. Composting Council.



B. Samples: For each bulk-supplied material in sealed containers labeled with content, source, and date obtained; providing an accurate representation of composition, color, and texture.




IFB 154339


A. Soil tests as indicated in Section 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE of this Project Manual.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Contractor is required to provide soil testing through an independent, state-operated, or university-operated laboratory; experienced in soil science, soil testing, and plant nutrition; with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated; and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANTING SOILS

A. Planting-Soil Type: Planting soils shall provide a suitable soil medium for vegetative growth and shall not have low moisture content, low nutrient levels, low pH, materials that are toxic to plant or animal life, and/or unacceptable soil gradation.

1. Topsoil salvaged from the project site may be used as planting soil provided that it meets the standards set forth in these specifications.

2. Topsoil shall be a loam, sandy loam, clay loam, silt loam, sandy clay loam, or loamy sand. Other soils may be used if recommended by an agronomist or soil scientist and approved by DPS.

3. Unacceptable Properties: a. Topsoil shall not be a mixture of contrasting textured subsoils. b. Topsoil shall contain less than 5% by volume of cinders, stones, slag, coarse

fragments, gravel, sticks, roots, trash, or other materials larger than 1-1/2” in diameter.

c. Topsoil shall not contain any materials that are hazardous to plant or animal life or might become hazardous to plant or animal life.

2.2 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Lime: Where soil test indicate that subsoil is either highly acidic or composed of heavy clays, ground limestone shall be spread at the rate of 4-8 tons/acre (200-400 lbs/1000sf) prior to placement of topsoil. Lime shall be distributed uniformly over designated areas and worked into the soil.

a. ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows: 1) Class T with a minimum of 99 percent passing through a No. 8 sieve and a

minimum of 75 percent passing through a No. 60 sieve. 2) As indicated by soil tests, provide lime in the form of ground dolomitic

limestone of calcitic limestone.




IFB 154339

B. Sulfur: As indicated by soil tests, granular, biodegradable, and containing a minimum of 90 percent elemental sulfur, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through a No. 6 sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through a No. 40 sieve.

C. Iron Sulfate: As indicated by soil tests, granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur.

D. Perlite: As indicated by soil tests, horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.

E. Agricultural Gypsum: As indicated by soil tests, minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent passing through a No. 50 sieve.

F. Sand: As indicated by soil tests, clean, washed, natural or manufactured, free of toxic materials, and according to ASTM C 33.

2.3 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: As indicated by soil tests, well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter produced by composting feedstock, and bearing USCC's "Seal of Testing Assurance," and as follows:

1. Feedstock: Limited to leaves. 2. Reaction: pH of 5.5 to 8. 3. Soluble-Salt Concentration: Less than 4 dS/m. 4. Moisture Content: 35 to 55 percent by weight. 5. Organic-Matter Content: 30 to 40 percent of dry weight. 6. Particle Size: Minimum of 98 percent passing through a 2-inch sieve.

B. Sphagnum Peat: As indicated by soil tests, partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or of granular texture with 100 percent passing through a 1/2-inch sieve, a pH of 3.4 to 4.8, and a soluble-salt content measured by electrical conductivity of maximum 5 dS/m.

C. Manure: As indicated by soil tests, well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, debris, and material harmful to plant growth.

2.4 FERTILIZERS

A. Superphosphate: As indicated by soil tests, commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid.

B. Commercial Fertilizer: As indicated by soil tests, commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil

reports from a qualified testing agency.




IFB 154339

C. Slow-Release Fertilizer: As indicated by soil tests, granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil

reports from a qualified testing agency.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Place planting soil and fertilizers according to requirements in other Specification Sections.

B. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in planting soil.

C. Limit topsoil to areas having 2:1 or flatter slopes. Areas that exceed 2:1 slope require special stabilization. Contact Owner immediately if slopes exceeding 2:1 are encountered on site.

3.2 PREPARATION OF UNAMENDED, ON-SITE SOIL BEFORE AMENDING

A. Excavation: Excavate soil from designated area(s) to a depth of 6 inches and stockpile until amended in a location approved by the City.

B. Unacceptable Materials: Clean soil of concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials that are harmful to plant growth.

C. Unsuitable Materials: Clean soil to contain a maximum of 5 percent by volume of stones, roots, plants, sod, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand.

3.3 PLACING AND MIXING PLANTING SOIL OVER EXPOSED SUBGRADE

A. General: Apply and mix unamended soil with amendments on-site to produce required planting soil. Planting soil or topsoil shall not be placed while the soil is in a frozen or muddy condition, when the subsoil is excessively wet or in a condition that may otherwise be detrimental to proper grading and seedbed preparation.

B. Subgrade Preparation: Till subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

C. Planting soil and topsoil shall be uniformly distributed in a 4-8 inch layer and lightly compacted to a minimum thickness of 4 inches.

D. Compaction: Compact each blended lift of planting soil to 75 to 82 percent of maximum Standard Proctor density according to ASTM D 698 and tested in-place.




IFB 154339

E. Finish Grading: Any irregularities in the surface resulting from topsoiling operations shall be corrected in order to prevent the formation of depressions or water pockets. Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

3.4 APPLYING COMPOST TO SURFACE OF PLANTING SOIL

A. Application: If indicated for use by results of soil tests, apply 4 inches of compost to surface of in-place planting soil. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

B. Finish Grading: Grade surface to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protection Zone: Identify protection zones according to Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

B. Maintain necessary erosion and sediment control measures during topsoiling work.

C. Protect areas of in-place soil from additional compaction, disturbance, and contamination. Prohibit the following practices within these areas except as required to perform planting operations:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Vehicle traffic. 4. Foot traffic. 5. Erection of sheds or structures. 6. Impoundment of water. 7. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.

D. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable materials, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property unless otherwise indicated.

1. Dispose of excess subsoil and unsuitable materials on-site where directed by Owner.





IFB 154339

Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 329200-1 Alexandria, Virginia TURF AND GRASSES

SECTION 329200 – TURF AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division

01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Preparation of all areas to be seeded including scarifying, tilling, fine raking and

spreading topsoil.

2. Furnishing and installing temporary seeding as required.

3. Furnishing and spreading lime, fertilizer, grass seed, and mulch on all areas

topsoiled, or as indicated. Included are areas that are disturbed by the Contractor’s

trailers, parking lots or laydown areas and areas of construction travel.

4. Maintenance of seeded areas until acceptance by the Owner.






A. All seed mixtures shall be blue tag certified in accordance with the requirements of the

Virginia Crop Improvement Association or the Atlantic Seedmens Association.

B. All materials and work shall conform to the requirements of the "Virginia Erosion and

Sediment Control Handbook" (VESCH) Third Edition, 1992, as specified herein.

C. All materials and work shall conform to the current applicable requirements of the Virginia

Department of Transportation (VDOT) "Road and Bridge Specifications", as specified herein.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. During delivery, on-site storage, and handling, protect seed from drying out and from

contamination.

B. Store materials in a cool, dry location away from all contaminants.

C. Handle material with care. Do not drop or dump from vehicles.

1.6 GUARANTEE

A. The life of the turf and satisfactory condition of all areas that are to be seeded shall be



IFB 154339


guaranteed for a period of twelve months after the end of fall or spring planting season in

which the material was planted.

B. During the guarantee period, portions of the seeded areas which die or are in an unhealthy

condition shall be replaced as soon as is reasonably possible after its unsatisfactory condition

is evident. Replacements shall be made as often as necessary to provide a turf or lawn which

is vigorous and healthy at the end of one full growing season. Such replacements shall be

made at no additional cost to the Owner. The decision of Owner's representative will be final

in all questions of replacement.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following certificates of compliance for materials in accordance with the General


1. Seed

2. Mulch

3. Hydroseed mixture.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEED

A. All seed material shall be labeled "certified" in accordance with the requirements of the

Virginia Crop Improvement Association or the Atlantic Seedmens Association. Seed types,

temporary and permanent, shall be as indicated on the drawings.

2.2 LIME

A. Lime type as indicated on the drawings.

2.3 FERTILIZER

A. Fertilizer type as indicated on the drawings.

B. Contractor shall have on-site and off-site topsoil tested to determine the actual fertilizer

requirements. Should the requirements be different than above, the Contractor shall submit

recommended ratio to Engineer with test results.

2.4 TOPSOIL

A. Topsoil shall be topsoil material stripped from the project site and stockpiled for later use.

Topsoil shall be free from roots, rocks larger than 3/4 inch in any dimension and other

material detrimental to plant growth.

B. The Contractor shall provide topsoil from his own approved off-site source at no additional

cost should there be insufficient topsoil available onsite. Borrow topsoil shall be clean loam

or sandy loam free from roots, rocks larger than 3/4 inch in any dimension and other material

detrimental to plant growth. Borrow topsoil shall be tested to determine if it meets the



IFB 154339


requirements of topsoil.

2.5 MULCH

A. Mulch shall consist of dry straw or hay, free from noxious weeds, mold and other deleterious

materials. Mulch shall be reasonably bright in color and shall not be musty, caked, decayed

or very dusty.

2.9 LIQUID MULCH BINDERS

A. Binders shall be a non-toxic liquid asphaltic emulsion type CRS-1, CRS-2, RS-1, RS-2 or SS-

1 conforming to the requirements of VDOT Section 310.

2.10 PESTICIDES

A. All materials and application methods shall be acceptable to the local Virginia Cooperative

Extension Office and registered with the Virginia Department of Agriculture and Consumer

Services in accordance with the Virginia Pesticide Law. Materials shall be properly handled

and applied in order to prevent injury to humans, animals and desirable plant life.

B. Insecticides shall be diazinon, dursban, sevin or an approved equivalent.

C. Herbicides for control of broadleaf weeds shall be 2, 4-D + MCPP + dicamba or other

approved 3-way mixtures. Herbicides for control of annual grass such as crabgrass shall pre-

emergence herbicide such as DCPA (Dacthal), Bensulide (Betason), Benefin (Balan) or an

approved equivalent. Herbicides for control of perennial grass (often called wiregrass) shall

be glyphosate (Round-up).

2.11 WATER

A. Water shall be clean and potable. Contractor shall provide all water.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. All areas disturbed during construction outside of the building, walks, parking lots, asphalt

areas and planting beds shall be permanently seeded as indicated herein. This includes all

construction laydown areas, storage areas and construction travel ways. Areas disturbed by

construction activities after seeding shall be reseeded by the Contractor at no additional cost

to the Owner.

B. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer after fine grading and topsoiling prior to seeding to

approve the final grades.

C. Seeding operations shall not be performed when the ground is frozen, muddy or snow covered

or when soil or weather conditions would prevent proper soil preparation or establishment of

turf.



IFB 154339


3.2 TOPSOILING

A. Immediately prior to placing topsoil, scarify the subgrade to a depth of 2 inches for bonding

the topsoil to the subsoil.

B. Spread topsoil evenly; compact and grade to a depth of 4 to 6 inches. Do not spread topsoil

when frozen or excessively dry or wet. Do not dump or spread topsoil in areas where the

subgrade is not in proper condition. Correct irregularities in the finished surfaces to eliminate

any depressions.

C. Hand rake the topsoil. Notify the Engineer to request approval of the seedbed. Remove all

rocks over 3/4 inch in any dimension, roots, debris or other materials which will hinder

planting or future maintenance.

D. Protect finished topsoil areas from damage by vehicular or pedestrian traffic.

E. Topsoiled areas shall be seeded within five days after topsoil is applied.

3.3 LIMING

A. Distribute lime uniformly into the soil. Disc, harrow, or till it into the top 4 to 6 inches of soil

prior to seeding.

B. Apply lime at a rate as indicated on the drawings.

3.4 FERTILIZING

A. Distribute fertilizer uniformly into the soil. Disc, harrow, or till it into the top 4 to 6 inches of

soil prior to seeding.

B. Apply fertilizer at a rate as indicated on the drawings.

3.5 SEEDING

A. Scarify ground with rake as necessary until soil is smooth and friable immediately prior to

seeding operations.

B. Distribute seed uniformly with a broadcast seeder, drill, culti-packer seeder or other approved

sowing equipment. The seed shall be planted to an average depth of 1/2 inch. The seeding

operation shall be as near to the contour as is practical but never up and down the slope. Sow

one-half of the seed in one direction and sow the remainder at right angles to the first sowing.

C. Following seeding, the seeded areas shall be compacted with a roller to set the seed. Roller

shall be dry to prevent picking up seed during rolling operation.

D. Apply seed mixtures at the rate indicated on the drawings.

E. Apply seed mixture at the rate of 400 pounds per acre (10 pounds per 1000 ft2) for all lawn



IFB 154339


and turf areas, and 300 pounds per acre for non-maintained areas.

F. Permanent seeding shall be performed during times indicated on the drawings. Seeding at

other dates shall be done only with approval of the Engineer.

G. Temporary seeding shall be used on disturbed areas that will not be brought to final grade for

a period of more than 14 days.

H. The Contractor, at his option, may use excelsior, or other means to facilitate establishment

and germination of turf and lawn areas.

3.6 HYDROSEEDING

A. Hydroseeding will be permitted in accordance with VDOT Section 603.

B. Care shall be taken to avoid hydroseed getting on tree trunks, signs, pavements, and walks.

3.7 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain all seeded areas until final acceptance by the Owner of the entire project.

B. Maintenance shall include weeding, insect control, cultivating, replanting and reseeding, and

mowing necessary to keep seeded areas in a healthy growing condition.

C. When the height of the grass reaches 4 to 5 inches, the Contractor shall mow the grass to a

height of 3 inches with approved mowing equipment. Maintain height between 3 and 4

inches.

D. Contractor shall apply herbicide to grassed areas to control weeds during the time periods

prescribed by the County Extension Agent and directions on the herbicide label.

3.8 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. When all work is completed, including maintenance, the Engineer, upon request, will make an

inspection to determine acceptability. Should areas not be properly seeded and turf not

established, the Contractor will reseed as many times as necessary, at no additional cost to the

Owner, to achieve a satisfactory stand of grass or turf.

B. Any bare area over 1 square foot is considered unacceptable. Areas with excessive gravel,

roots, clods, or lack of topsoil are also considered unacceptable.


Hammel, Green & Abrahamson 329300-1 Alexandria, Virginia PLANTS


IFB 154339

SECTION 329300 - PLANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Plants.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.

B. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. They also include substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. Some sources classify herbicides separately from pesticides.

C. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. See Section 329113 "Soil Preparation" for drawing designations for planting soils.

D. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



B. Samples of each type of mulch.


A. Product certificates.

B. Sample warranty.




IFB 154339


A. Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year.


A. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

1. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.

B. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1.


A. Deliver bare-root stock plants within 24 hours of digging. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting. Transport in covered, temperature-controlled vehicles, and keep plants cool and protected from sun and wind at all times.

B. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling.

C. Handle planting stock by root ball.

D. Store bulbs, corms, and tubers in a dry place at 60 to 65 deg F until planting.

E. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner.

b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over.




IFB 154339

2. Warranty Periods: From date of planting completion.

a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months. b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants:12 months. c. Annuals: 12 months.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANT MATERIAL

A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant List, Plant Schedule, or Plant Legend indicated on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.

B. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which begins at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting.

C. Perennials and Grasses: Provide healthy, disease-free plants of species and variety shown or listed, with well-established root systems reaching to sides of the container to maintain a firm ball, but not with excessive root growth encircling the container. Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery and that are in bud but not yet in bloom.

2.2 FERTILIZERS

A. Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip-type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercial-grade planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria, converting nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots.

1. Size: 10-gram tablets. 2. Nutrient Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent

potassium, by weight plus micronutrients. 3. Application Rate: Apply proper number of tablets per plant size according to

manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.3 MULCHES

A. Organic Mulch: Double-shredded, natural color hardwood, aged at least one year.

2.4 PESTICIDES

A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by the EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as




IFB 154339required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

2.5 TREE-WATERING DEVICES

A. Slow-Release Watering Device: Standard product manufactured for drip irrigation of plants and emptying its water contents over an extended time period; manufactured from UV-light-stabilized nylon-reinforced polyethylene sheet, PVC, or HDPE plastic.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. BIO-PLEX. b. Engineered Watering Solutions; PQ Partners, LLC. c. Spectrum Products, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TIME FOR PLANTING

A. Do not install plants in frozen ground.

B. Install perennials, ornamental grasses, vines, and annuals between either April 1 – June 15 or October 1 – November 15. Planting perennials, ornamental grasses, vines, and annuals between November 2 and March 31 requires approval by the Landscape Architect.

3.2 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT

A. General: Prepare planting area for soil placement and mix planting soil according to Section 329113 "Soil Preparation."

1. Amend existing soil with compost, imported topsoil, or other amendments as approved

by Owner and Landscape Architect. 2. Remove rocks, stones, and other deleterious materials prior to amending soil. Remove all

rocks and stone greater than 1” diameter. 3. Till soil to 12” depth and mix amendments into at least top 8” of soil where plants are

indicated on drawings. 4. Install plants as indicated in details on plan sheets.

B. Placing Planting Soil: Place and mix planting soil in-place over exposed subgrade.

C. Before planting, obtain Landscape Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.




IFB 154339

3.3 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS

A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits.

1. Excavate planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are unacceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.

2. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter. 3. Excavate at least 12 inches wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate

vertical roots for bare-root stock. 4. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the

bottom of the root ball.

B. Backfill Soil: Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as backfill soil unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING

A. Inspection: At time of planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. If root flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to where the top-most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare, verify that root ball still meets size requirements.

B. Roots: Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break.

C. Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch above adjacent finish grades.

1. Backfill: Planting soil. For trees, use excavated soil for backfill. 2. Balled and Burlapped Stock: After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize

plant, carefully cut and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.

3. Container-Grown Stock: Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.

4. Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Carefully remove root ball from fabric bag without damaging root ball or plant. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.

5. Bare-Root Stock: Support stem of each plant and spread roots without tangling or turning toward surface. Plumb before backfilling, and maintain plumb while working. Carefully work backfill around roots by hand. Bring roots into close contact with the soil.




IFB 1543396. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air

pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.

7. Place planting tablets equally distributed around each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole.

a. Bare-Root Stock: Place tablets beside soil-covered roots; do not place tablets touching the roots.

b. Quantity: Per manufacturer’s recommendations for each size of plant.

8. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.

3.5 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING

A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape.

B. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.

3.6 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING

A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines as indicated on Drawings in even rows with triangular spacing.

B. Use planting soil for backfill.

C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots.

D. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water.

E. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.

F. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock.

3.7 PLANTING AREA MULCHING

A. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated.

Retain required mulch applications in two subparagraphs below.

1. Trees and Treelike Shrubs in Turf Areas: Apply organic mulch ring of 3-inch average thickness, with 12-inch radius around trunks or stems. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems.

2. Organic Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 3-inch average thickness of organic mulch over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems.




IFB 154339

3.8 PLANT MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings.

B. Fill in, as necessary, soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.

C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices when possible to minimize use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents.

D. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents according to authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.

E. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings.

F. At time of Substantial Completion, verify that tree-watering devices are in good working order and leave them in place. Replace improperly functioning devices.





IFB 154339

Hammel, Green and Abrahamson, Inc. 334100-1 Alexandria, Virginia STORM DRAINAGE

SECTION 334100 - STORM DRAINAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL




B. Special Provisions for Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) in the Appendix,

apply to this Section. Should there be a conflict, the most restrictive shall apply.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Install storm sewers, drop inlets, manholes, cleanouts, drain basins, end walls,

erosion control stone, piping for underground detention system and other

appurtenances.

2. Connect to new building roof drainage at the building and terminate at new storm

sewer system as indicated.






A. All work and materials shall conform to the current applicable requirements of the Virginia

Department of Transportation (VDOT) "Road and Bridge Specifications" and "Road and

Bridge Standards" as specified herein.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Inspect materials delivered to site for damage. Unload and store with minimum handling.

Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective covering. Store plastic piping,

jointing materials and rubber gaskets under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store material

directly on the ground. Keep inside of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris.

B. Handle pipe, fittings, manholes, castings, inlets and other accessories in a manner to ensure

delivery to the trench in sound undamaged condition. Take special care to avoid injury to

coatings and linings on pipe and fittings. Make satisfactory repairs if coatings or linings are

damaged. Carry, do not drag, pipe to the trench. Store rubber gaskets, plastic piping and

jointing materials that are not to be installed immediately under cover and out of direct

sunlight.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A. The Contractor shall verify the connection to the new building plumbing for roof drains prior



IFB 154339


to installation of storm sewer. Verification shall include size of pipe, location, depth, invert

and type of pipe of both the building pipe connection, and the existing storm sewer. Should

there be any change from the drawings, notify the Engineer immediately.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following manufacturer’s product data in accordance with the General Conditions

and Division 01 Specification Sections:

1. Drain basins

3. Underground detention system

B. Submit the following certificates of compliance for materials in accordance with the General


1. Pipe and fittings

2. Manhole, frames and covers

3. Drainage structures

4. Endwall

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3, paragraph 3.1 “Piping Applications” for applications of pipe and fittings.

2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PVC pipe and fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F794, Series 46.

B. Corrugated polyethylene pipe (high density polyethylene pipe - HDPE) and fittings shall have

smooth interior/corrugated exterior conforming to the requirements of ASTM F2648 or

AASHTO M294, Type “S” for pipe from 12-inch diameter to 60-inch diameter and AASHTO

M252, Type “S” for 4-inch diameter to 10-inch diameter. Pipe shall have bell and spigot soil-

tight joints with gaskets conforming to the requirements of ASTM F477. The classification of

perforations shall be Class II as specified in AASHTO M294. The water inlet area shall be no

less than 1.89 in2/ft.

C. Plastic pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D1785, Schedule 40, Type 1, Grade

I (PVC 1120) with socket-type PVC Schedule 40 fittings conforming to the requirements of

ASTM D2467, PVC I. Solvent cement for joining shall conform to the requirements of

ASTM D2564.

2.3 MANHOLES

A. Manholes shall be precast reinforced concrete conforming to the requirements of ASTM

C478. Manhole sections shall be sealed with an o-ring rubber gasket conforming to the

requirements of ASTM C443. Adjustment rings shall be no less than 4 inches in height.

B. Manhole steps shall be No. 4, ASTM A615, Grade 60 steel rebar encapsulated in corrosion



IFB 154339


resistant copolymer polypropylene plastic. Steps shall be installed in manholes with depths

of 4 feet or greater.

C. Manhole frames and covers shall be molded gray cast iron conforming to the requirements of

ASTM A48, Class 35B. Castings shall be asphalt coated. The word “STORM shall be cast

in the center of the cover.

D. Manhole inside diameter shall be 48 inches minimum unless otherwise noted. Manholes may

require diameters larger than 48 inches to accommodate the pipes entering and exiting the

manhole. The Contractor shall determine the size manhole required if not indicated.

2.4 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES

A. Precast drainage structures shall conform to the requirements of VDOT Section 302 and

VDOT Standards unless otherwise modified or indicated. All standard precast base and riser

units shall have a minimum inside diameter of 48 inches unless otherwise noted. The word

"STORM" shall be cast in the center of the cover where applicable.

B. Steps shall be installed in drainage structures with depths of 4 feet or greater.

C. Cast-in-place drainage structures shall conform to the requirements of VDOT Section 302 and

the minimum dimensions as required by VDOT Standards. The minimum inside dimension

of all base and riser units shall be 48 inches unless otherwise noted. The word "STORM"

shall be cast in the center of the cover unless within VDOT Right of Way.

2.5 END WALLS

A. End walls shall conform to the requirements of VDOT Section 302 and VDOT Standards

unless otherwise modified or indicated.

2.6 CRUSHED STONE

A. Crushed stone shall be Size No. 57 open graded coarse aggregate conforming to the


2.7 EROSION CONTROL STONE AND RIP RAP

A. Erosion control stone and rip rap shall conform to the requirements of VDOT Section 414.

B. Rip rap bedding all conform to the requirements of VDOT Section 245. Bedding shall

include filter fabric.

2.8 DRAIN BASIN

A. Drain basins are to be molded PVC units with cast or ductile iron grates that meet the

standards of ASTM F794, F949, and F1336 with soil-tight joints and gaskets meeting

requirements of ASTM F477.

B. Grates are to be from same manufacturer as the basins and meet the requirements of ASTM



IFB 154339


A536 grade 70-50-5. Grates 12-inch or larger shall have minimum H-10 ratings. Grates shall

be painted black unless otherwise noted.

2.9 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC

A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for

subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater

than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test

methods referenced:

1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288.

2. Grab Tensile Strength: 157 lbf; ASTM D 4632.

3. Sewn Seam Strength: 142 lbf; ASTM D 4632.

4. Tear Strength: 56 lbf; ASTM D 4533.

5. Puncture Strength: 56 lbf; ASTM D 4833.

6. Apparent Opening Size: No. 70 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4571.

7. Permittivity: 0.2 per second, minimum ASTM D 4491.

8. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours’ exposure; ASTM D 4355.

2.10 CONCRETE

A Concrete shall be minimum VDOT Class A3 (3,000 psi) general concrete conforming to the


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Pipe for storm sewers from manhole to manhole, drainage structure to manhole, drainage

structure to drainage structure, manhole to end wall or drainage structure to end wall shall,

unless otherwise specifically noted on the drawings, be the following:

1. Corrugated polyethylene pipe (HDPE) - non preforated.

B. Pipe from downspout rainleaders and building roof drains shall, unless otherwise noted, be

one of the following:

1. PVC pipe.

2. Plastic pipe, Schedule 40.

3. Corrugated polyethylene pipe (HDPE) - non-perforated.

C. Pipe for underground detention system shall, unless otherwise noted, be the following:

1. Corrugated polyethylene pipe (HDPE) - perforated.

3.2 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL

A. Trench excavation, bedding and backfilling shall be as specified in Section 312000, "Earth

Moving" except as specified herein.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPELINES



IFB 154339


A. General Requirements

1. All pipe shall be laid true to line and grade and with bell end facing upgrade

beginning at the low point of the system. The sections of the pipe shall be so laid and

fitted together that, when complete, the sewer will have a smooth and uniform invert.

The pipe shall be kept thoroughly clean so that proper joints can be obtained. Each

pipe shall be inspected for defects before lowering into trench and all defective

material shall be promptly removed from the project. A plug shall be placed in the

last joint of pipe whenever work is suspended.

2. Water shall not be allowed to rise around the joint until the joint has been completed.

Joints shall not be covered until approved by the Owner.

3. All new construction shall be plugged at the lowest manhole or outlet until inspected

and approved.

4. The interior of the pipe shall be carefully cleaned of all dirt, cement or superfluous

material of every description as the work progresses. The ends of the pipe which

enter masonry other than manholes shall be neatly cut to fit the inner face of the

masonry. When directed, such cutting shall be done before the pipes are built in.

5. Not more than one type of pipe shall be used in any one pipe line.

6. Pipe bedding shall be compacted to a uniform shape and minimum depth of 4 inches

of crushed stone for all pipe unless otherwise specified. Increase bedding to

springline of pipe on depths to pipe invert over 8 feet.

7. Installation shall comply with the requirements of VDOT Section 302 and the

manufacturer's recommendation for the type of pipe being used except as otherwise

specified herein.

B. Setting Line and Grade

1. The line and grade of the pipe shall be set from grade stakes set by level not over 50

feet apart or by laser.

2. When a laser beam is used, the following requirements shall apply. Control point

shall be set at a minimum of fifty foot intervals. Line and grade of the laser shall be

checked at a minimum of one hundred foot intervals. The level vial on the grade

instrument of the laser shall be checked at a minimum of each 30 minutes of use or

more frequently if equipment is being used around the grade instrument that could

cause the instrument to become unlevel. A blower shall be used when required to

keep a uniform air temperature in the pipe to prevent any bending of the light beam.

C. PVC and Polyethylene Piping

1. Trench excavation, bedding and backfill shall be performed in accordance with the

requirements of ASTM D2321 and F449.

2. Bed and backfill to the crown of the pipe with crushed stone in accordance with the

requirements of ASTM D2321. The stone backfill shall be carefully and completely

hand tamped to provide full support under the pipe, around the pipe to the crown of

the pipe. Compaction of the final backfill shall be to 95 percent of maximum density

at optimum moisture content when tested in accordance with ASTM D698.

3. Environmental Factors. Temperature and weather conditions are more critical when

installing PVC and polyethylene pipe. Pipe ends must be dry when making solvent

weld joints and primer and solvent compounds shall not be allowed to stand in

opened containers longer than the manufacturer’s stated “pot life.” In cold weather,

the pipe can become brittle and shall be handled with care in the same manner as

other rigid pipe materials.



IFB 154339


3.4 INSTALLATION OF MANHOLES AND DRAINAGE STRUCTURES

A. Install manholes and drainage structures in accordance with the requirements of VDOT

Section 302.

B. Base sections shall be set on a minimum 6 inch bed of crushed stone. Stone shall be carefully

leveled against the original ground.

C. Remove all lifting rings from precast tops. Fill and seal all lifting holes in the drainage

structure walls with concrete grout.

D. Provide inlet shaping for all manholes and drainage structures in accordance with VDOT IS-1

standards as indicated. All other structures and manholes shall have the invert sloped to

prevent ponding.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND DETENTION SYSTEM

A. Install system in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and as indicated.

Install in the presence of a manufacturer’s representative. Provide documentation for

manufacturer’s representative that system was installed properly.

B. Submit O&M information with schedules. Provide base and optional maintenance contract

for Owner to evaluate.

3.6 TESTING

A. The Contractor shall provide all labor, material and personnel to conduct the following tests

of pipe lines. Tests must be performed in the presence of the Owner's representative and at

least 48 hours advance notice of the time for testing must be given to the Owner's

representative.

B. Test for Displacement of Pipeline

1. Pipe will be checked by the Owner's representative to determine whether any

displacement of the pipe has occurred. A light will be flashed between manholes or

structures by means of a flashlight or by reflecting sunlight with a mirror. If the

illuminated interior of the pipe lines shows poor alignment, displaced pipe, or any

other defects, the defects designated by the Owner's representative shall be remedied

by the Contractor at his expense.

C. Test Flexible Pipe for Deflection

1. The contractor shall test flexible pipe (PVC and polyethylene) for excessive

deflection. The equipment provided shall include a cylindrical or circular gauge set

at an outside diameter equal to 95% of the nominal pipe inside diameter. The gauge

shall be designed to be pulled through the pipe with little effort and shall include a

line to retrieve the device if it becomes lodged in the pipe. The test shall be run 30

days after completion of backfill. Any section of pipe that does not pass the gauge

shall be excavated and the backfill removed and recompacted.



IFB 154339


3.7 REPAIRS

A. If pipe lines or manholes fail to meet test requirements or if any leaks, crooked or damaged

pipe culverts, damaged structures, precast units, or other defects are visible or revealed, the

Contractor shall rebuild, at his expense, those portions of the pipe lines which are faulty. The

test shall be repeated until the pipe line is deemed acceptable.
